Professional Documents
Culture Documents
ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻭﻱ
ﻋﻠﻭﻡ ﺘﺠﺭﻴﺒﻴﺔ – ﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ – ﺘﻘﻨﻲ ﺭﻴﺎﻀﻲ
ﺇﺸﺭﺍﻑ ﻭ ﺘﺄﻝﻴﻑ
ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﻓﺎﺘﺢ ﻤﺭﺍﺩ
ﻤﻔﺘﺵ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﺘﻜﻭﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﻤﺅﻝﻔﻭﻥ:
– ﻤﻔﺘﺵ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﺘﻜﻭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﻗﻭﺭﻴﻥ
– ﻤﻔﺘﺵ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﺘﻜﻭﻴﻥ ﺠﻤﺎل ﺘﺎﻭﺭﻴﺭﺕ
– ﺃﺴﺘﺎﺫﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻭﻱ ﻜﺭﻴﻤﺔ ﺒﻭﻋﻠﻲ
-ﺃﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻭﻱ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺒﻥ ﻋﻴﺴﻰ
-ﺃﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻭﻱ ﻭﻫﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﻭﻫﺭﺍﻨﻲ
ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
y
3
2
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 x ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺔ
-1
ه أ ا ن
أ
ا و ،و
ارزم م 973م و ! 1050م .ﻻ ﻴﺅﺭﺥ
ﻤﺅﺭﺥ ﻷﺒﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﺇﻻ ﻭﻴﻘﺭ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻅﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻡ ،ﺒل ﻭﻴﺼل ﺒﻌﺽ ﻤﺅﺭﺨﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻐﺭﺒﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ
ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻋﻅﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻌﺼﻭﺭ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﻤﺎﻥ .ﻗﺩ ﻋﺎﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺭﻭﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﻴﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻠﻭﻙ ﻭﺴﻼﻁﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩ
ﻭﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻡ أ*ل أ ا (س ا &ن ﻭﻗﺩ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺒﻴﺭﻭﻨﻲ ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺒﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﻋﺼﺭﻩ ،ﻤﻥ ﺃﻤﺜﺎل
ﺍﺒﻥ ﺴﻴﻨﺎ ﻭﺍﻝﻔﻠﻜﻲ ﺃﺒﻲ ﺴﻬل ﻋﻴﺴﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺼﺭﺍﻨﻲ .ﻝﻘﺩ ﺃﺘﻘﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺭﻭﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﻴﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻐﺎﺕ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺎﻨﺏ
ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻴﺔ – ﻝﻐﺔ ﺒﻠﺩﻩ -ﻭﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ ،ﻓﻘﺩ ﺃﺘﻘﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺭﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺎﻋﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻻﻁﻼﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺼﻭل ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻝﻐﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺼﻠﻴﺔ.
ﻭﻗﺩ ﻜﺘﺏ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺤﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﻝﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻡ ،ﻭﻨﻘل
ﻓﻲ ﻜﺘﺒﻪ ﺁﺭﺍﺀ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻕ ﻭﺍﻝﻐﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺩﻤﺎﺀ ،ﻭﻨﺎﻗﺸﻬﺎ ﻭﺃﻀﺎﻑ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﺎ،
ﻓﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﻝﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻨﺎﻗﺸﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ،ﻤﺜل ﻭﺼﻔﻪ ﻝﺼﻭﺭﺓ
ﻭﺍﻀﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺘﺜﻠﻴﺙ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ،ﻭﺒﺤﺙ ﺒﺤﺜﹰﺎ
ﻤﺴﺘﻔﻴﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺨﻁﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل ﻭﺍﻝﻌﺭﺽ ،ﻭﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺤﻭل ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻫﺎ،
ﻜﻤﺎ ﺒﺤﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻀﻭﺀ ﻭﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻭﺕ ،ﻭﺃﻭﻀﺢ
ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﻴﺭ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺴﺭﻋﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺒﺎﻹﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻜﺘﺒﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺘﺎﺭﻴﺦ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩ.
ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺭﻭﻨﻲ 973ﻡ – 1050ﻡ
7
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 1
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
y ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻫﻭ
f
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
) (Cﻨﺼﻑ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] [ ABﺤﻴﺙ . AB =1 :ﻨﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ) ، (Cﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ ، A
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺴﻘﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ) . ( ABﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل (
x = AH ، α = BAMﻭ . f ( x ) = AM ﻨﻀﻊ :
.1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ cos αﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ.
.2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) f ( xﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
α
.3ﺤﺩﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
.4ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
( )
.5ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ . O , i , j
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
. h ( x ) = x2 + 3 x − 4 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ hﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ:
( )
.1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻭﺭﻕ ﻤﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺭﻱ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ O , i , jﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠـﻰ ℝ
f ( x ) = x 2ﻭ . g ( x) = −3 x + 4 ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
. h( x ) = 0 .2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ℝﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
. 3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ.
8
1 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ: ] [ − 2, 3 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
1
f ( x) = x + 1ﻭ . g ( x) = − x + 2
2
( )
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) ( D ′ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O , i , j
.1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ g؟ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) . ( D ′
.2ﺒﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﻭ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) . ( D ′ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ.
ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: ] [ − 2,3 .3ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل f3 ، f 2 ، f1ﻭ f 4ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
) f3 ( x ) = −2 f ( x) ، f 2 ( x ) = f ( x) × g ( x) ، f1 ( x ) = f ( x) + g ( xﻭ . f 4 ( x ) = g ( x) + 1
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ xﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ) f3 ( x ) ، f 2 ( x ) ، f1 ( xﻭ ) . f 4 ( x •
( )
ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ) ( D3ﻭ ) ( D4ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ f3ﻭ f 4ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O , i , j •
)f ( x
= )h ( x .4ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
)g ( x
1 2
. h( x ) = − − ﻋﻴﻥ Dhﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . hﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ Dhﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
2 x−2
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ،ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( O , OI , OJﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
J
) ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل ﻫﻲ .( 1km :
9
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 1
ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ x1ﻭ x2ﻤﻥ ، I ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ x1ﻭ x2 ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ x1ﻭ x2
) f ( x1 ) = f ( x2 ﻤﻥ ، Iﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x1 < x2ﻓﺈﻥ: ﻤﻥ ، Iﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x1 < x2ﻓﺈﻥ:
) f ( x1 ) > f ( x2 ) f ( x1 ) < f ( x2
-2 -2
-1 0 1 2 x
fﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ − 1:1.5 fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ − 1:1.5 fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ − 1:1.5
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Iﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل.
10
1 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ αﺒﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺩﺴﺘﻭﺭ ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f (αﺃﻤﺎ ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻭﺍﺒﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ
ﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ βﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل f ( x) = β : x
ﺤــل:
f (−2) = −6 ، f (1) = 9ﻭ . f ( 3) = 5 + 6 3 .1
f ( x ) = 2 .2ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x 2 + 6 x = 0ﺃﻱ x( x + 6) = 0ﺃﻱ x = 0ﺃﻭ x = −6ﺇﺫﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 2ﺴﺎﺒﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ 0ﻭ .-6
f ( x) = −7ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x 2 + 6 x + 9 = 0ﺃﻱ ( x + 3)2 = 0ﺃﻱ x = −3ﺇﺫﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ -7ﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ ﻫﻲ .-3
.3ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f ( x ) = ( x 2 + 6 x) + 2 :ﻭﻤﻨﻪ f ( x ) = ( x + 3) 2 − 9 + 2ﺇﺫﻥ . f ( x ) = ( x + 3) 2 − 7ﺇﺫﻥ . a = 3
f ( x) = −8ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ( x + 3)2 − 7 = −8ﺃﻱ . ( x + 3) 2 = −1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭﻻ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ -8ﺴﻭﺍﺒﻕ.
ﺤــل:
.1ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺠﺯ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) f ( xﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ : f
.2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
x2 3 x2 2
2
11
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 1
ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺔ
ﻨﻠﺨﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺘﺫﻜﻴﺭﺍ ﺒﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺩﺭﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺜﺎﻨﻭﻱ
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
y
4
]]−∞, 0 fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ •
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a < b ≤ 0ﻓﺈﻥ a 2 > b 2
3
f : x ֏ x2
[∞[0, +
2
1
fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ •
y
[]−∞, 0 fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ •
1 1
1 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a < b < 0ﻓﺈﻥ >
a b 1
֏ f :x
0 1 x fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞]0, + • x
1 1
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < a < bﻓﺈﻥ >
a b
y
3
-1
y
y ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ
f : x ֏ sin xﻭ g : x ֏ cos x
1
f : x ֏ sin x
ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻫﻤﺎ 2π
0 3 x
g : x ֏ cos x
12
1 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺤــل:
.1ﻨﻨﻁﻠﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻰ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺸﺭ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
( )
)− ( x + 2 ) + 5 = − x 2 + 4 x + 4 + 5 = − x 2 − 4 x − 4 + 5 = − x 2 − 4 x + 1 = f ( x
2
ﺤــل .1 :ﻨﻨﻁﻠﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻰ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺘﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻤﺎﺕ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [ ∞ ] − ∞ ; 2 [ ∪ ] 2; +ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
1 1 + 3 ( x − 2 ) 1 + 3x − 6 3x − 5
. =+3 = = )= f ( x
x−2 x−2 x−2 x−2
.2ﻝﻨﻌﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]2; +
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]2; +ﺤﻴﺙ 2 < a <b :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ) 0 < a − 2 < b − 2ﺒﻁﺭﺡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ( 2
1 1 1 1
. > +3 ﻭﻤﻨﻪ + 3 > ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ " ﻤﻘﻠﻭﺏ " ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0; +ﻓﺈﻥ
a−2 b−2 a−2 b−2
ﻨﺠﺩ ﺇﺫﻥ )f (a ) > f (b
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ . ]2; +
ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [. ]−∞ ; 2
13
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 1
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺃﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ Dﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
f =g ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ: ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎf ( x ) = g ( x ) :
.2ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭﻴﺔ
fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ D fﻭ Dgﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ λ .ﻭ kﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ.
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ
Df ( f + k )( x ) = f ( x) + k f +k ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ fﻭ k
D f ∩ Dg )( f + g )( x ) = f ( x) + g ( x f +g ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ fﻭ g
Df )( λ f )( x ) = λ f ( x λf ﺠﺩﺍﺀ fﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ λ
D f ∩ Dg )( f × g )( x ) = f ( x) × g ( x f ×g fﻭg ﺠﺩﺍﺀ
f )f ( x f
{ x∈D } ∩ Dg : g ( x) ≠ 0 = ) ( x g
ﺤﺎﺼل ﻗﺴﻤﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ g
f g )g ( x
ﻤﺜﺎل f :ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ f ( x ) = x 2 :ﻭ g ( x) = x + 2
• ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل f × g ، −2 f ، f + g ، f + 3ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
( f × g ) ( x ) = x 2 ( x + 2 ) ، (−2 f ) ( x ) = −2 x 2 ، ( f + g ) ( x ) = x 2 + x + 2 ، ( f + 3) ( x ) = x 2 + 3
f x2 f
= ). ( x ﺒﹻ: [ ∞ ] − ∞ , − 2 [ ∪ ] − 2, + ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ • ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
g x+2 g
.3ﺘﺭﻜﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل
ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ gﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻌﻲ ) ( x ֏ x ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x) = − x + 3 :
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ − x + 3 ≥ 0ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x ≤ 3ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g fﻫﻲ D = ] − ∞ ,3 ] :ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
= ) ( g f )( x − x+3
14
1 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = x + 2 :ﻭ g ( x) = x 2 + 2 x
f
.1ﻋﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل f × g ، − f + 2 g ، f + gﻭ
g
x2 − 4
= ) . h ( xﻫل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ fﻭ hﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ؟ .2ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 2; +ﺒﹻ:
x−2
ﺤــل:
(− f .1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ + 2 g )( x ) = 2 x 2 + 3x − 2 ، ( f + g )( x ) = x 2 + 3 x + 2 : x
( f × g )( x ) = x3 + 4 x 2 + 4 x ﻭ
f x+2 1
x 2 + 2 x = 0 ) ( x ) = 2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x = 0ﺃﻭ ( x = −2 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x ≠ 0ﻭ = : x ≠ −2
g x + 2x x
.2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ fﻭ hﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻷﻥ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ.
(
= g 2 x2 + 1 ) = f ( x −1)
( 2x + 1) − 1 (= 2 x −1) + 1
2
= 2
15
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 1
ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ
.1ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔf + k :
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Iﻭ λﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ. ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . I • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ λ > 0ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ λ f
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ λ < 0ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﺎ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ λ fﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . I •
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Iﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Jﺤﻴﺙf ( I ) ⊂ J : ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . I •
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﺎ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . I •
16
1 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 7
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ:
3
f (1ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ]−∞ ; 0ﺒﹻf ( x ) = − + 2 :
x
g (2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [1.5; +ﺒﹻg ( x) = (−2 x + 3) 2 :
ﻋﻨﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺤﺎﻭل ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل λ u ، u + kﺃﻭ v uﺤﻴﺙ: ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
uﻭ vﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺘﺎﻥ.
ﺤــل:
1
= ) h( xﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ. f = −3 h + 2 : .1ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺭﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ]−∞ ; 0ﺒﹻ:
x
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ −3 hﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﺘﺠﺎﻫﺎ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ hﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ.
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ hﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ]−∞ ; 0ﻓﺈﻥ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [. ]−∞ ; 0
.2ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺭﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ vﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [1.5; +ﻭ ] ]−∞ ;0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﹻ:
u ( x) = −2 x + 3ﻭ v( x) = x 2ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [∞ u ( x) ≤ 0 ، [1.5; +ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ. g = v u :
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ uﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [1.5; +ﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ vﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−∞ ;0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ . [1.5; +
ﺤــل:
ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ .1ﺍ( ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ( f + g ) ( x) = −2 x + 3 + 3x + 1 = x + 4 :ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) ( f + g
ﺏ(ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ( f + g ) ( x) = 2 x + 1 − 3x + 5 = − x + 6 :ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) ( f + gﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
.2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . ( f × g )( x ) = ( x − 2 )( x + 2 ) = x 2 − 2 :ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ) ( f × gﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ " ﻤﺭﺒﻊ " ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ
ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) ( f × gﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−∞ ; 0ﻭ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [0; +
ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻕ :ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻋﻁﺎﺀ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ﺘﻤﻜﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ) ( f + gﻭ ) ( f × gﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ
ﺇﻻ ﺃﻥ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻀﻴﻔﺕ ﺸﺭﻭﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . g
17
<
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 1
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
.1ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔf + k :
( )
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) ( C fﻭ ) ( C f + kﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻨﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ O ; i ; jﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ ) ( f + kﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
ﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ) ( C f + kﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( C fﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . k j
Ch
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل g ، fﻭ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ:
g ( x ) = x2 − 1 ، f ( x ) = x2ﻭ h ( x ) = x2 + 2
Cf
ﻝﺩﺒﻨﺎ g = f − 1ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ) ( C gﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( C fﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . − j
1
ﻝﺩﺒﻨﺎ h = f + 2ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ) ( Chﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( C fﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . 2 j
0 1 x
Cg
( )
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﻭ ) ( Cλ fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ O ; i ; jﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ ) (λ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺤﻴﺙ λ
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( C fﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x
ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Cλ fﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ xﺒﻀﺭﺏ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . λ
y
Ch ( C fﻓﺈﻥ ) ) M ′ ( x, λ f ( x ) ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) ) M ( x, f ( xﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:
( Cλ fﻷﻥ ) . ( λ f )( x ) = λ . f ( x ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ )
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل g ، fﻭ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ:
18
1 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
y
ﺤــل:
x 1 1
Cf .1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x ≠ 0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ+ = 1 + :
= )f ( x
x x x
1
.2ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺭﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞ ;0[ ∪ ]0; +
1
ﺒﹻ h( x) = :ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎf = h + 1 :
0 1 x
Ch x
( )
ﺇﺫﻥ ،ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ، O ; i ; jﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ
ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ j
( C fﺍﻝﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﻭﻕ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ،ﻭ ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻅﻴﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻨﺤﺘﻔﻅ ﺒﺠﺯﺀ
( C fﺍﻝﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺘﺤﺕ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل . ) ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻝﺠﺯﺀ
19
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 1
5
4
Cf ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺘﺤﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل
( C fﻭ ) ( C gﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ) ﻋﻠﻰ
3
Cg fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
g ( x) = ( x − 1) + 1
2
2 ﻭ f ( x) = x 2
1
Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (
C fﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ x ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
' Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Cﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x + 1
g ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 x ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ' MMﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ
.2ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ Dﺤﻴﺙ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ g ( x) = f ( x + b) + k :ﺤﻴﺙ
( C fﻭ ) ( C gﺇﻝﻰ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ )
bﻭ kﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎﻥ.ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ:
(
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O , i , jﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) ) M ( x , f ( xﻤﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) ) M ′ ( x − b , g ( x − bﻤﻥ ) ( Cg
)
ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ MM ′ = − bi + k j :ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M ′
. (C f ) ﺏ( ﺤﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C gﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
.4ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ gﻭ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ∞ [ − 1; +ﺒﹻ:
h( x ) = x + 1 + 2 ﻭ g ( x) = x + 1
ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. ) ( Ch ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C gﻭ
ﺍ( ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ " ﺍﻝﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻌﻲ " f : x → xﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . ( C g
ﺏ( ﺤﺩﺩ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Chﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻤﻪ.
20
1 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
y Y .1ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ ) ( x0 , y0 ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ Ω ( O ;i , j )
( Ω;i , j ) ( )
ﻫﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i , jﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
j
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
j Ω
i X ﻫﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ ) ( x , y
ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( O ; i , jﻭ ﺤﻴﺙ ) ( X , Yﻫﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ
O x
i ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ: ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( Ω ; i , j
x = X + x0
ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
y = Y + y0
.2ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل ﺃﻭل
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = x 2 + 4 x + 3 :ﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O ; i , j
( )
ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ Ωﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ) ( −2, −1ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻠﻡ O ; i , j
( )
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( C fﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ Ω ; i , jﻫﻲ Y = X 2 :ﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻤﻪ.
)( f
C ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍ O ; (
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ i , j )
.3ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل ﺜﺎﻨﻲ
x+2
= ) f ( xﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞, −1[ ∪ ]−1, +ﺒﹻ:
x +1
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O ; i , jﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ Ωﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ) ( −1,1ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O ; i , j ( )
= Yﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻤﻪ.
X
1
( )
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( C fﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ Ω :i , jﻫﻲ:
.5ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ( O;i , j ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) Ω(2,3ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ )
f
3x
= )f ( x [∞ ]−∞, 2[ ∪ ]2, +ﺒﹻ:
x−2
21
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 1
x+2
= )f ( x ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ Dﺠﺯﺀ ﻤﻥ ℝﺒﹻ:
x +1
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥD = ] − ∞ ; − 2 ] ∪ ] − 1; + ∞ [ :
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ f = g h :ﺤﻴﺙ gﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ " ﺍﻝﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻌﻲ " ﻭ hﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩﻫﺎ.
1
. h( x) = 1 +ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐ ﻴﺭ hﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−∞; −2ﻭﻋﻠﻰ [∞]−1; + .3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
x +1
.4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−∞; −2ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞] − 1; +
.5ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل .4
.1ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ [ ∞ D = ] − ∞ ; − 2 ] ∪ ] − 1; +
x+2 x+2
ﻭ . x + 1 ≠ 0ﻝﻨﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻡ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ≥ 0 :
x +1 x +1
x ∞− -2 −1 ∞+
x+2 - 0 + +
x +1 - - 0 +
x+2
+ 0 - +
x +1
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥD = ] − ∞ ; − 2 ] ∪ ] − 1; + ∞ [ :
.2ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ h
x+2 x+2 x+2
֏ h: x ֏ xﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ g : x ֏ x :ﻓﺈﻥ: ֏ ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
x +1 x +1 x +1
ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻓﻌﻼf = g h :
1 ( x + 1) + 1 x + 2
1+ = = .3ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ : hﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ = h( x) : D
x +1 x +1 x +1
1 1
֏x h( x) = 1 +ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ hﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ: ﻤﻥ
x +1 x +1
1 1
֏ xﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ x + 1 :ﻤﺘﺒﻭﻋﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔx ֏ : ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ:
x x +1
1 1
֏ xﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ x ֏ x + 1ﻭ ֏ xﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
x +1 x
ﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−∞; −2ﻭﻋﻠﻰ [∞]−1; +
.4ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−1; +ﻭﻋﻠﻰ ]]−∞; −2
.5ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ
ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﺅﻜﺩ ﻓﻌﻼ ﺼﺤﺔ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻊ.
22
1 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ . 2cmﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ N ، Mﻭ Pﺤﻴﺙ N ∈ [CD ] ، M ∈ [ AB ] :ﻭ ] . P ∈ [ AD
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﺘﺤﺭﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ABﻤﻊ. AM = CN = DP :
ﻨﻀﻊ AM = xﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ ) f ( xﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . MNP
.1ﻋﻴﻥ Dﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ fﺜﻡ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥf ( x) = ( x − 1) + 1 :
2
ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ]. [ 0; 2ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ fﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Mﺍﻝﺘﻲ
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ MNPﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ.
( C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﹻ fﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ y = x 2 :ﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻤﻪ. ) .3ﺍﺸﺭﺡ ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﺘﻡ ﺭﺴﻡ
ﻭ AB = 2ﻓﺈﻥD = [ 0; 2] : ﺘﺘﺤﺭﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ AB .1ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ Dﻭ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) : f ( xﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ M
1 1
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ MNPﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ PﻭﻤﻨﻪMP 2 = x 2 + ( 2 − x ) = x 2 − 2 x + 2 :
2
= )f ( x
2 2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ( x − 1) + 1 = x 2 − 2 x + 1 + 1 = x 2 − 2 x + 2 :ﻭﻤﻨﻪf ( x) = ( x − 1) + 1 :
2 2
ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ) x ֏ ( x − 1ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0;1ﻭ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ 1; 2
2
) (C
f .3ﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
y ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = x 2
ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ )u (1;1
2
23
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 1
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ:
ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ kﻴﺘﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ C 5ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ= 2F 4 * B 5 :
ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﺘﻡ ﺤﺠﺯ F 4ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻝﻭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻔﺎﺘﻴﺢ.
ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻙ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ xﻭ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﻴﺩ.
ﺍﻷﺴﺌﻠﺔ:
.1ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﻗﻴﻡ kﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ . B 2ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
ﻝﻤﺎ k = −1؟ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﺤﺩﺙ ﻝﻤﺎ k = 0؟ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) (C kf .2
.3ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﻲ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ fﻭ kfﻝﻤﺎ k > 0ﺜﻡ ﻝﻤﺎ . k < 0
.6ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺄﺨﺫ ﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻤﻊ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﻓﻕ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ .ﻫل
ﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﺃﻡ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ؟
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﻤﺠﺩﻭل Excelﺃﻭ ﺒﺄﻱ ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﺁﺨﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ،ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
. x ֏ f (x + a ) + b ) ، x ֏ f (x + a ، x ֏ f (x ) + b
24
2 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺇﻜﺘﺸﺎﻑ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل
π
. g ( x ) = cos fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ f (x ) = sin x :ﻭ − x
2
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺘﺤﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻲ fﻭ . g
ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺍﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل .ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ) (Cﻭ ) (C
g f
π
ﻨﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ cos + x = − sin x : ℝ
2
.2ﻋﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺭﺍﺴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ fﻭ gﻭ ﻀﻊ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﺭﺓ:
• f (x ) = sin xﻭ ) g (x ) = sin (π − x • f (x ) = cos xﻭ ) g (x ) = cos (π − x
.3ﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ) cos ( 2xﻭ 2cos x
f (x ) = cos ( 2xﻭ . g (x ) = 2cos x ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ) : fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ
(C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ )
ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺔ .ﻀﻊ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﻭل ﺩﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻨﺎ ﻴﺅﻜﺩ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ.
) (
(C fﻭ C gﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . gﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟ ) ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ
.ﻓﻲ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ) Y 1 (1ﺜﻡ ﺨﺯﻨﻬﺎ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ENTER ﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
ﺜﻡ . MATHﺃﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ TRACEﺜﻡ ﺍﻨﻘل ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻝﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ .Y 2 ALPHA ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ → STOﺜﻡ
. ENTER ﺜﻡ " ." Horizontalﺜﻡ ﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﺒﺎﺍﻝﻤﺴﺔ PRGM ﺜﻡ 2nd ﺃﺤﺠﺯ Aﻭ ﺼﺎﺩﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ . ENTERﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل
.2ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺔ ) (C hﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺤﻴﺙ . h = g fﻴﻤﻜﻨﻙ ﺤﺠﺯ ) Y 2 (Y 1ﻓﻲ .Y 3
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﺨﺹ ) (C hﻭ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ؟ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺘﻪ.
25
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 1
ﺃﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 0, 7 v (4
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 3ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
v (5ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 0, 7
][0;4 ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 1
v (6ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][3, 7
y
ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ .
3
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ . 4 .ﺇﻝﻰ . ..7 .
2
ﺃﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﺎﺕ : 1
x( x − 2 x) (3
2
, x − 2 (2 , x + 2 x (1
3 3 2
2 x 2 + 2 (3 , 2 x 2 − 1 (2 , 2 x 2 + 5 (1
fﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][1, 3 (3
(4ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ
fﻭ g ) (C fﻭ ) (Cgﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ .6.
( −2) (5ﺤل ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 4 :
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺯﻭﺩ ﺒﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ) (O, i, jﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل (
f 2ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]0; +ﺒـ :
y 1
3
f ( x ) = − x 2 + 3ﻭ = )g ( x
x
2
cg f 22
( )( x ) = − x 3 + 3x (2 ، ( f + g )(5) = − (1
1 g 5
−x 2 + 3
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 x = ) (2 f + 3 g )(1) = 7 (4 , (f .g )( x (3
x
-1
cf
-2 f . 3ﻭ gﻭ hﺩﻭﺍل ﺤﻴﺙ :
f ( x) = x 2ﻭ g ( x) = xﻭ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ h
ﻫﻭ :
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −1, 2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : x 0 3 7
) h( x 4
f = g (3 , g ≥ f (2 , f ≥ g (1
0
ﺒـ: [∞]−1; + fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل.7. −1
−2
= )f ( x ﻨﻀﻊ u = f g :ﻭ v = g h
x +1
f (1ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞]−1; + u (1ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 0, 7
ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞]−1; + f (2 u (2ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 0,3
ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞]−1; + f (3 u ( x) (3ﻋﻨﺼﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 0,9
(4ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ .
26
1 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
2x + 3 ﺒـ : . 8ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ
f ( x) = 2 . 15 1
x −4 f ( x) = x 2 − 5 x + 3
2
5 (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ 3 ,- 2 , 0 , 1 :
= )f ( x . 16
2x + 1
2
17
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺴﻭﺍﺒﻕ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ , 3 :
x2 2
= )f ( x . 17 . 9 .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][− 2;2
x−3
) (C fﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
2
x
= )f ( x . 18. ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
x −3 y
3
f ( x) = x − x − 1 . 19
2
x−2
= )f ( x . 20. 1
2x − 6
f ( x ) = sin x − 3 cos x . 21. -2 -1 0 1 2 x
-1
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ . 22 .ﺇﻝﻰ . 27 .
27
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 1
1
= )g ( x f ( x ) = x 2 + 2 xﻭ − 3 36
x f . 28ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ :
f ( x ) = x 2 + 1ﻭ g ( x) = x 2 + 2 x − 3
k , h , g , fﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒـ : . 37
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل:
h ( x ) = x + 1، g ( x ) = x 2
، f ( x ) = 2 x (1 f ×g ، f +g ، g ، f
k ( x ) = x2 + 1 (2ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ) ( f + g )( xﻭ )( f × g )( x
f . 29.ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : 4 2x − 1
g (x ) = 1 − = ) f (xﻭ
f + k = g h (2 k = h g (1 x +1 x +1
(1ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ g
k h = g + 2 h (4 f k = 2k (3 3fﻭ −2 g (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :
k k = g 2 + 2 k (6 g k = gk + k (5 ..30.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
f ( x ) = 2x 2 − 1ﻭ g ( x ) = 4x + 3
• ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ . 38 .ﺇﻝﻰ . 43 .
(1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ :
ﻓﻜﻙ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ( f + g )( x) = 2( x + 1) 2
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 2f + g :ﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ .
)f ( x ) = ( x − 1 . 38. fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0; +ﺒـ: . 31.
2
−3
f ( x ) = ( x + 2) + 1
2
. 39. = )g ( x f ( x) = 5 x − 2ﻭ
2x
3 ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل : (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ 5 ، 2 ، 1
= )f ( x . 40
x +1 −2 g ، 3 f ، f + g
1
f (x ) = x +1 . 41 (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ 3 ، -1 ، −ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل :
2
)f ( x ) = cos ( x − 1
1 f
. 42 f −g ، ، f ×g
2 g
= )f ( x
2x
−1 . 43 • ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ . 32 .ﺇﻝﻰ . 36 .
5 ﻋﻴﻥ f gﻭ g fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ
−1
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f + gﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل I = ) f ( xﻭ g ( x) = 2 x 35
x +1
28
1 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
.
ﺤﻴﺙ : f ..49ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ℝ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ]−∞;0ﺒـ : . 45
1 f ( x) = x + x
2
. g ( x) = , f ( x ) = x 2 + 1ﻨﻀﻊ h = g f
x ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. ]−∞;0
y f . 46ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]0; +ﺒـ :
5
1
4
f ( x) = x −
3 x
2 ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞[ 0; +
1
f . 47ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ]−∞;3ﺒـ :
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x
-1
f ( x) = 3 − x
-2
-3 (1ﻓﻜﻙ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
-4 ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ .
-5
[]−∞;3 (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
(P ) .48.ﻫﻭ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ "ﻤﺭﺒﻊ"
ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ) (C 1ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) (Pﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ 2i
y
4
ﻭ ) (C 2ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) (C 1ﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ − j
3
y
4
2 )( P
3
1
2
y
2
) (C 1
y y
4 ) (C 2
4
1 3
3
2
1
0 1 2 3 4 x
29
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 1
..53.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ][− 3,3 ) (Cﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) fﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل( 50
ﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [0,3ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : 5
y
ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل : -1 0 1 2 3 x
-1
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = − x − 5 : (2ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ x 3 :
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ }ℝ − {−2 .56.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ f (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
2
1
) (A, i , j
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ (1ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C f
ﺃﻨﻘل ﻫﺩﺍ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺘﻙ ﺜﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺜل
(2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) (C fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ f 1ﻭ f 2ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
) . (A, i , j
f1 ( x ) = x 3 − 3 x 2 + 2
(3ﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل Aﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C f
f 2 ( x) = x3 − 3 x 2 + 2
30
1 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
..64.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {0ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: (C ) ..57.ه ا ا
7ا : 8 f
x 2 − 2x + 3
= )f ( x
f ( x) = x 2 + 2 +
1
(x − 1)2
x
y
6
1
= ) h (x ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ g ( x) = x 2 + 2 :ﻭ
4
x 3
(3ﻫل ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ .
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ [∞. ]0, + ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ..58..ﺇﻝﻰ ..62.. •
f ( x) = x 2ﻭ g ( x) = − x 2 − x
) (Cﻭ ) (C
g f (1ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ h
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ xﻭﻀـﻌﻴﺔ ) (Cfﺒﺎﻝﻨـﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻘﻁـﻊ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . h
. y = x2 ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
31
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 1
(Cfﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x ) ﻝﺘﻜﻥ M 1ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ [∞[0,+ (1 .67ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Ch ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ) . f ( x ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞[0,+ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
f 69ﻭ gﻭ hﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺤﻴﺙ :
1 1
g ( x) = 1 − ، f ( x) = 3 x − x ≥ 0ﻓﺈﻥ f ( x ) ≥ 0
3x 3x
h( x ) = 3 x − 1
ﺤﻴﺙ [∞[0,+ (2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
(1ﻓﻜﻙ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ g ( x) = −1 + 1 + x :
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ [∞[0,+ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
[ ]− ∞,0ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ، ]0,+ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ xﻤﻭﺠﺒﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ g ( x ) ≥ 0
[∞]0,+ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ [ ]− ∞,0ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ (3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g f؟
)f ( x
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻭ ﺒﺴﻁ ) ( g f )( x ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
)g ( x
f (4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f g؟
ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ؟ (4ﻫل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ hﻭ
g ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) . ( f g )( x
70ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
..68ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Cfﻭ ) (C gﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ
[∞ I = ]0,+ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
fﻭ gﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺤﻴﺙ h = g f :
x 1 x2 −1
g ( x) = + = )، f ( x
2 2x 2x
y
(1ﻓﻜﻙ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ . v
5 ) (Cf
(2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ uﻭ vﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ .I 4
32
1 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﻤﺴــﺎﺌل ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −3;3ﺍﻝـﺸﻜل 71
( )
75ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﺯﻭﺩ ﺒﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ، O; i, j ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻴﻤﺜل ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ.ﻤﺜل ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = xﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ f1 ( x) = − f ( x ) (1
y
Aﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﺎ )(2;0 ) f 2 ( x) = f ( x (2
y 1
f3 ( x) = f ( x) + 1 (3
0 1 x
1
M . f 4 ( x ) = f ( x + 1) (4
→
j
→ 0
i1 A x f 72ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (Cﺍﻷﻗﺭﺏ f ( x) = 2 x 2 − 1ﻭ g ( x) = 4 x3 − 3 x
ﻤﻥ . A ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ f g = g f :
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ xﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻭ Mﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ 73ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
ﻤﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x f ( x) = x − 2 − 3 x + x + 2
(1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ AMﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ) f ( xﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﻤﺯ
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0; +ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
2 ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ.
3 7
f ( x) = x − + (2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ
2 4
ﺃ( ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﺒﻴﻥ AMﻭ ) f ( x؟ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ.
ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞. [ 0; + (3ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ، fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g
ﺠـ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ )g ( x) = − f ( x
AMﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ .
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞]−1; + ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f 74
ABC 76ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ) ( AB = AC
3x − 2
ﻭ [ AH ] . BC = 12ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﻠﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﻀﻠﻊ ) ( BC = )f ( x ﺤﻴﺙ
x +1
(1ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ .ﺤﻴﺙ . AH = 9
(2ﺨﻤﻥ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ Aﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ Pﻭ Qﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ BCﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ
ﻝـ . Hﻨﻀﻊ . HP = HQ = x
ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺤﻴﺙ x > −1ﻴﻜﻭﻥ f ( x) < A
Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ] [ ABﻭ Nﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ] [ ACﺤﻴﺙ
(3ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ
MNPQﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل )ﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل(.
b
f ( x) = a + xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]−1; +ﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
x +1
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞. ]−1; +
(5ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺍﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
[∞ ]−1; +ﻴﻜﻭﻥ f ( x) < 3
(6ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ
[∞]−1; + ) f ( xﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ xﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
33
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 1
f m ( x) = mx 2 − 4mx + 4m + 2 ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻁﻭل ﻭ ﻋﺭﺽ
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M ( x; yﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ( H ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل MNPQﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺤﺎﻁ ﹰﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABC
ﻭ ) ( Pmﻓﺈﻥ xﻴﺤﻘﻕ: ﻭ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ.
( E )...... mx 3 − 7 mx 2 + (16m + 1) x − 12m − 2 = 0 18 − 3x
= MQ - (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ
2
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ x = 2ﻴﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( E
-ﻨﻀﻊ ) A( xﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل MNPQﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ bm ، amﻭ cmﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥA( x) = −3 ( x − 3) − 9 :
2
= mx − 7 mx + (16m + 1) x − 12m − 2
3 2
) = ( x − 2)(am x 2 + bm x 2 + cm (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . A
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ mﺒﺤﻴﺙ : (3ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ 0;6
(4ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ Aﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻅﻤﻰ.ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻬﺎ؟ ( Pm ) -ﻭ ) ( Hﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻓﻘﻁ..
( Pm ) -ﻭ ) ( Hﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ. (5ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﺎﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ
ﻼ .ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ
79ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴ ﹰ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ.
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ، ( ABﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ، Bﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (CMﻴﻘﻁﻊ f 77ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـf ( x ) = ( x + 1)( x − 4) :
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ADﻓﻲ – (1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
. Nﻨﺴﻤﻲ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ 2
3 25
] [ MN ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ f ( x) = x − −
2 4
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ -ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( O; I , Jﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Pﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل
ﻫﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ) (Γﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﺃﻱ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ x 2ﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Iﻝﻤﺎ Mﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ). ( AB
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ.
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ A; AB, ADﻭ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ tﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ
g (2ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ g ( x) = f ( x ) :
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M
-ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ g ( x) = f ( x ) : x ≥ 0
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . t
-ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ gﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ.
x
=y (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) (Γﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ (3ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ gﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ . f
2x −1
1
(3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ − ﺒـ:
O; i, j 78ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ( )
2 ( P) ( Iﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ :
x
= )f ( x 1
2x −1 )f ( x) = x (4 + x
ﺃ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ 2
b 1 ) ( Hﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {3ﺒـ :
f ( x) = a + ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ: ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ −x − 4
2x −1 2 = )g ( x
ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ x −3
1 1 (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( Pﻭ ) . ( H
−∞; 2 ﻭ 2 ; +∞ (2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﻝـ ) ( Pﻭ ) . ( H
ـ( ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Γﻭ ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ m ( IIﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ( Pm ) .ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ. ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f mﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ :
34
2
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
اف
دا آ
ود و
در.
ﻫﻭ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺒﻜﺭ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺒﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ .ﻭﻝﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜﺭﺥ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﻀﻭﺍﺤﻲ ﺒﻐﺩﺍﺩ ،ﻭﻻ ﻴﻌﺭﻑ ﺘﺎﺭﻴﺦ
ﻭﻻﺩﺘﻪ ﻭﻴﻌﺩ ﺃﺤﺩ ﻜﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺏ .ﺍﻫﺘﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﺍﻫﺘﻤﺎﻤﹰﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﹰﺍ ﺒﻌﻠﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻭﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ
ﻻ ﻻﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺒل ﻜﺎﻥ ﻴﺜﺒﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻤﻜﺘﻭﺒﺔ ﺒﺎﻷﺤﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ.
ﺇﻻ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻝﻡ ﻴﻜﻥ ﻤﻴﺎ ﹰ
ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻝﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺅﻝﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻲ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ﻭﻝﻜﻨﻪ ﺯﺍﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻹﻜﺜﺎﺭ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﺍﻫﻴﻥ ﺴﻭﺍﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ .
ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﻪ ) ﺍﻝﺒﺩﻴﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ( ﻁﺭﻗﹰﺎ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺓ ﻹﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻸﻋﺩﺍﺩ
ﻭﺍﻝﻜﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺭﺍﺝ ﺠﺫﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻓﻲ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻁﺭﻗ ﹰﺎ ﺠﺒﺭﻴﺔ ﺘﺩل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻭﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﻜﺭ ﻭﺴﻌﺔ
ﺍﻝﻌﻘل ﻭﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺘﺎﻤﺔ ﺒﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ،ﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺸﻬﺭ ﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﻜﺘﺎﺏ ) ﺍﻝﻔﺨﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ (
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺍﺸﺘﻤل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺓ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺴﺒﻘﻪ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﺤﺩ ،ﺘﺩل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺼﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻔﻜﻴﺭ ﻭﻤﻨﻬﺎ
) ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻝﻭ ﺃﻀﻴﻑ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻝﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺘﺞ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﹰﺎ ﻭﻝﻭ ﻁﺭﺡ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﻪ ﻝﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺘﺞ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﹰﺎ (
ﻜﻤﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺒﻁ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻨﺎ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﹰﺍ ﻹﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻌﻲ .ﻭﻓﻲ ﻜﺘﺎﺏ ) ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ( ﺃﻭﺠﺩ
ﻻ ﻤﺘﻨﻭﻋﺔ ﻭﻓﺭﻴﺩﺓ ﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ .ﻭﺘﻭﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ 1020ﻡ.
ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺨﻲ ﺤﻠﻭ ﹰ
35
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 2
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
xﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ.
(x 3
() )
.1ﺃﻨﺸﺭ ﻭ ﺒﺴﻁ ﺜﻡ ﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ+ 2 x + 1 x 2 + 1 :
.2ﻫل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 103121ﺃﻭﻝﻲ ؟
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ f ( x) = x 2 + 6 x + 5 :ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ
( )
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O, i, j
.1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
f ( x ) = ( x + 3) − 4 ﻭ ) f ( x) = ( x + 1)( x + 5
2
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
y y = ( x − 1) − 3
2
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Pﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ: ( O ;i , j ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ )
5 ) ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل (
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﺒﺎﻻﻨﺘﻘﺎل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ
4
)(P ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = x 2ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
3
.2ﺤل ﺠﺒﺭﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
)( x − 1
2
2 −3 = 0
ﺍﺸﺭﺡ ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ.
1
.3ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Pﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ℝ
36
2 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻭﺭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜﺘﺎﺏ " ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ " ﻝﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺍﺒﻥ ﻤﻭﺴﻰ ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻲ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
" ...ﻭ ﺃﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺫﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻌﺩل ﺍﻷﻤﻭﺍل ﻓﻨﺤﻭ ﻗﻭﻝﻙ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺠﺫﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﻴﻌﺩل ﻤﺎﻻ ﻓﺒﺎﺒﻪ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻨﺼﻑ
ﺍﻷﺠﺫﺍﺭ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻓﺎﻀﺭﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺜﻨﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺭﺒﻌﺎ ﻓﺯﺩﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺴﺘﺔ ﻭ ﺭﺒﻌﺎ ﻓﺨﺫ
ﺠﺫﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺜﻨﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻓﺯﺩﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻷﺠﺫﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻓﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل
ﺴﺘﺔ ﻋﺸﺭ .ﻭ ﻜل ﻤﺎ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺎل ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗل ﻓﺎﺭﺩﺩﻩ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺎل ﻭﺍﺤﺩ " ...
.1ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺹ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻴﻌﻨﻰ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺎل x 2ﻭ ﺒﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺎل xﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺹ ﻫﻲ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل " bx + c = ax 2 " :ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺫﻜﻭﺭ ﻫﻭ" 3x + 4 = x 2 " :
.2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻭﺯ ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 3x + 4 = x 2ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺩﻡ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻲ – ﻜﻼﻤﻴﺎ –
.3ﺃﻋﻁ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ ﺼﻴﻐﺔ ﺍﻝﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜلbx + c = x 2 :
3x + 20 = 2 x 2 ﻭ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ4 x + 5 = x 2 :
.4ﻝﺘﺒﺭﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺩﻡ ﻜﻼﻤﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 3x + 4 = x 2ﺍﺴﺘﻌﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻲ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ .ﻜﻴﻑ ﺃﻨﺠﺯ
ﺫﻝﻙ ؟
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ:
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ
AB = x
EC = 3
Fﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ EC
EFGHﻤﺭﺒﻊ
GI = BE
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
37
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 2
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) ﺃﻭ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ( ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ: ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
f ( x ) = an x n + an −1 x n −1 + ... + a1 x + a0
ﺤﻴﺙ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ an ، ... ، a1 ، a0ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ.
ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ:
ﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ. x ֏ 0 : ) ( k∈ ℝ ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔx ֏ k :
ﻫﻲ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ. x ֏ x5 )، x ֏ ( x + 2) ( x2 − 2 ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل، x ֏ 0,3 x 2 + x − 2 :
ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ fﺘﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل: ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻭ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
f ( x ) = an x n + an −1 x n −1 + ... + a1 x + a0ﻤﻊ an ≠ 0
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ، fﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ an ، ... ، a1 ، a0ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺘﻪ ﻭ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ a p x pﺍﻝﺤﺩ
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ . p
ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ:
ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ( a0 ≠ 0 ) x ֏ a0 :
ﻫﻲ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ .0
ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ ( a ≠ 0 ) x ֏ ax + b :ﻫﻲ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ .1
ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ( a ≠ 0 ) x ֏ ax 2 + bx + c :ﻫﻲ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ ) 2ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ(
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ.
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻜل ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺘﻪ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ. •
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ،ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ،ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ •
ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ.
38
2 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺠﺒﻨﺎ ﺒﻨﻌﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍﻝﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ: ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
(1ﻫل fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ؟ (2ﻫل ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ) f ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل an x n + an −1 x n −1 + ... + a1 x + a0 :؟
ﺤــل:
f ( x) = 2 x3 − 2 x 2 + 3 x − 3 ﺍ( ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ.
ﺏ( ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻷﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ x 2 + 1 ≠ 0 ، x
(x )
2
2
+1
= )g ( x ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x
= x2 + 1
x +1 2
ﺤــل:
( x + 1)(ax 2 + bx + c ) = ax 3 + bx 2 + cx + ax 2 + bx + c) = ax 3 + (a + b) x 2 + ( b + c ) x + c .1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ax 3 + (a + b) x 2 + ( b + c ) x + c = x3 + x 2 − 4 x − 4 : x
a = 1
a = 1 a + b = 1
ﺃﻱ b = 0 :ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ f ( x ) = ( x + 1) ( x − 4 ) : x
2
ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ
c = −4 b + c = − 4
c = −4
f ( x ) = 0 .2ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ( x + 1) ( x 2 − 4 ) = 0ﺃﻱ x + 1 = 0ﺃﻭ x 2 − 4 = 0ﺃﻱ x = −1 :ﺃﻭ x 2 = 4ﻭﻤﻨﻪ
ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻫﻲ ، -2 ، -1ﻭ 2ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻫﻲS = { − 2, − 1, 2 } :
39
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 2
ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ﺤﺎﺼل ﻗﺴﻤﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ fﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ gﻝﻴﺱ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ: ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
)f ( x
֏ h : xﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻨﺎﻁﻘﺔ.
)g ( x
.2ﺠﺫﺭ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﻭ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ. ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ αﺠﺫﺭ ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ fﻴﻌﻨﻲ . f (α ) = 0
ﻤﺜﺎل:
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻf ( x ) = x3 − x 2 − x − 2 :
( ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f (2) = 0 :ﻭﻤﻨﻪ 2ﻫﻭ ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ fﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 0ﻝﻴﺱ ﺠﺫﺭﺍ ﻝﻪ ﻷﻥ f (0) = −2 ) f (0) ≠ 0
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ 1ﻭ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ. ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α ) f (α ) = 0ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ( fﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ gﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
)f ( x) = ( x − α ) g ( x
ﻤﺜﺎل:
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻf ( x ) = x3 − 6 x 2 + 11x − 6 :
f (2) = 0ﻭ f (3) = 0 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f (1) = 0ﻭ
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ 2 ،1ﻭ 3ﻫﻲ ﺠﺫﻭﺭ ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ . f
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺘﺤﻠﻴل fﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
)f ( x ) = ( x − 1)( x − 2 )( x − 3
40
2 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺤــل:
.1ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺒﺭﻱ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ:
• ( f + g )( x ) = f ( x) + g ( x) = −3x 2 + 3x
• ( 2 f − 3g )( x ) = 2 f ( x) − 3g ( x) = 9 x 2 + x + 5
• ( g f )( x ) = g [ f ( x)] = −12 x 2 − 10 x − 3
f × gﻫﻲ .3 ( f × g )( x ) = f ( x) × g ( x) = −6 x 3 − x 2 − x − 1ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺩﺭﺠﺔ .2
ﺤــل:
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f (2) = 0 :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ . fﺇﺫﻥ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ gﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
)f ( x ) = ( x − 2) g ( x ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ) g ( xﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻓﺭﺽ g ( x) = ax 2 + bx + cﺜﻡ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ b ، aﻭ cﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
ﻜﺜﻴﺭﻱ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻨﺸﺭ ﻭ ﺘﺒﺴﻴﻁ ﻭ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) ( x − 2) g ( xﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺨﻭﺍﺭﺯﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ.
41
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 2
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ،ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ، xﻜل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜلax 2 + bx + c = 0 :
ﺤﻴﺙ b ، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻤﻊ . a ≠ 0
2a 4 a a 2a 4a 2
b
2
∆
ax + bx + c = a x +
2
− 2
ﺒﻭﻀﻊ ∆ = b 2 − 4acﻨﺠﺩ
2a 4a
2a ∆=0
ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﺤﻠﻴل ax 2 + bx + c ﻻ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺤﻠﻭل ∆<0
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ. ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax 2 + bx + c = 0 ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ∆ = 0
42
2 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻf ( x ) = x 2 + 3 x − 4 :
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻲ ﻝﹻ )f ( x
25
. f ( x ) ≥ −ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ fﺘﻘﺒل ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩﻫﺎ. .2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
4
ﺤــل:
2 2
3 9 3 25
x + 3x − 4 = x + − − 4 = x + −
2
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ: .1
2 4 2 4
2
3 25
f ( x ) = x + −ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻲ ﻝﹻ ). f ( x ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
2 4
25 25
.2ﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ) f ( xﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ − 4ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ f ( x) − − 4
2 2
25 3 25 3
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻷﻭل f ( x ) − (− ) = x + :ﻭﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ x + ≥ 0ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ f ( x) − (− ) ≥ 0
4 2 4 2
25
. f ( x) ≥ − ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
4
3 3 25 25
f ( x ) ≥ −ﻭ f − = −ﻓﺈﻥ f ( x ) ≥ f − ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ
2 2 4 4
3 25
−ﻭ ﺘﺒﻠﻐﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ −ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ. ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻫﻲ
2 4
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 6
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺠـ( x 2 − 4 x + 4 = 0ﺩ( x 2 + x − 6 = 0 ﺏ( x 2 + x + 1 = 0 ﺍ( x 2 + 2 x = 0
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻋﻨﺩ ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ( a ≠ 0 ) ax 2 + bx + c = 0ﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺇﻻ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﻠﻥ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ax 2 + bx + cﻴﻘﺒل ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻼ ﻅﺎﻫﺭﺍ.
ﺤــل:
ﺍ( x 2 + 2 x = 0ﺘﻌﻨﻲ x ( x + 2 ) = 0ﺃﻱ x = 0ﺃﻭ x = −2ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻫﻲ }S = {−2, 0
ﺏ( ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ b = 1 ، a = 1ﻭ c = 1ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ∆ = (1) − 4 (1)(1) = −3ﺇﺫﻥ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺤﻠﻭل ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ∅ = S
2
ﺩ( ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ b = 1 ، a = 1ﻭ c = −6ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ∆ = (1) − 4 (1)( −6 ) = 25ﺇﺫﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺤﻼﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺍﻥ:
2
43
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 2
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ،ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ، xﻜل ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺸﻜﻠﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ ax 2 + bx + c > 0 ، ax 2 + bx + c ≥ 0 :ﺤﻴﺙ b ، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻤﻊ . a ≠ 0
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ∆ = 0 :2
−b
= x1ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ax 2 + bx + c = 0ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x = x1ﻭ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) ax 2 + bx + c = a ( x − x1ﺤﻴﺙ:
2
2a
aﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل . x ≠ x1
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ∆ < 0 :3
b ∆
2
b ∆
2
x + + − 2 > 0 ax 2 + bx + c = a x +ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ +− ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
2 a 4a 2a 4a 2
ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ax 2 + bx + cﻫﻲ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ . a
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
∆<0
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax 2 + bx + c = 0ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭﻻ
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ax 2 + bx + cﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a
∆>0 ∆=0
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax 2 + bx + c = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ x1ﻭ x2 ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax 2 + bx + c = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ x1
ax 2 + bx + c 0ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) 0 ( −aﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a ax 2 + bx + c ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a 0 ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ a
<
44
2 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 7
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺠـ( x 2 − x + 4 < 0 ﺏ( − x 2 + 10 x − 25 ≥ 0 ﺍ( 2 x 2 + 4 x − 6 ≤ 0
y ﺤــل:
2 .1ﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل.
.2ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل
1
ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ -1ﻭ 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻘﻊ
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 x ﻓﻭﻕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ] x ∈ [ − 1; 2ﻭ ﻴﻘﻊ ﺘﺤﺘﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
45
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 2
c b
=P ﻭ S =−
a a
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :1ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﹼﻴﻥ ﺒﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺠﺫﺭﻴﻥ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺫﺭ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ Sﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ P
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻲ :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ 2 x 2 + α x − 3 = 0 :ﺤﻴﺙ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
ﻋﻴﻥ αﺤﺘىﻴﻜﻭﻥ ) ( −3ﺤﻼ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﺤل ﺍﻵﺨﺭ.
46
2 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻊ
.1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻊ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ، xﻜل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜلax 4 + bx 2 + c = 0 :
ﺤﻴﺙ b ، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻤﻊ . a ≠ 0
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻊ ،ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ، xﻜل ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺸﻜﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ:
ax 4 + bx 2 + c > 0 ، ax 4 + bx 2 + c ≥ 0ﺤﻴﺙ b ، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻤﻊ . a ≠ 0
47
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 2
S1 = 1 + 2 + ... + nﻭ S2 = 12 + 22 + ... + n 2ﺤﻴﺙ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ. ﻨﻬﺩﻑ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ:
.1ﺤﺴﺎﺏ S1
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ fﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ f ( x + 1) − f ( x) = x : x •
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ S1 = f ( n + 1) − f (1) :ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ S1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n •
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻷﻝﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ. •
.2ﺤﺴﺎﺏ S 2
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ gﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ g ( x + 1) − g ( x ) = x 2 : x •
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ S 2ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻝﻑ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ. •
.1ﺤﺴﺎﺏ S1
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ f ( x ) = ax 2 + bx + cﺤﻴﺙ b ، aﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻤﻊ a ≠ 0 •
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎf (x + 1) = a (x + 1)2 + b ( x + 1) + c = ax 2 + ( 2a + b ) x + a + b + c :
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ f (x + 1) − f (x ) = (ax 2 + ( 2a + b ) x + a + b + c ) − (ax 2 + bx + c ) = 2ax + a + b
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ f ( x + 1) − f ( x) = xﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ:
1
=a
1 1
ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ f ( x ) = x 2 − x + c :ﻭﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺃﺨﺫ . c = 0 2a = 1ﺃﻱ 2
2 2 b = − 1 a + b = 0
2
1 1
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ f ( x) = x 2 − x
2 2
6
48
2 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
] [ AB ﺤﻴﺙ M . AB = 4ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ] [ AB ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ
ﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻫﻤﺎ ] [ AMﻭ ] . [ MB
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ Sﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﻠﻭﻥ ﻭ ﺒﹻ aﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ ] . [ ABﻨﻀﻊ AM = x
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ Sﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
1
= S؟ .2ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎa :
2
1
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ. S > a :
4
4 4
π
=S
2
(−x 2
)
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺴﻴﻁ ﻨﺠﺩ+ 4 x :
1
.2ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Mﺤﻴﺙa :
=S
2
π
ﺃﻱ − x 2 + 4 x − 4 = 0 :ﺃﻱx 2 − 4 x + 4 = 0 :
2
( 1
)
S = aﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ − x 2 + 4 x = ( 4π ) = 2π
2
1
2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ x − 4 x + 4 = 0 :ﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ ( x − 2 ) = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪx = 2 :
2 2
1
= Sﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎa :
2
1
.3ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎS > a :
4
>
>
π
ﺃﻱ− x 2 + 4 x − 2 0 :
2
(
− x2 + 4x
1
4
) 1
S > aﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ ) ( 4π
4
ﻝﻨﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ − x + 4 x − 2
2
ﻭ x′′ = 2 + 2 ﻴﻘﺒل ﺠﺫﺭﻴﻥ ﻫﻤﺎx′ = 2 − 2 : − x2 + 4 x − 2 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ∆ = 8ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
x 0 2− 2 2+ 2 4
− x2 + 4 x − 2 0 - + 0 -
1
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻗﻴﻡ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ S > a :ﻫﻲ. 2 − 2 ; 2 + 2 :
4
49
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 2
50
2 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ ﺤل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ
.3ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ
ﻤﻊ A ≠ 0 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔAx 2 + Bx + C = 0 :
ﻨﻀﻊD = B 2 − 4AC :
A,B,C
ﻻ ﻨﻌﻡ
D=0
ﻻ ﻨﻌﻡ
D>0
(
X 1 = − B − D / 2A ) ﺤل ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ
51
2
ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ
أ دة ا رات أ
أم ؟
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ.
ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ f ( x ) = 3 x − 1 − 2 x 3ﻫﻲ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ 1
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ . P ( x) = x − 3 x − x + 3
3 2
10 ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ .
(1ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2ﻫﻭ ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝـ . P ( x ) :
( )
2
= ) f ( xﻫﻲ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ x−3 ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ 2
(2ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻫﻭ ﺠﺫﺭ ﻝـ . P ( x ) :
y P ( x) (3ﻻ ﻴﻘﺒل ﺠﺫﻭﺭ . ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ .
2
−2
1
fﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ 11 3ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ f ( x) = 4ﻫﻲ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ .
x
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ،ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
-1 0 1 2 3 x 4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) f ( xﻭ ) g ( xﻜﺜﻴﺭﻱ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ
-1
ﻤﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل.
ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ) f ( x ) + g ( xﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻌﺔ .
(1ﻤﻤﻴﺯ ) f ( xﺴﺎﻝﺏ .
-2
f ( x ) = − x 2 + 3 x − 2 (4 ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ x0ﻫﻭ ﺠﺫﺭ 7
ﻴﻌﻁﻰ f ( x ) = 3 x + 4 x − 7
2
13 ﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) . P ( x
) f ( xﻴﺤﻠل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل : P( x) = x 2 − 5 x − 6 (1ﻭ x0 = −1
7
f ( x) = 3( x − 1)( x + ) (1 P( x) = −2 x 3 + 5 x 2 + 8 x − 3 (2ﻭ x0 = 3
3
P( x) = x 4 − x 2 + 2 x + 6 (3ﻭ x0 = 3
f ( x ) = ( x − 1)( x − 7) (2
f ( x) = ( x − 1)(7 x − 3) (3 ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ 8
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ) (O ; i ; j ) P ( xﻴﻘﺒل ﺠﺫﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ .
14
ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = − x 2 + x − 3ﻫﻭ P( x) = x 2 + 571x − 6 (1
ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = x 2ﺒـ : P( x) = −7 x 2 + x − 6 (2
(1ﺍﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل . P( x) = 2 x 2 − 7 x + 5 (3
1 11 P( x) = x 3 − 3 x 2 − 5 x + 7 (4
u = i +ﺜﻡ (2ﺍﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ j
2 4 3
P( x) = x 2 + x 6 + 1 (5
ﺍﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل . 2
1 11 a 9ﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ .
u= i− (3ﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺍﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ j
2 4 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ x
ﻭﺍﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل . x 3 − 6 x = x 3 + (b − a ) x 2 − (b + 5) xﻓﺈﻥ . a = b
52
2
اوال آ ات ا
ود
ا #ت "! آ ات ا
ود fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ . D f 15
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) P ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺴﻁ 20 ﺍﺸﺭﺡ ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ) f ( xﻝﻴﺱ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ
ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺩﺭﺠﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ : ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ .
)P ( x) = ( x + 3)( x + 2 2
°1 f ( x ) = −2 x3 + 3x − 5 (1ﻭ ∗D f = ℝ
)P( x) = ( x − 5)( x 2 + 2 x − 1 °2
− x2 + 1
P ( x) = ( x + 5)( x − 3)2 °3 = ) f ( xﻭ }D f = ℝ − {−1 (2
x +1
)P( x) = (3 x + 2) − 9( x + 2
2 2
°4 − x2 + 2x − 3
= ) f ( xﻭ D f = ℝ (3
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) P ( xﻭ ) Q( xﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ. x2 + 3
21
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ :
( )
2
= ) f ( xﻭ D f = ℝ | x| −5 (4
) P( x) + Q( x؛ ) P( x) − Q ( x؛ )2 P( x) + 3 Q ( x
ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ. 16
P( x) = −3x 2 + x − 5 (1ﻭ Q( x) = 2 x 2 + 4 x − 1
f : x ֏ ( x + 3)( x − 2) (1
2
53
2
(4 x − 3)2 − (3x − 2)2 = 0 ، 2 x 2 - 2 2 x + 1 = 0
b ، aﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ) f ( xﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺤﻴﺙ : 26
ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ (67971 x − 31527)2 = 0؟ 31 f ( x ) = −2 x + ax + b
3
ﺒﺭﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل : x 32 ﻋﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ − 2ﺠﺫﺭﺍ ﻝـ )f ( x
1962 x + 110364 x − 2007 = 0
2
ﻭ . f (0) = 5
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ .
c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ) f ( xﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺤﻴﺙ : 27
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 33 f ( x) = ax3 − 3( x − b) x + cx 2 + ( x 2 − 3) x
f ( x ) = 0ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻼ ﻝـ ): f ( x
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ c ، b ، aﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ
f ( x ) = x 2 − 3 x + 2 (1
ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ ) f ( xﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺎ.
f ( x ) = 3 x 2 − 5 x + 2 (2
f ( x) = −9 x 2 − 3 x + 2 (3 ا#دت & ار %ا $
f ( x ) = −5 x 2 + 8 x − 3 ( 4 ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) f ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻲ ،ﺜﻡ 28
f ( x ) = 2 x + 3 x − 3 (5
2
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ، f ( x) = 0ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
34ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
x + 3 x − 10 = 0 (1
2
f ( x ) = x 2 − 6 x + 8 (1
−3 x 2 + 5 x − 2 = 0 (2 f ( x) = x 2 + x − 6 (2
2 x 2 + 7 x + 8 = 0 (3 f ( x ) = − x 2 + 3 x − 5 (3
x 2 + 5 x + 5 = 0 (4 f ( x ) = 3 x 2 − 7 x + 2 (4
− x + 18 x + 19 = 0 (5
2
4
f ( x) = x 2 − 2 x + (5
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 35 5
ax 2 + b x + c = 0 f ( x) = −5 x 2 + 15 x (6
ﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ aﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ. ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﻜﺘﺏ 29
b ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ
ﻨﻀﻊ = ' b
2 ﻭﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻴﻥ ' xﻭ " . x
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ∆ ،ﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ، ( Eﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . c ، b ' ، a x ' = 2ﻭ x " = 3؛ x ' = −1ﻭ x " = 5
∆
= ' ∆ ،ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ' ∆ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . c ، b ' ، a (2ﻨﻀﻊ 1
= ' xﻭ x" = −
1
= ' xﻭ x " = −3؛
1
4 3 2 2
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ∆ ' ≥ 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ −3
= ' xﻭ x" = 0 x ' = 0ﻭ x" = 3؛
' ∆ −b ' + ∆ ' −b ' − 2
؛ ﻫﻤﺎ 2
a a = "x ' = x ؛ x ' = x " = −2
) ' ∆ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( ( E 3
30ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯ ،ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭ ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ 36
ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
x −4=0
2
(2 x 2 − 3 x = 0 (1
− x + 18 x + 19 = 0 (1
2
54
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
2
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ : 37
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) ( x − x1 )( x − x2؛ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻼ ﻝـ
t − 5 t + 6 = 0 (1
2
55
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
2
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ y ، xﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ: 55 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x 49
ax + bx + c = 0ﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
2
x + y = 17
3 ﻭ aﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .
x + y = 1241
3
56
2
ر ـ
. P( x) = 5 x − 2 15 x + 3 (6
2
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، mﺇﻥ ﺃﻤﻜﻥ ،ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 61
. P( x) = − x + 12 x − 36 (7
2
ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﻼﻥ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺎﻥ:
. P ( x ) = − x 2 + 2 3 x − 3 (8 x − 9 x + 3m − 4 = 0 (1
2
. P ( x ) = x 2 + x + 9 (9
2 (m − 1) x 2 − 2(m + 2) x − m − 1 = 0 (3
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ 66 (1 − m) x 2 + mx − 3m − 4 = 0 (4
ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : ﺤﻘل ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ 28 m2ﻭﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ 62
. P ( x ) = 2 x 3 − 3 x 2 + 2 x − 3 (1 23 mﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻁﻭﻝﻲ ﺒﻌﺩﻴﻪ .
. P ( x ) = − x 3 + 2 x 2 − 6 x + 5 (2 ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ m 63
. P ( x ) = x 3 − 4 x 2 + 5 x − 2 (3 (1ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ m = 3 cmﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻁﻭل ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺒﻌﺩﻱ
. P( x) = −3x 3 + 11 x 2 − 12 x + 4 (4 ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺤﻴﻁ ABCD
. P ( x ) = x 4 − 3 x 3 − x 2 + 3 x (5 ﻭﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ . ABCD
ﺤﻠل ) P ( xﺜﻡ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻪ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ 67 (2ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻝﻪ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁ ﻝﻠﻤﺭﺒﻊ ABCD
ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : ﻭﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ . ABCD
. P ( x ) = x 4 − 3 x 2 + 2 (1 (3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ mﺒﻌﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻝﻪ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ
. P ( x ) = x 4 + 3 x 2 − 4 (2 ABCDﻭﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ . ABCD
. P ( x ) = 3 x 4 − 2 x 2 − 8 (3 إ0رة آ ات ا
ود
P( x) = 2 x − 7 x + 9 x − 21x + 9 68
4 3 2
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ 64
1
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) P(3ﻭ P ﺜﻡ ﺤﻠل ) P ( x ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
2
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) P( xﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . x . P( x) = ( x − 2)(2 x + 1) (1
ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻠﻭل ﻜﻼ . P( x) = (3 − 2 x)( x + 1) (2
69
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ : . P( x) = ( x − 1)( x + 2)( x − 3) (3
(C f ) 70ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ .ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ 65
ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ،ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، xﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ )f ( x
. P( x) = 2 x 2 + x − 6 (1
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜﻠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ :
y y
4
. P( x) = −3 x 2 + 8 x − 4 (2
) (C f
. P( x) = −6 x 2 + x − 2 (3
4
3
-1
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 x
-2
-1
57
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
2
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ: 77 ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 71
x2 − 4 | x − 2 | = 0 x2 + 3 | x − 1 | = 0 2 x + 5x − 3 ≥ 0
2
(1
−3 x 2 − 5 x + 2 ≥ 0 (2
x 4 + 4 | x 2 − 1 | + 3 | x + 2 | +1 = 0
2 x 2 + x − 15 < 0(3
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ: 78 −3 x 2 + 11x − 10 < 0 (4
( x − 2) 2 − 3( x − 2) + 2 = 0 −2 x 2 + x − 5 < 0 (5
−2 x 2 + 2 x − 4 > 0 (6
x−5 x +6 = 0
4x2 + x + 9 ≥ 0 (7
x+ x −6 = 0 x 2 − 3x + 7 ≤ 0(8
3 7
− +2=0 9 x 2 − 6 5 x + 5 ≤ 0 (9
x2 x
79ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل : x
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 72
x3 − x 2 + 3x − 3 < 0 (1
( E ) . . . 3x 4 − 7 x 3 + 8 x 2 − 7 x + 3 = 0
−2 x 3 + 2 x 2 − x + 1 ≤ 0 (2
(1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 0ﻝﻴﺱ ﺤل ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( E x3 − 2 x2 − x + 2 > 0 (3
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﻤﻜﺎﻓﺌﺔ x4 − 5x2 + 6 > 0 (4
ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ )' ( Eﺤﻴﺙ : 3x 2008 + 11x1962 + 1964 ≥ 0 (5
58
2
ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ) S ( xﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ 6ـ45
ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻠﻴﻥ MBRNﻭ NPDQﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ. [ AB] 83ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻁﻭﻝﻬﺎ .5
(2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ xﺘﻜﻭﻥ ) S ( xﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ :
ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل . ABCD MA2 − AB . MB = 0
ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : 88 ﻓﻲ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ . AB = 8
84
P( x) = 2 x 2 − 6 x + 3 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﺴﻘﻁﻬﺎ
M
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (γﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ Pﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ABﻫﻭ H
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i : j ﻭ . MA2 + 3MH 2 = 18
3 3
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Sﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ . ; − A B
2 2 H
3
= ). f ( x 85ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜل :
(1ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ) P ( xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل P( x) = a ( x + b)2 + c x
ﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ. ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ) (hﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
(2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (γﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( S ; i : jﺜﻡ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i : j
ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) . (γ (1ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﻋﺩﺩ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ
(3ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ Pﺜﻡ ﻭﻀﺢ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (hﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ . y = 2x + m
(4ﺃﻋﻁ ﺤﺼﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ) P ( xﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ]. x ∈ [−2 ; 3 (2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﹻ ) (hﻭ ) ( Dﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ
(5ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ . P( x) ≤ x ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺘﺎﻥ ' Mﻭ " ، Mﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ I
(6ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) (O ; i : jﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ]" . [ M ' M
A E ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل B
y = xﺜﻡ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ . P ( x) ≤ x 86
h ، g ، fﺜﻼﺙ ﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 89 H I F ﻀﻠﻌﻪ I ، 1ﻨﻘﻁﺔ
)| g ( x) = f (| x؛ ؛ f ( x) = x 2 − 2 x + 3 ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ ] [ BD
| )h( x) =| f ( x ﺘﻌﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ EBFI
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Ch ، C g ، C fﻤﻨﺤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل h ، g ، fﻋﻠﻰ D G C ﻭ . HIGD
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ،ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻲ
2
ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i : j ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ EBFIﻭ HIGDﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ .
3
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ gﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ،ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ Cgﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ C f؟
C R 87ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل B ABCD
(2ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) . fﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ) f ( xﺍﻝﺸﻜل
ﻋﺭﻀﻪ AB = 3 cm
ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻲ( Q N M
x ﻭﻁﻭﻝﻪ . BC = 5 cm
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ D P A
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) f ( xﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . x
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ ABﻭﻨﻀﻊ
(5ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ) h( xﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺭﻤﺯ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ.
. AM = xﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ AMNPﺤﻴﺙ ] P ∈ [ AD
(6ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ Ch ، C g ، C fﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ . ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻠﻴﻥ MBRNﻭ . NPDQ
59
3
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻨﻪ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺔ
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ، f + g
f 1
x ֏ f ( ax + b ) ، ، ،f ×g
g g
∆y ) f ( x + h) − f ( x
lim ∆x = lim
∆x → 0 h →0 h
"
رد أو" أآ ا ء ا ا ر ،ا"! َ
ا)ا( ِ$ـ " ن "$رق 1 23 1741 (+" $ ,أس
أآ د( ام إ. 1766 ( 4 5
<=>1ا;) :درا"( Bر اَ Aات ( ،ا; Dء
)ا G!Hا ، BE +Fا= ت (... ،ا Iت ) ا BHب ،
ا (")+ا; ، (Iورا GH $ا Lو ا B3 ، ;Kب
F1ات ا
ت ،ا 3 Bت ا ، (...(Aد( أو
) B3ب اFات(
EULER Leonhard ه أ B"M )3ا GHا ;Kو ا دOت ا; .(I
Suisse, 1707-1783
61
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 3
vm
4
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . xﻨﻀﻊ h = x − 2
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، hﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( LM
3 (2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Eﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺨﺹ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ
ﻴﺭﻯ ﻷﻭل ﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻀﻭﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . L
N 2
أ ـ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﺜﹼل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( LEﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻘﻭﺱ
AB؟
M
1 L ب ـ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( LMﻝﻤﺎ
62
3 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
y
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ﻨﺴﻘﻁ ﺠﺴﻤﺎ ﺴﻘﻭﻁﺎ ﺤﺭﺍ ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍﺌﻴﺔ .ﺒﻌﺩ tﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻡ ﻗﺩ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ) d (tﻤﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺭ.
ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل tﻤﻥ ] . d (t ) = 5t 2 : [ 0,5
) (C
) ( Cﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ dﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
( )
). O ; i , jﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ( .
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻥ ﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻤﻠﻤﻴﺘﺭﻴﺔ.
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺔ ﻝﻠﺠﺴﻡ ﺨﻼل ﺨﻤﺱ ﺜﻭﺍﻥ ﻤﻥ
ﺴﻘﻭﻁﻪ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ؟
(3ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AMﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 2, 20
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ Aﻭ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ، ( C
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒـ . t ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ
• ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AMﻫﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ dﻋﻨﺩ . t0 = 2
• ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻠﺤﻅﻴﺔ
ﻋﻨﺩ t0 = 2؟
• ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻠﺤﻅﻴﺔ .ﻫل ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﺘﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ،ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻤﻌﻴﻨﺎ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ:
f : x ֏ x n (1ﻤﻊ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ . I = ℝ
1
֏ f : xﻭ [∞ I = ]0; +ﺃﻭ [. I = ]−∞ ; 0 (2
x
f : x ֏ x (3ﻭ [∞ . I = ]0; +
63
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
ﺍﻹﺸﺘﻘﺎﻗﻴﺔ.
.1ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ.
1.1ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺭ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ f :ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل D fﻤﻥ x0 . Rﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻥ . D fﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ x0
) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0 ) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x 0
lim ֏ g : hﺘﻘﺒل ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ lﻋﻨﺩ . 0ﺃﻱ = l ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ :
h →0 h h
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ lﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . x0ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒـ ) . f '( x0
ﺘﻌﺎﻝﻴﻕ:
) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ x0ﻭ ، x0 + hﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﹻ ) g ( h؛ ﻭﻫﻭ .ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
h
.D f ﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ hﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ x0 + hﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﻤﻥ
) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0
. lim ) = f '( x0 ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ
h →0 h
.2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ f :ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل D fﻤﻥ . R
ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ D fﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ . D f
ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل xﻤﻥ D fﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ) f '( xﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ . D f
)f ' : x ֏ f '( x ﻭﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ﺒﹻ ' .. fﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ . f ' ( x ) = 2x
64
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒﹻ. f ( x ) = x 2 + 2 x − 1 :
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ . x0 = 2
ﺤــل :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ hﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ 0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
f (2 + h) − f (2) (2 + h) 2 + 2(2 + h) − 1 − 7
=
h h
4 + 4h + h + 4 + 2 h − 8
2
=
h
h + 6h
2
=
h
= h+6
)f (2 + h) − f (2
lim )= lim ( h + 6
h →0 h h →0
=6
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ 2ﻭ . f ' ( 2 ) = 6
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ x0ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ
) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0 ) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0
. lim ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ x0ﻭ x0 + hﺜﻡ ﻨﺤﺴﺏ
h →0 h h
ﺤــل:
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . f ( x ) = − x 2 + 2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . R
) f ( x0 + h) − f ( x0
ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ x0ﻭ x0 + hﻤﻊ h ≠ 0 ﻝﻴﻜﻥ x0ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
h
f (x 0 + h ) − f (x 0 ) −(x 0 + h ) + 2 − (− x 0 + 2) −2x 0 h − h 2
2 2
65
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . x0ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ . O, i, jﻤﻤﺎﺱ
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )) A( x0 , f ( x0ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل Aﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻪ ) . f '( x0ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ ﻫﻲ
) y = f '( x 0 )( x − x0 ) + f ( x0
y ) ( C ) (T
f ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻫﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻪ ) f '( x0
0
)f(x ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Tﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل y = f '( x 0 ) x + bﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
A
) ) A ( x 0 , f ( x0ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) (Tﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ
1 . b = f ( x0 ) − f '( x0 ) x0ﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ) y = f '( x 0 )( x − x0 ) + f ( x0
0
0 1 x x
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) ﻨﻘﻁﺔ x0ﻭ ) (Tﻤﻤﺎﺱ )f ( x0 + h M ) (T
)) . A( x0 ; f ( x0ﻨﻌﻭﺽ ﻤﺤﻠﻴﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ x0
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺎﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . (T f ( x0 ) + f '( x0 )h E
ﺃﻱ ﻨﻌﻭﺽ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ) f ( x0 + hﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ
. f ( x0 ) + f ' ( x0 ) hﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل hﻗﺭﻴﺏ ﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺭ f ( x0 ) + f ' ( x0 ) hﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ
) . f ( x0 + hﺒﻭﻀﻊ x 0 + h = xﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ) f ( x0 A
1
xﻗﺭﻴﺏ ﻤﻥ x0ﻓﺈﻥ ) f '( x0 )( x − x0 ) + f ( x0
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺎ ﻝـ ) f ( xﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ . x0
0 1 x
x0 x0 + h
ﻨﻘﺒل ﺃﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ x 0ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) . x ֏ f '( x0 )( x − x0 ) + f ( x0
66
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 3
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒﹻ. f ( x) = − x 2 + 2 :
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Cﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( O, i, j
f
ﺤــل:
• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻷﻭل ﺭﺃﻴﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ xﻤﻥ Rﻭ f ' ( x ) = −2x؛ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 1ﻭ f '(1) = −2ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ -2ﻫﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ A
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . f (1) = 1
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻫﻲ . y = f '(1)( x − 1) + f (1) :
ﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻫﻲ . y = −2 x + 3
ﺤــل:
• ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺘﻤﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ xﻤﻥ ، Rﻭ ، f ' ( x ) = 2 x + 2
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ 2ﻫﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C
f ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ 0ﻭ f '( 0 ) = 2 ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ .0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f (0 ) = 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻫﻲ . y = f '( 0 )( x ) + f ( 0 ) :
ﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻫﻲ . y = 2 x + 1
• ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﹻ fﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ 0ﻫﻭ ) f '( 0 )( x) + f ( 0ﺃﻱ . 2 x + 1ﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g : x ֏ 2 x + 1ﻫﻲ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻬﺎ.
• 1.00004 = 1 + 4 × 10−5ﻭ ) f ( x) = (1 + xﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ) (1.00004ﻫﻲ 1 + 2 × 4 × 10−5
2 2
67
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ n ) f : x ֏ x nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ( ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ :
f ': x ֏n xn−1
1
ﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ : [ ] − ∞ , 0ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0, + ֏ f : xﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :3ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
x
1
. f ': x ֏ −
x2
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ):5ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ sin xﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ :
f ': x ֏ cos x
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ):6ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ cos xﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ :
f ': x ֏ − sin x
68
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
1
fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ] − ∞ , 0ﺒﹻ f ( x) = x 2 :ﻭ = ). g ( x
x
( )
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﻭ ) ( C gﺭﺴﻤﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O, i, j
( C fﻭ ) . ( Cg ) ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ
ﺤــل :ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺘﻴﻥ 1ﻭ ، 2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ fﻭ gﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [ . ] − ∞ , 0ﻭﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
1
. g '( x) = − f '( x) = 2 xﻭ
x2
) ) A ( x0 , f ( x0ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( C fﻭ ) ) B ( x1 , g ( x1ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) . ( C g
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭ )' (Tﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) ( C gﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B ) ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Tﻤﻤﺎﺱ
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝـ ) y = f ' ( x0 )( x − x0 ) + f ( x0 ) : (Tﺃﻱ y = 2 x0 x − x02
1 2
y=− 2
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝـ )' y = g ' ( x1 )( x − x1 ) + g ( x1 ) : (Tﺃﻱ x +
x1 x1
1
2 x0 = − x 2
) (Tﻭ )' (Tﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ
1
= −x2 2
0 x1
1
ﺒﺤل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ x0 = −2ﻭ . x1 = −
2
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Tﻭ )' . y = −4 x − 4 : (T
( )
h ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ) O, i, jﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل(
0 1 x
) ( OM Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( C fﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . hﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
1 1 )f ( h
ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻓﺄﻜﺜﺭ .ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﺍﻗﺘﺭﺏ hﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺭ ﺍﻗﺘﺭﺒﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﺃﻱ ﻫﻭ
h h h
ﻨﻘﺭ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( OMﻫﻲ ﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ .
( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ . ) ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻏﻴﺭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ 0ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ
69
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ u :ﻭ vﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Dﻤﻥ . Rﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) (u + vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Dﻭﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ:
' . (u + v) ' = u ' + v
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ uﻭ vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ D ) Dﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﺎل ﺃﻭ ﺇﺘﺤﺎﺩ ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﻥ .( Rﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) (u.vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ
ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Dﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ . ( u.v ) ' = u '.v + u.v ' :
70
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 6
1
. f ( x) = x 3 + ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0, +ﺒﹻ+ x :
x
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺤــل:
1
ﻭ . w: x ֏ x ֏ v:x ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺩﻭﺍل v ، uﻭ . wﺤﻴﺙ، u : x ֏ x3 :
x
1 1
֏ . w': x v': x ֏ −ﻭ 2
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0, +ﻭﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ، u ' : x ֏ 3 x 2 :
2 x x
1 1
. f ' : x ֏ 3x2 − 2 + ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ . ]0, +ﻭﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﻲ :
x 2 x
ﺤــل:
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ . vﺤﻴﺙ. v : x ֏ x ، u : x ֏ x3 + x + 1 :
1
֏ .v': x ﻫﺎﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0, +ﻭﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ، u ' : x ֏ 3 x 2 + 1 :
2 x
1
. f '( x) = (3 x 2 + 1) x + ( x 3 + x + 1) ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ . ]0, +ﻭﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻫﻲ :
2 x
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل8
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒﹻ. f ( x) = −7 x3 + 4 x 2 +3 x − 2 :
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺤــل:
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ .ﺇﺫﻥ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ) Rﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ( .ﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﺤﻴﺙ :
f '( x) = (−7) × (3 x 2 ) + (4 ) × (2 x) + (3 ) × (1) + 0
f '( x) = − 21x 2 + 8 x + 3
71
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
1 u
× uﻭ ﻨﻁﺒﻕ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻤﻘﻠﻭﺏ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻭ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ . ﻴﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ
v v
ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔf : x ֏ u (ax + b) :
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ):ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( uﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Dﻤﻥ a . Rﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ E .ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ
ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺤﻴﺙ ax + bﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ . Dﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) f : x ֏ u (ax + bﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Eﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ
' fﻫﻲ . f ' : x ֏ au '( ax + b) :ﺤﻴﺙ ' uﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ uﻋﻠﻰ . D
72
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 9
3x + 5
= ). f ( x ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
2x − 4
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺤــل:
• ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ . 2 x − 4 ≠ 0
2 x − 4 = 0ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ x = 2
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ [∞ . D f = R − {2} = ]−∞ , 2[ ∪ ]2, +
u
= . fﺤﻴﺙ. v : x ֏ 2 x − 4 ، u : x ֏ 3 x + 5 : • ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ vﺃﻱ
v
ﻫﺎﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ [ ]−∞ , 2ﻭ [∞ ]2, +ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ، u ' : x ֏ 3 :
.v': x ֏ 2
ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ []−∞ , 2 ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ v( x) ≠ 0ﻋﻠﻰ D fﻭﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
)3(2 x − 4) − 2(3 x + 5 −22
= )f '( x = ﻭ [∞ . ]2, +ﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ:
)(2 x − 4 2
(2 x − 4) 2
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 10
sin x π
= . f ( x) = tan x ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 0 , ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
cos x 2
ﺤــل:
π
• ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 0 , ﻷﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . cos x ≠ 0
2
u
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ uﻭ vﺃﻱ = . fﺤﻴﺙ. v : x ֏ cos x ، u : x ֏ sin x :
v
π
ﻫﺎﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ 0 , ﻭﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ . v ' : x ֏ − sin x ، u ' : x ֏ cos x :
2
π π
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ v( x) ≠ 0ﻋﻠﻰ 0 , ﻭﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ . 0 ,
2 2
ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ :
)cos x × cos x − sin x × (− sin x 1
= )f '( x 2
= = 1 + tan 2 x
cos x cos 2 x
73
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 3
:ﺠﺩﻭل ﻤﻠﺨﺹ
x ֏0 R x ֏a
x֏a R x ֏ a x +b
x ֏ 2x R x ֏x2
x ֏ n x n −1 R x ֏ xn ( n ∈ℕ )
x֏−
1 ]0, + ∞[ ] ﻭ−∞ , 0[ x֏
1
x2 x
n
x ֏ − n +1 ]0, + ∞[ ] ﻭ−∞ , 0[ x ֏
1
( n ∈ℕ )
x xn
x֏
1 ]0, + ∞[ x֏ x
2 x
x ֏ cos x R x ֏ sin x
x ֏ − sin x R x ֏ cos x
u' 1
−
u2 u
u ' v − uv ' u
v2 v
x ֏ au '(ax + b) x ֏ u (ax + b)
74
3 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 11
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . f ( x) = 2 x − 6 :
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺤــل:
• ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ . 2 x − 6 ≥ 0
2 x − 6 ≥ 0ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ x ≥ 3
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ [∞ . D f = [3, +
• ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ v : x ֏ 2 x − 6ﺘﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . u : x ֏ x
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ . v ' : x ֏ 2
1
֏ .v': x ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ uﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0, +ﻭ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ
2 x
[ ∞ ] 3, + ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ vﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ . ] 3, +ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ
1
× f '( x) = 2 ﻭﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎ ﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) x ֏ u (ax + bﻨﺠﺩ ﺃﻥ :
2 2x − 6
1
=
2x − 6
ﺤــل:
• ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ v : x ֏ −4 x + 3ﺘﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . u : x ֏ cos x
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ vﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ . v ' : x ֏ −4
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ uﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ . v ' : x ֏ − sin x
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ . R ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ v : x ֏ −4 x + 3ﺘﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ u : x ֏ cos x
ﻭﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎ ﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) x ֏ u (ax + bﻨﺠﺩ ﺃﻥ f '( x) = (−4) × [ − sin(−4 x + 3)] :
)= 4 sin(−4 x + 3
75
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 3
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . 0; i , jﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Pﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ :
1 2
֏ f : xﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Pﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ .( a ≠ 0 ) a x
k
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ aﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Pﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل .
• ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) . (T
( )
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . 0; i , jﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Pﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ :
. f : x ֏ − 3x 2
• ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) . ( P
• ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (T 1ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Pﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ .1
• ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (T 2ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Pﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . −2
1
. − • ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (T 3ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Pﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ
3
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ 0; i , jﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Hﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ :
1
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ .( a ≠ 0 ) a ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( H ֏ . f : xﻝﺘﻜﻥ M
x
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ aﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Hﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﻫﺎﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ.
• ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﺃﻥ Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﻝﻠﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB
• ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) . (T
• ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) . ( H
• ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (T1ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Hﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Rﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . −1
• ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (T2ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Hﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . −3
1
. − • ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (T3ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Hﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ
2
76
3 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﺄﻝﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ:0
1
= ) f (x
1
) (1 + x ) (1 + x
2 3
1+ x
) (1 + x cos x sin x
2
1+ x
ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ
1 + 2x 1
ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻋﻨﺩ0
.2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
1 1
0,99 ، 1,004 ، ( 0,99 ) ، (1,002 ) ، ( 0.98 ) ، (1,003) ،
2 2 3 3
،
0,98 1,003
1 1
. ،
) ( 0.99 )(1.01
2 2
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ:
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]−1, +ﺒﹻ:
( )
1
(C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i , j ) ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ = ) f (x
x +1
(C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 0 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭﺓ ﻝﹻ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ )
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ gﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) ∆ ( .ﻋﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ،ﻤﺠﺎﻻ ﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ
1 1
.f ( x ) − g ( x ) ≤ 10−3 ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل − ; ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ:
2 2
1 1 1
)(1 ≤0 ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ − ; ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ− (1 − x ) ≤ 2x 2 :
x +1 2 2
1 1
ﻋﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) ، ، (1ﻤﺠﺎﻻ ﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل − ; ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ:
2 2
. f ( x ) − g ( x ) ≤ 10
−2
77
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 3
( )
1
ﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ f ( x) = x 2ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i , j
2
ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﻴﻥ.
y
) (T ) (Cf ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺭﺴﻡ
ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﻴﻥ ﻭﻨﻀﻊ ) M ( x0 , y0
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ M x0 , − 12 ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = − 12ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Tﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( C f
1
ﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ aﻭ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، Mﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝـ ) . y = ax − a 2 (T
2
1 1
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) (Tﻭﻤﻨﻪ − = a x0 − a 2ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ) a 2 − 2ax0 − 1 = 0ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ( a
2 2
ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯ x02 + 1ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﻥ ﻴﺸﻤﻼﻥ ، Mﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻴﻥ
ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ -1ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻲ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ .
1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = −
2
78
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 3
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ f . O; i; jﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0, 2ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
y ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ )ﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل( ) . f ( x) = 4 − x 2
2
1 (1ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺨﻤﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ :ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ ، 0ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ 2ﻭ ﻝﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ.
0 1 2 x (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [. [ 0; 2
• ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﺃﻥ ) f ( xﺘﻜﺘﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل f ( x) = 2 − x × 2 + x
[[0; 2 ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ' fﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . 0 •
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ .2 ) (3ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ xﻏﻴﺭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ، 0ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ
( C fﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ ( D) ، xﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . y = xﻨﺴﻤﻲ ' Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) (4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ
( C fﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ . xﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ Mﻭ ' . M ) ﻤﻥ
. (C f ) ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( Dﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ]' [ MMﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( Dﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
(1ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ
• ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩ 0ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ،ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻋﻨﺩ 2ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ،ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ.
[∞]0; + (2ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ uﻭ vﺤﻴﺙ u : x ֏ 4 − x 2ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭ v : x ֏ xﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ
[[0; 2 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f = uﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [ [ 0; 2ﻷﻥ 4 − x 2 > 0ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
)4 − x 2 = (2 − x)(2 + x •
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ [ 0; 2ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 2 − x > 0ﻭ 2 + x > 0
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ f ( x) = 2 − x × 2 + x
−x
= )f '( x • ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ): f '( x
4 − x2
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ 2ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ . ) (3ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ
(
M '( x '; x) ، M x; 4 − x 2 ) (4
'M ( )
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ، x ' = 4 − x 2ﺇﺫﻥ 4 − x 2 ; x ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ' f ( x ') = x : xﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 4 − x '2 = x
]' [ MM ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ' OMMﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ) ( Dﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ •
( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻜﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ . ) ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
79
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 3
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﹻ ) f (1ﺜﻡ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ 0;1
ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ hﻗﺭﻴﺒﺎ ﻤﻥ 0ﻓﺈﻥ . f ( a + h ) ≈ f ( a ) + hf ′ ( a ) :ﻴﻤﺜل ﻫﻨﺎ hﺍﻝﺨﻁﻭﺓ.
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺨﻁﻭﺓ hﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﺒﺎﻝﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﻤﻥ aﺇﻝﻰ bﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ) ( x kﻭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ) ( y kﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ
fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻲ: ﻝﻸﻋﺩﺍﺩ ) ( x k
b −a
= hﺜﻡ ﻨﻀﻊ: ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ nﺤﺩﺍ ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻭﺓ:
n
xk yk
x0 =a f (a ) = y 0
x1 = x 0 + h = a + h ) f ( x 1 ) ≃ y 1 = y 0 + hf ′ ( x 0
x 2 = x 1 + h = a + 2h ) f ( x 2 ) ≃ y 2 = y 1 + hf ′ ( x 1
...
...
x n = x n −1 + h = a + nh = b
) f (b ) = f ( x n ) ≃ y n = y n −1 + hf ′ ( x n −1
ﺒﺄﺨﺫ h = 0.01ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ .ﺍﻗﺭﺃ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) f (1ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ .C 102
80
3 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻭ ﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ
2x − 1
= ) g ( xﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ .0ﻋﻠﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ. ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ:
x 2 +1
3
ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ •
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻶﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ Ti83 plusﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﻤﺜﻴل ا)ا(
$
PRGM ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ 2nd ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
ﻭ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ .5ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻝﻕ ﻨﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺤﺠﺯ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ
. ENTER ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺼﺎﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻤﺜﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﺎﻝﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﻴﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ) . ( −2ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭﺓ
ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺔ.
ﺜﻡ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ.1 PRGM ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ 2nd ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻝﻤﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
81
3
ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
أ دة ا
رات
ﻴﻨﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 21
ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ.
أ
أم ـ
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ( x) = x 2 − 3 : 13 ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ : 1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل h ≠ 0
f ' (1) = 2 f ' (1) = −3 f ' (1) = 0 ، f ( x) = x 2 + 1ﺒﻴﻥ 3ﻭ h + 3ﻫﻲ . h + 6
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x) = ( x − 1) :
2
14 2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل −1ﻓﺈﻥ
hﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ. )f (h − 1) − f (−1
ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻫﻭ :
)f (2 + h) − f (2 h
= h2 + h − 1 3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ
h
)f (2 + h) − f (2 )f (1 + h) − f (1
= h+2 ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ = 2h 2 − 3h − 4 ، h
h h
)f (2 + h) − f (2 ﻓﺈﻥ f ' (1) = −4
= −h
h 4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ f (−2) = 0ﻭ f ' (−2) = 2ﻓﺈﻥ
f (1 + h) + 1 )f (h − 2
lim f 15ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ f (1) = −1ﻭ = 2 lim =2
h →0 h h →0 h
. f ' (1) = 3 ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ . 1 fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ( x) = x3 : 5
)f (−2 + h) − f (−2
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ . 1 . lim ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل = −8 ، h ≠ 0
h →0 h
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {1ﺒﹻ : 16 6ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﺤﻘﻕ f ' (3) = 1
1 )f (3 + h) − f (3
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ) f ' (2ﻫﻭ : = ). f ( x . lim ﻓﺈﻥ = 1
x −1 h →0 h
ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ . −1؛ 0؛ 7ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ y = 3ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [0 ; +ﺒﹻ f ( x) = x : 17 ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(0 ; 3ﻓﺈﻥ . f ' (0) = 3
f ' (0) = −1 ) f ' (0ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺭﻑ f ' (0) = 1 f 8ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x) = x 2 − x :
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨىﺎﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ f (0) = 1 :ﻭ . f ' (0) = 3 18 ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(2 ; 2ﻫﻲ . y = 3 x + 1
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )A (0;1
9ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﺤﻘﻕ f (1) = −2ﻭ f ' (1) = −1
y = 3x + 3 y = 3x؛ y = 3x + 1؛ ﻫﻲ:
ﻓﺈﻥ y = − x − 1ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
y = 2 x − 3ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ 19 ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 1
.0 2 ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) . A(1; − 1ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ) f ' (1ﻫﻭ 6 : 10ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x) = x 2 + x : 20 x
ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ، −2ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ = y
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 2
ﻓﺈﻥ . f ' (−2) = 4
f ' ( x) = 2 x − 1 f ' ( x) = 2 x + 1 f ' ( x) = 2 x
11ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
(C f ) 21ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
y
1
) ، ω (2 ; − 1ﻴﺸﻤل ) O (0 ; 0ﻓﺈﻥ . f ' (2) = −
1
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ]. [− 3 ; 2 2
2x + 1 1
0 1 x
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ' ( x) = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ֏ xﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 12ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ֏ xﻭ
x x
. f ' (−1) = 0 ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ . ℝ
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ]. f ' ( x) ≥ 0 : [−1; 2
82
3
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
27ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : a اد ا ا ! f
1
. f ( x) = − x 2 + 1
2 ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ aﻓﻲ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ، 2 23 ، 22: ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻨﻴﻥ
ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ). f ' (2 f : x ֏ x 2 (1؛ . a = 0 22
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 28 f : x ֏ − 3 x + 5 (2؛ . a = 3
. f ( x) = 3 x − xﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ 2
a = −2 f : x ֏ 3 x 2 + 4 (3؛
ﻋﻨﺩ −1ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ). f ' (−1 1 23
a = −1 ، f : x ֏ − (1
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ x − 5 x + 3ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
2
29 x
3
، ℝﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ 3ﻭ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ . ֏ a =1 ، f : x (2
x
−4
֏ f : xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ، ℝ 30ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ֏ a = −3 ، f : x
1
(3
x 2x
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ −2ﻭ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ . a = 4 ، f : x ֏ 2 x (4
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−1ﺒﹻ : 31 a = −1 ، f : x ֏ −3 x (5
1 1
= ). f ( x =a ، f : x ֏ 3 − x (6
x +1 4
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ، 2ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 24
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ . 2 f ( x) = 4 x − 6ﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ hﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−1ﺒﹻ : 32 (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ −1ﻭ . −1 + h
1 (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ، −1
. f ( x) = 3 +
x +1 ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ). f ' (−1
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ، 2ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ (3ﻫل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل 0؟
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ . 2 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ( x) = x :
3
25
33ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {2ﺒﹻ : (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ : h
= ). f ( x
x (2 + h)3 − 8
x−2 = h 2 + 6h + 12
h
(1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ، 3ﻭﻋﻴﻥ (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ، 2
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ). f ' (3 ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ). f ' (2
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ). f '(5 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 26
1 f ( x) = x 3 − 6 x 2 + 4 x − 2
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . f ' −
2
(1ﻝﻴﻜﻥ hﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ،ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
'. f ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) ( 3 (4
)f (2 + h) − f (2
(5ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ). f '(0 (2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ 2؛ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ) f '(2؟
83
3
3
ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
= ) f ( xﻭ . a = −3 (3
x +1 34ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {2ﺒﹻ :
x+2 x
= ) f ( xﻭ a = −2؛ ﺜﻡ a = 3 (4 . f ( x) = 1 −
x x−2
x+2 ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ، 3ﻭﻋﻴﻥ
= ) f ( xﻭ a = 2؛ ﺜﻡ a = −3 (5
x−3 ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ). f ' (3
ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ) f ' (a ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل 40 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ −3 ; +ﺒﹻ : 35
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
. f ( x) = 3 + x
f ( x) = x − 3 (1ﻭ . a = 4
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ hﺤﻴﺙ :
f ( x) = 2 x + 5 (2ﻭ . a = 2
)f (1 + h) − f (1 h+4 −2
f ( x) = 1 − x (3ﻭ . a = −2 . = h > −4ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
h h
f ( x) = 3 − 2 x (4ﻭ . a = −11 )f (1 + h) − f (1 1
= (2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ :
f ( x) = − x (5ﻭ . a = −4 h 4+h +2
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ، 1
a ! f ا('& %ا "#$ا
−−− −−− ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ). f ' (1
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﺤﺴﺏ 41 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 2 ; +ﺒﹻ : 36
) f (a + hﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، hﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . f ( x) = x − 2
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . a ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ، 7ﻭﻋﻴﻥ
f : x ֏ x + 2 (1؛ a = 6ﺜﻡ . a = 0 2
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ). f ' (7
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−∞ ; 1ﺒﹻ :
1
f : x ֏ x 2 + x − 1 (2؛ a = 2ﺜﻡ . a = − 37
2
. f ( x) = 1 − x
f : x ֏ −3 x 2 + 6 x − 5 (3؛ a = 1ﺜﻡ . a = 0
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ، −3ﻭﻋﻴﻥ
f : x ֏ x 3 + 2 x − 5 (4؛ a = 0ﺜﻡ . a = 2
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ). f ' (−3
f : x ֏ x 3 − 3 x 2 + 2 (5؛ a = −1ﺜﻡ . a = 2
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ) f ' (a 38
f : x ֏ x 2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ 42
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ . 3
f ( x) = 2 x − 7 (1ﻭ a = 3؛ ﺜﻡ a = −2
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ) f (3 + hﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
f ( x) = −3 x − 1 (2ﻭ a = 1؛ ﺜﻡ a = − 2
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ | . | h
f ( x) = x 2 − 3 (3ﻭ . a = −1
f : x ֏ x + 2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ 2
43 f ( x) = x 3 + 1 (4ﻭ . a = 0
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ . −1 1
f ( x) = x 2 + x (5ﻭ . a = 2
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ) f (h − 1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل 2
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ | . | h 39ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ) f ' (a
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ (2 + h) 2ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
44
ﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ hﺇﻝﻰ . 0 2
= ) f ( xﻭ . a = −2 (1
x
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ : 1 −1
= ) f ( xﻭ = . a (2
(2, 04) 2؛ (1, 98) 2؛ . (2, 001) 2 2 2x
84
3
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
(2ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ ، y = − x 2 + 4 :ﻭ x0 = 2 1
ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 45
(3ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ ، y = x 2 − 3 x + 2 :ﻭ x0 = 1 3+ h
x −1 ﻴﺅﻭل hﺇﻝﻰ . 0
= ، yﻭ x0 = −2 (4ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ :
3x (2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
y = x 2 − 2 x 51ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (Cﺃﻜﺘﺏ 1 1 1
. ؛ ؛ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ :
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . −1 3,1 2, 99 3, 02
−4 (1ﺠﺩ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ (1 + h)3ﻝﻤﺎ h 46
= yﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (Cﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 52
x ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺏ ﻤﻥ . 0
ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 2 (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ :
1
y = 2 − x 2 53ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C (1, 04)3؛ . (0, 96)3
2
ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ (1ﺠﺩ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ 5 + h 47
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ،1
ﻴﻨﺘﻬﻲ hﺇﻝﻰ . 0
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B ; 0
5
2 (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ :
(C ) 54ﻭ ) ( Dﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ : . ؛ 4,83 ؛ 4, 97 5, 01
y = x 2ﻭ . y = −4 x − 4 fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ aﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝ 48
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (Cﻭ ). ( D ﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ f ' (2) = 4 ، f (2) = 3 :ﻭ f ' (2,1) = 2
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( Dﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﹻ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ (1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ، 2ﻋﻴﻥ
ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ . ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ). f (2,1
) (Cﻭ ) ( Dﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ : 55 (2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺘﺂﻝﻔﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ، 2,1
y = 3x3 + 2 x 2 − 7 x − 6ﻭ . y = 2 x + 2 ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ). f (2, 2
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ c ، b ، aﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل د اس
ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 49ﺇﻝﻰ 57ﻴﻨﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ
)3 x 3 + 2 x 2 − 9 x − 8 = ( x + 1)(ax 2 + bx + c ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O ; i ; j
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (Cﻭ ) ( Dﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ، ℝﻭ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ 49
ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ . ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ) . (C
(3ﺍﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( Dﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ . ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻪ ﻫﻭ a
(C ) 56ﻤﻨﺤﻥ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(2 ; 4ﻭ )∆( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ A(−1 ; 3) (2ﻭ a = −2 A(2 ; 0) (1ﻭ a = 1
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = 3 x + 5 3
A(−2 ; 3) (3ﻭ = A(2 ; 2) (4 aﻭ a = 2
2
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، A
50ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ
ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( .
ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ، x0ﺜﻡ
(C ) 57ﻤﻨﺤﻥ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ). A(−1 ; − 3
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻪ ،ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، A
2 x2
ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﻪ . i = ، yﻭ x0 = 3 (1ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ :
5
85
3
ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
(2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Pﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ
). E (0 ; 4
اوال اـــ(ـ
(3ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ) (Pﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻪ ﻋﻨﺩﻫﺎ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ( x) = 3 x − 1 : 58
1 (1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، aﺒﺭﺭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . y = x
2 fﻋﻨﺩ aﻭﻋﻴﻥ ) . f ' (a
a (4ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (P (2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ mﻭ pﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ
ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . a ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . x ֏ mx + p :
(5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Pﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ( x) = x3 : 59
ﻴﺸﻤل ﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O (1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ، a
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ 62 ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ،ﺜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ . f ' ( x) = 3 x 2 :
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) f '( xﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: (2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ
. f : x ֏ 2 x + 5 x − x + 1 (1
3 2
ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 1
π π
. f : x ֏ x 2 (cos ) − x + sin (2 60ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ :
3 6
1
. f : x ֏ x − 1 (3 g ( x) = − x 2 + 2 x
2
2 x3 + 5 x 2 (1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝ
֏. f :x (4
x2 + 1
ﻭﻋﻴﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ.
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ x xﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ 63
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙ :
ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]0; +ﻭ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ). f '( x
f ' (t ) = 2 − tﻭ . f (0) = 1ﻨﻀﻊ ϕ = f − g
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 64 ﺃ ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، aﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ hﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
. f : x ֏ 3 x 2 − 4 x + 1 (1
) ϕ ( a + h) − ϕ ( a
x2 1 =
֏. f :x − x + 5 (2 h
2 2 ) f ( a + h) − f ( a
3 x 2 + 12 x + 1 + a − 2 + 0,5 h
֏. f :x (3 h
6 ﺏ ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ϕﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
. f : x ֏ 3 x 4 − 2 x 3 − 6 x 2 + 3 x − 5 (4
ﺝ ( ﺒﺭﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ϕﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ .
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 65
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : 61
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
f ( x) = x − 5 x + 4ﻭ ) (Pﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ
2
−x + 1 −2
֏. f :x ֏ (2 . f : x (1 ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . (O ; i ; j
x+2 x
x +1
. f : x ֏ 2x + 1 − (3 (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻭﺃﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ
x−3
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ . f ' ( x) = 2 x − 5 :
2 x 2 + 3x − 1
֏. f :x (4
x2 − 3
86
3
ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺤﻴﺙ f ( x) = x3 : 66
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . ω ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) f '( xﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ) g '( xﺤﻴﺙ gﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
f : x ֏ x + 3 x + 4 (1ﻭ . x0 = 0
2
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ g ( x) = f ( x − 3) :؛
f : x ֏ 2 x − x + 3 x (2ﻭ . x0 = −1
3 2
) g ( x) = f (2 x + 5؛ )g ( x) = f (−3 x + 2
x+3 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﺤﻴﺙ f ( x) = x :ﻭ g
֏ f : xﻭ . x0 = 1 (3 67
1 − 2x ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ .
f : x ֏ 2 − x (4ﻭ . x0 = −2
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺘﻲ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . g
2
y = − x 2 + 3 72ﻭ = yﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (C1 (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺘﻲ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ . g
x
ﻭ ) (C2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ. (3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) f '( xﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ). g '( x
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( ﻴﻤﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ؛ )g ( x) = f (2 x + 5 ؛ )g ( x) = f ( x − 1
(2ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( . ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 68
(3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ) (C1ﻭ ) (C2ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
. f : x ֏ (3 x − 2) 2 (1
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( .
. f : x ֏ 3 x − 2 (2
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ، 73
֏. f :x x − 3 (3
) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ :
. f : x ֏ 2 − 3 x (4
3x 2 + α x + β
= ) f ( xﺤﻴﺙ β ، αﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ . f : x ֏ (2 x − 3) x (5
x2 + 1
. . f : x ֏ ( x 2 + 2 x − 3) − x + 3 (6
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ). f '( x ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 69
(2ﻋﻴﻥ αﻭ βﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
، y = 4 x + 3ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ . f : x ֏ cos (3 x − 2) (1
. f : x ֏ sin (3 x − 2) (2
ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 0
f : x ֏ sin x × cos x (3
fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ − ; ﺒﹻ :
1 5
74 . f : x ֏ sin ( x − 2π ) × cos ( x + π ) (4
2 2
1 . f : x ֏ cos 2 3 x (5
f ( x) = α x + β +ﺤﻴﺙ β ، αﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ
3− x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0 ; +ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : 70
ﻋﻴﻥ αﻭ βﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻁﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﻥ : 1
. f ( x) = x +
f (2) = 1ﻭ . f '(2) = 0 x +1
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ، 75 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ،
) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ؛ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ 71
ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ، (C fﺫﺍﺕ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ . ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ω ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (C fﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x0
87
3
y ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
B ـ.ـ-ـ,
5 cm ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ ، mﺤﻴﺙ ABC 76
m ∈ ℝ ∗+؛ ﻴﺤﺼﺭ ﺩﺍﺨل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ،ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼ
O A x DEFGﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ .ﻨﻀﻊ BD = x
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻑ Aﻴﺘﺤﺭﻙ ﺒﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻗﺩﺭﻫﺎ . 2 cm / s A
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻠﺤﻅﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ Bﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻑ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺩ 3cmﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺩﺃ Oﻝﻠﻤﻌﻠﻡ ؟ E F
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . R 79
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﺎﺫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻀﻴﺔ ﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ xﻤﻥ ﺴﻁﺢ B D G C
R2 (1ﻋﻴﻥ xﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ .
× ، g = g 0ﺤﻴﺙ g 0ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﺒﹻ :
( R + x)2
(2ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل DEFG
ﺍﻝﺠﺎﺫﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻀﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﺒﺤﺭ .
ﻫﻲ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABC؛ ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ
) .( g 0 ≃ 9,8 ms −2
ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . m = 4, 002
1
× . g = g0 (1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ : −4
2x x
2
= yﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ ) ( Hﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ 77
1+ + x
R R
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ M ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Hﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ m
(2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻡ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺭ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ hﻨﻀﻊ :
ﺤﻴﺙ mﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .
،ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ g ≃ g 0 1 − :
2x 1
≃ 1− h
R 1+ h Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺤﻴﺙ
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ gﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ x = 4800 mﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Mﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ]. [ AB
R ≃ 6370000 m (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . m
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ 80 (2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻫﻭ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . ( H
) (C fﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ، y = xﻭ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻨﻪ
3
88
3
ﺍﻻﺸﺘـﻘـﺎﻗـﻴـﺔ
t : x ֏1 82
j
ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﻭل ) lim g ( xﻭ ). lim h( x
x →0 x →0 M T
S
(5ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ sin xﺜﻡ
x
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ) f ' ( 0ﻭ ). lim h( x i I
x →0
O C
ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ. 83
ﻨﻘﺫﻑ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺭﺽ ﻜﺭﺓ ،ﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻤﺘﺩ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ∆(
89
4
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ.
ﻭ ﺩﻭﺍل ﺼﻤﺎﺀ.
91
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 4
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
h ، g ، fﻭ kﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
f : x ֏ x + 5ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
g : x ֏ −2 x + 3ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
h : x ֏ x 2ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
1
֏ k : xﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ . ]0, +
x
(1ﺫﻜﺭ ﺒﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ h ، g ، fﻭ . k
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ' h ' ، g ' ، fﻭ ' kﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﻭﺍل h ، g ، fﻭ kﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ' h ' ، g ' ، fﻭ ' kﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ .
(4ﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ،ﻭ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ
ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺘﻬﺎ ﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل.
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
( )
) O, i, jﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل (.
(1ﺤل ﻓﻲ Rﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x
g ( x) = 0
1
(2ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
(3ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . g
0 1 x
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ . R
(5ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ' fﻋﻠﻰ . R
(6ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺘﺩﻝﻲ ﺒﻪ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﺨﺹ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
92
4 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
( )
y ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O, i, j
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ − 1, 2
) (Cf
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ
ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( C fﻓﻲ Mﻤﻭﺠﺒﺎ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ
ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( C fﻓﻲ Mﺴﺎﻝﺒﺎ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻥ ] [ − 1, 2ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' f
1
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ.
0 1 x (4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻥ ] [ − 1, 2ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' f
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ.
(5ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ
ﻝﺤﺎﻤل ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ؟ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ؟
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﻫﻭ ﺤﺼﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ .
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −1 , 5ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ f ( x ) = 2 x − 4 x + 6 :
2
93
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 4
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺸﺘﻘﺎﻗﻴﺔ.
ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ:
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ):ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل D fﻭ ' fﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ .
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ' fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ' fﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻡ ﻤﻨﻌﺯﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ( D fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل D fﻓﺈﻥ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . D f
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ' fﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ' fﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻡ ﻤﻨﻌﺯﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ( D fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل D fﻓﺈﻥ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . D f
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ' fﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل D fﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . D f
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل D fﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . D f
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . f : x ֏ − x 3 + 2 :
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﺤﻴﺙ . f ' : x ֏ −3x 2 :
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ * ℝﻭ ﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺯﻭﻝﺔ 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . R
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ):ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Iﻭ ' fﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ .
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻨﻌﺩﻤﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻋﻨﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ cﻤﻥ Iﻤﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻔﺘﻭﺡ ' Iﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ Iﻴﺸﻤل c
ﺘﻘﺒل ﻓﻴﻪ fﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ) . f (cﺘﺴﻤﻰ ) f (cﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ .
94
4 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
1 3 1 2
= ). f ( x ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﺒﹻx − x − 2 x + 1 :
3 2
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﻥ Rﺘﻘﺒل ﻓﻴﻬﺎ fﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻌﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻜﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﻫﺎﻭ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻬﺎ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻠﺨﺹ
ﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺠﺩﻭل ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ .
ﺤــل:
(1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺓ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ . Rﻝﺘﻜﻥ ' fﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . R
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ f '( x ) = x 2 − x − 2 Rﻭﻫﻲ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻤﻴﺯﻩ . ∆ = 9
-1ﻭ 2ﻫﻤﺎ ﺠﺫﺭﺍﻥ ﻝﻪ ،ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻪ ﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻵﺘﻲ:
• f '( x ) > 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ] − ∞ , − 1ﻭ f '( −1) = 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. ]−∞ , − 1
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ . ] − 1, 2 • f '( x) < 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ] − 1, 2
ﻭ f '(2) = 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ∞ . [ 2, + • f '( x) > 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ∞ ] 2, +
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻲ.
7 13
= ) f ( −1ﻭ
f (2) = −
3 6
(2ﻤﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ' fﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ -1ﻤﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﺜﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −3, 0ﺇﺫﻥ
13
= ) f ( −1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ -1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −3, 0
6
7
f (2) = −ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [1, 4ﻤﺜﻼ . ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ
3
95
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 4
ﺤﺼﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ:
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ] [ a , bﻭ ' fﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ .
] [ a ,b • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ a , bﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
) f ( a ) ≤ f ( x ) ≤ f (b
] [ a,b • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ a , bﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
) f (b ) ≤ f ( x ) ≤ f ( a
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −3,1ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . f : x ֏ x 2 + 2 x − 3 :
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ Rﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻫﻲ . f ' : x ֏ 2 x + 2 :
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﺴﺎﻝﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −3, − 1ﻭ f ' ( −1) = 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [. [ −3, − 1
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ]−1,1ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ
ال ]. ]−1,1
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ:
x -3 -1 1
0 0
)f ( x
-4
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] f (−1) ≤ f ( x) ≤ f (−3) ، [ −3, − 1ﺃﻱ −4 ≤ f ( x) ≤ 0
f ( −1) ≤ f ( x ) ≤ f (1) ،ﺃﻱ −4 ≤ f ( x) ≤ 0 ][ −1,1 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
ﻋﻨﺼﺭﺤﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ – ﻋﻨﺼﺭ ﺤﺎﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل :
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل . D f
• ﻴﺴﻤﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﺤﺎﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ) ( Majorantﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل D fﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . f ( x) ≤ k ، D f
• ﻴﺴﻤﻲ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﺤﺎﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل ) ( Minorantﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل D fﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . f ( x ) ≥ k ، D f
96
4 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 2
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −5, 0ﺒﹻ. f ( x) = 2 x3 − 9 x 2 + 12 x − 100 :
• ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −5, 0
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﺤﺎﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﺤﺎﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −5, 0
ﺤــل • :ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻓﻬﻲ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ . Rﻝﺘﻜﻥ ' fﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . R
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ f '( x) = 6 x 2 − 18 x + 12 Rﻭﻫﻲ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻤﻴﺯﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭ
1 . ∆ ' = 9ﻭ 2ﻫﻤﺎ ﺠﺫﺭﺍ ﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ،ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻴﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ] . [ −5, 0ﻭﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
] [ −5, 0ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ −5, 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ:
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺍ x0ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ a , bﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
] [ a , bﻭ ﺃﻥ ) f (aﻭ ) f (bﻤﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ .
) f (aﻭ ) f (bﻤﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ x0ﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﺘﻘﺭ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﻴﺘﻪ.
ﺤــل • :ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0,1ﻭ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' fﺤﻴﺙ . f '( x) = 3 x 2 − 6 x + 4
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0,1ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ] f (0) = −1 . [ 0,1ﻭ f (1) = 1ﺇﺫﻥ ) f (0ﻭ )f (1
ﻤﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻭﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩل f ( x) = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺍ x0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ 0,1
97
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 4
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ:
ﻤﺜﺎل ﺃﻭل ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ :
y
4 ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺭﺍﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺘﺤﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل
( C fﻭ ) ( C gﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ) ﻋﻠﻰ
3
fﻭ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
) (C
f
2
f ( x) = − x 3 + 2 x 2ﻭ g ( x) = − x 2 + 2 x
1 (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (C
f
ﻭ ) . (C g
-2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 x
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻀﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ) (C
f
ﻭ ) . (C
-1
g
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O, i, j
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . 1
(2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = x − 4
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . f ( x ) − ( x − 4) = ( x − 1) 3
(3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( C fﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ:
ﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : fﻭg
( C fﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ) ( C gﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ )
x ֏ f ( x) = x − x + 4 x − 3ﻭ g ֏ g ( x) = xﻝﻴﻜﻥ
3 3 2
( )
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , j
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ gﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺘﺎﻥ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ] ). [ f ( x) − g ( x
ﻭ ) . (Cg ) (C
f (3ﺇﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ
98
4 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
A
K B
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﺍﻹﺴﺘﻤﺜﺎل:
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺃﻭﻝﻰ:
M
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . AB = 2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Γﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Dﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 2
L ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺱ
، ACﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ A
ﻭﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻥ . Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) (Tﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Γﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻓﻲ Kﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ BCﻓﻲ . L
D C
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Mﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل KLﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ .ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻫﺫﺍ ﻨﻀﻊ :
KB = xﻭ . LB = y
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . KL 2 = x 2 + y 2
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . KL = 4 − x − yﻭﺃﻥ . KL 2 = x 2 + y 2 − 8 x − 8 y + 2 xy + 16
− x2 + 4x − 8 4x − 8
= KL = . yﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
x−4 x−4
− x2 + 4x − 8
= )f ( x (5ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0 , 2ﺤﻴﺙ :
x−4
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل KLﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . x = 4 − 2 2
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ . M
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ:
ﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻪ 30cmﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ 10 cm
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺭﺴﻡ ﺒﺩﺍﺨﻠﻪ ﺃﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻴﺔ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﺤﺠﻤﻬﺎ ) V (r
ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ .ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل.
30cm
r
10cm
99
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 4
3 9
3 x +ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻹﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ. ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ≥ :
2x 2
3
. f ( x) = 3 x + ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ
2x
(1ﺃﻭﺠﺩ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ . D fﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' . f
3 x3 − 3
= ) . f '( x (3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
2 x2
(4ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
9
≥ ). f ( x (5ﺇﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ D f
2
y
. D f = ] 0, + ∞ [ (1
(2ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0, +ﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ
ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ . ] 0 , +
3 3
= ). f '( x −
2 x 2x2
3
ﻨﺎﻁﻕ ﻭ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ : (3ﻨﺠﻌل ﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
2 x
1 3 x 3
= ). f '( x − 2
0 1
2x 2x
x
3x x − 3
= )f '( x ﻨﻭﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻤﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺤﺩ ﻫﻭ 2 x 2ﻭ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ
2x2
3 x3 − 3
= ) . f '( x 2
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ x > 0ﻓﺈﻥ x = x 2ﻭﻤﻨﻪ
2x
(4ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ x3ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0 , +ﻷﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ x3ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0 , +
ﺘﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ xﺍﻝﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ . ] 0 , +ﻭﻤﻨﻪ u : x ֏ x 3 − 1ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] 0 , +ﻭ u (1) = 0
ﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ 2 x 2 > 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ∞ ] 0 , +ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ f '( x) < 0 :ﻋﻠﻰ [ ] 0 ,1ﻭ f '( x) ≥ 0ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ . [ 1, +
)f ( x
9
2
3 9
.3 x + (5ﻤﻥ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ≥
2x 2
100
4 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
v2
5 +ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﻗﻭﺩ . ﺸﺎﺤﻨﺔ ﺘﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ 200kmﺒﺴﺭﻋﺔ vﻤﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﺒـ ، km / hﺍﻝﺸﺎﺤﻨﺔ ﺘﺴﺘﻬﻠﻙ l / h :
320
ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﻗﻭﺩ ﻫﻭ 16 DAﻝﻠﹼﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻭ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻀﺎ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺌﻕ ﺃﺠﺭﺘﺎ ﺘﻘﺩﺭ ﺒـ 100 DAﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ .
(1ﻨﺴﻤﻲ tﺯﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺤﻠﺔ .ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ tﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . v
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻔﺔ ) P (vﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . v
36000
. f ( x ) = 10 x + (3ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] ] 0 ,120ﺤﻴﺙ
x
(4ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺤﻨﺔ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺃﻗل ﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ؟
200
=. t
(1
v
36000 v 2 200 200
. P (v) = 10v + . P (v) = 5 +ﺃﻱ × × × 16 + 100 (2
v 320 v v
36000
. f ( x ) = 10 x + (3
x
] . D f = ] 0,120
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻺﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ D fﻷﻨﻬﺎ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﻌﻴﺘﻴﻥ :ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺂﻝﻔﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻘﻠﻭﺏ .
10 x 2 − 36000
= ). f '( x
x2
ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) f '( xﻫﻲ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺒﺴﻁ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ 10 x 2 − 36000
(4ﻤﻥ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻗل ﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺴﺭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺤﻨﺔ . 60 km / h
101
4
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺩﻭﺍل ﻝﻬﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ g ، fﻭ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
h ( x ) = x 2 + 2x + 3 ، g ( x ) = x 2 + 2x − 3 ، f ( x ) = x 2 + 2 x
ﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ( D ) : y = −2x − 7ﻭ . ( D ′ ) : y = −2x − 1
.1ﺒﺎﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻨﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺠﺯ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺜل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ
ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل h ، g ، fﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) . ( D ′
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻤﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) ( D ′ﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺱ.
.3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺠﺒﺭﻴﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ.
.4ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺭﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ) . ( −2
102
4
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ
أ دة ا رات أ
أم ـ
ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ. ﺒﹻ f ( x ) = 3 x − 4 : 1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 15 ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
] [ a ; bﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = 3 x 2 + 5 : 2
]: [a ; b ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]. ]−∞ ; − 1
. f ( x) ∈ [ a ; b ] (1 ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = 3 x 3 + 12 : 3
. f ( x ) ∈ [ f (a ) ; f (b) ] (2 ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
. f ( x ) ∈ [ f (b) ; f (a) ] (3 ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = 3 x 3 + 12 : 4
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ℝﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل 16 ﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ، x0ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 5
ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل . ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ : x0 f ( x ) = x − 3 x + 5ﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
3
ﻤﺎﺌﻼ . ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ . ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﻴﻡ ، 6
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 12 x 3 + 33 x − 55 = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 17 ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ .
]: [ 0 ; 2 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ، fﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ 7
ﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﻠﻭل . ﺤﻠﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ . ﺤﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ . ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ .
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ −x 3 − 233 x + 5 = 0 18 fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ f ( x ) = x 2 − x : 8
ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][0 ;3 (1 ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ
1
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][−5 ; 0 (2 ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل .
2
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][0 ;1 (3
9ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 2 ; 3
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ 3 x5 + 7 x 3 − 1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ 19 ﻓﺈﻥ . f (3) − f (2) > 0
ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ . ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ . ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ 10
f : x ֏ −x − 7 x − 3 x + 4ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ
5 3
20 ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [−1 ; 2ﻓﺈﻥ . f (2) − f (−1) < 0
ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﺤﻘﻕ f (a ) − f (b) = 0ﻓﺈﻥ 11
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][−7 ; 4
fﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ a ; b
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x) = mﺘﻘﺒل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]: [0 ; 1
12ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ a ; b
(2ﺤﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ . ( 1ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭل.
ﺤﻴﺙ ) f (a ) = f (bﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل
(3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﺤﻠﻴﻥ .
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل .
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 21 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ f '( x) = x 2 − 2 x + 1 ، x 13
] . [−α ; α
ﺇﺫﻥ f (1) :ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ
(1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . [−α ; α
) f (αﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 14
(2ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻻ ﻴﻘﺒل ﺃﻱ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ
] ، [1 ; 3ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ
ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل .
ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ αﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل .
(3ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] . [−α ; α
103
4
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
) (C3 ) ، (C2 ) ، (C1ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼﺕ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﺩﻭﺍل ، g ، f 27
ا "#$وا دا
hﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭﺩﻭﺍﻝﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ. fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f 22
y
y -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 x
-1
)( p
-2
1 -3
) (C1
0 1 x ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ) f '( xﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . x
1
1
y
) (C 3 0 1 x
y
1
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
0 1
1y
1 ) (Q ) ' (C fﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﻤﺘﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ 25
a b
0 1 x
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
0 1 x
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺘﺒﻠﻐﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﻓﻲ 28 ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ ) f (aﻭ ). f (b
ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
) ' (C fﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﻤﺘﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
y
26
f : x ֏ x 3 − 3 x + 1 (1؛ ]. D = [−3 ; 1
f : x ֏ − x 3 + 6 x − 2 (2؛ ]. D = [−2 ; 3 2 ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ
104
4
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﻓﻲ ﻜل 29
ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ) (Cﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(2 ; 1ﻭﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ
ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) ، (−1 ; − 3ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﺤﺎﻤل
f : x ֏ x 2 − 3 x + 2 (1؛ ]. D = [ −3 ; 2
ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل.
f : x ֏ −2 x 2 − 4 x + 6 (2؛ ]. D = [ −4 ; 2
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ a > 0ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
f : x ֏ x 3 − 3 x 2 + 1 (3؛ ]. D = [ −5 ; 7
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ ax + bx + c
2
36
f : x ֏ x 4 − 2 x 2 + 3؛ ]. D = [ −2 ; 2 (4
ﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﻭ a ≠ 0
4x + 3
ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ) (Cﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(1 ; − 1ﻭﻴﻘﺒل ֏ f : x؛ ]. D = [ −1 ; 2 (5
x+2
ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) ، (−1 ; 0ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ x −1
f : x ֏ 2؛ ]. D = [ −4 ; 6 (6
13 13 x +3
. y = − x −ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ . c ، b ، a
f : x ֏ 3 x + 1؛ . D = − ; 16
1
2 2 (7
37ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺒﺎﺨﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 3
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ. f : x ֏ 2 − x؛ ] . D = [ −7 ; 2 (8
f : x ֏ x 2 − 2 x + 2 (1؛ ]. D = [−3 ; 2 ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﺒﹻ : 30
f : x ֏ 2 x 2 − 3x − 1 (2؛ ]. D = [0 ;1 (5, 012013014015016) + 3 2
=A
3, 012013014015016
f : x ֏ −3 x 2 + 3x − 2 (3؛ ]. D = [0 ; 2
(5, 012013014015017) 2 + 3
f : x ֏ − x − 6 x + 3 (4؛ ]. D = [−4 ; 0
2
=B
3, 012013014015017
f : x ֏ −2 x 2 − 4 (5؛ ]. D = [−1 ;1
ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﺒﹻ : 31
f : x ֏ x 2 − 3 (6؛ ]. D = [−2 ;1 2, 01401414
=A
ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺒﺎﺨﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 38 (1, 01401414)2 + 2, 01401414
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ. 2, 01401416
=B
f : x ֏| x 2 − 2 x | (1؛ ]. D = [0 ;5 (1, 01401416)2 + 2, 01401416
f : x ֏| x 2 + 5 | (4؛ ]. D = [−3 ; 2 ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ aﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
f : x ֏ ( x 2 + 3)( x + 1) (3؛ ]. D = [−2 ; 2 ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ
105
4
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ
(C g ) (2ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﺩﺭﺱ 40
ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻭﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ، (O ; i ; jﺤﻴﺙ gﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ :
. g : x ֏ sin x ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x) = 0ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . I
f : x ֏ 2 x 3 − 3 x 2 − 1 (1؛ . I = ; 2
3
) ∆ ( ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C gﻋﻨﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻪ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ . 0
2
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ f : x ֏ − x 3 + 3 x 2 − 3x − 2 (2؛ ]. I = [ −1 ;0
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆ ( .
f : x ֏ 2 x 3 − x 2 − 2 x + 1 (3؛ . I = − ; − 1
3 1
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : 45 2 2
3
4x − 1 2
֏ f : x؛ I = 0 ;
1 x
+ x 2 + 4 x − 1 (4
֏. f :x
x2 + 1 2 6
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ f ( x ) − 4ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﺼﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ )f ( x 41ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻭﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . x ﻋﺩﺩ ﻭﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x) = 1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ، I
ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺠﺩﻭﻝﻲ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ g : x ֏ x 2 : 46 ﺤﻴﺙ f : x ֏ x 3 − 5x 2 + 3x + 2 :ﻭ ]. I = [ −1 ; 2
ﻭ h : x ֏ − x 2 + 2 xﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ 42
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ f ( x ) = | x | + | x − x | :
2
ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ .ﺃﻋﻁ ﺤﺼﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ). f ( x
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Eﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ : x 47 f : x ֏ x 2 − 3 (1؛ ] . D = [ 0 ; 2
x 3 + 2 x 2 − 4 − λ = 0ﺤﻴﺙ λﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . f : x ֏ 2 x 3 − 6 x + 2 (2؛ ]. D = [ 2 ;8
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ λﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]، [ −4 ; − 1 2
֏ f : x؛ ]. D = [ 0 ; 2 (3
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺍ ﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ][ 0 ; 1 ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( E x−3
−4
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ : ֏ f : x؛ ]. D = [ −1 ;1 (4
48 ( x − 2) 2
f ( x ) = x − 3x + 3x − 1
3 2
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Dﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ 43
) ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ .
( )
ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; j ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﺼﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ). f ( x
( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ؟ ) (1ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ f : x ֏ x 2 + 4 x + 5 (1؛ ]. D = [ −4 ;0
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . f ' ( x ) = 0 (2 f : x ֏ −3 x 2 + 6 x + 5 (2؛ ]. D = [ 0 ; 2
ﻓﺴﺭ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ . f : x ֏ x 3 − x 2 − 2 x − 1 (3؛ . D = − ;
3 5
2 2
( C fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﻤل ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ) (3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ
f : x ֏ 5 −؛ . D = 1 ;
3 3
(4
ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . 3 2 2x − 1
(4ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = cx + d f : x ֏ 4 − 5 x (5؛ ]. D = [ −9 ;0
( C fﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝـ ) ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﻤﻥ
ـ'ـ&ـ%
) ) ( Dﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ . ( c ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ : (1 44ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
f : x ֏ x − sin x
106
4 1
= (T1 ) : y x +1
4 fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ℝﺒـ :
(T2 ) : y = 8 x − 16 6
49
1 1 f ( x ) = ax + b −
(T3 ) : y = −x+ x
16 2 aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ؛ ) ( C fﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ
ﻭﻝﻜﻨﻪ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺘﺫﻜﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .ﺴﺎﻋﺩ ﻋﻤﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻜل ﻤﻤﺎﺱ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ .
ﺇﻝﻰ ﺩﺍﻝﺘﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ .
ﻋﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺤﻴﺙ ) ( C fﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 2 ; 0
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . 52
ﻭﻴﻘﺒل ﻋﻨﺩ Aﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = x − 2
) ( Pﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = x 2ﻭ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙ: 50
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ) . (1; − 2
f ( x ) = x − 3x + 2
2
107
5
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ x 0ﺃﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﺃﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞. −
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ x 0ﺃﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﺃﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞. −
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻨﺎﻁﻘﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ aﺤﻴﺙ aﺤﺩ ﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ.
ﺍﻝﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ . x 0
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺸﺭﻁ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﺤﺩ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ.
ﺘﺒﺭﻴﺭ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻌﻠﻭﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ.ﺍﻝﺒﺤﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﺎﺌل.
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻴﺔ) ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ،ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ،ﺍﻝﻤﻘﻠﻭﺏ ﻭ ﺤﺎﺼل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﺔ( ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﺈﺯﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ.
y
1
109
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 5
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
1
= )f ( x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 3ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
)( x − 3
2
.1ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
.2ﺃﻜﻤل ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ،ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ:
x 2.9 2.99 2.999 2.9999 3.0001 3.001 3.01 3.1
)f ( x
.3ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
.4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ f ( x ) ≥ 108ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ xﻋﻨﺼﺭﺍ ﻤﻥ 3 − 10 ;3 ∪ 3;3 + 10
−4 −4
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
1
= )g ( x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 1ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
x −1
.1ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) g ′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . g
.2ﺃﻜﻤل ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ،ﺠﺩﻭﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﻴﻥ:
x 0.9 0.99 0.999 0.9999 x 1.0001 1.001 1.01 1.1
)g ( x )g ( x
.3ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
.4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ∈ 1;1 + 10−10 ﻓﺈﻥ g ( x) ≥ 1010ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ∈ 1 − 10−10 ;1ﻓﺈﻥ g ( x ) ≤ −1010
.5ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ : A
1 1
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ∈ 1;1 + ﻓﺈﻥ g ( x) ≥ Aﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ∈ 1 − ;1ﻓﺈﻥ g ( x) ≤ − A
A A
k ) k ( x) = x 2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ( ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ kﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
.1ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . k
.2ﺃﻜﻤل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ:
x 10 102 103 104
)k ( x .3ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
.4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Bﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ≤ − Bﻴﻜﻭﻥ k ( x ) ≥ A ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ≥ Bﻴﻜﻭﻥ k ( x ) ≥ A
110
5 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 0ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
2x +1
= ) h( x
x
b
aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ. ﺤﻴﺙ h( x ) = a + .1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
x
.2ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) h′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . h
.3ﺃﻜﻤل ﺠﺩﻭﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﻴﻥ:
x −10 −103 −105 −107 x 10 103 105 107
) h( x ) h( x
.4ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
.5ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ≥ 106ﻓﺈﻥ h( x) ∈ 2 ; 2 + 10−6 ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ≤ −106ﻓﺈﻥ h( x) ∈ 2; 2 − 106
.6ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ eﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Bﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ≥ Bﻓﺈﻥ ] h( x) ∈ ] 2; 2 + e
.7ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ eﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Bﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x ≤ − Bﻓﺈﻥ [ h( x) ∈ [ 2 − e ; 2
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
x2 − x − 2
= )f ( x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 2ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
x−2
.6ﺃﻜﻤل ،ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ،ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ:
.7ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
ﺒﺴﻁ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ )f ( x x2 − x − 2 .8ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﺤﻠﻴل ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
.9ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ eﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < e ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x − 2 < α
111
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ
y
.1ﺃﻤــﺜــﻠﺔ
6
5
4
ﻤﺜﺎل :1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 3ﺒﹻ :
1
3 = ) ) f ( xﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻷﻭل (
)( x − 3
2
2
1
ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺃﻥ ) f ( xﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺸﺭﻴﻁﺔ ﺃﻥ
ﻴﺄﺨﺫ xﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 3ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 x
-1 ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻋﻨﺩ ) 3ﺃﻭ ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ (3
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل1 ∞lim f ( x) = + ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ:
x →3
112
5 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ. ) 1
f ( x ) = −1 +ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ −2; −1[ ∪ ]−1;0ﺒﹻ:
)( x + 1
2
(C f؟ ) .1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ) . ( −1ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
. (C f ) .2ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
1
limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞ . lim f ( x) = +ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺤــل (1 :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ∞= +
x →−1 x →−1 ( x + 1)2
. (C f ) ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = −1ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
2
f ′( x) = − (2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ] [ −2; −1[ ∪ ]−1;0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
)( x + 1
3
y
x −2 −1 0
7
∞+∞ +
5
4
)f ( x
3
0 0
2
1
. (C f ) .2ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﺤــل:
1 1
، lim limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞f ( x ) = − = +∞ ، lim .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ∞= −
x
x<0
→0 x
x>0
→0 x x
x<0
→0 x
. (C f ) .ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = 0ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ lim ∞f ( x) = +
x
x>0
→0
1
f ′( x) = − .2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ ] [ −1;0[ ∪ ]0;1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
y x2
4
x −1 0 1
)f ′( x - -
3
2
0 ∞+
1
)f ( x
-1
-1
0 1 x
∞− 2
-2
113
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
5
ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻤﺎﻻﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ
y
6
.1ﻤــﺜــﺎل
5 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ hﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 0ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
1
) ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺭﺍﺒﻊ ( h( x ) = 2 +
4
x
3
ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻷﻭل ﺃﻥ ) h( xﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2
2
ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺸﺭﻴﻁﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ xﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﺠﺩ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ.
1 ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ hﻫﻲ 2ﻋﻨﺩ ∞+
lim h( x) = 2 ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ:
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 x ∞x →+
-1 ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ) h( xﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺒﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2
ﺒﺎﻝﻘﺩﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺸﺭﻴﻁﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ xﺴﺎﻝﺒﺎ ﻭﺘﺄﺨﺫ xﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﺠﺩ ﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ.
ﻨﻘﻭل ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ hﻫﻲ 2ﻋﻨﺩ ∞−
lim h( x) = 2 ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ:
∞x →−
1 1
limﺤﻴﺙ aﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ. = 0 ، lim =0 ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﻨﻘﺒل ﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
∞x →− x+a x →+∞ x + a
0 1 2 x 3 4 5 6 7 8 x ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Chﻋﻨﺩ ∞. +
ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ ﻤﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل
ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Chﻋﻨﺩ ∞. −
( C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ bﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ. ) ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = bﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞+
) ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞ ( −ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ) lim f ( x ) = bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( lim f ( x) = b
∞x →− ∞x →+
114
5
ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ. ) 1
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − { 0ﺒﹻ:
f ( x) = −2 +ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
x2
(C f؟ ) .3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ .ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
. (C f ) .4ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ′ ( xﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﺤــل:
. (C f ) ∞ . lim f ( x) = +ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = 0ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
x →0
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ lim f ( x) = −2ﻭ . lim f ( x) = −2ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = −2
∞x →− ∞x →+
y
6 ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ +ﻭﻋﻨﺩ ∞− ) ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
2
f ′( x) = − .2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ } ℝ − { 0ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
5
4 x3
3 x ∞− 0 ∞+
2 )f ′( x + -
∞+∞ +
1
-3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 x )f ( x
-1
-2 -2
-2
ﺤــل:
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ -1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
2x −1 2x −1− 2x − 2 −3
= f ( x) − 2 =−2 =
x +1 x +1 x +1
−3
limﻓﺈﻥ lim ( f ( x) − 2) = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ lim f ( x) = 2 ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ = 0
∞x →+ ∞x →+ x →+∞ x + 1
ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞+
−3
lim ( f ( x) − 2) = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ lim f ( x) = 2 ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ = 0
lim
∞x →− ∞x →− x →−∞ x + 1
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞− ) ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
115
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
ﻤﻔﻬﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ
ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺎﺭﻴﻑ
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ x0ﻫﻲ lﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ، eﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:1
0 ≤ f ( x) − l < e ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x − x0 < α
ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏlim f ( x) = l :
x → x0
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ +ﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ، Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:3
f ( x) > Α ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Bﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x > B
ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏlim f ( x ) = +∞ :
∞x →+
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ، Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:4
f ( x) > Α ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ Bﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x < − B
ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏlim f ( x ) = +∞ :
∞x →−
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ x0ﺒﻘﻴﻡ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:5
f ( x) > A ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ، Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x − x0 < α
lim ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏf ( x) = +∞ :
x
x>x
→ x0
0
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ x0ﺒﻘﻴﻡ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻫﻲ ∞ +ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:6
f ( x) > A ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ، Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x0 − x < α
lim ﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏf ( x) = +∞ :
x
x< x
→ x0
0
ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻙ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺎﺭﻴﻑ ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ . ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
116
5 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( x) = 2 x + 1 :
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥlim f ( x) = 3 :
x →1
ﺤــل:
ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ، eﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ lim f ( x) = 3 ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ
x →1
0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < e ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x − 1 < α
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻝﻴﻜﻥ eﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < e :
0 ≤ 2x − 2 < e ﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ 0 ≤ (2 x + 1) − 3 < eﺃﻱ 0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < e
0≤ 2 x−2 <e ﺃﻱ 0 ≤ 2( x − 2) < e ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ
e
< 0≤ x−2 ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ
2
e
0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < e ﻓﺈﻥ < 0≤ x−2 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ
2
e e
≤( α = ) αﺃﻭ ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ 0 ≤ f ( x) − 3 < eﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﺨﺫ
2 2
lim f ( x) = 3 ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺇﺫﻥ
x →1
ﺤــل:
ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ، Aﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ∞lim g ( x) = + ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ
x
x >0
→0
g ( x) > A ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ αﺒﺤﻴﺙ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ 0 < x < α
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Aﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﺒﺤﻴﺙg ( x) > A :
1 1
<0< x أي > A > 0
g ( x) > A
A x
1
< 0 < xن g ( x) > A و إذا آن
A
1
=α ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ g ( x ) > Aﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﺨﺫ
A
∞lim g ( x) = + ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺇﺫﻥ
x
x>0
→0
117
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ
.1ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ
ﻴﺘﻡ ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﺤﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ. •
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﻤﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ). lim f ( x) = f (a •
x→a
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ. ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﺒﻠﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ a •
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺫﻜﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﺒﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﺎل •
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x → sin x :ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞. +
118
5
ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
∞lim (−5 x + 3) = − ﻭ ∞lim 2 x 2 = + ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ +ﻷﻥ •
∞x →+ ∞x →+
1
limﻓﺈﻥ ∞lim g ( x) = + • ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ∞ lim x = +ﻭ = 0
∞x →+ x →+∞ x + 1 ∞x →+
1
ﻓﺈﻥ ∞lim g ( x) = − lim • ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ lim x = −1ﻭ ∞= −
x
x < −1
→−1 x
x < −1
→−1 x + 1 x
x < −1
→−1
1
ﻓﺈﻥ ∞lim g ( x) = + lim • ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ lim x = −1ﻭ ∞= +
x
x > −1
→−1 x
x > −1
→−1 x + 1 x
x > −1
→ −1
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ :ﻜﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻹﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ) g ( xﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ [∞ ]−∞; −1[ ∪ ]−1; +ﻭ x ≠ 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل:
1 1 1 1
x 2 1 + + 2 1+ + 2
g ( x) = ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ lim 1 + + 2 = 1ﻭ lim 1 + = 1 =x
1 1 1 x x x x
∞x →−
x x ∞→−
x x 1 1+
1
x 1 +
x x
ﻭ ∞ lim x = −ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ lim g ( x) = −∞ :ﻭ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥlim g ( x) = +∞ :
∞x →+ ∞x →− ∞x →−
119
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
( C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔy = ax + b : ) ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ ) +ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞ ( −ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ:
) lim f ( x) − ( ax + b ) = 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( lim f ( x) − ( ax + b ) = 0
∞x →− ∞x →+
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = ax + b :ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞. +
) ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞( −
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ∞ −ﻭ ∞. + ) ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = −2 x + 3ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
120
5
ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
3
f ( x) = − x + 2 + ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ ] − ∞ ;3 [ ∪ ] 3; +ﺒﹻ:
x−3
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ .ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = − x + 2
( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞+ ) ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ( ∆ ) : y = ax + bﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞) +ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞( − ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) lim f ( x) − ( ax + b ) = 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( lim f ( x) − ( ax + b ) = 0
∞x →− ∞x →+
ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Cgﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ( ∆ ) : y = ax + bﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ )g ( x) − (ax + b
ﺤــل:
c ax 2 + ( −a + b ) x − b + c
ax + b + = .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ : 1
x −1 x −1
a = 2
c
ax + b +ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ −a + b = −3 : ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ،ﻤﻥ ﻜل xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ = g ( x) ،1
−b + c = 3 x − 1
2
g ( x) = 2 x − 1 + ﻨﺠﺩ b = −1 ، a = 2ﻭ c = 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ : 1
x −1
limﻭ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ( ∆ ) : y = 2 x − 1ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﹻ ) ( Cgﻋﻨﺩ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞. +
2
.2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ = 0
x →+∞ x − 1
2
= )g ( x ) − ( 2 x − 1 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ :1
x −1
• ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل [ g ( x) − ( 2 x − 1) < 0 ، x ∈ ] − ∞ ;1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﻘﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( Cgﺘﺤﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ (
)∆( ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل [ ∞ g ( x ) − ( 2 x − 1) > 0 ، x ∈ ] 1; +ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﻘﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C gﻓﻭﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ •
121
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ :1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ( a ≠ 0 ) y = ax + b :ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞+
)f ( x
limﻭ lim [ f ( x ) − ax ] = b ﻓﺈﻥ = a
∞x →+ ∞x →+ x
)f ( x
limﻭ lim [ f ( x ) − ax ] = b =a .2ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ:
∞x →+ x ∞x →+
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ lim f ( x) − ( ax + b ) = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = ax + b :ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ
∞x →+
( a ≠ 0 ) y = ax + b ( C fﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ: ) ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ:
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) ( C fﻋﻨﺩ ∞ ) +ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻨﺩ ∞ ( −ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
lim [ f ( x) − ax ] = b
)f ( x
ﻭ lim =a
∞x →+ ∞x →+ x
)f ( x
limﻭ ( lim [ f ( x ) − ax ] = b ) ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ = a
∞x →− ∞x →− x
122
5 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
x + 3x − 3
3 2
= )f ( x ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞; −1[ ∪ ]−1;1[ ∪ ]1; +ﺒﹻ:
x2 −1
( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ. ) ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ.
. (C f ) .2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﺤــل:
3 3 3 3
x3 1 + − 3 1+ − 3
lim f ( x) = lim × = lim x
x x x x • .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
2 1 1
∞x →− ∞x →− x ∞→−
x 1 − 2 1− 2
x x
1 3 3
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ lim 1 + − 3 = 1 :ﻭ lim 1 − 2 = 1ﻭ ∞ lim x = −ﻓﺈﻥ ∞lim f ( x) = −
∞x →− ∞x →− ∞x →−
x ∞x →−
x x
ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥlim f ( x) = +∞ :
∞x →+
1 1
lim
x
x < −1
= )f ( x
→−1
lim
x
(x
x < −1
→−1
3
+ 3x2 − 3 )
x −1 x + 1
• ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
lim f ( x) = +∞ ، lim f ( x ) = −∞ ، lim ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥf ( x) = +∞ :
x
x >1
→1 x
x <1
→1 x
x > −1
→ −1
• .2ﻤﻥ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻠﺫﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ:
. (C f ) x = −1ﻭ x = 1ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﺎﺌل • ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ∞ lim f ( x) = +ﻭ ∞lim f ( x) = −
∞x →− ∞x →+
123
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 5
ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ
ﺘﻤﻬﻴﺩ
ﺒﻌﺩ ﻤﺎ ﺘﻁﺭﻗﻨﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺘﻡ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ
ﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻁﺭﻕ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﻲ ﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺃَﻀﺤﻰ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻥ ﺠﺩﺍ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ
ﻭ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ .ﻨﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﻤﺨﻁﻁﺎ ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺠﺯﺌﻲ ﻋل ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺡ
ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻝﻐﺎﺀ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﺤل ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺭﻭﺴﺔ.
.1ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ
ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻝﻡ ﺘﻜﻥ ﻗﺩ ﺃﻋﻁﻴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺹ. •
ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺸﻔﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺘﻬﺎ ) ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ( ﻗﺼﺩ ﺘﻘﻠﻴﺹ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ •
ﻭ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﻤﺭﺍﻜﺯ ﺃﻭ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ.
124
5 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
( )
= ) f (xﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ . O ; i ; j
1
sin x
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fا
ا
ا
ِـ:
π
= xﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ .1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ . fﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺸﻔﻌﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺘﻬﺎ .ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
2
π
ﻝﹻ ) . (C fﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . 0;
2
π
. (C f ) limﺜﻡ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل . 0; ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ>
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) f (x
2 x →0
ﺤــل:
• .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ } D f = ℝ − { k π / k ∈ ℤﻷﻥ sin x = 0 :ﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ x = k πﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ
• ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻜﻭﻥ D fﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ 0ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ sin ( − x ) = − sin x : x
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ − x ∈ D f : D fﻭ ) . f ( − x ) = −f ( xﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ.
• ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ sin x :ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺔ 2πﺩﻭﺭ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺩﻭﺭﻴﺔ ﻭ 2πﺩﻭﺭ ﻝﻬﺎ.
π π
(
• ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺍ Ω; i , jﺤﻴﺙ Ω , 0 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻫﻲ x = X + :ﻭ y = Y
2 2
)
π
ﻷﻥ sin + X = cos X
2
= Y
1
cos X
( )
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (C fﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ Ω; i , jﻫﻲ:
π 1
֏ Xﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = :ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﹻ ) . (C f ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ا ا:
2 cos X
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ 2πﺩﻭﺭ ﻝﹻ fﻨﻜﺘﻔﻲ ﺒﺩﺭﺍﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻁﻭﻝﻬﺎ 2πﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ [ ]−π ;0[ ∪ ]0; +πﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ ﻨﻘﻠﺹ
π π
;. 0
2 ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ . ]0; πﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ x = 2 :ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﹻ ) (C fﻨﻜﺘﻔﻲ ﺒﺩﺭﺍﺴﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
1
x limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﹻ ) (C f
>
→0
limﻷﻥsin x = 0+ :>
x →0
f (x ) = lim
>
x → 0 sin x
= +∞ .2
4
3 π
x 0
2 2
1 ) f ′(x -
x
0
-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4
∞+
-1
) f (x
-2
1
-3
-4
-5
125
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 5
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . f ′ ( x ) = 3 ( x 2 − 1) :ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ،ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ، xﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ . f
ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ .0ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C f
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ]. [ −1; + 1
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﺨﺘﺭﻕ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﻪ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺔ .0ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻨﻌﻁﺎﻑ
ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C f
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) f ( −2ﻭ ) f ( 2ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻭ ) (C fﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) ( −1;3ﻭ ). (1; − 1
( )
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ Ωﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ) . ( 0;1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (C fﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ Ω ; i ; jﻫﻲY = X 3 − 3X :
ﺜﻡ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ g : X ֏ X 3 − 3Xﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ .ﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ؟
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻓﻲ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻓﻭﺍﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﹻ β ، α :ﻭ . γ
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f (0) = 1ﻭ f (1) = −1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . f ( 0 ) × f (1) < 0ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ αﻴﺤﻘﻕ. 0 < α < 1 :
ﺒﺎﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . 0, 3 < α < 0, 4
ﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﻜل ﻤﻥ 0,3ﻭ 0, 4ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ α؟
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ βﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ 0.1ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . β
.2ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
ﻨﻌﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ ]−∞ ; +ﺒﹻf (x ) = x 3 + 3x 2 − 4 :
( )
(C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; j ) ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . f ( x ) = ( x + 2 ) ( x − 1) :ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ
2
126
5 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ
.1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
ax + b
֏ xﺤﻴﺙ c ، b ، aﻭ dﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﺔ ﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل:
cx + d
ﻤﻊ c ≠ 0ﻭ ad − bc ≠ 0
.2ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل
2x − 1
= ) f (x ﻨﻌﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ:
x −1
( )
(C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i ; j ) ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
ﻋﻴﻥ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
b
f (x ) = a + ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ : D f
x −1
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ . D fﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ
ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ.
ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ.
(C fﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ) ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ
ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺩﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ. y = − x :ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻫﺩﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) . Ω ( 1; 2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Ωﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C f
.3ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
x −3
(
. O ;i ; j ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) = ) f (xﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
2x + 1
ﻨﻌﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ:
127
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 5
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i ; jﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) C ( 0; 2 ) ، B ( −1; 0 ) ، A ( −1; 2ﻭ ) M ( x ;0ﺤﻴﺙ . x < −1
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AMﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . N
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ xﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻭ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ CAN ، OMNﻭ . ABM
( )
f (x ) = −ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i ; j
x2
x +1
.2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fا
ا
ا
[ ِ ]−∞ ; − 1ـ:
• ! ا
% &'()* +,- OMNا$اد ا
" b ، aو 4,5 " cن * %أ +1آ]−∞ ; − 1 [ %* x +
c
f (x ) = ax + b +
x +1
أدرس −1 ) f 6!5(78و ) ∞ . −أدرس >=ات 1 +,@ A ]−∞ ; − 1 [ fول >=ا>.(7 •
( * % !* +C 5 (C fر ( D1 ) %و ) 5"> &E5 ( D 2ه( .أر' آ ( D 2 ) ، ( D1 ) %* Fو ) . (C f >" Bأن ) •
(* .3ه x G 6ا
!4,> 6ن * %أ H(* (71ا
OMNأ%,5 (* =M؟ أ JK) &Hه Iا
(.H
128
5 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
1 2
= ) f (x x +1+ f .1ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ D = ]2; +ﺒﹻ:
2 x −2
ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ.
ﺍ( ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ Dﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) (C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ
) ∆ ( ﻭ ) ( ∆′ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ.
ﺏ(ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ . fﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﺜﻡ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) ∆ ( ٍ ( ∆′ ) ،ﻭ ) . (C f
.2ﻤﺜﻠﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁﺎ ) ( Γﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻪ ، hﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ r
ﻭ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﺎ ﺒﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 1ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ H ، I ، O ، A
ﻭ Jﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ ) (OI ) ⊥ ( AJﻭ ) . ( AH ) ⊥ ( HJ
1
ﻨﻀﻊ ) g ( h ) = V ( hﺤﻴﺙ ) V ( hﻫﻭ ﺤﺠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ) . ( Γﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ h > 2
2
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ) V ( hﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ hﺜﻡ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل 1ﻋﻴﻥ hﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ) V ( hﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ.
1
'0 1203رب ِـ ) (C f . limﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x = 2
x →2 >
limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞f ( x ) = +
→2 x − 2
x
>
= +∞ .1
∞+ ∞+
1 ) f (x
0 1 x 4
.2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﻴﺤﻴﻁ ﺒﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻪ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻀﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . h > 2
OI HJ = HAJ
tan HAJﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ tan OAIﻭ = HJ ﻨﻌﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ . r 2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ = OI
= OAIﻓﺈﻥ
AI AH AH AI
h h2
= r2 = . r 2ﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻭﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ AIOﻨﺠﺩ ) AI 2 = h ( h − 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
h −2 AI 2
1 1 1 π h2 π
× = . g ( h ) = V ( h ) = × π r 2 hﻴﻜﻭﻥ ) V ( hﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . h = 4 ) = f (h
2 2 3 3 2 ( h − 2) 3
129
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 5
130
5 ا
!(ر%5
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ +ﻭ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) (C fﻴﻘﺒل 9 أ
أم
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 5ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
3
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = − :ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ... 1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ x
2
3 2
f ( x ) = − x (1 > ) f ( xﻓﺈﻥ lim f ( x ) = 0 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x > 0ﻭ
2 ∞x →+ x
lim f ( x) = −∞ (2 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ x 2
3
x →−
3 3
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x > 0ﻭ 1 − ≤ f ( x ) ≤ 1 +ﻓﺈﻥ
2
3
(3
lim f ( x) = − x x
∞x →+
2 lim f ( x ) = 1
∞x →+
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 10ﺇﻝﻰ 12
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ x 3
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻔﻬﺎ
5 5
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x > 0ﻭ 1 + ≤ f ( x ) ≤ 2 +ﻓﺈﻥ
x x
10 1 ≤ lim f ( x ) ≤ 2
∞x →+
∞− -1 2 ∞+ 4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ lim f ( x ) = −2ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ
x ∞x →−
)f '( x + 0 - 0 + fﻻ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = −2
)f ( x 0 1 fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {1ﺤﻴﺙ: 5
∞− -3 4x 4
g ( x) = x + 2 + f ( x) = x + 2 −ﻭ
x −1 x −1
11 ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = x + 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﺎﺌل
ﻝـ ) (C fﻭ ﻝـ ) (C g
x ∞− 0 ∞+
ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
)f '( x - -
2 ∞+ ﺇﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ
)f ( x
∞− 2 ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 6ﺇﻝﻰ 9
2x −1
= )f ( x fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙ 6
12 x2 + 4
lim f ( x) = ...
∞x →−
x -2 0 1 ∞+ 0 (3 2 (2 −
1
(1
4
)f '( x + 0 + +
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−2ﺤﻴﺙ : 7
2
∞+ 4 − 3x
)f ( x
∞− = )f ( x
-1 x+2
k ، h ، g ، fﺩﻭﺍل ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 13 ) (C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ:
[∞ . ]−∞; −1[ ∪ ]−1; +ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ : y = − 2 (3 y = − 3 (2 y = 4 (1
lim f ( x) = 1 ، lim
>
f ( x) = +∞ ، lim f ( x) = 1 fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻴﺤﻘﻘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻁﻴﻥ 8
∞x →+ x →−1 ∞x →−
ﻭ )f ( x ) ≥ g ( x ∞lim g ( x) = +
∞lim g ( x) = −∞ ، lim g ( x) = + ∞x →+
x →−1 ∞x →+
131
ا
!(ر%5 5
3 ﺃﻨﺴﺏ ﻝﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ
f 14ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙf ( x) = − x + 1 :
5 y
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
2
1
lim f ( x) (2 lim f ( x) (1
x →0 x→2
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x
-1
lim f ( x) (4 lim f ( x) (3
∞x →+ ∞x →− -2
f 15ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙf ( x) = x :
2 -3
-4
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ -5
lim f ( x) (2 lim f ( x) (1 -6
x →3 x →−3
132
5 ا
!(ر%5
1 20ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞−
f ( x ) = x + x (2 = )f ( x + 1 (1
x
1 1 ﺜﻡ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
= )f ( x − 3 (4 f ( x) = − x (3
x x 5 x3 − 1 x2 + 2 x − 1
= )f ( x = ) (2 f ( x (1
= )f ( x
1
− 3 (6 = )f ( x
1
(5 2x − 3 x3 + 1
x +1 x+2
2x2 + x −1 −2 x 2
1 = )f ( x ( 4 f ( x ) = (3
−2 − x2 − x2 − 3 2 x3 + 5x 2 − 1
1
f ( x) = x (8 f ( x) = 2 (7
1
+1 x +3 fﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ .ﺍﺤﺴﺏ )lim g ( x) ، lim f ( x 21
∞x →+ ∞x →+
x
1 ﻭ ) lim ( f + g )( xﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
−4 ∞x →+
1
f ( x) = x (10 f ( x) = x 2 + 1 (9
2 x f ( x ) = 2 x − 1 (1ﻭ g ( x ) = − x
2
+1
x
f ( x ) = x 2 + 3 (2ﻭ g ( x ) = − x 2
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) lim f ( xﻭ ﺃﻜﹼﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ 25
∞x →−
1
fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﹰﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل f ( x) = x +ﻭ g ( x) = −3 x (3
x
1
f ( x ) = x 3 − x + (2 f ( x ) = x 2 + 2 x − 3 (1 f ( x ) = 2 x 2 + x − 1 (4ﻭ g ( x ) = − x 3 + 2 x + 4
x
1 1
f ( x ) = 1 + + 2 (4 = )f ( x
x
(3 22ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) lim g ( x) ، lim f ( xﻭ )lim ( f × g )( x
∞x →+ ∞x →+ ∞x →+
x x x
2x 1 ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
= )f ( x (6 = )f ( x − 1 (5
1 x
1− 2 1
x = )g ( x f ( x ) = x 2 (1ﻭ
x
2x + 3
2
−1
= )f ( x (8 f ( x) = 2 (7 1
x+
1 x + 4 = ) f ( xﻭ g ( x) = x (2
x x2
1
f ( x) = ( x − 1) (10 f ( x) = x 2 + 2 (9 1
3
= )g ( x 3
f ( x ) = 2 x 3 + 1 (3ﻭ
x x
26ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) lim f ( xﻭ ﺃﻜﹼﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل
x →0 23ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﹰﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
f
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: lim
x →+∞ g
xlimﻭ ) ( x
∞→+
)g ( x) ، lim f ( x
∞x →+
1 1
f ( x) = x 2 + (2 f ( x ) = x + (1 1
x2 x = )g ( x f ( x ) = x (1ﻭ
x −1 1 x
f ( x) = 2 (4 = )f ( x − 2 (3
x x 1 2
= )g ( x f ( x ) = 2 (2ﻭ
1 x2 − 1 x x
= )f ( x (6 = )f ( x (5
1 x 1 1
3− = )g ( x f ( x ) = (3ﻭ
x x 2
x
1 1 1 1
= )f ( x − + 1 (8 = )f ( x
− (7
x + 2 2x x x ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ
27ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) lim f ( xﻭ ) lim f ( xﻭ ﺃﻜﹼﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻥ 24ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ
∞x →− ∞x →+
ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ) lim f ( xﻭ ﺃﻜﹼﺩ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ
∞x →+
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﹰﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل
133
ا
!(ر%5 5
x2 + 2 x − 1
x2 + 1 = )f ( x (1
= )(∆) : y = x + 1 ; f ( x (3 x2 + 1
x −1
4 x5 − 3x 2
(∆ ) : y = x + 2 ; f ( x ) = x + 1 +
x
(4 = )f ( x (2
x−2 2 x5
32ﺃﻨﺴﺏ ﻝﻜل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ −2 x 4 + x 3 − x + 1
= )f ( x (3
1 1 x4 + 1
g ( x) = 1 − 2 ، f ( x) = 1 − 2x2 + x −1
x x f ( x) = 3 (4
x −1
4
x −1
2 − x + 2x −1
k ( x) = 2 = )، h( x 2 x2
x x f ( x) = 4 (5
x −1
3
x −1 x −1
= ) m( x ، l ( x) = 2
x x ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ
y 28ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﹰﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
5
4 ) ( O; I , J ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
3
f ( x ) = 3 x 2 − 6 x + 3 (1
2
1 f ( x ) = x 2 − 5 x + 6 (2
134
5 ا
!(ر%5
x +1 − 2 y
; x0 = 3 = )f ( x (7 4
( x 2 − 9)2 3
x3 − 1 2
= )x0 = 1 ; f ( x (8
x −1 1
x 2 − 3x + 2
= )x0 = 2 ; f ( x (9 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
-1
1 2 3 4 5 x
x3 − 8
-2
x +1 − x
= )x0 = 0 ; f ( x (10 -3
x2 − x -4
x +1 − x -5
= )x0 = 1 ; f ( x (11
x2 − x
34ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ
y
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: 1
1 1
f ( x) = 2 − (1 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0
-1
1 2 3 4 5 x
x −1 x −1
-2
x
f ( x ) = −2 x + 3 + 2 (2 -3
x −1 -4
f ( x) = x 2 + 3 + x (3 -5
f ( x) = x + 1 − x (4
f ( x) = 4 x 2 − 3 x − 1 − 2 x (5 5y
1 1
= )f ( x − (6 4
x −1 x −1 3
x2 + 2x − 5 2
= )f ( x (7 1
2x
1 − 2 x2 -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x
f ( x) = x 2 + 1 + (8 -1
x+2 -2
35ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻭ -3
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺠﻙ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ)ﺭﺴﻡ ) ( (C f -4
-5
f ( x ) = x 3 + x − 1 (1
f ( x ) = 2 x 4 − x 2 − 3 (2
33ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ x0ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
f ( x) = x − 8 x + 16 x − 9 (3
4 3 2
x2 − x
3 ; x0 = 0 = )f ( x (1
f ( x ) = − x 3 − x 2 − 1 (4 3x 2 − x
2 x2 − 5x + 6
36ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ x0 = 2 ; f ( x) = 2 (2
x −x+2
37ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ )( x − 1)(2 x − 3
= )x0 = 1 ; f ( x (3
2x 6x −1 x2 −1
= )f ( x (2 = )، f ( x (1
1+ x 2
3 − 2x x −1
= )x0 = 1 ; f ( x (4
2 x2 + x − 1 x 2 + 3x + 2 x −1
(5 f ( x ) = 2 (4 ، f ( x) = 2 (3
x − x +1 x − 5x + 6 x−4
= )x0 = 4 ; f ( x (5
3 )( x − 2)( x + 3 x −2
= ) f ( x ) = x − 1 − (6 ، f ( x
x ( x − 1)2 x + x−2
2
= )x0 = 1 ; f ( x (6
x2 − 2 x + 1 x+3 −2
f ( x) = 2 (7
x − 2x
135
ا
!(ر%5 5
42ﺒﺤﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ f
38ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ D = [ 0; +ﺤﻴﺙ :
ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ −ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞+
f ( x) = x + 3 − x
) ﻓﻲ ﺤﻠﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﻫﺎ (
1 + cos x (1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
= )f ( x (1 3
x = )f ( x
x sin x x+3+ x
f ( x) = 2 (2 (2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ : D
x +3
f ( x) = cos x - x (3 3
≤ )0 ≤ f ( x
5 + cos x x
= )f ( x (4 (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞+
x
2 39ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ D = ]0; +ﺤﻴﺙ:
f ( x) = 3 + ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ :
x −1 x+ x
= )f ( x
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ x2 + x + 1
[∞]−∞;1[ ∪ ]1; + f 43ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ (1ﺃﻤﻠﺊ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = 3ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ x 10 4 106 1010 1012 1020 1040
ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f )f ( x
(2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ) (Cﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )( D (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
f 44ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } D = ℝ − {2ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ: x 2 ≤ x 2 + x + 1 ≤ ( x + 1) 2
2x −1 x ≤ x2 + x +1 ≤ x +1 ﻭ
= )f ( x
2− x (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺍﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل 1 1
1− ≤ f ( x) ≤ 1 +
f ( x) = a +
b
ﻋﺩﺩ xﻤﻥ Dﻴﻜﻭﻥ: x +1 x
2− x 1 1
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = −2ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ lim 1 + lim 1 −ﻭ (4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ
∞x →+ x x →+∞ x + 1
ﻝـ ) (Cﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ )lim f ( x
∞x →+
(3ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ) (Cﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆(
f 40ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ D = ]0; +ﺤﻴﺙ
[∞]−∞; −1[ ∪ ]−1; + f 45ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 3 + sin x
1 = )f ( x
f ( x) = 2 x − 1 + ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ : x
x +1 (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = 2 x − 1ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ 2 4
≤ )) ≤ f ( xﺘﺫﻜﻴﺭ ( −1 ≤ sin x ≤ 1
ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f x x
(2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﻝـ ) (Cﻭ )∆( . (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ )lim f ( x
∞x →+
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } D = ℝ − {3ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ: 46 f 41ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ D = ]0; +ﺤﻴﺙ
2x −12
x 2 + sin x
= )f ( x = )f ( x
x −3 x
(1ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ b ، aﻭ cﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ( (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ Dﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
c x2 − 1 x2 + 1
f (x ) = ax + b + ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ Dﻴﻜﻭﻥ: ≤ )≤ f ( x
x −3 x x
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )∆( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = 2 x + 6 (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ )lim f ( x
∞x →+
ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﺎﺌل ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
136
5 ا
!(ر%5
47ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻴﻘﺒل ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ) (d1
(2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (Cﻤﻊ ) (dﻭ ﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﺍﻻﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ) (d 2ﻭ ) (d3ﻓﻘﻁ ﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﺎﺕ y
7
f 49ﻭ gﺩﺍﻝﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−2ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: ) ( d3
6
) (d 2
4 x2 5
g ( x) = x − 2 − = ) f ( xﻭ 4
( x + 2)2 x+2
3
(C f ) (1ﻭ ) (C gﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ fﻭ g 2
) (d1
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O; i, j 1
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ -5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x
-1
)ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺌل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ(. -2
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (C fﻭ ) . (C g -3
-4
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : 50 -5
. f ( x) = x − 3x − 5 x + 4
3 2
aﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ
) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
(1ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻭﻓﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ؟
ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O; i, j
2 x 2 + ax
(1ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f = )f ( x
x2 + x − 2
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) S (1; −3ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . (C 4x + a
= )g ( x
(3ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) . (C )( x + 2)( x − 1
g (4ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } ℝ − {−1ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
a 1
= )h( x + +1
x + 2 x −1
5
g ( x) = −1 + (2ﻋﻴﻥ aﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) (Cﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) (d1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x = 1
x +1
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Hﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ 48ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ
ﻓﻘﻁ ) (dﻭ )∆( )ﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل (
ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O; i, j
ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . g (∆) 7y
ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) . ( H 6
(5ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ) (Cﻭ ) ( Hﻴﺸﻤﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) ، A(0; 4ﺜﻡ ﺍﺩﺭﺱ 5
4
ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (Cﻭ ) . ( H 3
) (d
(6ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) (Cﻭ ) ( Hﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﻴﻥ 2
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . S 1
137
ا
!(ر%5 5
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ MNﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (dﺜﻡ ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻲ
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ MNﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞ +؟ ﺇﻝﻰ ∞ −؟
ﻝـ ) . (d ) (C g
(5ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ) (Cﻭ ) . ( P
ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) (C gﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
(6ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) (Cﻭ ) ( Pﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ .
(4ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ B
54ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O; i, j
1 ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﻤﺎ .
.ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ ) ( Hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ = yﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
x -ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) (C fﻭ ) (C gﻴﻘﺒﻼﻥ ﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎﻥ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ
3 3
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M . A ; − ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Hﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . x ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ.
2 2
ﻨﻀﻊ. f ( x) = AM 2 : ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ
(1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ) f ( xﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x f 52ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ∗ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
(2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f − x2 + x − 1
= )f ( x
1 x
=( x ) ﻻﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ' fﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﻨﺩ
2 ) (Cﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
(3ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O; i, j
= )g ( x (4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ gﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓf ( x) : - (1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) (Cﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﺎﺌﻼ )∆(
-ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . g ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = 1 − x
(5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ M 1ﻭ M 2ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﺌﺩ ) ( H
-ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﻝـ ) (Cﻭ )∆( .
ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ x1ﻭ x2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ AM
(2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺜﻡ ﺍﺭﺴﻡ )∆( ﻭ ) . (C
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺼﻐﺭﻯ.
m (3ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ mﻋﺩﺩ
(6ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( Hﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M 1ﻴﻌﺎﻤﺩ
ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . f ( x) = m
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AM 1
(4ﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = mﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) (Cﻓﻲ
-ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝـ ) ( Hﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M 2ﻴﻌﺎﻤﺩ
ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﻴﻥ Mﻭ ، Nﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ mﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AM 2
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ MN
55ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل ﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
A (5ﻭ Bﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O; i, j
1 ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل.
ﺤﻴﺙ f (0) = −
4 ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Iﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
6 f 53ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞D = ]−∞;0[ ∪ ]0; +
5 1
ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲf ( x) = x 2 + 2 + 2 :
4 x
3 ) (Cﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
2 ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . (O; i, j
1 (1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ.
-5 -4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4 5 x [∞]0; + (2ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ
-1
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) (Cﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
-2
ﻝﻪ.
-3
-4
( P ) (4ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ M . y = x + 2ﻨﻘﻁﺔ
2
138
5 ا
!(ر%5
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C
60ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } D f = ℝ − {−2ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
2x + 3x + 1
2
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ.
= ) f (x
x +2
(3ﻤﺜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ . -2
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ 56
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ b ، aﻭ cﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ
x + cos x
c f ( x) = 2
f ( x) = ax + b + ﻤﻥ : D f x + x +1
x+2
(1ﻋﻴﻥ D fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
(3ﺠﺩ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻤﺎﺌل ∆ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜل
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻤﻥ : D f
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞. +
x −1 x +1
(4ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ∆ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞. − . ≤ f ( x) ≤ 2
x + x +1
2
x + x +1
(5ﺤﺩﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (Cﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ∆ . (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ )lim f ( x
61ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ } D f = ℝ − {−1;1ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
∞x →+
139
5
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻭﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ . ]1; + 66
(2ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ fﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺅل xﺇﻝﻰ ∞+
ﻨﻌﻁﻲ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ : f
f 64ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺤﻴﺙ :
x 1 3 ∞+
1 3 1 2 13
= )f ( x x − x − 2x +
)f '( x - 0 + 3 2 12
)f ( x ∞+ ∞+ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞ −ﻭﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞. + (1
5 ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ) f ' ( xﺜﻡ ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℝ (2
2
ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f (3
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل f ( x ) ، x > 1ﺘﻜﺘﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
b 1
b ، a ، f ( x ) = ax +ﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ I ; 0 ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻝﻠﺭﺴﻡ (4
x −c 2
) ( C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ fﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ
( )
ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ O ; i ; j
(
. O ;i ; j ) ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ f ( x ) = 0 : (5
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f (6
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ .ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . c
ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻭﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻠﻭل (7
(2ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) ، f ( xﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . f ( x ) = m
. 6a + b = 5
fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒـ . f ( x ) = x − sin x 65
(3ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) f ' ( xﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ 4a − b = 0
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ fﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) f ( xﻭﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻱ
(2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ، [ 0 ; 2πﺃﺤﺴﺏ
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ x − 2 y = 0ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﻝﻠﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) . ( C f
) k ) f ( x + k 2π ) ، f ( x + 4π ) ، f ( x + 2πﻋﺩﺩ
(5ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻲ ﻝـ ) ( C fﻭ ) . ( D ﺼﺤﻴﺢ( .
(6ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) ( C fﻭﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ . ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0 ; 2π (3ﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
5 4
f ( x) = x + − (6ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ). lim f ( x
x −1 x + 1 ∞x →−
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ (7ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ −6π ; 6π
ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ .
140
5 ا
!(ر%5
x (4ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺘﻲ fﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞ −ﻭﺒﺠﻭﺍﺭ ∞. +
= ). g ( x g (IIﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ
1− x ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( C fﻴﻘﺒل ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﺒﺎ ﻤﺎﺌﻼ ) ∆ ( ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ
) ( C gﺭﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ .
(5ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ fﻗﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﻼﺸﺘﻘﺎﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ، D fﻭﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ :
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . g = ) f '( xﺤﻴﺙ ) P( xﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺠﺔ
)P( x
(x )− 1
2 2
ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = xﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ N ﺒﺴﻁ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) f ( xﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ]−∞ ; 0ﻭﻓﻲ
ﻫﻲ ) 0 ( y ; x ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ . [ 0; +
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ]−1;1ﺇﺫﺍ (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ .
ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( C gﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ xﻓﺈﻥ Nﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ M
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ). lim f ( x
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( C f
∞x →+
(5ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) . ( C f
141
6
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
143
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 6
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ...، 20 ، 15، 10 ، 5 ، 0 : 5ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒـ ...، u4 ، u3 ، u2 ، u1 ، u0
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u8 ، u7 ، u6 ، u5ﻭ ﺒﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ u120 ، u18ﻭ ﺃﻜﺘﺏ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( Dﻝﺘﻜﻥ n Bn ،.......، B3 ، B2 ، B1ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
) . ( Dﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﻨﺴﻤﻲ unﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺒﺭﺒﻁ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ nﻨﻘﻁﺔ
. Bn ،.......، B3 ، B2 ، B1
• A u1 = 0 ﻓﻌﻠﻴﻪ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n = 1
u2 = 1 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n = 2
u3 = 3 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n = 3
)( D
• • • • • u4 = 6 ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل n = 4
............... B5 B4 B3 B2 B1 (1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u8 ، u7 ، u6 ، u5
(2ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ u5ﻤﺜﻼ ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﺇﻝﻰ u4ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺃﻀﻼﻋﻬﺎ ] . [ AB5ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ
ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ un +1ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﺇﻝﻰ unﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺃﻀﻼﻋﻬﺎ ] . [ ABn +1
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ un +1ﻭ . un
(3أ
u13
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
144
َ
6 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
( )
ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , j ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (C
g ﻭ
) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = x + 1
ﻭ ) ∆ ( ﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻬﻤﺎ . (1ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) ( C
g
( )
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) . O '( 0 ,1ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ) ( C gﻭ ) ∆ ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O '; i , jﺤﻴﺙ )' y ' = f ( x
( )
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( C gﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O '; i , j
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
. Aﺘﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻤﺅﺴﺴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻘﺩﺍ ﻝﻠﺘﻭﻅﻴﻑ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :ﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﺒـ 10000 DAﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺔ
ﺘﻘﺩﺭ ﺒـ 10 0 0ﻨﺴﻤﻲ u1ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ .ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ unﻝﻠﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﺨﻼل ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ . ( n ≥ 1) n
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u7 ، u6 ، u5 ، u4 ، u3 ، u2 ،
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ un +1ﻭ . un
10000 DAﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ . Bﺘﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻤﺅﺴﺴﺔ ﺍﻗﺘﺼﺎﺩﻴﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻋﻘﺩﺍ ﻝﻠﺘﻭﻅﻴﻑ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :ﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﺒـ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﺘﻘﺩﺭ ﺒـ 1200 DAﺒﻌﺩ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ v1ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ .
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ vnﻝﻠﻤﺭﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﺨﻼل ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ . ( n ≥ 1) n
. v7 ، v6 ، v5 ، v4 ، v3 ، v2 (1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ vn +1ﻭ . vn
(3ﻴﺭﻴﺩ ﻤﻭﻅﻑ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺘﻌﺎﻗﺩ ﻤﻊ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻤﺩﺓ 7ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ .ﺃﻱ ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺩﻴﻥ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻓﺎﺌﺩﺓ ؟
145
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ.
.1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ uﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺘﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n0ﻤﻌﻁﻰ ،ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ )u (n
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ nﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺒـ unﺒﺩﻻ ﻤﻥ ). u (nﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ ﺒﺩﻝﻴل . ﺘﺭﻤﻴﺯ:
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ( un )n ≥ nﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n0
0
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕ ( un )n∈ℕﺃﻭ ) ( un ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ
unﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺩﻝﻴﻠﻪ nﻭ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﻜﺫﺍﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ . u
un 0ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n0
u0ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕ
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺒﻴﺭﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻭ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ) un = f (nﺤﻴﺙ . f : x ֏ − x 2 + 3 ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
ﺘﻭﻝﻴﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﺒﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ:
• ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ fﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Dﻭﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل x ∈ Dﻓﺈﻥ . f ( x ) ∈ Dﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ uﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ
ﺍﻷﻭل un 0ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) un +1 = f (unﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ .ﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﺤﺴﺎﺏ un +1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻡ unأ آ n ≥ n0
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ fﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ . u
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 1ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . un +1 = 3un : n
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ u0 = 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ u3 = 3u2 = 27 ، u2 = 3u1 = 9 ، u1 = 3u0 = 3ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ...
146
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺤــل:
= ، u2 = ، u1
3 3 33 3 3 12 3 3
= . u3 = = = = = (1
2 + u2 2 + 12 34 2 + u1 2 + 3 11 2 + u0 4
11 4
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺎﺕ ﺘﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ u11 ≈ 1 ، u10 ≈ 1ﻭ . u12 ≈ 1 (2
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ) ( unﺘﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ 1ﺇﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ . n = 10
147
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ.
.1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ.
• ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . u n = (−2) n :
u1 u0 u2
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ (un )n ≥ n 0ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ )ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ(ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﺒﺔ n0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ .2ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ:
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ un +1 < un ) un +1 ≤ unﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n0
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ (un )n ≥ n 0ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﺒﺔ n0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ . un +1 = unﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل .3ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ:
ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . n0
)ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( ﻫﻲ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل Iﻤﻥ ℕ .4ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ:
)ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻤﻥ ℕﺃﻭ ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ )ﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﻤﻥ
. ) ℕﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ( .
148
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 3
2 + un
= un+1ﺤﻴﺙ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 1ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ
un
• ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . ( O , I , J
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﺜﻡ ﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
. y = xﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ) un +1 = f (unﻭﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) . M (un , un +1
2+ x
ﺤــل (C f ) :ﻫﻭﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (unﺃﻱ
y
4 = )f ( x
x
3 ) (CM 0
f )∆( ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ∞ (∆) . ] 0 , +ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . y = xﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
M M3
Mﻫﻲ ﺃﻭل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ .ﻨﺴﻘﻁ M 0ﻋﻠﻰ ) ∆( ﻭﻓﻕ
0
) M 0 (u0 , u1ﺃﻱ ) ( 1,3
2 2
) ( Oxﺜﻡ ﻨﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) (C fﻭﻓﻕ) ( Oyﻭﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ
M1
1
5
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M 1 (u1 , u2ﺃﻱ . M 1 3, ﻨﻜﺭﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ M 2ﺜﻡ M 3ﺇﻝﻰ ﺁﺨﺭﻩ.
3
y M3
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ (un ) n≥1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u1 = 1
5
) (C f )∆(
1
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ . un+1 = un2 + un
2
4
• ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ
3 ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . ( O , I , J
M2
ﺤــل (C f ) :ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (unﺃﻱ
2
M1 1 2
= ) f ( xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ (∆ ) . ] 0 , +ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
x +x
1 2
. y = xﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ 3
0 1 2 3 4 5 x
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
2n − 1 n +1
= vn ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) ( unﻭ ) (vnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ un = nﻭ
n+3 3
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ:
(1ﻨﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ un +1 − unﺃﻭ
u
(2ﻨﻘﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ n +1ﻭ . 1
un
(3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺠﺩﺕ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ un = f (n) : nﻨﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
= un +1 − unﺇﺫﻥ un +1 − un < 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ) ( unﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕ
−2 n −1
. ﺤــل • :ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( un
3n +1
2x −1
= ) f ( xﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [0, + • ) (vnﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺤﻴﺙ
x+3
149
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ.
. 1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ :
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ rﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
. un +1 = un + r ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ : n
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ rﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (un
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ r = 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻭ ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل . u0 ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
• ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ un = 3n + 5ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 5ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . r = 3 ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ:
• ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل 1ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . 2
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u1ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻫﻲ . un = u1 + ( n − 1) r ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ:
• ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﻋﺎﻤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u pﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ) pﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ ( nﻓﺈﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ
. un = u p + ( n − p ) r
• ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ﻴﻌﻭﺩ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
150
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . un = −7 n + 12 :
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ
ﺜﺎﺒﺕ ،ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﺒﺕ ﻫﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ .
ﺤــل:ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺇﺫﺍ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . u0 = 12 ، u0ﻝﻨﺤﺴﺏ . un +1 − un
. un +1 − un = −7( n + 1) + 12 − ( −7 n + 12) = −7ﺇﺫﻥ un +1 − un = −7ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ r = −7ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . u0 = 12
151
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
.
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ.
. 1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ :
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ qﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ
. un +1 = un × q ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ : n
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ qﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . (un
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q = 1ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺤﺩﻭﺩﻫﺎ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ . u0 ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q = 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍ ﺀَﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ.
152
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 8
1
= . un ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
2n
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ :ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻨﺤﺎﻭل ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ un +1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل un +1 = un × qﺤﻴﺙ qﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ
un +1
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ ،ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﺒﺕ ﻫﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ . ﻤﺴﺘﻘل ﻋﻥ nﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ unﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ
un
ﺤــل :ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺇﺫﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻫﻭ . u0 = 1 ، u0
1 1 1 1
= un +1 n +1
× = n × = un
2 2 2 2
1
= qﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . u0 = 1 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
2
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 9
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 3ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ un +1 = 4un + 6 :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ. vn = un + 2 :
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .
ﺤــل :ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺇﺫﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻫﻭ . v0 = u0 + 2 = 5
ﻨﻜﺘﺏ vn +1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . vn
vn +1 = un +1 + 2 = 4un + 8
.
= 4(un + 2) = 4vn
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . vn +1 = 4vn : n
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ q = 4ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل . v0 = 5
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل10
1 1
= . u5 ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، ℕﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ = ، qﻭ
32 2
• ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u2007
• ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . S = u0 + u1 + ........ + u28 + u29
ﺤــل • :ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ pﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ . un = u p × q n − p : n
2002
2007 −5 1 1 1
. u2007 = u5 × q = × = 2007
ﺇﺫﺍ
32 2 2
1 1 − q n +1
S = u0 ﻭ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ S = 2 1 − 30 • ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q ≠ 1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
2 1 − q
153
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
) ( un • ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺘﻘﺒل ∞ −ﻜﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻜل ﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻔﺘﻭﺡ [ (α ∈ ℝ ) ]−∞, αﻴﺸﻤل ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ .ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ. lim un = −∞ :
∞n →+
ﻤﺜﺎل :1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . un = n 2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
n0ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ αﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ [ ∞ n 2 ∈ ] α , +ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ n ≥ n0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞. lim un = +
∞n →+
ﻤﺜﺎل :2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . un = − n 2 − 1ﻝﻴﻜﻥ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
n0ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ αﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ [ (−n 2 − 1) ∈ ] − ∞ , αﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ n ≥ n0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞. lim un = −
∞n →+
ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺠﺎل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل [∞ [α , + ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ) . un = f ( nﺤﻴﺙ f
ﺤﻴﺙ αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ∞ lim f ( x ) = +ﻓﺈﻥ ∞. lim un = +
∞n →+ ∞x →+
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻭل ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺘﺒﻘﻰ ﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ .
154
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل12
1
= . un ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ( un )n≥1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
n
• ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ،ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ) ( unﻫﻲ . 0
ﺤــل:
ﻝﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺫﺍ .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻤﺠﺎل [ ]α , βﻴﺸﻤل . 0ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ pﺤﻴﺙ :
1 1
، p > −ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ( n ≥ p ) n > pﻭ
α β
1 1 1 1 1
< αﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺇﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺘﺒﺔ . α < un < β pﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ. ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ < α < −ﻭ < < βﺇﺫﺍ < β
n n p p n
lim un = 0
∞n →+
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل13
3n + 1
= . un ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
n+2
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
ﺤــل:ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ) un = f (nﺤﻴﺙ fﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [ ∞ [ 0 , +ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
3x + 1
= ) . f ( xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ lim f ( x) = 3ﺇﺫﺍ . lim un = 3ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ .
∞n →+ ∞x →+ x+2
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل14
n 2 + 3n + 1
= . un ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
2n + 3
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
ﺤــل:
n 2 + 3n + 1
= . un ﻨﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
2n + 3
3 1 3 1
n 2 1 + + 2 1+ + 2
un =
n n n n
×= n
3
2+
3
n2 +
n n
3 3 1
lim 1 + + 2 = 1ﻭ lim 2 + = 2
∞n →+ n n ∞→+ n n
3 1
1+ + 2
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺩﺓ . . limﺇﺫﻥ ∞lim un = + n n =1
∞n →+ ∞n →+ 3 2
2+
n
155
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 6
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Dﻤﺠﺎﻻ ﻴﺸﻤل D ، lﻴﺸﻤل ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ n1ﻭ Dﻴﺸﻤل ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
) ( wnﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ . n2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ n3ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ n1ﻭ D ، n2ﻴﺸﻤل ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ) ( vnﻭ ) ( wnﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ n3
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ vn ≤ un ≤ wnﻓﺈﻥ Dﻴﺸﻤل ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ . n3ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ . lim un = l
∞n →+
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ( un ) :2ﻭ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺘﺎﻥ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍ َﺀ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ un ≥ vn ، n0ﻭ ∞lim vn = +
∞n →+
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:ﻝﻴﻜﻥ [∞ ]α , +ﻤﺠﺎﻻ ]α , +∞[ .ﻴﺸﻤل ﺇﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ n0ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ un0 ≥ vn0ﻓﺈﻥ
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ ]α , +ﻴﺸﻤل ﺇﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ n0ﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ، pﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل un ≥ vn ، n ≥ n0ﻝﻴﻜﻥ qﺍﻷﻜﺒﺭ
ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ pﻭ . n0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ n ≥ qﻓﺈﻥ [∞ vn ∈ ]α , +ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞. lim un = +
∞n →+
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ( un ) :3ﻭ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺘﺎﻥ .ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍ َﺀ ﻤﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ un ≤ vn ، n0ﻭ ∞lim vn = −
∞n →+
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q > 1ﻭ u0 < 0ﻓﺈﻥ ∞ lim un = −ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺩﺓ .
∞n →+
ﻓﺈﻥ lim un = 0ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ . • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ −1 < q < 1
∞n →+
ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺩﺓ ) ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ (. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q ≤ −1
n
1
ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ (1 :ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒـ un = 3 :ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻨﺤﻭ 0ﻷﻥ ) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ
2
1
ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 3ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ = qﻭ −1 < q < 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . lim un = 0
∞→ n 2
(2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒـ vn = 3 :ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻷﻥ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل
n
v0 = 1ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ q ' = 3ﻭ q ' > 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ∞. lim vn = +
∞n →+
(3ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( wnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒـ wn = (−3) n :ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺒﺎﻋﺩﺓ ﻷﻥ ) ( wnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ
ﺍﻷﻭل v0 = 1ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ q '' = −3ﻭ q ' < −1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ .
156
6 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل15
2n + 1 4n
. ≤ ≤ un ( un )n≥1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
n 2n + 3
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ . ( un )n≥1
2n + 1 1
ﺤــل= lim 2 + = 2 :
4n 4
limﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . lim un = 2 = lim limﻭ = 2
n →+∞ 2n + 3 n →+∞ 3
∞n →+ ∞n →+ n ∞n →+
n
2+
n
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل16
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . un = n + sin(n) :
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
ﺤــل:ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ −1 ≤ sin(n) ≤ 1 : nﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . sin(n) ≥ −1 : n
ﺇﺫﺍ un ≥ n − 1ﻭ ∞ lim n − 1 = +ﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ∞lim un = +
∞n →+ ∞n →+
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل17
2
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 = 2ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . un +1 = 1 + un :
5
5
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ vn = un − :
3
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
ﺤــل (1:ﻝﻨﺤﺴﺏ . vn +1
5
vn +1 = un +1 −
3
2 5
= 1 + un −
5 3
2 2 2 5
= un − = un −
5 3 5 3
2
= vn
5
5 5 1 2
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ = qﻭ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل = = 2 −
. v0 = u0 −
3 3 3 5
2
(2ﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻭ = . q
5
5 5 2
−1 < < 1ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ ﻭ lim vn = 0ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ = lim unﻷﻥ un = vn +
3 n ∞→+ 3 ∞n →+ 5
157
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 6
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ.
ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u1ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ r ) rﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ (. ( un )n≥1
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . un +1 + un −1 = 2un
(2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ c ، b ، aﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . a + c = 2b
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺤﺩﻴﻥ ﻁﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻀﻌﻑ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ . ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ:
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ:ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ c ، b ، aﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ:
a + b + c = 15
a × b × c = 80
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ.
( un )n≥1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ( un )n≥1ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u1ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ q ) qﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ (.
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . un +1 × un −1 = un2
(2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ c ، b ، aﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . a × c = b 2
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺤﺩﻴﻥ ﻁﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ . ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ:
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ:ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ c ، b ، aﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ:
a + b + c = 26
a × b × c = 216
u0
= . lim S n • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ −1 < q < 1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
∞n →+ 1− q
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ q ≤ −1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ S nﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻪ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ .
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ α :ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ( un ) .ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u 0 = 3ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
2
=. q
α
ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺘﺒﻌﺎ ﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ αﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ Snﺤﻴﺙ . S n = u 0 + u1 + ........ + u n −1 + u n
158
6 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺭﺘﻴﺒﺔ:
) . un = ( −2 ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل ( un ) :ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
n
159
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 6
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , jﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ 0 ,1ﺒـ:
( )
f ( x ) = 2 − 2 x 2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i , jﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ Aﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ
.ﻨﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺠـﺎل ] [ 0,1 ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ، ( C fﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﻴﻨﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ x = 0ﻭ x = 1
y 1
ﺇﻝﻰ nﺠﺯ ﺀَﺍ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﻜل ﺠﺯﻉ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
.ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺒﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل.
n
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Eﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ) ( C fﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭﻴﻥ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ unﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ
) (C
f ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺘﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ Eﻭﻨﺴﻤﻲ vnﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
1 ﺘﺤﻭﻱ . Eﻭ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ un ≤ A ≤ vnﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .
(1ﻋﻴﻥ unﻭ vnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ lim unﻭ . lim vn
∞n →+ ∞n →+
n
)n(n + 1)(2n + 1
∑p
p =1
2
=
6
ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ (2ﺇﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ A
160
3 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ .
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ:ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( v nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
un + 3 vn un + 2vn
= . vn +1 = un +1ﻭ v0 = 1 ، u0 = 12ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ : n
4 3
ﻨﻀﻊ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ wn = un − vn : nﻭ . tn = 3 un + 8 vn
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( wnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﻭﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .ﺃﺤﺴﺏ wnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( tnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ .
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﺘﻨﺎﻗﺼﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕ
(4ﻋﻴﻥ unﻭ vnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
(5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ unﻭ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ . vn
un = 4 + 8
n
1
12 un − vn = 11×
n
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ 12 (4
1 3u + 8v = 44
un = 4 − 3 12 n n
n
1 1
lim un = 4ﻭ . lim vn = 4 lim = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ < −1ﺇﺫﺍ < 1 (5
∞n →+ ∞n →+
n →+∞ 12 12
161
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 6
162
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 6
) ( unﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ u0 = 5 :ﻭﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ un +1 = 5un − 7nﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n
7 7
vn = un − n −ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ . n ) ( vnﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ِـ:
4 16
.1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺇﻜﺴل ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺒﺭﻤﺠﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ) ( unﻭ ) . ( vn
ﺴﺠل nﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ A1ﻭ 0ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B1ﺜﻡ 1ﻓﻲ ، C1ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺘﻴﻥ B1ﻭ C1ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ C2ﺜﻡ ﺴﺠل unﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ A2ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ u0ﺃﻱ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 5ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B2؛ ﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ
ﺤﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B3ﺜﻡ ﺤﺩﺩﻫﺎ ﻭﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ. ﺴﺠل vnﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ A3ﻭﺃﺤﺠﺯ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ
vn +1
( .2ﻻﺤﻅ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ،ﺃﻋﻁ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﻭل ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ) ( vnﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺴﻁﺭﺍ ﺃﺨﺭﺍ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ
vn
.5ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﻴﻥ S nﻭ Tnﺤﻴﺙ Sn = v0 + v1 + ... + vn :ﻭ . Tn = u0 + u1 + ... + un
163
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 6
ﻭﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ webﻭ ﻨﺼﺎﺩﻕ. ZOOM ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ 2nd .2ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
= Y
ﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺜﻡ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ TRACE .3ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ
ﺍﻝﻨﺴﻴﺞ.
ﻤﺜﺎل:
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻨﺸﺎﻫﺩ ﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل •
un + 3
= u n +1 u 0 = 2.5ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ
2u n + 1
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻨﺸﺎﻫﺩ ﺘﺒﺎﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (v nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل •
1
v 0 = 0.5ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ v n +1 = v n + 1
2
) (u nﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u 0 = 3ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻀﻊ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﻭل ﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
u +4
. u n +1 = n ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ
2u n + 1
ﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ Ti83plus
) (u nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u 0 = 3ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ:
2u n + 1
= u n +1
un + 2
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ PRGMﺜﻡ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ Newﺜﻡ ﻨﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﺴﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ.
PRGM
ﻨﺴﻤﻴﻪ ﻤﺜﻼ suite :ﺜﻡ ﻨﺩﺨل ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل.
ﻭ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ CTLﺜﻡ4 ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ Forﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ •
164
6 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ
ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻴﻌﺭﺽ ﺒﻨﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺒﻨﺎﺌﻪ ﻋﻘﺩﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺘﻭﻓﻴﺭ .ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ) (1ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺌﺩ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ 7%
ﻝﻠﻌﻘﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ) ( 2ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻔﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺌﺩ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻬﺎ 5%ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ.
ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺌﺩ ﺍﻝﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﺴﺏ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﻠﻎ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺩﻉ ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺘﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺌﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ ﻜل ﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ
ﺭﺼﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﻓﺭ ﻝﻠﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺒﻘﻬﺎ.
ﻓﻲ 01ﺠﺎﻨﻔﻲ 2006ﻭﻀﻌﺕ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺃﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺒﺸﺭﻯ ﻤﺒﻠﻎ 1000 DAﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻨﻙ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﺨﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺃﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺩ ) (1ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ
ﺍﺨﺘﺎﺭﺕ ﺒﺸﺭﻯ ﺍﻝﻌﻘﺩ ) . ( 2ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﹻ anﺇﻝﻰ ﺭﺼﻴﺩ ﺃﺴﻤﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺒﹻ b nﺇﻝﻰ ﺭﺼﻴﺩ ﺒﺸﺭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ . 2006 + n
.1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻜل ﻤﻥ a0ﻭ b0؟ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ a2 ، a1ﻭ a3ﺜﻡ b 2 ، b1ﻭ . b3
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( anﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ) (b nﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺱ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
.3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ anﻭ b nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
.4ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﺘﻤﻡ ﻤﻠﺊ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻏﺎﻴﺔ . n = 19
165
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ار ــد أ
ــ
أم ــ
ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﻁﺄ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ . 13
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 14ﺇﻝﻰ . 19 ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻤﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل 1
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 1− n 2
14 . −
12
= ، unﻫﻭ : ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ
1 + n2
ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0 ; + ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) un = f (nﺤﻴﺙ f 13
2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n
3
ﺒﹻ f ( x) = − x 2 :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
4 ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ، un = n × 2nﻫﻲ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ .
n
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ . Aﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍل ، AB 8
( un ) (4ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ . ( un ) (3ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ .
ACﻭ BCﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ r
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻌﺭ Pﻝﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ ﻴﺯﻴﺩ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ 5 %ﻓﻲ ﻜل 17 ﻓﺈﻥ rﻫﻭ ﺜﻠﺙ ﻁﻭل ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ .
ﻋﺎﻡ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺴﻌﺭﻫﺎ ﻴﻔﻭﻕ 2 Pﺒﻌﺩ :
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0 ≠ 0ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ 9
15 (2ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ . 10 (1ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ .
. q ≠ 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ un + 2 = 4un +1 − 3unﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
4 (3ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ ﻭ 5ﺃﺸﻬﺭ 14 (4 .ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ .
ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻓﺈﻥ . q = 3
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 18
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺤﻴﺙ a ، un +1 = aun + bﻭ b 10
3n + 2
ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . un = n − 2 :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ،ﻫﻲ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ .
4
( un ) (1ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ( un ) (2 .ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ. ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 11
9 ﺒﹻ un +1 = (1 − n)un :ﻫﻲ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
. ( un ) (3ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺒﺔ (4 .ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﻫﻭ
16 ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﺍﻥ v2 = 1 ، v1 = 2ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (vn 12
( un ) 19ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل u0ﻭ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ q 2
. ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ . ℕﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) (vnﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ .ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ : n 2
. un = u0 + q n (2 . un = u0 q n (1 3 + 7 + 11 + 15 + . . . + 203 = 5160 • 13
• 1 + 2 + 4 + 8 + . . . + 128 = 263
. un = u0 + (q − 1)n (4 . un = u0 q n +1 (3
166
6
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
y
y = 2x + 1 y=x اـــت
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
20
fﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، un = f (n) ، n
ﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ .
n−2
= . un °2 . un = 3n − 4 °1
n+2
π
1 . u n = cos 3π n − °4 . un = n 2 − n °3
4
0
u0 u1 u2 u3 x
21ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f
1
ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ، un +1 = f (un ) ، nﺜﻡ
y
y=x ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ . u3 ، u2 ، u1
y = x +1
4
1
= u0 u0 = −2
3
u0 = 4
-1 0 1 u22 u31 4 5 6 7
u80 x u 0 = −5
°4 2un °3
-1
u
n +1 = u 2
− 2u u + =
un + 1
n n n 1
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ . un 24 22ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ un + 1 :؛ un + 1؛ u2n؛ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
؛ u2 n + 1؛ u2 n −1؛ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ un2 ، ℕﺜﻡ ﻤﺜل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ .
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : . u n = n 2 − n °2 . u n = n + 1 °1
. u n = n 2 + n − 3 °2 . u n = 4 n − 1 °1 u0 = 1
. °4 u n = n °3
. u n = n + 1 °4 = . un
n
°3 un +1 = 2un − 3
n +1 23ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
25ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ un = 2 3n :
ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ،ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺜﻴل ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻝﻠﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ un + 1 :؛ u2n؛ u2 n − 1؛ un2
) ( unﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒِـ u0 :ﻭﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺘﺭﺍﺠﻌﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ .
ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
2 y
8 n + 1 °2 8n °1 y = -2x+1
64n
. 64 n °4 °3
8
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 26
ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . un = n − 5n + 6n + 3 :
3 2
1
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ u0؛ u1؛ . u2ﻫل ) ( unﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ؟
0 1 x
(2ﺤﻠل un − 3ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻭﺍﻤل . u1 u0
167
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ
n 5 ) (Cﻫﻭ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ، 27
= un ( un ) 29ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ + :
5 n ﻭ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = x
). (n ≥ 1
y
…
B0 B 1 B2 …
Bn
unﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺒﺭﺒﻁ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) Bn ، . . . ، B2 ، B1 ، B0ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﻨﺸﺎﻁ . (2
(1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ u1 = 1ﻭ . u2 = 3
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ u n + 1 = un + n + 1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . n ≥ 1
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ . u5 ، u4 ، u3
(4ﻤﻥ ﺍﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﻨﻀﻊ :
)n(n + 1
= vn
2
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u3 ، u2 ، u1
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . v1 •
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ u n + 1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . un
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ v n + 1ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ vnﻭ . nﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ . vn = un •
168
6 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل .ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ . v n + 1 − vn ( un ) 32ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺒﹻ :
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ . n 4 − 2n3 + 11n 2 + 14n + 24
= un
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ 44 24
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ، u2 ، u1 ، u0
ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ nﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . un = 2n3 − 30n 2 + 162
. u4 ، u3
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻ :
ﺠﺩ ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﺎ ﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻤﺒﺴﻁﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺩ . un (2
. f ( x ) = 2 x 3 − 30 x 2 + 162
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u7 ، u6 ، u5ﻫل ﺘﺨﻤﻴﻨﻙ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ؟ (3
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻝﻴل . 10
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺤﻴﺙ : 33
) ( unﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n 45
. un = (1, 01) − 1000 n
n
3n
= . un ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ (1ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺠﺩﻭﻝﺔ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﻥ u0ﺇﻝﻰ u2007
n+2
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ . (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ )u n + 1 − un = 0, 01 × (1, 01n − 100000
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﻴﻜﻭﻥ . un > 0 ﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n0ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل : n ≥ n0
u n +1 u n + 1 − un ≥ 0
. (3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺓ − 1
un ا
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 34ﺇﻝﻰ 42ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺘﻐﻴﺭ
169
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ
π
sin n ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ [∞ [ 0 ; + ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ f 48
4 °6 ( −1)n
= . un . u n = °5 ) sin(2π x
3n 2 n2 = ). f ( x ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ
n 1
5 x+
. un = . un = ( 0, 7 ) °7
n
°8 2
4
ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﹻ . un = f (n) :
n +1 1
= . un °10 . u n = n °9 ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
3n + 1 3
( un ) 52ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n
y
1
x +1
= ). f ( x ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ، un = f (n) :ﻤﻊ
2x − 1
(1ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل xﺇﻝﻰ ) ∞. ( + 0 1 x
170
6
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
y
u3
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺜﻠﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ. 67
y
u2
4
) (C f
3
u1 1 ا
4
2
ا
1
0 1 ) (C f x
1
u0
4 y
= . u n +1 ﻭ u0 = −1
4 − un
1
= vn ﻭﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺤﻴﺙ :
un − 2 2
-1
171
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ
u0 = −1 u0 = 1
. 2 (10 (9 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕﺒﹻ : 71
3u n + 1 = un 3u n + 1 − 2 un = 3
1 + un
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ. . u n +1 = 1 − u0 = −1ﻭ
75 1 + 2 un
ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
un + 1
= . vn ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺤﻴﺙ :
) (C f un
1
(1ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
ا
1
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( vnﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺤﺩﻫﺎ ﺍﻷﻭل
u1
0
u3 u4 u2
1
u0
ﻭﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ .
(3ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ vnﺜﻡ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) . ( un
y
173
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ
ﻤﺜﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 11ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻭﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ .
(1ﻋﻴﻥ αﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( Dﻭ )' . ( D
ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺴﻁﺭ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ 2007؟ ﻭﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻭﺩ ؟
(2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ αﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل (1ﻨﻀﻊ:
ﻨﺭﻗﻡ ﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻜﺘﺎﺏ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ ، nﺍﻝﺼﻔﺤﺔ 1ﺘﻜﻭﻥ 92 v n = un − α
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ .ﺒﺠﻤﻊ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻨﺠﺩ 2007ﻭﻝﻜﻥ
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( vnﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
ﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻘﻴﺕ ﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻭﻝﻡ ﻴﺤﺴﺏ ﺭﻗﻤﺎﻫﻤﺎ .
• ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ vnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ nﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﺎﺏ ؟
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﻴﻥ :
(2ﻭﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻠﺘﺼﻘﺘﻴﻥ ؟
S1 = v0 + v1 + v2 + . . . + vn
)ﺃﻭﻝﻤﺒﻴﺎﺩ .(2003
S2 = u0 + u1 + u2 + . . . + un
ﻤـﺴـﺎﺌـل ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ ( C1 ) . 2ﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ 90
ﺤﻴﺙ u0 = 1 :ﻭﻤﻥ ( un ) 93ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Bﻭﺘﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . C
u −1
. u n+ 1 = n ﺃﺠل ، n ≥ 1 B1ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] C1 ، [ BCﻭ E1ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ CB1C1 E1
2
ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻭ ) ( C2ﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ B1ﻭﺘﺤﺩﻫﺎ
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . u3 ، u2 ، u1
αﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ (2 ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Cﻭ . C1
174
6
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘـﻴﺔ
ﻝﻠﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺃﺩﻓﻊ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ،ﻝﻠﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ
95ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻭﻝﻠﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﺩﻨﺎﻨﻴﺭ . . .ﻭﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺤﺘﻰ
ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ، ( O ; i ; jﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )A1 ( 2 ; 2 ) ، A0 (1 ; 1
ﻨﺼل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺼﺎﻥ ؟
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻗﺔ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻬﺎ ، 30 cm ، An ( xn ; yn ) . . .ﺤﻴﺙ xn = n + 1 :
99
ﻨﺭﺴﻡ "ﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ" ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍ ﺀ ﻤﻥ ﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﻭﺭﻗﺔ .ﻜل ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺘﺯﺩ n 2 + 3n + 4
= . yn ﻭ
4
ﺒﹻ 1 cmﻋﻥ ﺴﺎﺒﻘﺘﻬﺎ .
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺍﻝﺨﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻜﺴﺭ :
A0 A1 A2 . . . Anﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
6
) ( An An + 1 ) ، . . . ، ( A1 A2 ) ، ( A0 A1ﺘﺸﻜل ﺤﺩﻭﺩ
2 1
5 1 . ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ
2
3
(1ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ . A4 ، A3 ، A2 ، A1 ، A0
4
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ n
n +1
= . yn − yn − 1 ﻴﻜﻭﻥ :
2
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻁﻭل "ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺼﻑ 10؟
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Anﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻗﻁﻊ ﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ) . ( Ρ
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻁﻭل "ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ" ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺼﻑ n؟
(4ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) ( Ρﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، A1 ، A0
(3ﺍﺒﺘﺩﺍ ﺀ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺘﺨﺭﺝ "ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻨﻴﺔ"
. A4 ، A3 ، A2
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺭﻗﺔ .
ﺘﻀﻡ ﺜﺎﻨﻭﻴﺔ 1500ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍ . 96
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Ω 0ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ 100
ﺤﻴﺙ ( C0 ) . AΩ 0 = 10ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Ω 0 ﻴﺯﺩﺍﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ ﺒـ 20ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍ.
1 (1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻤﺴﺔ؟
ﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ h . 5ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ .
3 (2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﺸﺭﺓ؟
) ( C1ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( C0ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ hﻭ ) ( C2ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( C1
(3ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺴﻨﺔ ﻴﻔﻭﻕ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻭﻴﺔ ،
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cn +1 ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ hﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n
2000ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ؟
( Cnﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ )
ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻝﻡ ﺤﺎﻝﻴﺎ ﺘﻘﺩﺭ ﺒﹻ 1, 75 %ﻓﻲ 97
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ Ω nﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cnﻭ Rnﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ.
ﻜل ﻋﺎﻡ .
) ( C0 ) ( C1 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻝﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺎﻡ 1990ﻫﻭ 5,3
) ( C2
ﻤﻠﻴﺎﺭ ﻨﺴﻤﺔ ،ﻓﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺴﻜﺎﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ :
Ω0 A
Ω1 Ω2 ﺴﻨﺔ 2030؟ ﺴﻨﺔ 2007؟ ﺴﻨﺔ 2000؟
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺭﻴﻜﻭﺭﺩ )(Robert Recorde 1510 – 1558 98
ﻤﺨﺘﺭﻉ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ " = " .
(1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ln = AΩ nﻭ ﻋﻥ Rnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﺃﺒﻴﻊ ﻝﻙ ﺤﺼﺎﻨﺎ ﻝﻪ 4ﺼﻔﺎﺌﺢ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ 6
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) ( Cn (2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ n
ﻤﺴﺎﻤﻴﺭ .
ﻭ ) ( Cn + 1ﻤﺘﻤﺎﺴﺘﻴﻥ ﺨﺎﺭﺠﻴﺎ .
175
6
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﺔ
(3ﻨﻀﻊ unﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺒﺎﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . ( Cn
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ 102
• ﺃﻜﺘﺏ unﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( unﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺃﺴﺎﺴﻬﺎ.
(4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Snﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ . ( n ≥ 0 ) un
• ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ S nﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . lim S n •
∞n →+
y
B3 A4
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ .
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻗﺭﺍﺹ ﻫﻲ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ . y = ax + b
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻀﻠﻌﺎﺕ ﻤﻨﺘﻅﻤﺔ . y=x
103
B2 A3
B1
A2
A1
1
. hn = An Bn ، . . . ، h2 = A2 B2 ، h1 = A1 B1
176
7
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
ﻭﻝﺩ ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ﻋﺎﻡ 287ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺠﺯﻴﺭﺓ ﺼﻘﻠﻴﺔ ،ﻭﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻝﺩﻩ ﻓﻠﻜﻴ ﹰﺎ ﺸﻬﻴﺭﺍﹰ ،ﻭﻜﻤﻌﻅﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﺒﺎﺏ
ﺁﻨﺫﺍﻙ ﺴﺎﻓﺭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻹﺴﻜﻨﺩﺭﻴﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻴﻭﻨﺎﻥ ﻁﻠﺒ ﹰﺎ ﻝﻠﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ،ﻭﻴﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺜﻴﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺅﺭﺨﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻡ
ﺃﻥ ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻋﻅﻡ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﺩﻴﻤﺔ .ﻤﻥ ﺃﺸﻬﺭ ﺍﻜﺘﺸﺎﻓﺎﺘﻪ ،ﻁﺭﻕ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﺤﺠﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻝﺠﺎﻨﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻸﺠﺴﺎﻡ ،ﻭﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻲ ﺩﻗﻴﻕ ﻝﻠﺠﺫﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ
ﻭﺃﺨﺘﺭﻉ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻝﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ.ﻭﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺤﺩﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ π
ﻭﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ﺒﺩﻗﺔ ﻋﺎﻝﻴﺔ .
ﺃﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺠﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻜﺎﻨﻴﻙ ﻓﺄﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻜﺘﺸﻑ ﺍﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺴﻴﺔ ﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ
ﺍﻝﺜﻘل ﻝﻸﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻷﺠﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺼﻠﺒﺔ ﻭﺍﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﺍﻓﻊ ﻭﻤﺨﺘﺭﻉ
ﻗﻼﻭﻭﻅ ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ .ﻭﻤﻥ ﺃﺒﺭﺯ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﻨﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻜﺘﺸﻔﻬﺎ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﻁﻔﻭ ﺍﻷﺠﺴﺎﻡ
ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﻴﺎﻩ ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺼﺎﺭ ﻴﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻ "ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ".
ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ﻭﻗﺩ ﻗﺘل ﺃﺭﺨﻤﻴﺩﺱ ﻋﺎﻡ 212ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻼﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﻤﺎﻥ.
287ﻕ ﻡ 212 /ﻕ ﻡ
177
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 7
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . 2 IA + IB = 0 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Jﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . JB − 2 JC = 0 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . 2GA + GB − 2GC = 0 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ABCﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ . J
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . 3GI = 2GCﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G ، I ، C؟
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . −GJ + 2GA = 0ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G ، J ، A؟
(4ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( AJﻭ ) ( CI؟
(5ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ G
(6ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . BG = 2CA
(7ﺇﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( BGﻭ ) ( ACﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
178
7 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
A G B
ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻤﻴﺯﺍﻥ ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺼﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻁﺭﻓﻲ ] ، [ ABﻜﻔﺔ
ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ Aﺘﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ . Mﻝﻭﺯﻥ ﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ mﻨﻀﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ
M
ﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Gﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻴﺯﺍﻥ ﻝﻪ ﻤﻴﺯﺓ ﻭﻫﻲ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻜﺘل ﻋﺩﻴﺩﺓ .
m
ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻜﺘل ﻭ ﺍﻷﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻠﻭﻏﺭﺍﻡ ) . ( kg
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ . M = 2 kg
(1ﺃﻴﻥ ﻴﺠﺏ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ m = 4 kg؟
(2ﺃﻴﻥ ﻴﺠﺏ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ m = 3 kg؟
(3ﺃﻴﻥ ﻴﺠﺏ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ m = 2 kg؟
2
(4ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ . AG = AB :
3
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﻀﺎﻋﺔ m؟
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻁﺭﻑ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﺨﻼل ﻓﺼل ﺩﺭﺍﺴﻲ .
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ
12 4 ﺍﻝﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺒﻴﺔ
13.5 2 ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺴﻼﻤﻴﺔ
09.5 2 ﺍﻹﺠﺘﻤﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﺒﻴﺔ
10 3 ﺍﻝﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻨﺴﻴﺔ
10 2 ﺍﻝﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻹﻨﺠﻠﻴﺯﻴﺔ
11 5 ﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ
08.5 4 ﻋﻠﻭﻡ ﻓﻴﺯﻴﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ
09.5 4 ﻋﻠﻭﻡ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ
12 1 ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺴﻴﻘﻰ
13.5 1 ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ
16 1 ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﺔ
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻔﺼﻠﻲ ﻝﻠﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ .
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل m1ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل m2ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺩﺒﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل m3ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ.
13 × m1 + 13 × m 2 + 3 × m 3
.ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ؟ (3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
29
179
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 7
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:2ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ABﻭ CDﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( CDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ .
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ 0ﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻤﻊ ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
.2ﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﺤﻴﺙ u = ABﻫﻲ ﻁﻭل ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ABﻭﻨﻜﺘﺏ . u = AB = AB
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ:
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) u = 1ﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺃﻁﻭﺍل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ(.
AB = 0ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . ku = k × u
) M ∈ ( ABﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ k ) AM = k ABﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ(
.3ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ.
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :1ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( CDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ . AB = kCD
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :2ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ . AB = k AC
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( O , I , Jﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ) A( x , yﻭ ) ' . B ( x ', y
x '− x
. :ﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺘﺎ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ AB
y '− y
x
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:3ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O , I , Jﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ . u
y
ﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻫﻲ . u = x 2 + y 2 :
180
7 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ،ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺤﻴﺙ 5BD = ACﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺤﻴﺙ 6 BE = BC
A C
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 2
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ α ،ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻭﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ E ، 1ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ
. AE = α ABﻝﺘﻜﻥ Fﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ . BF = (1 − α ) BCﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ADﻭ ﻴﺸﻤل Eﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
) ( CDﻓﻲ . Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻭ ﻴﺸﻤل Fﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ADﻓﻲ . Gﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( EHﻭ ) ( FG
ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Iﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( EF ) ، ( ACﻭ ) ( GHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺔ .
( )
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ A; AB, AD
181
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 7
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ αﻭ βﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ . α + β ≠ 0
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺤﻴﺙ α GA + β GB = 0 :
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ αﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ( A , αﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ .
ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A , α ) ; ( B , βﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺘﻴﻥ)ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻭﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ nﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ(.
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ }) . {( A , α ) ; ( B , β
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ Bﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ (α + β ) GA = 0ﻭﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ α + β ≠ 0ﻓﺈﻥ GA = 0ﺃﻱ Gﻴﻨﻁﺒﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ A
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α + β = 0ﺃﻱ α = − βﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺘﺼﺒﺢ α (GA − GB ) = 0ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α ≠ 0ﻭ A ≠ B
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ .ﻤﺜﻼ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α = 2ﻭ β = −2ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ A ≠ Bﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A, 2 ) ; ( B, −2ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ.
ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ:ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α = βﻨﺤﺼل GA = −GBﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺘﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . Bﻭﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻨﺄﺨﺫ . α = β = 1
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ.
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ α GA + β GB = 0 :ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ α GA + β GA + β AB = 0ﻭﻤﻨﻪ (α + β ) GA = − β ABﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ α + β ≠ 0
β
= A . AGﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺘﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ Gﻭﺤﻴﺩ . ﻓﺈﻥ AB
α +β
.ﻓﺈﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﺨﻭﺍﺹ i 1:ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ }) { ( A , α ) ; ( B , β
}) . {( A, kα ) ; ( B, k βﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .
B ، Aﻭ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ. i 2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ }) . { ( A , α ) ; ( B , βﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:
α GA + β GB = 0 i 1ﺒﻀﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻓﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﻐﻴﺭﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ kﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ:
kα GA + k β GB = 0ﻭﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ α + β ≠ 0ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ k ≠ 0ﻓﺈﻥ kα + k β ≠ 0ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ .
β
GA = −ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ. i 2ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ 1ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ AB
α +β
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . α MA + β MB = (α + β ) MG M
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ α MA + β MB = α MG + α GA + β MG + β GB : Mﻭﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ α GA + β GB = 0
ﻓﺈﻥ . α MA + β MB = (α + β ) MG
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . MA + MB = 2 MG M
182
7 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 3
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ .
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ِ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 3ﻭ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
(2ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ -4ﻭ 3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
β
).ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻹﺴﺘﻌﺎﻨﺔ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻁﺎﻝﻴﺱ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤل( ﺇﻝﻰ α + βﺠﺯﺀ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺇﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ Aﻨﻀﻊ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﺩ
α +β
ﺤــل 3 + 1 = 4 (1 :ﻭ 4 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ .ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ 3GA + GB = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
1
B AG = ABﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
4
) ( ABﻭﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ] [ AC
ﻨﻘﺴﻤﻬﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ 4ﺃﺠﺯﺍﺀ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
1
G
Dﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ACﺒﺤﻴﺙ AD = ACﺜﻡ ﻤﻥ Dﻨﻨﺸﺊ
4
A
D
C ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ∆ ) . ( BCﻴﻘﻁﻊ
) ( ABﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G
3 − 4 = −1 (2ﻭ −1 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ .ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ −4 HA + 3HB = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
AH = −3 ABﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻭﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ.
( )
8
ﺤــل AK = − AB (1:ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 3 AK = −8 AK + KBﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ 11AK + 8 KB = 0ﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ:
3
11KA − 8 KB = 0ﺇﺫﺍ Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 11ﻭ -8ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ MAﻭ ABﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ αﺤﻴﺙ
( )
AM = α ABﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ AM = α AM + MBﻭﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ . (1 − α ) AM = α MBﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ:
(1 − α ) AM − α MB = 0ﺒﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ . (1 − α ) MA + α MB = 0
(1 − α ) + α = 1ﻭ 1 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 1 − αﻭ αﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻫﻭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﺭﺍﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) . {( A,1 − α ) ; ( B, αﺤﻴﺙ αﻴﻤﺴﺢ . ℝ
183
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 7
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ، B ، A :ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻭ β ، αﻭ γﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ . α + β + γ ≠ 0
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ β ، αﻭ γﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺤﻴﺙα GA + β GB + γ GC = 0 :
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ β ، αﻭ γﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ.
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﺒﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ GB = GA + ABﻭ GC = GA + ACﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ (α + β + γ ) GA + β AB + γ AC = 0
β γ
( )
1
= AG = AGﺃﻱ β AB + γ AC AB + ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ AC
α + β +γ α + β +γ α + β +γ
1
ﻭ β AB + γ AC = uﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ AG = λ uﻭﻤﻨﻪ Gﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ . ﺒﻭﻀﻊ = λ
α + β +γ
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ . Cﻭﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻓﻲ
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﻝـ ، 1ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ
2
، ABCﺒﺎﻝﻔﻌل Gﺘﺤﻘﻕ GA + GB + GC = 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 3AG = AB + ACﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ' . AG = AAﺤﻴﺙ ' A
3
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ BCﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺜﻠﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻌﺩ ﻤﻥ Aﻭ ﺜﻠﺙ ﺍﻝﺒﻌﺩ ﻤﻥ ' Aﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
.ﻓﺈﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ }) { ( A , α ) ; ( B , β ) ; ( C , γ
}) . {( A, kα ) ; ( B, k β ) ; ( C , kγﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ β ، αﻭ γﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . α MA + β MB + γ MC = (α + β + γ ) MG ، M
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﺒﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ MB = MG + GB ، MA = MG + GAﻭ MC = MG + GCﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ
α MA + β MB + γ MC = (α + β + γ ) MG
ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ.
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ G :ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ β ، αﻭ γﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α + β ≠ 0ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Dﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Dﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ α + βﻭ γﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ α GA + β GB + γ GC = 0ﻭ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻝﺩﻴﻴﻨﺎ α MA + β MB = (α + β ) MD
ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Mﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ α GA + β GB = (α + β ) GD ، Gﻭﻤﻨﻪ (α + β ) GD + γ GC = 0ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ G
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Dﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ α + βﻭ γﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﻭﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻤﺭﺠﺤﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ .
184
7 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
، B ، Aﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻭﺍﻤل 1 ، 2ﻭ 5ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
C ﺤــل 2 + 1 + 5 = 8 :ﻭ 8 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﻥ Gﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ
ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ .ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، Aﻭ C
J G
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻭﺍﻤل 1 ، 2ﻭ 5ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ
2 GA + GB + 5GC = 0ﻭ ﺒﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ
GB = GA + ABﻭ GC = GA + ACﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ
A B 1 5
I K 8GA = − AB − 5 ACﻭﻤﻨﻪ AG = AB + AC
8 8
5 1 1 5
AG = AB + ACﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ Gﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ] [ ABﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Kﺤﻴﺙ ٍ AI = ABﻭ . AK = AB
8 8 8 8
5
ﻤﻥ Kﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BCﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ACﻓﻲ Jﺇﺫﺍ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻁﺎﻝﻴﺱ . AJ = AC
8
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ AG = AI + AJﺃﻱ AGﻫﻲ ﻤﺤﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ AIﻭ . AJ
185
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 7
.
186
7 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 9
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O; i , jﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B ( −1; 4 ) ، A (1; 2ﻭ ). C ( −3;3
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
. ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A, −1) ; ( B, −3) ; ( C , 2 (3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ H
B ، Aﻭ Cﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( AC ﺤــل(1:ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
−4 −2
ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ .ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ AB ﻭ AC ﻫﻤﺎ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( ACﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
1 2
( −2 ) × ( 1 ) − ( −4 ) × ( 2 ) = 6ﻭ 6 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( ACﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ .ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
B ، Aﻭ Cﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
(2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABCﻨﻀﻊ ) . G ( xG ; yG
2+4+3 1−1 − 3
= . yGﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ xG = −1ﻭ . yG = 3 = xGﻭ
3 3
ﺇﺫﻥ ). G ( −1;3
−1 − 3 + 2 = −2 (3ﻭ −2 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ Hﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﻨﻀﻊ ) . H ( xH ; yH
= yH
( −1) × 2 + ( −3) × 4 + 2 × 3 = xHﻭ
)( −1) ×1 + ( −3) × ( −1) + 2 × ( −3
−2 −2
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ xH = 2 :ﻭ yH = 4ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ H ( 2; 4 ) :
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ Aﻭ Bﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﺭﺠﺤﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 2 ، 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭﻤﻨﻪ I
G ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻭ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ Cﻭ Dﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Jﻤﺭﺠﺤﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 1،1
1
A I ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ CDﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ 4GI + 2GJ = 0ﻭﻤﻨﻪ B IG = IJ
3
D C
1 + 1 + 1 + 3 = 6 (2ﻭ 6 ≠ 0ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ Hﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ.
H
. HA + HB + HC + 3HD = 0ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ
I
ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤل . 1ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ B ، Aﻭ Cـ I
A B ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABCﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ 3GI + 3GD = 0ﺇﺫﻥ Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ][ ID
187
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 7
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ:
ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ MA − 2MB + 3MC ABC .1ﻤﺜﻠﺙ .ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ = 6 :
ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ .
ABC .5ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . AB = AC = BC = αﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Γﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ MA − 4MB + MC = MA − 2MB + MC :
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) . ( Γ
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ MA − 2MB + MCﻤﺴﺘﻘل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ }). {( A ,1) , ( B , −4 ) , (C ,1
3
GM = αﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( Γﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯﺓ. ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
2
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) . ( Γ
188
7
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ .ﻭ Oﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ' Aﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] B ' ، [ BCﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] C ' ، [ ACﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ . OH = OA + OB + OC :
(1ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺭﺴﻤﺎ ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . H
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ AHﻭ ' OAﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ .
ﺇﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( AHﻭ ) ( BCﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﻴﻥ .
(3ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ H؟
(4ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ Oﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Hﻭ Gﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ −1ﻭ 3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
(5ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G ، Oﻭ Hﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .ﺤﺩﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ .
ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ G ، Oﻭ Hﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺒﻌﻀﻬﺎ
ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G ، Oﻭ Hﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻭﻻﺭ ) (Droite d' Eulerﻝﻠﻤﺜﻠﺙ
. ABC
189
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 7
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ .
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Q ، Pﻭ Rﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
• . 2 PB + PC = 0
1
• . AQ = AC
3
• Rﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( BQ ) ، ( APﻭ ) ( CRﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ .
190
7 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ .
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻝﻴﻜﻥ ] [ AHﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﻠﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﻀﻠﻊ ] [ BCﺤﻴﺙ . AH = 4cm
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ B ، Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ 1 ، 2ﻭ 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
M (2ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﺤﻴﺙ . u = 2 MA − MB − MC :
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . 2 MA + MB + MC = u :
.ﺤﻴﺙ nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ }) {( A, 2 ) ; ( B, n ) ; (C , n (4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Gnﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ B ، Aﻭ C
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gnﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝـ . n
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ Gnﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AH
(5ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ 2MA + nMB + nMC = n u :ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Γ n
ﺘﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ Γ nﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ .
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ AGnﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . n
4x
= ) . f ( xﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [∞ . [ 0, + (6ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺤﻴﺙ :
x +1
(7ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ . AGnﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ . Γ n
( )
u = − AB + AC (2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . u = 8
(3ﻨﺩﺨل Gﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ MB ، MAﻭ MCﻭ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ 4 MG = 8 :
A G0 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ MG = 2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Gﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ .2
2 + n + n = 2 + 2n (4ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ Gn nﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ .
( )
2Gn A + nGn B + nGnC = 0ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ( 2 + 2n ) Gn A + n AB + AC = 0
G G1 n n
= Gn Aﻭ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ = Gn Aﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ AH ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ AH
G2 1+ n 1+ n
n
< 0ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝـ . nﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ Gﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AH <1
1+ n
B H (5ﻨﺩﺨل Gﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ MB ، MAﻭ MCﻭ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ C ( 2 + 2n ) MG n = 8n :
(7ﻤﻥ lim f ( x ) = 4ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ . lim AGn = 4ﻭﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ Γ nﺘﺅﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Hﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 4
∞n →+ ∞x →+
191
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 7
• .1ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺤﺭﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ A ′ﻭ B ′ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ ABﻭ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
AB ′ = 1ﻭ BA ′ = 2
GA 1
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ= :
GB 2
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 2ﻭ .1
• .2ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺤﺭﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ A ′ﻭ B ′ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ ABﻭ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
AB ′ = 3ﻭ BA ′ = 1
GA
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ= 3 :
GB
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 1ﻭ .-3
.3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺘﻴﻥ.
.4ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺠﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺘﺤﻘﻘﻬﺎ aﻭ bﺤﺘﻰ:
ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺇﻝﻰ ] [ ABﻭ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ Aﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ . B •
ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺇﻝﻰ ] [ ABﻭ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ Bﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ . A •
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺇﻝﻰ ] [ ABﻭ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ Aﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ . B •
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺇﻝﻰ ] [ ABﻭ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻗﺭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ Bﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ . A •
. Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){ ( A , −2 ) , ( B ,3 ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
192
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺃﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 10ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A, 2); ( B,1ﻓﺈﻥ:
ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 11ﺇﻝﻰ 17 1
AG = AB
m 11ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ )( B,5m − 2) ، ( A,3m 3
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ] [ ABﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭ Cﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ 2
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ:
1 AC = 3 ABﻓﺈﻥ Aﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Bﻭ C
≠m (3 m ≠ 0 (2 m ≠ 1 (1
4 ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 1ﻭ -3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
12ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A, 2);( B,3ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺤﻴﺙ: ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ Gﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ I 3
3
5 AG = 3 AB (3 2GA = 3 AB (2 AG = AB (1 ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻓﺈﻥ Aﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ
2 }){(G,3);( I , 2
G 13ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) ، {( A,1); ( B,3ﺇﺫﻥ Aﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ
4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻓﺈﻥ Aﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ:
ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( B,1); ( D,1);(C , −1
}){( B,3);(G, −4)} (2 ، {( B, 4);(G, 3 (1
B ، A 5ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ
{( B,3);(G, 4)} (3
ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ .ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ:
14
4 AG − 7 BG − 3GC = 7 AB + 3 AC
ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ،ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ 6ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ:
{( A, −1); (C , 4)} (2 ، {( A, −1); ( D,1)} (1 AG = AB + 3 ACﻓﺈﻥ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ
15ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A, −2); ( B,3);(C , −1ﻫﻭ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ABCD 7ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻤﺤﺩﺏ ﻭ Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻗﻁﺭﻴﻪ.
193
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
1
2GA − 3GB = 3BA (6 BG = AB (5 [ AB] 18ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = 8cm
5
A 22ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ G .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, αﻭ ) ( B, βﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ .ﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ αﻭ βﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, αﻭ ) ( B, β 1 1
= αﻭ =β α = 4 (1ﻭ (2 β = 6
3 6
3GB − 2 AB = 0 (1
α = 3 (3ﻭ α = 3009 (4 β = −2ﻭ β = 2006
−2 AB + 3GA − 5GB = 0 (2
A 19ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
2
2 AB = GB (3 ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
3
B (4ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ A }){(A , 4); (B ,5 (1
}){( A, 2); ( B, −3 23ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Cﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){(A ,8);(B , −5 (2
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ Aﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ؟ Bﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ؟ }){(A , −6); (B , 2 (3
}){( A,3);(C ,1 24ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Bﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ 1 1
A , − ; B , − (4
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ Aﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ؟ Cﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ؟ 2 3
194
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﻭﻋﻥ Pﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . C (2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻨﻪ ﻤﻬﻤﺎ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ:
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( NC ) ، ( AMﻭ )( BP − MA' − MB' + 2 MC' = 0
ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ. (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ' B' ، Aﻭ ' Cﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
34ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ I 30ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ G1 .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, 2ﻭ )(C , −3
3 1 ﻭ G2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A,1ﻭ )(C , −3
ﻭ Jﺤﻴﺙ Iﻤﺭﺠﺢ A, − ﻭ B,
2 2 (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل.
ﻭ Jﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, 2ﻭ )( D, −3
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ AG1ﻭ BG2ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ABﻭ AC
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل. (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( BG2ﻭ ) ( AG1ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ
1
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ CI = AB − BC :ﻭ CJ = 2 AD − DC 31ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ L .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, 2ﻭ )(C ,1
2
(3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ I ، Cﻭ Jﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ. Mﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A,1ﻭ )( B, 2
(4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Kﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ DJﻭ Lﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ: Nﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) (C ,1ﻭ )( B, −4
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ Bﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) (C ,1ﻭ )( N ,3
AB = BL
ﺃ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Cﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ]. [ KL (2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ LN
ﺏ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( KLﻭ ) ( BDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ (3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ ][CL
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ Cﻤﺭﺠﺢ )( D,1 ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ LMJIﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ O
195
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
2 BA + 3BG − 5GC = 0 (2
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ
BG = 2 BA − BC (3
B ، A 38ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ
2AG = AB + AC (4
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ )ﺇﻥ ﻭﺠﺩ( ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, β ) ، ( A, αﻭ ) (C , γﻓﻲ
1 2
CG = CA − CB (5 ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
3 3
B ، A 42ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ D .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ γ = 1 ، β = 6 ، α = 4 (1
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. 1 1 1
γ = ، β = ، α = (2
2 3 6
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Aﺜﻡ ﻋﻥ Bﺜﻡ ﻋﻥ Cﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
γ = −4 ، β = −2 ، α = −1 (3
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
γ = 3 ، β = 0 ، α = −1 (4
}){( A,1);( B,1); (C , −1 D (1ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
ABC 39ﻤﺜﻠﺙ.ﺍﺫﻜﺭ ﺇﻥ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
}){( A, 2);( B,3);(C , −6 D (2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
ﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
}){( A, −3);( B, 7);(C , −14 D (3ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
2GA + 2GB + 2GC = 0 (1
1 1 5
D (4ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ A, ; B, ; C , − 5GA − 3GB − GC = 0 (2
2 4 8
3GA − 4GB = 2 AB + AC (3
}){( A, −3);( B,1);(C ,3 D (5ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ 3 1
AG = − AB + AC (4
{( A, }
D (6ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ )2);( B, 2); (C , −3 2 4 2
1
ABC 43ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ BG = AB − AC (5
2
}){( A,1); ( B, 2);(C ,1
2GA − 3GB − 4GC = 3BA (6
(1ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺸﻜﻼ ﻤﺒﻴﻨﺎ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G B ،ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ A 40
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ β ، αﻭ γﺤﻴﺙ Aﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ .ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻝﻠﻤﺭﺠﺢ ،ﺃﻨﺸﺊ
ﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) . {(G, α ); ( B, β );(C , γ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
B ، A 44ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ. Eﻤﺭﺠﺢ }){( A, −1); ( B,1); (C , 2 (1
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ )( B, 2) ، ( A,1 Fﻤﺭﺠﺢ }){( A,1); ( B, −1);(C , −1 (2
ﻭ )(C , −4
Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ }){( A, 0);( B, 2);(C ,1 (3
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ AGﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ABﻭ ، ACﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ . G
Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ }){( A,1); ( B, 2);(C , 4 (4
45ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ G .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ )( B, −4) ، ( A, 2
1 1 1
ﻭ ) I . (C , 6ﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ AC I (5ﻤﺭﺠﺢ A, ; B, − ; C ,
2 3 6
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ. }){( A, 0); ( B, 0); (C ,8 J (6ﻤﺭﺠﺢ
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺸﻜﻼ.
ABC 41ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ.
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Iﻭ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
ﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ β ، αﻭ γﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ
B ، A 46ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
) ( B, β) ، ( A, αﻭ ) (C , γﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, −3ﻭ ). ( B, 2
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A,1ﻭ ). (C , −2
BG = −3BA + 2GC (1
196
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BCﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ). ( ML Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B,1) ، ( A, −1ﻭ )(C , −1
53ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻭ Hﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ: (1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ H ، Gﻭ Kﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺌﻬﺎ.
2
AH = AB (2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ H ، Gﻭ Kﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ
3
ABC 47ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BC
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Iﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( B,1); (C , 2
( )
1
ﻭ jﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( A,1); (C , 4 (1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ AI = AB + AC
2
ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( A,1); ( B, 2);(C , 4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ (2ﻫل Aﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B,1) ، (C ,1ﻭ ) ( I , −2؟
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( BJ ) ، ( AIﻭ ) (CHﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ . G ABC 48ﻤﺜﻠﺙ .
ABC 54ﻤﺜﻠﺙ G .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Jﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( A, 2); ( B,1);(C ,1 1 1
AI = AB + ACﻭ AJ = AB + AC
2 2
(1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BC
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Iﺜﻡ Jﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ C
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ. GB + GC = 2GI :
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ.
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Iﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ
49ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ، ABCﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ )، ( A,1
ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ .
) ( B, 4ﻭ )(C , −3
(3ﺍﺴﺘﺨﻠﺹ.
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, 4ﻭ )(C , −3
ABC 55ﻤﺜﻠﺙ B ' .ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ ACﻭ ' C
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ AI
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ]. [ AB
B ، A 50ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
Iﻭ Jﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
2 1 (1ﻫل ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺘﻴﻥ }){( A, 2); ( B, −1
BI = BCﻭ BJ = BC
3 3 ﻭ }) {( A, −3);(C , −1ﺘﻘﺒﻼﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﺤﻴﻥ؟ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ
3
ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ HﺒـC ' H = C ' J : ﻨﻌﻡ ،ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﺒـ Kﻭ Lﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
5
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( A,1); ( B, 2);(C , 2
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( K , −1ﻭ )( L, 4
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ' ، Iﻭ Hﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
ABC 51ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ .
ABC 56ﻤﺜﻠﺙ I .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( ABﺤﻴﺙ
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B,3) ( A,1ﻭ )(C , −3
2 IA + IB = 0
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( AGﻭ ) ( BCﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( ICﺤﻴﺙ . 3GI − 2GC = 0
ABC D 52ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل I .ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ ABﻭ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AGﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BCﻓﻲ . H
ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
(1ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺸﻜﻼ.
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ Fﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) (C ,1ﻭ )( D,3
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( A, 2);( B,1);(C , −2
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [GDﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ )، ( A,1
(3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Lﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( B,1); (C , −2 ) (C ,1) ، ( B,1ﻭ ). ( D,3
ﺃ -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Lﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( BC
(3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( IF
ﻭ ) ( AG 3
(4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Lﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ. AL = AD :
ﺏ -ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺤﻴﺙ . BH = k BC 4
197
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
ABC 57ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ G
(1ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) Hﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل Kﻭ .( L Hﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ BC
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Gﻭ Dﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ
ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ]. [ HA
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Jﻭ Kﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . HG = HB + HC
ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
(3ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ HAﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ
(4ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Lﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ
HBﻭ ، HCﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
Hﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ B ، Aﻭ Cﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ
(5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ.
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ.
ABC 60ﻤﺜﻠﺙ.ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Iﻭ Lﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
ABC 58ﻤﺜﻠﺙ I .ﻭ Gﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ:
(k ∈ ℝ) AL = k AB ، CJ = kCA ، BI = k BC 1 1
AI = ACﻭ . BG = BI
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ Gﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABC 3 3
1 ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺸﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل = k
3 ) ( B, 6) ، ( A, 2ﻭ ). (C ,1
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ GI + GJ + GL = 0 :
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Iﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, 2ﻭ ) (C ,1ﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
(3ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺜﻠﺙ IJL؟
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ . 2GA + GC
ABC 61ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ . Gﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، I ، F ، E
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, 2ﻭ ) ، ( I ,1ﺜﻡ ﺃﻥ
K ، Jﻭ Lﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
. 2GB + GI = 0
1 2 1
، AE = AC ، AL = AB ، AK = AB (3ﺃ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ 2GA + 6GB + GC = 3GI + 6GB
3 3 3
2 1 2 ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ . 2GA + 6GB + GC = 0ﺍﺴﺘﺨﻠﺹ
BI = BC ، BJ = BC ، AF = AC
3 3 3 ABCD 59ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ G .ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
Iﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ ][ AB
ﻭ ] [ BCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺒﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل.
198
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
MA + 2 MB = -MA + 4 MB ABC 62ﻤﺜﻠﺙ .ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Iﻭ Jﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل.
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺤﻴﻥ Gﻭ Hﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺘﻴﻥ Gﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [CIﻴﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ
}) {( A,1); ( B, 2ﻭ }) {( A, −1); ( B, 4ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ. ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G ، Aﻭ Jﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ
199
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
B ، A 69ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
5 3
= − MA + MB − MC
2 . AB = 10
ﺏ( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ ACﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( E (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }){( A,1); ( B, 4
ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ) ( E ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( A, 4); ( B,1
ABC 73ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ I . Aﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ BC (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ، Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
) (Γﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Aﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺸﻤل I ﺤﻴﺙ . MA + 4 MB = 10
Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (Γﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻗﻁﺭﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ I
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ' ، Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, −1) ، ( A, 4ﻭ ). (C , −1
ﺤﻴﺙ . MA + 4 MB = 4MA + MB
(2ﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ αﻭ βﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ Aﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ABC 70ﻤﺜﻠﺙ G .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
) ( B, β) ، (G , 2ﻭ ). (C , α
}). {( A,1); ( B, −2);(C ,3
(3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
2 MG + MB + MC = 2 BC؟
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﺤﻴﺙ MM ' = MA − 2 MB + 3MC
74ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = 8cmﻭ BC = 4cm
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﻭ . AC = 6cm
ﻭ u = 2 MA − MB − MC
(1ﺃ -ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Iﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( A,1); ( B, 4
ﺃ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ gﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . I
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﺤﻴﺙ ' . u = MM
ﺏ -ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Jﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( B, 2); (C , −1
ﺏ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ، Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . J
. MA − 2 MB+3MC = u ﺤﻴﺙ:
(3ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ Gﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
ABC 71ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ Aﻭﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ
}){( A,1);( B, 4); (C , −2
AB = 4cm
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻫﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) (CIﻭ ) . ( AJ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
MA − MB − 2 MC = 4
. MA + 4 MB = 5 2MB − MC
(1ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ Gﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ )( B, −1) ، ( A,1
(5ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
ﻭ ) (C , −2ﻻﺴﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ MA − MB − 2 MC
. MA + 4 MB-2MC = 4 MA − MC
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ M ∈ ( E ) :ﺘﻜﺎﻓﺊ MG = 2
ABC 75ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ Aﺤﻴﺙ AB = 12 (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻁﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) . ( E
ﻭ AC = 5 (4ﻤﺜل Gﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) . ( E
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ E1ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ABC 72ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ .ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ 5cm
ﺤﻴﺙ3MA + 5MB + 2 MC = 6 MA + 4 MC : (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B,1) ، ( A, −1ﻭ )، (C , −1
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ E2ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ABCGﻤﻌﻴﻥ.
ﺤﻴﺙ3MA + 5MB + 2 MC = 3 AC : (2ﺃ( ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻹﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ، ( E
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ E3ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
200
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
2MA + MB+MC = -2MA + MB+MC ﺤﻴﺙ3MA − 5MB + 2MC = 6 MA + 4 MC :
201
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : ﺠـ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺒﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ
(1ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ∆( ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . k
ﺤﻴﺙ MA + MB + MC = 4 MD − ME (3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ' Mﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﺒﺎﺴﺘﺜﻨﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ B؟
(2ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) (Γﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
82ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, 2) ، ( A,1ﻭ )(C ,3
ﺤﻴﺙ MA − MB + MC = MD − ME
ﻭ Jﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A,1ﻭ ). ( B, 2
ABC 85ﻤﺜﻠﺙ I .ﻭ Jﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ : (1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Cﻭ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ،ﻭﺤﺩﺩ
1
AI = −2 ABﻭ CJ = CI ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (CJ
5
(2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، Gﻋﻴﻥ ) ( Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M
(1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Jﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ . C
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ MA + 2 MB + 3MC
(2ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BJﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ACﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G
ﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻤﻊ . MA + MC
ﺤﺩﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Gﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AC (3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( Eﻭ ) ( ABﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . 83ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﺤﻴﺙ ، AC = 12cm
3MA − 2 MB = MA − MI
AB = 10cm
86ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻭ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . ﻭ . CB = 8cm
(1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻝـ kﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ Gkﻝـ ) ، ( A, k (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, 2) ، ( A,1ﻭ )(C ,1
202
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
(4ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ K ، C ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ
B ، A 88ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ؟.ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ
ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ .ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Gﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ 93 ، Aﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ) A(−1; 2ﻭ )B(2; −2
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ ) ( A,3ﻭ ). ( B, 7 Bﻭ ، Cﺜﻡ ﺠﺩ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻰ.
.2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ OGﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ OAﻭ . OB ، 2GA − 3GB − 5GC = 0 (1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( A; AB, AC
.3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) (O; i, j؟ ، −4GA + GB − 3GC = 0 (2ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( B; BA, BC
(1 94ﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )B(−3, 4) ، A(1, 2 1 7
، GA + GB − GC = 0 (3ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ )(C ; CA, CB
ﻭ ). C (−2,5 2 2
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 88ﺇﻝﻰ 96ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, −2) ، ( A, −3ﻭ )(C , 4
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O; i, j
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G
(1 89ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A(4;3ﻭ )B(−1; −2
(3ﻫل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BGﻴﻤﺭ ﺒﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O؟ ﻋﻠل.
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, −2ﻭ )( B, −3
(1 95ﻤﺜل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) (O; I, Jﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )، A(2,1
(3ﺃ( ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )C (5; 4
5
) C (5, 7) ، B(−1,5ﻭ D 1, 1
2 ﺏ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ AC = − AB
5
(1ﻋﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ Cﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Bﻭ C
ﻝـ ) ( A, aﻭ )( B, b
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
(1 90ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A(1;3ﻭ )B(2;1
(3ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻤﺭﺠﺢ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﺭﺠﺢ )( A,1
) ( A,1ﻭ ) ( B, x؟ ﻋﻠل.
ﻭ ) ( B, −3ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, −2ﻭ )( B,1
96ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
(3ﺃ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ]. [ AB
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ )، (3;3
ﺏ( ﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺤﻴﺙ MI = k MN
) (−2; −3) ، (−1; −1ﻭ ). (3; −3
ﺠـ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ aﻭ bﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ Iﻤﺭﺠﺢ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ BCDE
ﻝـ ) ( M , aﻭ )( N , b
ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ.
(1 91ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B (−1; 4) ، A(2;1ﻭ )C (−3; −2
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABC
}){( A, 2);( B,1);(C ,1);( D,1);( E ,1
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ )( B, −3) ، ( A, 2
(3ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Lﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ . BCDEﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ
ﻭ )(C , −1
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G ، Aﻭ Lﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
(4ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G ، Oﻭ Hﻫل ﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ؟
(4ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥGA + GB + GD = 0 :
(1 92ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) A(−1; −2ﻭ ) B (3; −4ﻭ )C (2; −5
ﺏ( ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABD؟
G (2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, −2) ، ( A, −3ﻭ )(C , 4
(5ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BCﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ DE
-ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ G
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . AIJ
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A,3ﻭ )( B, 2
203
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
ﻝﻠﻬﻴﺩﺭﻭﺠﻴﻥ . 1 97ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
-ﻤﺜل ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﻁﺎﻝﺔ Gﺠﺯﻱﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺀ . ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ). (6;0) ، (2; 4ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ' Bﻭ Kﺤﻴﺙ ' B
-ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . OG ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ACﻭ Kﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ]' . [OB
100ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ABCD (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ' Bﻭ . K
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ) ( A; i, jﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ( I (2ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ). (2; 0ﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ αﻭ β
ﺤﻴﺙ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ ) ( A, αﻭ ). ( I , β
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ Jﻤﺭﺠﺢ )(O, 2) ( A,1
(4ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( IJﻭ ) ( ACﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ
ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﻁﺎﻝﺔ
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺠﺴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﻴﻥ ،
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺜﻘل ﻫﺫﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻤﻴﻥ
ﻤﺭﻓﻘﻴﻥ ﺒﻜﺘﻠﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ )ﺃﻭ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ(ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
98ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ،ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻡ Aﻜﺘﻠﺘﻪ M Aﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ
101ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ،ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﻁﺎﻝﺔ G
. 100g
ﻝﻠﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ ABCDEFﺤﻴﺙ
AB = AF = 3 AI = 3 AJ
ﻭ Oﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ IBCDﻭ Hﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ
ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ . AIEF
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ:
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ G :ﺘﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OH
(2ﻗﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ABCDEFﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﺁﺨﺭ ﻭ ﻤﺜل
ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ' OHHﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ،ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ OH
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ:
ﺘﻘﺩﺭ ﺒـ 0,96 ×10−10 mﻭ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ '
HOH
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) (O, 2ﻭ ) . ( H ,3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
ﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﺎ . 1050
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( A; I , Jﻤﺜل . G
ﺍﻝﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﻝﻴﺔ ﻝﻸﻭﻜﺴﺠﻴﻥ 16ﻭ ﺍﻝﻜﺘﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﻝﻴﺔ
204
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
102ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ) :ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ(
ﺠـ( ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ Pﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ ﻗﺭﺹ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ﻫﻭ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . ( A; i, j
104ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ Pﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ ﻭﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ
ﺍﺘﺤﺎﺩ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ABCﻭ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ
AB = 6cmﻭ Oﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ BC
G1ﻭ G2ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ﻭ G3ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ
ﺩ( ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﺤﺭﻑ T
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ Iﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ P
)ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ (
205
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
ﻤﺴــﺎﺌل 107ﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻌﺩﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺘﻬﺎ I
109ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ Ménélaüs ﺴﻤﻜﻬﺎ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ ،ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ Rﻤﺴﺘﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ Q ، P . ABCﻭ Rﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ R
ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Cﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ = ' R
) ( AC ) ، ( BCﻭ ) ( ABﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ. 4
R
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ q ، pﻭ rﺤﻴﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ = OC
2
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ Pﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﻝـ ) ( B,1ﻭ ) (C , − p
ﻭ Qﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﻝـ ) (C ,1ﻭ )( A, − q
ﻭ Rﻤﺭﺠﺤﺎ ﻝـ ) ( A,1ﻭ ) . ( B, −r
( )
(2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ، A; AB, ACﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
Q، Pﻭ .R (1ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ Aﻭ ' Aﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺼﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Q ، Pﻭ Rﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﻁﺭﻴﻬﻤﺎ Rﻭ ' Rﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ . pqr = 1 ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ O :ﻤﺭﺠﺢ )' ( I , A − Aﻭ )' . (C , A
(4ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ R :ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ Bﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ Aﻭ Q (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ Iﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ Oﻭ . C
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] ( RQ ) . [ ACﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( BCﻓﻲ ). Pﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل(. (3ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺸﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل R = 4 cmﻭ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BC؟ ﺍﻝﻌﻁﺎﻝﺔ I
108ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻴﺯﻴﺎﺀ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ'' :ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺘﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺠﺴﻤﻴﻥ ﺼﻠﺒﻴﻥ
S1ﻭ S 2ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺘﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ C1ﻭ C2ﻭ
ﻜﺘﻠﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ m1ﻭ . m2ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﻁﺎﻝﺔ Gﻝﻬﺫﻩ
ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ m1 GC1 + m2 GC2 = 0
(1ﺘﺭﺠﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ.
110ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ I (2ﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻌﺩﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ Pﺴﻤﻜﻬﺎ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ aﻭ ﻜﺘﻠﺘﻬﺎ
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ ABﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( DBﻭ ) (CIﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺠﻤﻴﺔ kﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﺘﺤﺎﺩ ﺠﺯﺌﻴﻥ S1ﻭ S 2
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل .ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ S1ﻭ S 2ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
(1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ . ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ C1ﻭ C2ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻠﻴﻥ.
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ(1) ....... GA + GB + GC = 0 : ﺃ( ﻨﺴﻤﻲ m1ﻜﺘﻠﺔ S1ﻭ m2ﻜﺘﻠﺔ S 2
(3ﺃ( ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B,1) ، ( A,1ﻭ )(C , −1 ﺇﺫﻥ ) × k aﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ m1 =( S1
ﺏ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Kﻫﻲ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) (G ,3ﻭ )(C , −2 ﻭ ) × k aﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ . m2 = ( S2ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ؟
(3ﺃ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ) (1ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻤﺭﺠﺢ )، ( D,1 ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ، P
) (G,3ﻭ )(C , −2 ﻭ ﻤﺜل G
ﺏ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Aﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ DK
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
MD + 3MG − 2 MC = MA + MB
206
7 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺏ( ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( B, −1) ، ( A, 2ﻭ ). (C , 2 (5ﺃ( ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺃﻱ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ I m
ﺠـ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( BJ ﻝﻠﺠﻤﻠﺔ }) {( D, m);(G ,3); (C , −2ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﹰﺍ ؟
ﺩ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ' GMﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . GM ﺏ( ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ I mﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ،ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
ﻫـ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل M 1
= DI m DK
m +1
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' . M
1
(3ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] . [ BC ֏ f : xﻭﺸﻜل ﺠﺩﻭل ﺠـ( ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ
x +1
ﺃ( ﻤﺎ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( E1ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ' M ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ)ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻬﺎﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺃﻁﺭﺍﻑ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ(
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ k = −1؟ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) ( E1 ﺩ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ I mﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﺴﺢ m
ﺏ( ﻤﺎ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( E2ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ' M ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ }ℝ − {−1
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ k = 2؟ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) ( E2 ABC 111ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ،ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻕ ، mﻨﺭﻓﻕ
) 113ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺨﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ( ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gmﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ }). {( A, 2);( B, m);(C , −m
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ.ﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
BACﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BCﻓﻲ . I ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BC
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ] [ AIﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒـ Cﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ABﻓﻲ . D (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ،ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﺴﺢ mﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ، ℝ
(1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ADCﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ . ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝـ Gmﻫﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ∆ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ.
IB AB (2ﺃ( ﺃﻨﺸﺊ G2ﻭ . G−2
= ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ :
IC AC
ﺏ( ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ m ≠ 2ﻭ . m ≠ −2ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Gmﻨﻘﻁﺔ
(2ﻨﻀﻊ AC = b ، AB = cﻭ BC = a
ﻤﻥ ∆ ﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ G2 ، Aﻭ . G−2
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( BGmﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ACﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ACﻓﻲ Jﻭ ﻤﻨﺼﻑ (3ﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ABC
ﺒـ Iﻭ ﺃﻥ ) (CGmﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ABﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ABﻓﻲ . Kﻨﺴﻤﻲ Oﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ACB
ﺒـ . J
) ( B, b) ، ( A, aﻭ ) (C , c
(3ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( A; AB, ACﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ mﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ I
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥaOA + bOB + cOC = aOA + (b + c)OJ :
ﻭ . Jﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ I ، Oﻭ Jﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( AIﺜﻡ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻤﻨﺼﻔﺎﺕ
112ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ . A
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BCﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ ACﻝﻴﻜﻥ k
(4ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺤﺩﻴﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺘﺼﻠﺔ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل
ﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ،ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻨﺭﻓﻕ
ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ B ، Aﻭ Cﻤﺭﺍﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺔ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﻭ a
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﺤﻴﺙ MM ' = 2 MA − MB + k MC :
b ،ﻭ cﺃﻁﻭﺍﻝﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
(1ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ k = −1
ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ' MMﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ.
ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل M
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' . M
(2ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ k = 2
-ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻌﻁﺎﻝﺔ Gﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺃ( ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A, 2ﻭ )( B, −1
) ( B, b) ، ( A, aﻭ ) . (C , cﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ . G
207
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 7
KB tan γɵ
= (1ﺃ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ : ) 114ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻼﻗﻲ
KC tan β
ﺍﻹﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ،ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ (
(C , tan γɵ ) ( B, tan β ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ Kﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ )
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ . AC = b ، BC = a AB = c
ﺠـ( ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ACﻓﻲ L
Iﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ Hﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ABﻓﻲ M
ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻹﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻭ Oﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ
-ﺃﻋﻁ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻤﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Lﻭ . M
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺩ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) Hﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ(ﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ :
β ، αﻭ γﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ) Iﺃﻭ Hﺃﻭ ( Oﻤﺭﺠﺤﹰﺎ
( B, tan βﻭ ) (C , tan γɵ
) ) ، ( A, tan α
ﻝـ ) ( B, β) ، ( A, αﻭ ) (C , γ
] [ AC ] ، [ BCﻭ ] [ AB N ، M (2ﻭ Pﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ
(Iﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ . ﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
BACﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BCﻓﻲ ' ، Aﺇﺫﻥ ' A
ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻫﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ
ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) . ( ACﻨﺭﻤﺯ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . MNP
ﺇﻝﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒـ . d
ﺏ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻥ Oﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ N ، Mﻭ . P
hﻁﻭل ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A
) ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ (1ﺩ( (.
ﺠـ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ Oﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABC
ﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ B ، Aﻭ Cﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ.
(I 115ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
3
f ( x) = x 2 − 6 x + 8
2
( )
ﻭ ) (C fﺘﻤﺜﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O; i, j
-ﺍﺩﺭﺱ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
(1ﺃ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ AA ' Bﻭ AA ' C
( )
(IIﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O; i, jﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ )A(4; 0
ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ .
ﻭ ) . C (0; 4ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل A'B c
،ﺜﻡ ﺃﻥ ' Aﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ =
] ، I = [ 0;8ﻨﺭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ) K (4; kﻭ ) L(0;8 − k A 'C b
ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ G1ﻭ G2ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ AKL ﻝـ ) ( B , bﻭ ) . (C , c
ﻭ OAL ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ACﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' B (2ﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ABC
(1ﺃ( ﻤﺎ ﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺎﻥ ﻝـ Kﻭ Lﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ABﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' C
ﻭ ﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ACB
kﻓﻲ I؟ -ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ' Bﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ Cﻭ ، Aﺜﻡ ' Cﻜﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ﺏ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ G1ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻥ G2ﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﹰﺎ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻝـ Aﻭ B
kﻴﻤﺴﺢ . I (3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ Iﻫﻲ ﺭﺠﺢ ﻝـ ) ( B, b) ، ( A, aﻭ ). (C , c
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ،ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، kﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ AKL (IIﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻼﻗﻲ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﺔ
ﻭ . OAL ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ:
(3ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ OAKLﺼﻔﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻋﻁﺎﻝﺘﻬﺎ . G ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ،ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ABCﻜل ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎﻩ ﺤﺎﺩﺓ.
ﺃ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ kﺍﺤﺩﺜﻴﻲ . G ﻭ ACB = γ
ABC = β ، BACﻨﻀﻊ = α
ﺏ( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ) (C fﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BCﻓﻲ . K
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Gﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ kﻓﻲ . I
208
8
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
ال
اص اوا ا
ت
اوا.
أ"س زاو
.
$%د' ا&
) ا* ,-.ام
و ./*/ )01 )2 34 ,-.
)2د5ت و 'ا &ت ./*/
ﻭﻝﺩ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﻓﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻭﺯﺠﺎﻨﻲ ﺒﺒﻭﺯﺠﺎﻥ ﻀﻭﺍﺤﻲ ﺨﺭﺍﺴﺎﻥ .ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻨﺘﻘل ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﺒﻐﺩﺍﺩ.
ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ ﻓﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻭﻀﺢ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﻓﺎ ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺤﺭﻜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻤﺭ.
ﻗﺩﻡ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﻓﺎ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻓﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻭﻴﺔ .ﻗﺎﻡ
ﺒﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺴﺒﻘﻭﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺩﻡ ﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﺠﺩﻴﺩﺓ ﻤﺘﻌﻘﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺠﻴﻭﺏ ﺘﺴﻤﺢ
ﺒﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ sin 30°ﺇﻝﻰ .10−8ﻗﺎﻡ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﺘﻁﻭﻴﺭ ﻤﻔﻬﻭﻤﻲ
ﺍﻝﻅل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻅل ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻤﻨﺠﺯﺍ ﺠﺩﻭﻝﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻭﻫﻭ ﺃﻭل ﻤﻥ ﻋﺭﻑ ﻤﻘﻠﻭﺒﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﺏ
ﻭ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻗﺩ ﺍﻜﺘﺸﻑ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
ﺴﺎﻫﻤﺕ ﺒﺸﻜل ﻜﺒﻴﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺘﻁﻭﺭ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻔﻠﻙ.
ﻝﻘﺩ ﺩﺭﺱ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﺩﺩﺍ ﻁﺭﻕ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺌﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻭﺭ
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻁﺭﺓ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻋﺭﺽ ﻁﺭﻗﺎ ﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻓﺊ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ...
ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﻓﺎ ﺍﻝﺒﻭﺯﺠﺎﻨﻲ ﻨﺫﻜﺭ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺒﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﻓﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺃﻭل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻋﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﺴﻭﺭ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍ.
940ﻡ 998 /ﻡ
209
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 8
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
Jy
1 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ) ( Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ O
F E
ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 1ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻜﺱ ﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ
B A ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ x .ﻫﻭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺍﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
. IOA
ﺒﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ Aﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ.
x (1ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ A؟
O0 1I x
(2ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ A؟
(3ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ A؟
C D (4ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ A؟
(5ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Fﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ E؟
G H
(6ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ E؟
(7ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ E؟
(8ﺃﻨﻘل ﻭ ﺃﻜﻤل ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻵﺘﻲ:
5
.π − (9ﻀﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ x
2
210
8 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
l
) ( Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 1ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ
B A ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻜﺱ ﻹﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ .
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ) ( Cﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ( .ﺒﺘﺤﺭﻙ Aﻨﺤﻭ . B
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
l
) ( Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 1ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ
211
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 8
ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ .
.1ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ .
ﻴﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺍ ) ﺃﻭ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺎ ( ﻭﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ)ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻝﺏ(.
ﺍﺼﻁﻼﺤﺎ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻜﺱ ﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﻋﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺔ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻪ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻪ ﻜل ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 1
(
u , vﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ . x ﺘﻌﺒﻴﺭ :ﻨﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺒﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﻌﺒﺭ ﺒﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻗﺕ ﻭﻨﻘﻭل ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ )
ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ :ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ) ( u , vﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﺱ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ] − π , πﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ) . ( u , v
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ (1 :ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ) ( u , uﻫﻭ . 0
(2ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ) ( u , − uﻫﻭ . π
π
. (3ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺓ ﻫﻭ
2
π
. − (4ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭﺓ ﻫﻭ
2
ﻓﺈﻥ xﻫﻭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ uﻭ . v ( )
(5ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ xﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ u , v
ﺸﺎل: .2ﻋﻼﻗﺔ
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ):ﺘﻘﺒل ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ( ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ .
( ) ( ) (
u,v + v,w = u,w )
( ) ( ) ( ( ) )
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ u , − v = u , v + π • ، v , u = − u , v • :
(
. − u,− v = u,v • ، ( ) )
• − u ,v = u ,v +π ( ( ) )
212
8 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
( )
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , jﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺤﻴﺙ
3π π
= . OI , OB ( 4
)
= OI , OAﻭ( )6
( ) ( ) ( )
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . OA, OB (3 . OJ , OB (2 . OJ , OA (1 :
π π π
( ( ) ) ( ( )
OJ , OA = − OA, OJ = − OI , OJ − OI , OA = − + = −
)2 6 3
ﺤــل(1 :
3π π π
( ( ) ( )
= OJ , OB = OI , OB − OI , OJ ) = −
4 2 4
(2
3π π 7π
( ( ) ( )
= OA, OB = OI , OB − OI , OA ) = −
4 6 12
(3
−2007 − π < 2kπ ≤ π − 2007 ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺤــل−π < 2007 + 2kπ ≤ π (1 :
−2007 − π π − 2007
ﺇﺫﻥ −319,923 < k ≤ −318,923ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ k = −319 ≤<k ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
2π 2π
) (
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ u , vﻫﻭ 2007 + ( −319 × 2 × π ) = 2, 663rad
−189 189π
< −1 + 2k ≤ 1 −π < −ﺒﺎﺨﺘﺯﺍل πﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ + 2kπ ≤ π (2
4 4
185 193
23,125 < k ≤ 24,125ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ k = 24 ﺇﺫﻥ ≤<k ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
8 8
189π 189π 192π 3π
. −
4
+ (24 × 2 × π ) = −
4
+
4
=
4
) (
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ u , vﻫﻭ
65 65π
< −1 −π < −ﺒﺎﻻﺨﺘﺯﺍل ﻓﻲ πﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ + 2k ≤ 1 + 2kπ ≤ π (3
8 8
73 57
− < k ≤ −ﺇﺫﻥ −4,5625 < k ≤ −3,5625ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ k = −4 ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
16 16
65π 65π 64π π
.
8
= ) + ( −4 × 2 × π
8
−
8
=
8
) (
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ u , vﻫﻭ
213
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 8
ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ .
.1ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ.
( ) ) (
ﻭ ' vﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ،ﻝﻴﻜﻥ αﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ u, vﻭ ' αﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ' u ', v ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔu ' ، v ، u :
ﻭ ' u ', vﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺘﻴﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ kﺤﻴﺙ . α ' = α + 2kπ( ) ( )ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﺎﻥ u, v
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ kﺤﻴﺙ α ' = α + 2kπﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ α '− αﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝـ . 2π
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ α ' = α + 2kπﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ αﻭ ' αﻗﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﻝﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﺘﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺘﻴﻥ.
.2ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺭﺘﺒﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻲ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ.
ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ u :ﻭ v
) ( ) (
ﻭ vﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u , v = 2kπ :ﺃﻭ k ∈ ℤ . u , v = π + 2kπ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ u
u, v = 2kπﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ . ) ( ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ
) (
u, v = π + 2kπﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ . ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ
ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ u :ﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ kﻭ ' kﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ .
( ) ( )
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ kﻭ ' kﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻹﺸﺎﺭﺓ ﻓﺈﻥ . ku , k ' v = u , v
( ) ( )
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ kﻭ ' kﻤﻥ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ . ku , k ' v = u , v + π
B
.3ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﻴﺔ ( C ) .ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ B ، A . Oﻭ Mﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ
A
( )
ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺓ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . ( Cﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ MA, MBﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﻴﺔ.
O
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ B ، Aﻭ Mﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺓ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﻥ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ) ( C
α
ﻗﻴﺱ
2
( )
ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ αﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . OA, OBﻓﺈﻥ
( )
ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ . MA, MB
( ( ) )
M
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ) ( OABﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ AO, AMﻭ MO, MAﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ
( ( ) ) ( ( )
ﻤﺤﻭﺭﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ AMﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ AO, AM = − MO, MAﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . (1) .... AO, AM = MA, MO )
( ( ) )
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ) ( OBMﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ،ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ BM , BOﻭ MB, MOﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ
( ( ) ) ( ( ) )
ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ BMﻭﻤﻨﻪ BM , BO = − MB, MOﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . ( 2 ) .... BM , BO = MO, MB
( ( ) ( ) ( ) )
ﻤﻥ ) (1ﻭ ) ( 2ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ MA, MO + MO, MB = AO, AM + BM , BOﺃﻱ
( ( ) ( ) ) ( )
MA, MB = AO, AM + BM , BOﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 2 MA, MB = AO, AM + BM , BO + MA, MB ( ( ) ( ) )
( ( ) ( ) ( )
2 MA, MB = AO, AM + BM , BO + MA, MB = OA, MA + MA, MB + MB, OB ( ) ( ) ( ) )
α
( ) ( ( )
2 MA, MB = OA, MB + MB, OB = OA, OBﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻗﻴﺱ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ . MA, MB
2
( ) ( ) )
214
8 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 3
9π 41π
ﻗﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ؟ ﻭ ﻫل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﺍﻥ
8 8
ﺤــل :ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ αﻭ βﻗﻴﺴﻴﻥ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ α − β
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل 2kπﻤﻊ ) . ( k ∈ ℤ
41π 9π 32π
ﻭ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل . 2kπ − = = 4π = 2 × 2π
8 8 8
9π 41π
ﻗﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ،ﺃﻭ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺘﻴﻥ . ﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﺍﻥ
8 8
9π 41π
ﻗﻴﺴﺎﻥ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺘﻴﻥ ( ﻭ ) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻜﺫﺍﻝﻙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ
8 8
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 4
π
( )
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ E . AB, AD = −ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ABCDﺤﻴﺙ
2
ECDﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Fﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ABCDﺤﻴﺙ AFDﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABFﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ . (1
( )
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . FB, FA (2
( ) ( )
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . DE , DFﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . FD, FE (3
( )
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . FB, FE (4
(5ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ F ، Eﻭ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
ﺤــل (1:ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ AFDﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﺇﺫﺍ AF = AD = FDﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ AB = AD
A B ﻓﺈﻥ AF = ABﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABFﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ .
( )
(2ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ FB, FAﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻵﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻭﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ
5π π π
F (
= . FB, FA
12
) (
= AF , ABﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
6
)
= AD, AFﻭ ( 3
)
D C
( )
(3ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ DE , DFﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻵﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
π
= DE , DFﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ EDFﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ Dﻭ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ . ( 2
)
ﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ
(4
E
(5ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ( FB, FE ) = πﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ F ، Eﻭ Bﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
215
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 8
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ.
. 1ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ:
π
( )
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ = i , jﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , jﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ .
2
) (
π
( )
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ i , j = −ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , jﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ .
2
) (
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ
→ π → π
i − j
2 2
→ O →
O j i
. 2ﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ:
ﺘﺫﻜﻴﺭ ﻭ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ( C ) :ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ، Oﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
B ( )
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ O , OA , OBﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ .
ﻨﻀﻊ OA = iﻭ ، OB = jﻝﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ
→
cosx
j
x ( )
) ( Cﺤﻴﺙ xﻗﻴﺱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ، i , OMﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ
A
O →
i
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ xﻫﻭ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻭﻨﻜﺘﺏ cos xﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ xﻫﻭ
ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻭﻨﻜﺘﺏ . sin xﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ xﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
sinx i , OMﻓﺈﻥ ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل x + 2kπﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﻭ ﻜﺫﺍﻝﻙ ( )
M
( )
ﻗﻴﺱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ i , OMﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ xﻭ x + 2kπﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ
ﺍﻝﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . ( Cﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ cos ( x + 2kπ ) = cos x :ﻭ sin ( x + 2kπ ) = sin xﻤﻊ k ∈ ℤ
ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺩﻭﺭﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ 2πﺩﻭﺭ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ .
cos 2 x + sin 2 x = 1 ، −1 ≤ sin x ≤ 1 ، ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ :ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ −1 ≤ cos x ≤ 1 : x
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﻴﺭﺓ:
π π π π
x 0 6 4 3 2
1 2 3
sin x 0 1
2 2 2
3 2 1
cos x 1 0
2 2 2
) ( ) (
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ • :ﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ u , vﻫﻭ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ . cos u , v
) ( ) (
• ﺠﻴﺏ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ u , vﻫﻭ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ . sin u , v
216
8 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
5 ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
:ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
25π 9π
. sin (2 . cos (1
6 4
31π 11π
. cos − (4 . sin − (2
4 3
9π 8π + π π
cos = cos = cos + 2π (1 :ﺤــل
4 4 4
π 2
= cos =
4 2
25π 24π + π π
sin = sin = sin + 4π (2
6 6 6
π π 1
= sin + 2 × 2π = sin =
6 6 2
29π −30π + π π
sin − = sin = sin − 10π (3
3 3 3
π π 3
= sin + 2 × (−5)π = sin =
3 3 2
31π −32π + π π
cos − = cos = cos − 8π (4
4 4 4
π π 2
= cos + 2 × (−4)π = cos =
4 4 2
6 ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
π 3π 3
. <x< ﻭsin x = ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥcos x ( ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝـ1
2 2 5
. 10−2 ﺇﻝﻰx ( ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺩﻭﺭ ﻝـ2
. cos 2 x + sin 2 x = 1 : x ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ:ﺤــل
9 9 9 3
cos 2 x = 1 − ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ. + cos 2 x = 1 : ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪsin 2 x = ﻓﺈﻥsin x = ( ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ1
25 25 25 5
4 4 16
. cos x = − ﺃﻭcos x = ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪcos 2 x = ﺃﻱ
5 5 25
4 π 3π
. cos x = − < ﺇﺫﻥx < ﻷﻥcos x < 0 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
5 2 2
. x = 2.49802 ( ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻵﻝﺔ2
x = 2.5 ﻫﻭ10−2 ﺇﻝﻰx ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﺩﻭﺭ
217
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 8
ﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ.
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ xﻗﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﺎ ،ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﺎ :
π π
− x ، π + x ، π − x ، −x
. +x ،
2 2
( )
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﻨﺄﺨﺫ xﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﻭ Mﺼﻭﺭﺘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O; i, j
M →
j M
→
j
x
)( 3 ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ 'M →
j
M )( 2 ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ )(1 ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
→
O i Mﻭ ' Mﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ O →
i Mﻭ ' Mﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ → Mﻭ ' Mﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ
-x O i
'M ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺒﺩﺃ
'M
ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( 3ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) cosﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ( ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺯﻭﺠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ) sinﺠﻴﺏ ( ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺔ .
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :2ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
π π
cos 2 − x = sin x cos 2 + x = − sin x
sin π − x = cos x sin π + x = cos x
2
2
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ) M : (1ﻭ ' Mﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ M .ﻭ ' Mﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ
'M ( )
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﻌﻠﻡ .ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ Mﻫﻲ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ' Mﻭ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ' Mﻫﻲ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ i, OM = x . M
→ M
π π π
j
ﻭ i, OM ' = − xﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ sin − x = cos xﻭ cos − x = sin x
2 2 2
( )
O →
i
π
x +ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ) :( 2ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
2
π
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ) ( 1 " Mﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ،ﻭ " Mﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ − xﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ،
2
'M
→
"M
M
( )
ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ' Mﻭ " Mﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﺘﺎﻥ، i, OM = x .
j
π π π π
→ 2
2 2
(
sin + x = sin − x i, OM " = − x ، i, OM ' = + x )
2
( )
O i
π π π π
cos + x = − co s − x ﻭﻤﻨﻪ sin + x = cos xﻭ cos + x = − sin x
2 2 2 2
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل) ( 2
218
8 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
8 ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
: ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
7π 11π
. sin − (2 . cos (1
3 6
11π 12π − π π
cos = cos = cos 2π − (1 :ﺤــل
6 6 6
π π 3
= cos − = cos =
6 6 2
π π 3 7π −6π − π π
= sin − = − sin = − ﺃﻱsin − = sin = sin − − 2π (2
3 3 2 3 3 3
9 ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
: ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻴﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
5π 5π 5π 5π
. sin ﻭcos (2 . sin ﻭcos (1
6 6 4 4
5π π π 2
cos = cos π + = − cos = − (1 :ﺤــل
4 4 4 2
5π π π 2
sin = sin π + = − sin = −
4 4 4 2
5π π π 3
cos = cos π − = − cos = − (2
6 6 6 2
5π π π 1
sin = sin π − = sin =
6 6 6 2
10 ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل
13π 7π 7π 2− 6
cos ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞsin ﺩﻭﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝـcos = ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ
12 12 12 4
π
cos − ﻭ
12
7π 3+2 7π 7π 7π 7π
sin 2 = ﺃﻱsin 2 = 1 − cos 2 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪcos 2 + sin 2 = 1 ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ:ﺤــل
12 4 12 12 12 12
2
3+2 2 + 6 7π 2+ 6 7π 7π
.( = ) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺃﻥsin = ﺇﺫﻥsin > 0 ﻓﺈﻥ0 < < π ﻭﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ
4 4 12 4 12 12
13π π 7π 7π − 2 − 6
cos = cos + = − sin =
12 2 12 12 4
π π 7π 7π 2+ 6
cos − = cos − = sin =
12 2 12 12 4
219
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 8
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ.
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ aﻭ bﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ . .1ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﺏ:
sin a = sin bﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ a = b + 2kπﺃﻭ a = π − b + 2 kπ cos a = cos bﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ a = b + 2kπﺃﻭ a = −b + 2kπ
ﻤﻊ k ∈ ℤ ﻤﻊ k ∈ ℤ
ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ.
.1ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻲ
( )
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ O ; i , jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ . O
( )
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﻁﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ، Oﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ، ( r , θﺤﻴﺙ OM = rﻭ ، θ = i , OMﺘﺴﻤﻰ
ﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﺎﺕ ﻗﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ) r ) M ( r , θﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻭ θﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ (
) (
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺏ O; i ،ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻲ،ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ rﻫﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻲ ﻭ θﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ .
3π 3π
M
y
(
= i , OMﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻁﺔ Mﻫﻲ. 2 2; :
4 4
)
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل OM = 2 2ﻭ
r1 5π 5π
→
j
→ O0
6
(
= i , OMﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻁﺔ Mﻫﻲ. 5; :
6
)
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل OM ' = 5ﻭ
'M i1 x
'r ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) M ( r , θﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ . M
ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺘﺈﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ) ( x ; yﻭ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ) ( r , θﻓﺈﻥ r = x 2 + y 2 :؛ x = r cos θ؛ y = r sin θ
M r
y ON ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ:ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( OMﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻓﻲ Nﺤﻴﺙ OMﻭ
1 ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻹﺘﺠﺎﻩ .ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ OM = rﻭ ON = 1ﻓﺈﻥ OM = rONﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ N
→
N j
→ O0
i 1 x
( ( ) )
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ i, ON = i, OMﻓﺈﻥ ) . N ( cos θ ;sin θﺇﺫﺍ
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ) . M ( r cos θ ; r sin θﻭﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ cos 2 θ + sin 2 θ = 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
r 2 = x 2 + y 2ﺇﺫﺍ . r = x 2 + y 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺼﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ .
220
8 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
1y ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل11
→ M1
j (3 ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل xﺍﻵﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ
3
→
= . cos x (1
O0 i 1 x 2
1
M3 M2
. sin x = − (2
2
(3ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ .
π π 3
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M 1ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺼﻭﺭﺓ = cos xﻭﻤﻨﻪ cos x = cosﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺤــل(1:
6 6 2
π 1 π π
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ = ، sinﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M 1ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﺨﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ x = + 2kπﺃﻭ x = − + 2kπ
6 2 6 6
1 π 1
ﻭ ﺇﺴﻘﺎﻁﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ sin x = − (2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ sin x = − sinﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ
2 6 2
π π
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ M 2 .ﺼﻭﺭﺓ −ﻫﻲ ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ M 1 sin x = sin − ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
6 6
7π π π
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ x = − + 2kπﺃﻭ x = π + + 2kπﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ،ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M 3ﺼﻭﺭﺓ
6 6 6
7π π
= xﻫﻲ ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ M 1ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . ﻭ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ x = − + 2kπﺃﻭ + 2kπ
6 6
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل12
(
O ; i , jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ )
19π
) (
2 ,ﻫﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻲ . O ; iﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ A
3
(1
( )
) (
(2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ − 3 ; − 1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻲ . O ; i
19π 18π + π π
= ﻭﻤﻨﻪ ﺤــل= + 2 × 3π (1:
3 3 3
19π π 19π π
y = 2sin x = 2 cosﻭ = 2sin = 3 = 2 cos = 1
3 3 3 3
( )
( )
ﺇﺫﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﺎ Aﻫﻲ 1; 3ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i , j
221
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 8
c
= . cos x.cos α + sin x.sin α (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( 1ﺘﻜﺘﺏ
a2 + b2
c
= ) . cos ( x − α (4ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) ( 1ﺘﻜﺘﺏ:
a2 + b2
b a
= . cos αﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ = sin αﻭ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺒﺈﻤﻜﺎﻨﻨﺎ ﻭﻀﻊ
a2 + b2 a2 + b2
c
= ) . sin ( x + α ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﻝـ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻊ ،ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( 1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل :
a +b
2 2
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
. cos x + sin x = 1 (1
. 3 cos x + sin x = 1 (2
2 cos 2 x − 2 sin 2 x = −1 (3
) cos 3 x − 3 sin 3 x = m (4ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺘﺒﻌﺎ ﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ( m
222
8 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ:
. 1ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل.cos x < a :
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ :ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ [ [ 0, 2πﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ a ) (1) ... cos x < a : xﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ( .
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a ≤ −1ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ) (1ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﺎ ﺤﻠﻭل ﻓﻲ [ . [ 0, 2π
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ a ≥ 1ﻓﺈﻥ [ [ 0, 2πﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ). (1
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ −1 < a < 1ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﺎﻥ αﻭ βﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ [ 0, 2πﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ
. cos α = cos β = aﻨﺴﻤﻲ Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ αﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ' Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ Mﻭ ' Mﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل.
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻓﻭﺍﺼﻠﻬﺎ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ . a
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ) (1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ . [ 0, 2π
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل cos x ≤ aﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﺎﻥ a = −1ﻭ a = 1ﺘﺩﺭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺩﻯ .
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ [ [ 0, 2πﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺜﻡ ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ .
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ:
. 2 cos 3x + 2 ≤ 0 (2 . 2 cos x < 1 (1
1
. cos 4 x − > 0 (4 . 2 cos 2 x − 3 ≥ 0 (3
2
.sin x < b . 2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل:
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ :ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ] ]−π , πﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ b ) (1) ... sin x < b : xﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ( .
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ b ≤ −1ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ) (1ﻝﻴﺱ ﻝﻬﺎ ﺤﻠﻭل ﻓﻲ ] . ]−π , π
(2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ b ≥ 1ﻓﺈﻥ ] ]−π , πﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ). (1
(3ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ −1 < b < 1ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ αﻭ βﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ]−π , πﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ sin α = sin β = b
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ αﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ' Mﺼﻭﺭﺓ βﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ،ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ
Mﻭ ' Mﻤﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﺍﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ.
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ . b
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ ) (1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . ]−π , π
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل sin x ≤ bﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ b = −1ﻭ b = 1ﺘﺩﺭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺩﻯ .
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ [ [ 0, 2πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﺜﻡ ﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ .
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
1
. 2 sin 4 x − 1 ≤ 0 (2 . sin x < − (1
2
. 2sin 4 x − 2 > 0 (4 . 2sin 5 x + 3 ≥ 0 (3
223
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 8
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ .
1 3
.−
≤ ≤ sin x ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ ] − π , πﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ
2 2
3 1
≤ . sin xﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺘﻴﻥ (1ﺤل ﻓﻲ [ ] − π , πﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺘﻴﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل sin x ≥ − : xﻭ
2 2
) (
(2ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻲ ) ( Cﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ f : x ֏ sin xﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , j
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( O ; i , j
3 1
= yﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ (3ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻭ )' ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ y = −ﻭ
2 2
1 3
.− ≤ ≤ sin x (4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ) ( Cﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻭ )' ∆ ( .ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ
2 2
224
8 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
π
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ( O , I , J ) :ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ θ .ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 0; 2
ﻭ rﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻝﻬﺎ ) ( r ;θﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( O ; OI
π
= ) . ( AB , AC ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ Oﺤﻴﺙ
3
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . r
( ( ) () () )
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ OI , OB ، OA , OC ، OA , OBﻭ OI , OC
( )
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Bﻭ Cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O , OI
2π 2π 2π 2π
. sin θ + sin θ −
+ sin θ +
cos θ + cos θ −ﻭ = 0
+ cos θ + (4ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ = 0
3 3 3 3
y ﺤل O (1:ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ OA + OB + OC = O
A
2
'C = OAﺤﻴﺙ ' Aﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BCﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﻜﺫﺍﻝﻙ ' AA
π 3
1
3 3 3
J AA ' = OAﻭ OA = rﺇﺫﻥ . A ' A = rﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ AA ' Bﻗﺎﺌﻡ
B θ 2 2
0
ﻓﻲ ' Aﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ AB = A ' A + A ' B :ﺃﻱ AB − A ' B = A ' A
2 2 2 2 2 2
2π 2π
B r cos θ +ﻭ ﺃﻥ ; r sin θ + ﺃﻥ ﻭ A ( r ; θ ) ﺃﻥ ﻭ OA (4ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ + OB + OC = O
3 3
2π 2π
C r cos θ −ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺒﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻭ ﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ : ; r sin θ −
3 3
2π 2π 2π 2π
cos θ + cos θ − + cos θ + = 0ﻭ . sin θ + sin θ − + sin θ + = 0
3 3 3 3
225
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 8
ﻭ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ 5ﻭ ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ6 APPS ﺜﻡ 2nd ﻨﻀﻐﻁ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺒﻌﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻨﺤﺠﺯ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺜﻡ ﻨﺼﺎﺩﻕ.
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) (1;1ﻫﻲ ) . (1, 41;45
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺠﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻅﻠﻬﺎ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﻥ −90ﻭ 90ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻡ ﺠﻴﺏ
ﺘﻤﺎﻤﻬﺎ ﻓﺎﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﻥ 0ﻭ .180
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 7 : −2 ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ:
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) ( 4;60
226
8 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺃﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
π
= ) (u, vﻓﺈﻥ (u, −v) = ... 11ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 8ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
5
π 4π π )ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴل (
π + (3 − (2 − (1
5 5 5 1ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻲ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﻴﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻥ
π
= ) (u, vﻓﺈﻥ (−u , −v) = ... 12ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻗﻴﺎﺴﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝـ 2π
3
π 2π π ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ )' (u, v) = (u ', vﻓﺈﻥ uﻭ ' uﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ 2
− (3 (2 (1
3 3 3 ﻭ vﻭ ' vﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
π B ، Aﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ 3
13ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ (u, v) = −ﻓﺈﻥ (2u , −3v) = ...
6 2π 7π π
5π π π C 4, − ، B 2, ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻫﻲ ، A 1, :
(3 (2 − (1 3 3 3
6 6 6
π 1 ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
< 0 < xﻓﺈﻥ sin 2 x = ... 14ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ = sin xﻭ
2 2 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −π ; πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 2sin 2 x = 3ﺘﻘﺒل 4
3 1 ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﺤﻠﻭل ﻓﻘﻁ.
(3 (2 1 (1
2 4
5ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ αﺤﻼ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ cos x = 0, 6ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
π
ﻓﺈﻥ sin x = ... 15ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ cos x < 0ﻭ < x < π α + 105πﻫﻭ ﺤل ﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ cos x = −0, 6
2
(3ﻻ ﻨﻌﺭﻑ (2ﺴﺎﻝﺏ (1ﻤﻭﺠﺏ 5π 2007π
−ﻴﻌﻠﻤﺎﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻭ 6ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﺍﻥ
ABCD 16ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻤﺒﻠﺸﺭﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ . O 4 4
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ.
AB = aﻭ = π
. BAO
3 ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ: 7
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ OAB؟ cos 2 x + sin 2 x = 1ﻓﺈﻥ sin xﻭ cos xﻴﻜﻭﻥ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ AC ، OAﻭ . AD ﺩﺍﺌﻤﺎ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺎ.
cos( BAOﻭ )
sin( BAO (3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) 8ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ cos 2 x ≤ 1ﻫﻲ ℝ
(4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) cos( AB, AOﻭ )sin( AB, AO ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
u 17ﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻭ xﻗﻴﺱ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 9ﺇﻝﻰ 15ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ). (u , v ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺙ.
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ 9ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﺤﻴﺙ
ﻭﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ). (u, v π
2007π π ( ) (
= AB, ACﻓﺈﻥ BC , BA = .....
3
)
x=− )▪( )▪( x = −
π π
3 3
53π ( CB, CA (3 ) (2 − (1
)▪( x = 493π =x )▪( 3 3
π
(2ﻨﻀﻊ u = OAﻭ v = OBﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
4
( )
10ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺤﻴﺙ = AD, AB
2
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ AOB ( )
ﻓﺈﻥAB, AC = ... :
π π
( CB, CA (3 ) − (2
4 4
(1
227
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 8
23ﻝﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ) (Cﺍﻝﻘﻭﺱ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ 18ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Eﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ xﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ BCDﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ .ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( EFﻴﻌﺎﻤﺩ
(
i, OMﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل: ) ) . ( AE
228
8 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
A = sin x + cos(π − x) + cos (π + x ) 36 DC = AD ﺸﺒﻪ ﻤﻨﺤﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﺤﻴﺙABCD 29
π AC = AB ﻭ
A = sin x + sin(π − x) + sin − x − cos x 37
2
3π π
A = sin − x + sin( x + 5π ) + cos − x 38
2 2
π 39
A = cos (π − x ) − cos x + sin(π + x ) + cos − x
2 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
π π
A = sin (π + x ) + cos + x +cos(π − x )+sin x + 40 (
AD, AC (2 ) ( )
BC , BA (1
2 2
π
A = tan(π + x) + tan( 2 x − ) + co tan( 2 x) 41
(
BA, AD (4 ) ( )
DC , BA (3
2 π
ﻋﻴﻥ ( ﻫﻭu, v) ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ30
: ﻋﻥ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲsin x ﻭcos x ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ42 2
π π :ﻗﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
2 cos x + (2 sin x − (1
4 4 (u, −3v) (3 (2u , v) (2 (u , − v ) ( 1
π π (v, −u ) (5 (−u , −v) (4
sin x − (4 cos x + (3
6 6 π
5π π π ﻋﻴﻥ− ( ﻫﻭu, v) ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ31
= + :( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ1 43 3
12 4 6 :ﻗﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
5π 5π
sin ﻭcos ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ2 (2v, −u ) (3 (5u ,3v) (2 (v, u ) (1
12 12
7π 7π (−6u, 4v ) (4 (2v, −u ) (3
sin ﻭcos ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ3
12 12 sin x ، cos x ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ35 ﺇﻝﻰ32 ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ
11π π 2π
= + :( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ1 44 tan x ﻭ
12 4 3
5π π
11π 11π x=− (2 x= (1 32
sin ﻭcos ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ2 6 6
12 12
433π 17π
7π π 5π x= (4 x= (3
= − ( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ1 45 6 6
24 2 24
2π π
π π 11π x= (2 x= (1 33
= − ( ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ2 3 3
24 2 24
29π 5π
:( ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ3 x= (4 x=− (3
6 3
π 5π 7π 11π 5π π
16 × sin × sin × sin × sin =1 x= (2 x= (1 34
24 24 24 24 4 4
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ50 ﺇﻝﻰ46 ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 55π 17π
x= (4 x=− (3
: ﻴﻜﻭﻥx ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ 4 4
5π 21π 3π π
sin + x − 2 cos − x+ 46 x= (2 x= (1 35
2 2
2 2
945π 148π
3π x=− (4 x= (3
−3 sin ( x − 3π ) + sin + x = sin x 2 4
2
A ﺒﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ41 ﺇﻝﻰ36 ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ
229
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 8
π
= sin ( x + 7π ) − 2 sin x − 47
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ M؟ 2
ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ N؟ 13π 7π
= 2 sin − x − cos x +
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺒﺤﻴﺙ 2 2
2π 4π
(C ) 55ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ cos x + cos x + + cos x + = 0 48
3 3
y O(; OA , OB )
sin x + sin x +
2π 4π
+ cos x + = 0 49
1 B
3 3
N M π
(k ∈ ℤ) ، k x 50ﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ
2
A sin 3 x cos 3 x
-1 0 1 x − =2
sin x cos x
(1 51ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺤﻴﺙ
-1 π 3
= cos xﻭ x ∈ − ; 0
2 5
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . M
π π
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ، cos − x ، sin − x ، sin x
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . N 2 2
1
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻜل ﻗﻴﻡ xﺤﻴﺙ = sin x )sin(π − x) ، cos(π − x
2 π
56ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ) (Cﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ (3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ tan(π − x) ، tan − x ، tan x
2
ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ xﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0; 2πﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ: π 2
52ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ = sin xﻭ x ∈ ; π
2 3 2 3
cos x = − = (2 cos x (1
2 2 π
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ، cos − x ، cos(π − x) ، cos x
2 2
= sin x = −1 (4 sin x (3
π
2 . sin (17π + x ) ، sin + x
57ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ) (Cﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ x 2
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −π ; πﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ: 3π
= tan xﻭ x ∈ π ;
5
53ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ
3 1 2 2
cos x = − (2 cos x = (1 (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ cos xﻭ sin x
2 2
2 1 (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ )sin(π − x) ، cos(π + x) ، cos(π − x
sin x = − (4 sin x = − (3
2 2 tan(π + x) ، tan(π − x) ، sin(π + x) ،
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 58ﺇﻝﻰ ، 60ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ 1 (C ) 54ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ
y M
−2
10ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ xﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل I ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ
I = [ 0; π ] 58
cos x = −0,3 (2 cos x = 0, 7 (1
0 x1
π π
I = − ; 59
2 2
N
sin x = −0, 4 (2 sin x = 0, 6 (1
230
8 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
I = [ −π ; π ] 60
ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
M 67ﻭ N
27 43
1 3 sin x = − (2 = cos x (1
= OMﻭ ON = 2i + 2 j i− j 29 45
2 2
61ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ [ 0; 2πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ:
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻁﻭﺍل OMﻭ ON
(2ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ) ( i; OM 2 cos 2 x = sin x
62ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −π ; πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ:
ﻭ ) . ( i; ON
cos 2 x + 2 sin x cos x = 0
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺘﻴﻥ ) ( j; OM 63ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل [ [ 0; πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ:
ﻭ ) . ( j; ON cos 7 x = cos 2 x − sin 2 x
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Mﻭ . N ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ
68ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ( )
64ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O; i, jﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
ﺒﺈﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ:
B (0; −3) (2 A(−1;1) (1 π
C (1; π ) (3 B 1; (2 A (1;0 ) (1
(
D 3 2 ;3 2 ) (4 1
C ;−
2
3 (3
2
2
5π 3π 3π
F 3; − (6 E 2; (5 D 1; (4
(
E − 1; 3 ) (6 3
E − ;−
3 3 (5
6
4 2
( )
2 2
65ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ O; i, jﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
69ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ:
ﺒﺈﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ:
−5π π
π ;B 2 (2 A 1; (1
B 2; (2 A(1;0) (1 6 6
2
π π
3π (4 π D 4; (4 C 3; (3
D 5;− C 3 ; (3 6 6
4 6
7 π (6 5π (5 (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ
E 4;− ;E2 2
6 4 ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺩﺃ . O
1 7
H ; 20π (8 G ; 345π (7 66ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ) ( r ,θﻤﻊ [ θ ∈ [ 0; 2π
4 4
(
O; i, j 70ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ. ) y ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
231
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 8
π π
sin (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
cosﻭ
π 12
12
sin 2 x = cos x + (6
6 π π 2
cos 2 = cosﺍﺤﺴﺏ (1 72ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ
78ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 8 4 2
π π
sin 2 x − sin x − 6 = 0 (1ﻭ . I = ℝ sin cosﻭ (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
8 8
2 cos 2 x − 3cos x − 2 = 0 (2ﻭ [ . I = [ 0 , 2π (1 73ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ S1ﺤﻴﺙ
4 cos 2 x + 2(1 − 3) cos x − 3 = 0 (3 π 3π 5π 7π
S1 = cos 2 + cos 2 + cos 2 + cos 2
ﻭ ] . I = ]−π ; π 8 8 8 8
x 79ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ،ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺤﻴﺙ : (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ S 2ﺤﻴﺙ
2π 4π 8
π 3π 5π 7π
. f ( x ) = cos x + cos x +
S2 = sin 2 + sin 2 + sin 2 + sin 2
+ cos x + 8 8 8 8
3 3
π
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ : x 74ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 0; ﺤﻴﺙ
2
. f ( x) = 0
6+ 2
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ' . f = cos x
4
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ : (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . cos 2 x
2π 4π (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . x
. sin x + sin x + + sin x + =0
3 3 π
( )
x 75ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 0; ﺤﻴﺙ
O ; i ; j 80ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻭﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ . 2
2π 5 −1
. ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Rﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻪ = sin x
3 4
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A1 (1 ; αﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺘﻴﻥ (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ cos 2 xﻭ sin 2 x
Bﺼﻭﺭﺓ Aﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ، Rﻭ Cﺼﻭﺭﺓ Bﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ (2ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ cos 4 x = sin x
ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ . R (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ . x
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ OA + OB + OC = 0 76ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ sin xﻭ cos xﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻭﺍﻻﺴﺘﻨﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻥ : A = cos 4 x + sin 2 x + 2 cos 2 x sin 2 x (1
2π 4π B = cos 6 x + sin 6 x + 3cos 2 x sin 2 x (2
cos α + cos α + + cos α + =0
3 3 C = cos3 x + cos 2 x sin x + cos x sin 2 x + sin 3 x (3
2π 4π
sin α + sin α + + sin α + ﻭ =0 77ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
3 3
π 1
(1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺸﻜﻼ . cos 2 x − = (1
3 2
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Cﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ . R
π 3
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ . sin 2 x + = − (2
4 2
(4ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC cos x + sin x = 0 (3
(5ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ؟ cos 3 x = cos x (4
81ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) E ( xﺤﻴﺙ : cos 2 x = sin x (5
E ( x ) = cos x − cos x
2 4
232
8 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
π π
،ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ =2 ﺒﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ : 87 (1ﺤﻠل ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) E ( xﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ .
6 12
π π (2ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . E ( x ) = 0
sin cosﻭ
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﻴﻥ :
12 12 (3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ
O ; i ; jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻭﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ( ) 88
= )f ( x
sin 2 x − sin 4 x
:
π cos 2 x − cos 4 x
Aﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺘﻴﻥ . 2 ; • ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
3
π •
( )
ﺒﺴﻁ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ). f ( x
OABCﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺤﻴﺙ . OA , OC = −
2 (1ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ : 82
y
A
. 3x = x + 2 xﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ cos 3 xﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ cos xﺜﻡ
sin 3 xﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . sin xﺒﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
1
→ B sin 3 x cos 3 x sin 3 x cos 3 x
j
= ) Bﺒﻌﺩ − = A؛ +
O0 →
i 1 x sin x cos x sin x cos x
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ(.
C
π π ﺤﻠل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﻋﻭﺍﻤل ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 83
. sin ، cos ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ
12 12 . A( x) = 1 + cos 2 x + cos x (1
(1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ : . B ( x) = 1 − cos 2 x + sin x (2
( ( ) ( )
، i , OC = i , OA + OA , OCﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ) . C ( x ) = 1 + cos x + cos
x
(3
) (
ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . i , OC
2
x
. B ( x) = 1 − cos x + sin (4
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ 2
ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . C 84ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ :
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A π
. cos x + sin x = 2 cos x − (1
2
(4ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . OB = OA + OCﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ xB
π
ﻭ yBﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B . cos x − sin x = 2 cos x + (2
2
( )
(5ﺃﺤﺴﺏ OBﻭﻗﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ i , OBﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
cos
π
+ sin
π
. 8 ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ 8 = 1 + 2 :
ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B π π 85
π π cos − sin
. sin ، cos (6ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ 8 8
12 12 (1 86ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ :
89ﺤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل Iﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ 1
). cos 4 x = ( cos 4 x + 4 cos 2 x + 3
ﻭﻤﺜل ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ . 8
، I = [ 0 ; 2π [ (1 1
). sin 4 x = ( cos 4 x − 4 cos 2 x + 3
8
. 2 3 sin x − 3 < 0 . 2 3 sin x − 3 = 0
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
π 3π π 3π 5π 7π
; ، I = (2 . cos 4 + cos 4 + cos 4 + cos 4
2 2 8 8 8 8
. 2 cos x − 1 > 0 . 2 cos x − 1 = 0
233
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 8
، I = [ −π ; π ] (3
3
= . yﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﻨﻘﻁ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . 2sin x + 2 ≤ 0 . 2sin x + 2 = 0
2
ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( C fﻤﻊ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ) ( Dﻭ ) ∆ ( . π π
، I = − ; (4
2 2
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ : (3
tgx − 1 > 0 . tgx − 1 = 0
3
≥ cos 2 xﻫﻲ ﺇﺘﺤﺎﺩ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺠﺎﻻﺕ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ . I = [ −π ; π ] (5
4
92ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ (1)....... sin 3 x = − sin 2 x π
. 1 − 2 cos x − = 0
(1ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺜﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] ]−π , πﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ )(1 3
π
ﻭ ﻤﺜل ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ. 1 − 2 cos x − ≤ 0
3
- (2ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
I = [ 0 ; π ] (6
)sin 3 x = sin x ( 4 cos 2 x − 1
π 1 π 1
= sin 2 x − < ، sin 2 x −
-ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (1ﻫﻲ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﺤﻠﻭل 4 2 4 2
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ.
I = [ 0 ; π ] (7
-ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ) (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ
π 1 π 1
ﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . 4 cos 2 x + 2 cos − 1 = 0 cos 2 x − = − ، cos 2 x − ≥ −
5 2 5 2
(3ﻨﻀﻊ X = cos x
f 90ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ −π ; πﺤﻴﺙ :
ﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 4 X 2 + 2 X − 1 = 0
f ( x ) = sin x
4π 2π
. cos cosﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ (1ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
5 5
1
(1 93ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﻗﻭﺍﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺔ ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ : (2ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ . y = −
π 3π 5π 7π 2
sin − sin + sin − sin =0
8 8 8 8 ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻲ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ∆ ( ﻭ ) (C f
π 3π 5π 7π ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f
sin 2 − sin 2 + sin 2 − sin 2 =2
8 8 8 8
2
π 3π 5π 7π 3 =. y (3ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )' ∆ ( ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
sin 4 − sin 4 + sin 4 − sin 4 = 2
8 8 8 8 2
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻲ Cﻭ Dﻨﻘﻁﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ )' ∆ ( ﻭ ) . ( C f
(2ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ x
(4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ] [ −π ; πﺤﻠﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺍﺠﺤﺔ
4sin 3 x = 3sin x − sin 3 x
-ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ Sﺤﻴﺙ 1 2
≤ − ≤ sin x
π 3π 5π 7π 2 2
S = sin 3 − sin 3 + sin 3 − sin 3
8 8 8 8 f 91ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0; 2πﺤﻴﺙ :
(
O; i, j 94ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ. ) f ( x ) = cos x
Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ) (2;0ﻭ Bﺼﻭﺭﺓ A ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) ( C fﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . f (1
3π 3
. ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ Rﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ 0ﻭ ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻪ ، y=− ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ (2
4 2
Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ AB
234
8 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ . I
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﺌﻴﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ (2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . OABﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
( () ()
. OA, OE ، OA, OD ، OA, OC ، OA, OB ( ) ) ( )
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ . i, OI
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ . I
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ: 3π 3π
. sin cosﻭ (4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ
8 8
(
(k ∈ ℤ) ، 5 OA, OM = k .2πﻫﻲ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ) (
O; OA, OB 95ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻭ ﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ. )
ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺎﺴﻲ . ABCDE Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ) (Cﺤﻴﺙ
π
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (0 Aﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺎﺴﻲ
< 0 <α
2
(
OA, OM = αﻭ )
Pﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OMﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ . A
ABCDEﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، A
. ABCDE
235
9
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
إ
ء و ر
و .
ر"! ا
ب ا
ا
ء .
ا"
ل ا
*+, !%-ت (ازي $#
%و ا"
!#
1+ث ./
ا*8ه
ن 56أن أ 2 $ !%اي
ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﻴﺘﻲ ﺍﻹﻏﺭﻴﻘﻲ" ﻤﻨﻼﻭﺱ " ﺒﺠﺎﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﺴﻜﻨﺩﺭﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺼﺒﺢ ﻋﻀﻭﺍ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻗﺒل ﺃﻥ ﻴﺼﺒﺢ
ﻋﺎﻝﻡ ﻓﻠﻙ ﺒﺭﻭﻤﺎ.
ﻝﻡ ﺘﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻜﺘﺒﻪ ﺍﻝﺴﺘﺔ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻷﻭﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻝﻡ ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻤﻥ
ﻤﺅﻝﻔﺎﺘﻪ ﺇﻻ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﻪ " Sphaerica :ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺠﺯﺍﺀ
ﻭ ﻴﺭﺠﻊ ﺍﻝﻔﻀل ﻓﻲ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻌﺭﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻠﻤﻴﻥ.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻴﻌﻤﻡ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺇﻗﻠﻴﺩﺱ ﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ
ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻭﻴﺔ ) ( spheriqueﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺨﺼﺹ ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﻠﻡ
ﺍﻝﻔﻠﻙ ﻭ ﻋﺎﻝﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻭﻴﺔ.
ﻴﺸﺘﻬﺭ ﺒﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺘﻪ " ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ " Ménélaüs
MENELAUS d'Alexandrie
grec, vers 100
237
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 9
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ) ( Pﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ) ( P1ﻭ ) ( P2ﻭﻓﻕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ) ( ∆1ﻭ ) . ( ∆ 2
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ ) ( P1ﻭ ) ، ( P2ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( P1ﻭ ) . ( P2
238
9 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ﻨﻘﺒل ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻤﺩﻴﺩ ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ F ، Eﻭ Gﺤﻴﺙ Eﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] G ، [CDﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ
CDAﻭ Fﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ. FA = 2BF :
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ABCDﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ Gﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕGA + GB + GC + GD = 0 :
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻭ IJKLﺭﺒﺎﻋﻴﺎ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﺤﻴﺙ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ABCDﻭ G ′ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل . IJKL
.1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎل ﺃﻥ. AI + BJ + CK + DL = 4GG ′ :
.2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺎﻋﻴﻴﻥ ABCDﻭ IJKLﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺜﻘل ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇ ﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ:
AI + BJ + CK + DL = 0
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺭﺍﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺃﻭﺠﻪ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ABCDﻫﻲ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘﻠﻪ ﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ . ABCD
239
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 9
.3ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ
ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJK ] [ BC ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( LIJﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ABFE
ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺎﺴﻲ IJKLM ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل IJKL ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ IJKL
240
9 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺤﺭﻑ ] [ EF ] ، [ AB A BCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺏ J ، I .ﻭ K
ﻭ ] . [ FG
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻤﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺠﻪ ) ( EFGH ) ، ( ABFEﻭ ) . ( ABCD
.2ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ABCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( IJK
ﺤــل:
.1ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ Iﻭ Jﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ) . ( ABFE
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ) ( ABFEﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ IJ
ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ) ( EFGHﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ JK
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ) ( EFGHﻭ ) ( ABCD
ﻭﻓﻕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ .ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ Iﻭﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( JK
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( BCﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Lﺇﺫﻥ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ABCDﻭﻓﻕ ] . [ IL
.2ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ) ( BCGFﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ KL
ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ A BCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ IJKL
ﺤــل:
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( ABFEﻭ ) ( DCGHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
( ICHﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻬﻴﻥ ABFEﻭ DCGHﻭﻓﻕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ. )
ﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Jﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ AEﺤﻴﺙ ) . ( IJ ) // (CH
1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ AJ = AE
3
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ICﻭ ) ( ADﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . K
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( HJﻭ ) ( ADﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . K
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( ICHﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ADHEﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ HJ
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ABCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( ICHﻫﻭ ﺸﺒﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﺭﻑ
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﺎﻩ ) (CHﻭ ) . ( IJ
241
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 9
.3ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ
L
242
9 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﺤــل:
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( Pﻭ ) ( ABCﻴﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AB
ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻭﻓﻕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( JKﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AB
ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( JKﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻤﻊ ] K ∈ [ BC
ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻬﺠﻴﺔ ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( IJﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﹻ ) (CD
ﺤﻴﺙ Iﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ] . [ ADﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ A BCD
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Pﻫﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ . IJKL
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ) ( ILﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( KLﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) (CDﻓﺈﻥ
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﻁﻊ IJKLﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ.
ﺤــل:
ﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ IJ .1ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ABC
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ACDﻭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ JK
.2ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( JKﻭ ) (CDﻴﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ACD
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Mﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ I
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( IJKﻭ ) . ( BCDﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( IJKﻭ ) ( BCDﻷﻨﻬﺎ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( JKﻭ ) . (CDﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( IMﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( IJKﻭ ) . ( BCD
.3ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( IMﻭ ) ( BDﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Lﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ ABCDﻫﻭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ . IJKL
243
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 9
.1ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ
ﻨﺭﻓﻕ ،ﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ،ﺒﻜل ﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻨﻘﻁﻴﺔ ) ( A , Bﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ . AB
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ، A ≠ Bﻤﻨﺤﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻭ ﻤﻨﺤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ، ( ABﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻭ ﻤﻥ Aﻨﺤﻭ B
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ، A = Bﻓﺈﻥ AAﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ . 0
• ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ،ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ Mﺒﺤﻴﺙ . OM = u
( )
• k u + v = k u + k v • ( −1) u = −u
) (
• k k ′u = ( kk ′ ) u • ( k + k ′ ) u = k u + k ′u
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ:
• ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺤﻴﺙ v = k u
• ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) (CDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ABﻭ CDﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ.
• ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ABﻭ ACﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ.
244
9 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺏ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Iﻭ Kﺤﻴﺙ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] 4FJ = 3FE ، [ FGﻭ 2DK = 3DC
.1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ IJﻭ AKﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ FEﻭ . FG
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ IJﻭ AKﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ .ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( IJﻭ ) ( AK؟
ﺤــل:
1 3
IJ = IF + FJ = − FG + FE .1
2 4
3
AK = AD + DK = AD + DCﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ:
2
3
AD = FGﻭ DC = − FEﻓﺈﻥAK = FG − FE :
2
1
.2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ IJ = − AK :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ
2
IJﻭ AKﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ.
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( IJﻭ ) ( AKﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
245
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 9
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ v ، uﻭ wﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺤﻴﺙ:
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل:
v ، uﻭ wﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﹻ AC ، AB :ﻭ ADﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ:
• ﻴﻌﻤﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻜﻴﻔﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
•
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ v ، u :ﻭ wﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺤﻴﺙ uﻭ vﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ.
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ xﻭ yﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
w =xu +yv
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺤﻴﺙ OB = v ، OA = u :ﻭ OC = w
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، A ، Oﻭ Cﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ) ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ (.
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، A ، Oﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻓﻬﻲ ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎ ) (OAB
( )
ﺤﻴﺙ O ;OA ;OBﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻪ.
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، A ، Oﻭ Cﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (OABﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ
ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ xﻭ yﺒﺤﻴﺙOC = x OA + y OB :
( )
) ) ( x ; yﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ .( O ;OA ;OB
ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ w = x u + y v
246
9 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺤــل:
.1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎلMN = ME + EA + AN :
( )
1
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ HD = EAﻓﺈﻥ MN = EA + HB − EA
3
2 1
ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ MN = EA + HBﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻷﺸﻌﺔ EA ، MNﻭ HBﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
3 3
( )
.3ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ DA + DB + DCﻤﺭﺓ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ DGﻭ ﻤﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ . DI + DJ
ﺤــل:
.1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎل ﻭﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ : GA + GB + GC = 0
DA + DB + DC = 3DG
(
DA + DB + DC = 2 DI + DJ )
247
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 9
ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺓ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻭ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( AC ) ، ( AB ABC .1ﻤﺜﻠﺙ N ، M .ﻭ P
ﻭ ) ( BCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ N ، Mﻭ Pﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( .
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Q
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
QC PC PQ NC NQ QC
= = ﻭ = =
MB PB PM NA NM AM
MA PB NC
× × ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ= 1 :
MB PC NA
DEFG .2ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ T ، S ، R .ﻭ Uﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
) ( FG ) ، ( EF ) ، ( DEﻭ ) . ( DG
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ T ، S ، Rﻭ Uﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﺃﻋﺩ ﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ .U
RD SE TF UG
× × × =1
RE SF TG UD
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
HIJKﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ Y ، X ،W .ﻭ Zﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
3 1 3 2
Y J = Y K ، JX = JI ، HW = HIﻭ . ZK = − ZH
4 3 4 3
ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺸﻜﻼ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺎ.
ﻫل ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Y ، X ،Wﻭ Zﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ؟
248
9 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ
ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺃﺤﻴﺎﻨﺎ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻴﻴﻥ
ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Eﻭ Fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ AF = α AD :ﻭ BE = β BC
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل
1 2
=β ﻨﻔﺭﺽ = αﻭ
4 3
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ } ) { ( A ;1) , ( B ;3) , (C ;1) , ( D ; 2
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ F ، Eﻭ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G
249
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 9
( )
1 1
. QR = AC + AH .1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ PQ = HA + ACﻭ ﺃﻥ
2 2
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( PQRﻭ ) ( ACHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
.3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ABCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( PQRﻫﻭ ﺴﺩﺍﺴﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﻅﻡ.
250
9 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ABCDEFGHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ O .ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ EFGHﻭ Pﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ . ABCD
.1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ OPﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ EDﻭ . GB
.2ﻨﻬﺘﻡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺒﺎﻝﻬﺭﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ Oﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ ABCDﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ L ، K ، Qﻭ Mﺤﻴﺙ:
4
Qﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ) K ، (ODCﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] M ، [ ABﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [CDﻭ . OL = OP
5
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Q ، P ، M ، K ، Oﻭ Lﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. •
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ . 5KL − 3KQ = 0ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ٍ K ، Qﻭ L؟ •
OP = GB − OP + ED
( )
1
ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ OP = GB + ED
2
.2
• ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Q ، P ، M ، K ، Oﻭ Lﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Q ، Pﻭ Lﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (OKM
1 1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎAK = AB = DC = DM :
2 2
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ. ( KM ) // ( AD ) // ( BC ) :
1
ﻴﻤﺭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( KMﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ KP = BC . P
2
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (OKM
2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Qﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) OQ = OM (OMﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Qﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (OKM
3
4
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OPﻤﺤﺘﻭﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (OKM
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Lﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) OL = 5 OP (OP
ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Lﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (OKM
2 4
• ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎل ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ OL = OPﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ OQ = OMﺃﻥ:
3 5
2 1 2 1
KL = KM − OKﻭ KQ = KM − OKﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ. 5KL − 3KQ = 0 :
3 3 5 5
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ٍ K ، Qﻭ Lﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
251
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 9
ﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﺭ ( HICﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺍﻴﺔ ﺒﺈﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ HIﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺯﺭ ) ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ HIﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺩﻭﻥ ﺘﺤﺭﻴﺭ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ.
ﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ABCDA ′B ′C ′D ′ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( HICﻨﻨﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻓﺌﺔ section par un plan
ﻀﻤﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ 3Dﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﺜﻡ ﻨﻨﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( HICﺒﻌﺩ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻨﻘﻭﻡ ﺒﺈﺨﻔﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
) ( HICﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ ﻝﻠﻔﺄﺭﺓ .ﻨﺘﺤﺼل ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ.
252
9 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
(3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Pﻻ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ
C ، B ، Hﻓﺈﻥ ) (Dﻻ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ∆ ( .
253
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 9
. 6..
. 11 . 1 1
A , 0, 0 ﻭ B 0, , 0 ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
P ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( R ) , ( Q ) , ( P 2 2
ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ 1
ﻭ C 0, 0, ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ .
A ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ P 2
)( ﻭ ) ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻓﻲ ) . ( Q ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻫﻭ :
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﺃ(
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ
R ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﺏ(
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﺭﻑ ABCD
ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ) (ABﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ
R ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( SADﻭ ) ( SBCﺜﻡ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ
ـ ) ( Dﻭﻴﺸﻤل . A
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ) ( SABﻭ ) . ( SCD
ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( R
254
9 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
.15 .
.20 . ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Pﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) (Dﻭ ) (D ′ﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ) (Pﻭ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ Iﻝﻠﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ AEﻭ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( ABC
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (Pﻓﻲ I ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Pﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( EBG
،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺃ( ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ) (Dﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) (D ′ .16 .
ﻭ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻌﺎ . ) (D ′′ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) (D ′ ) ، (D ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ S
، ﺏ( ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ) (Dﻻ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) (D ′
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( ABCD
ﻭ ) ∆ ( ﻤﻌﺎ. ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﻁﻊ ) (D ′ ) ، (D ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Iﻭ Jﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ
.21 . ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Dﻭ ) (D ′ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ .O ) ، ( SABﻭ Kﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ
ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) (Dﻭ ) . (D ′ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( SDC
ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ Aﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﻥ ) ( A, D ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻤﻊ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ
ﻭ ) ( A, D ′ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ؟ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( SDC ) ، ( SAD ) ، ( SAB ) ، ( SBCﻭ ) ( ABCDﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ.
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
.22 .
.17 .
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Pﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎ ﻭ ) (Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ) . (P
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (Pﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) (Dﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Dﻭ ) (D ′ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (P ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ A ′ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ) (D
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) (Dﻭ ) ( ABﻝﻴﺱ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ Bﻭ B ′ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ) (D ′
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( AA ′ﻭ ) (BB ′ﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ
ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
.ﺍﻝـﺘـﻌـﺎﻤــﺩ . .18 .
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Bﻭ Cﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ) . (Pﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ
.23 . ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (P
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Pﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎ ﻭ ) (Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) (P ـ ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻭ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ ) (Pﻻ ﻴﺸﻤل . H ـ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ A ، B ،Cﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ
Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (Dﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ H ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﺒـ ) (Q
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ) (HM ـ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Dﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (Qﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ A ، B ،C
ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ∆ ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) ( AMﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎ ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ADﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (Pﻓﻲ . E
ﻋﻠﻰ ) ∆ ( . ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ E ،C ، Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ.
.24 . .19 .
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻬﻭﻩ ﻤﻨﺘﻅﻡ ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻬﻭﻩ .
ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (BCD ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ P ، N ، Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺤﺭﻑ
ﺃ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (BHﻫﻭ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻀﻠﻊ ) ( AC ) ، ( ABﻭ ) ، ( ADﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
] [CDﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . BCD ) (MP)، (PN ) ، (MNﺘﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (BCD
ﺏ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) (CDﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ. ﻓﻲ . N ′ ، M ′ ، P ′
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ’ P’,M’,Nﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ، (BC
) (CDﻭ ) (BDﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
255
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 9
.29 . .25 .
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻫﻭ ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ. ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Pﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎ ﻭ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . P
eﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [BC ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ Pﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻥ Aﻭ . B
)ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ( ـ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻓﻲ
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﻬﺎ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (Pﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل eﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘــﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴــﺔ .
) ( ABﻭ ) . ( AD
.26 .
.30 . ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ .
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ. ﻝﺘﻜﻥ K ، J ، Iﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ I1ﻭ I 2ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺤﺭﻑ
J3
ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻓﻴﻥ ] [GCﻭ ] . [BC ] [ AB ] ، [EF ] ، [EH
J12
1 I2 ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J 3 ، J 2 ، J 1ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
J1
ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] ) [ AEﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ( ABCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( IJK
ﺃ( ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (I1I 2ﻤﻊ .27 .
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( ABFE ABCDEFGHﻫﻭ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ.
ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﺒﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤ ﻌﻥ ﺒـ : ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Iﻤﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ
J 1 ، I 2 ، I1 ] [HGﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ
J 2 ، I 2 ، I1 ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ AB
J 3 ، I 2 ، I1 ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Kﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ
ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [EHﺒﺤﻴﺙ
.ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ . 1
= HK HE
3
.30 . ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ABCDEFGHﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( IJK
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ .28 .
ﻫل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻴﺔ ﺘﻌﻴﻥ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ.
ﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ؟ ﻫل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Iﻭ Jﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ
ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ؟ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻓﻴﻥ ] [BCﻭ ] [BD
ﺃ( ) ( A,C, F,G ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ،
ﺏ( ) ( A,C, D, F )ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﻁﺭﻭﺡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل(
ﺝ( ) (E, F,C, K ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (Pﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Jﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AB
256
9 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
.32 .
.38 . ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺒﻴﻥ ABEFGHKLﻭ BCDEHIJK
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O, I, J , K ﻫل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻴﺔ ﺘﻌﻥ ﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ؟
) A ( −2,3,1ﻭ ) B ( 3,1, m ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻫل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ؟
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﺒﺤﻴﺙ . AB = 38 ﺃ( ) ( A, C , F , G
.39 . ﺏ( ) ( A, C , D, F
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O, I, J , K ﺝ( ) ( E , F , C , K
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B ( −2, 0, 2 ) ، A (1, 2,3ﻭ )C ( 2, −1,1 .33 .
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻁﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ] [BC ] ، [ AC ] ، [ AB ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺏ
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ. ﺃ( ﺃﺫﻜﺭ ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ) ( A, B, D, E
.40 . ﻫﻭ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ؟
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O, I, J , K ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B ( 2,1, −2 ) ، A ( 3, 0,1ﻭ ) C ( 4,3, m ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، A
ﺃ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ mﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻴﻜﻭﻥ G ، F ، E ، D ،C ، B
ﻭ .H
ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ.
ﺏ( ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ـ mﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ
.34 .
ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ. ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺫﻜﻭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ . 33
ﺃ( ﺍﺫﻜﺭ ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ) (D, A, C, Hﻫﻭ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ؟
.41 .
ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ , B, A,
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O, I, J , K G , F, E, D, Cﻭ.H
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) C ( 6, 6, 2 ) ، B ( 5, 7, 2 ) ، A (1,1, 2 ﺕ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ Oﻝﻠﻤﻜﻌﺏ.
ﻭ ) . D ( 0, 2, 2 .35 .
ﺃ( ﺇﻝﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Iﻭ Jﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ABCDﻭ EFGHﻋﻠﻰ
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ؟ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﺏ( ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺃ( ﻫل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻴﺔ ) ( I , A, B, Jﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ. ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، E ، C ، B
.42 . G،Fﻭ.H
.36 .ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻥ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭﻱ ) . (O,I,J, Kﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )، B (1, 2, 0 ) ، A ( 2,3,1
257
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 9
258
10
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺃﻋﻁﻴﺕ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ.
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻭﺍﺯ ﻷﺤﺩ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ.
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻪ.
ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻭﺭﺱ ﻹﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ.
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺩﺴﺘﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ
ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺨﺎﺼﻴﺔ ﻤﺎ.
259
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 10
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ABCDEFGHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ﺤﻴﺙ:
AD = 2 ، AB = 3ﻭ . AE = 4
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ J ، Iﻭ Kﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻷﺤﺭﻑ ] [ AE ] ، [ ABﻭ ] [ ADﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ. AI = AJ = AK = 1 :
ﻝﻠﺫﻫﺎﺏ ﻤﺜﻼ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﻨﻘل
ﺒﺜﻼﺙ ﻭﺤﺩﺍﺕ ﻁﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ ABﻓﻲ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ AI
ﺜﻡ ﺒﺄﺭﺒﻊ ﻭﺤﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ BFﻓﻲ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ AJ
ﻭ ﺃﺨﻴﺭﺍ ﺒﻭﺤﺩﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ FGﻓﻲ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ . AK
ﻗﻤﻨﺎ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺒﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻓﻲ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ABCDEFGHﺒﺜﻼﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ) . ( 3; 4; 2
ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ( 3; 4; 2 ) :ﻫﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( A ; I ; J ; K
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ABCDEFGHﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( A ; I ; J ; K
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، Iﻭ Kﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( A ; I ; J ; Kﻤﺎﺩﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ؟
2
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ،ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ، ( A ; I ; J ; Kﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Lﻭ Mﺤﻴﺙ Lﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [CGﻭ . HM = HG
3
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ABFCDGHEﻤﻜﻌﺏ.
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﻓﻲ
(
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . A ; AB , AC , AD)
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﻼﺯﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺠﺏ
ﺃﻥ ﺘﺤﻘﻘﻬﺎ ) ( x , y , zﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺤﺘﻰ
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ:
• ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ GDE
• ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ABC
• ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ EHF
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AB •
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AC •
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AD •
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( HE •
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺃﺤﺭﻑ
ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ . A BFCDGHE
260
10 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
) ( A ; I , J , Kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
ABCDEFGHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ﺤﻴﺙ:
AD = 4AJ ، AB = 3AIﻭ . AE = 2AK
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ.
.2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
AG 2 = AC 2 + AE 2ﻭ AG 2 = AB 2 + AD 2 + AE 2
.3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ AG 2ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . AG
.4ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻤﺯﻨﺎ ﺒﹻ ) ( x G , y G , z Gﺇﻝﻰ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻭ ﺒﹻ ) ( x A , y A , z Aﺇﻝﻰ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ A
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [GH .5ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ MNﺤﻴﺙ Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ EHﻭ N
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
) (O ; I , J , Kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Γﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، Oﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ) (Ozﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 0, 0, 4ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 3
.1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) C ( 0, 0, cﺤﻴﺙ cﻋﻨﺼﺭ ﻤﻥ ] [ 0; 4ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( P
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻭ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (OIJ
• ﺤﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( Σﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Pﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ) . ( Γ
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Σﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . (C ;OI ,OJ
9 2
x 2 + y 2 −ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 4 • ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Γﻫﻲ z = 0
16
.2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) B ( 0, b, 0ﺤﻴﺙ bﻋﻨﺼﺭ ﻤﻥ ] [ −3;3ﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Q
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻭ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (OIK
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . (Q
( )
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ B ;OK ,OIﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﹻ ) ( Σ′ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (Qﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ) . ( Γ
4 2 16 2
= xﺤﻴﺙ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 4 • ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Σ′ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜلz − b :
3 9
• ﻤﺜل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( Σ′ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل . b = 1
261
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 10
ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ
.1ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻲ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﺒﺩﺅﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻜل ﺭﺒﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ ) (O ; I , J , Kﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
( )
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻀﻌﻨﺎ OJ = j ، OI = i :ﻭ OK = kﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ O ; i , j , k
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺎﺕ:
• ﺘﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، I ، Oﻭ Kﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ.
• ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ j ، iﻭ kﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
• ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OIﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OJﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ
ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (OKﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﺍﻗﻡ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) (OJ ) ، (OIﻭ ) (OKﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺓ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) (O ; I , J , Kﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ.
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) (O ; I , J , Kﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ OI = OJ = OK = 1ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ) (O ; I , J , Kﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ.
( ) ( )
• ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (OIJﺒﹻ P O ; i , jﻭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (OJKﺒﹻ ... ، P O ; j , k
.2ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ
( )
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺜﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ
OM = x i + y j + z k ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ ) ( x , y , zﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻨﻀﻊ OJ = j ، OI = iﻭ OK = k
ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) (OIJ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ J ، I ، Oﻭ K
ﻻ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ Mﻭ ﺤﻴﺙ kﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻪ ﻓﻬﻤﺎ
ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ M ′ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻬﻤﺎ.
(
)
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M ′ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ O ; i , jﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ
xﻭ yﻭﺤﻴﺩﻴﻥ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ. OM ′ = x i + y j :
M Mﻭ kﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ z ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ′
. M Mﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎل: ﺒﺤﻴﺙ′ = z k :
OM = x i + y j + z k ﻭﻤﻨﻪ: OM = OM ′ + M M ′
.3ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ
(
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ u .ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ . OM = u ) ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
x
( )
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻫﻲ ) ( x , y , zﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . O ; i , j , kﻭﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻜﺘﺏ OM y
z
ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻴﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜلu = x i + y j + z k :
262
10 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺤﻴﺙ OJ = j ، OI = i :ﻭ . OK = k( )
ﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ). ( 2,3, −3
ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺘﻬﺎ ) ( x , y , z ﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
( )
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ O ; i , j , k
ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M 2 ، M 1 ، m 3 ، m 2 ، m1
ﻭ M 3ﺜﻡ ﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ
m 1 0 m 2 M 3 M 2 m 3 M 1M
ﺤﻴﺙ:
) m 3 ( 0, 0, z ) ، m 2 ( 0, y , 0 ) ، m1 ( x , 0, 0
) M 3 ( x , y , 0 ) ، M 2 ( x , 0, z ) ، M 1 ( 0, y , z
263
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 10
ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
ﻴﺘﻡ ﺘﻤﺩﻴﺩ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ. .1ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
(
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ O ; i , j , k :ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
)
.1ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) u ( x , y , zﻭ ) v ( x ′, y ′, z ′ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ αﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ:
u = 0 .1ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x = y = z = 0
u = v .2ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x = x ′ﻭ y = y ′ﻭ z = z ′
( )
.3ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ u + vﻫﻲ ) ( x + x ′, y + y ′, z + z ′ﻭ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ αuﻫﻲ ) (α x , α y , α z
.2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) A ( x A , y A , z Aﻭ ) B ( x B , y B , z Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﺈﻥ:
.1ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻲ ) ( x B − x A , y B − y A , z B − z A
xA +xB yA + yB zA +zB
, , .2ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ ABﻫﻲ
2 2 2
.2ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
(
)
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ v ( a ′, b ′, c ′ ) ، u ( a, b , c ) .ﻭ ) w ( a ′′, b ′′, c ′′ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ v ، uﻭ wﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ xﻭ yﺒﺤﻴﺙ w = x u + y v
ax + a ′y = a ′′
ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ) ( x , yﻓﻲ . ℝ 2 bx + b ′y = b ′′ ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
cx + c ′y = c ′′
.3ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻪ
(
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( x A , y A , z Aﻭ ) u ( a, b , cﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻪ.
)
) M ( x , y , z ) ∈ ( Dﻴﻌﻨﻲ (α ∈ ℝ ) AM = α uﺃﻱ x − x A = α aﻭ y − y A = α bﻭ z − z A = α c
b ( x − x A ) − a ( y − y A ) = 0 x −xA y − yA z −zA
ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺜﻼ: = = ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ abc ≠ 0ﺃﻥ
c ( x − x A ) − a ( z − z A ) = 0 a b c
b ( x − x A ) − a ( y − y A ) = 0
ﺃﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ b ، aﺃﻭ cﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺜﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ : c = 0
z = z A
x = x A
ﻭ ﻴﺒﻘﻰ zﻜﻴﻔﻲ. ﺃﻤﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ b ، aﻭ cﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺜﻼ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ : a = b = 0
y = y A
ﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ:ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﺒﹻ ) ، (Oxﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺍﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﹻ ) (Oyﻭﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻭﺍﻗﻡ ﺒﹻ ) (Ozﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻼﺯﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺠﺏ ﺃﻥ ﺘﺤﻘﻘﻬﺎ ) ( x , y , zﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻝﻜﻲ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻨﻲ:
) (Oz ) (Oy ) (Ox ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ
x = y =0 z =x =0 y =z =0 ﻤﻤﻴﺯﺍﺘﻪ
264
10 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل3
15 17
(
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) C ( 4, 0, −2 ) ، B ( 2,5,1) ، A ( 2,1, −3ﻭ . H 5, − , −
2 2
)
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ A BCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ.
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، Iﻭ Hﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ AB
ﺤــل:
.1ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ) ﻤﺜﻼ ( . AD = BCﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ BCﻫﻲ )( 2, −5, −3
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻓﺭﻀﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻫﻲ ) ( x , y , zﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ADﻫﻲ ). ( x − 2, y − 1, z + 3
AD = BCﻴﻌﻨﻲ x − 2 = 2ﻭ y − 1 = −5ﻭ z + 3 = −3ﺃﻱ x = 4ﻭ y = −4ﻭ z = −6
ﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ) ( 4, −4, −6 ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ D
21 15
.2ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻫﻲ ) ، ( 2,3, −1ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ IHﻫﻲ 3, − , − ﻭ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ IDﻫﻲ ) . ( 2, −7, −5
2 2
3
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ IH = ID :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، Iﻭ Hﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ.
2
265
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 10
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
.1ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ
(
O ; i , j , kﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) u ( x , y , z )
ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ . OM = uﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ . u = OM
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ M 3 ، M 2 ، M 1ﻭ M ′ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
OM 3 = z k ، OM 2 = y j ، OM 1 = x iﻭ OM ′ = OM 1 + OM 2
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻭﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻡ OMM ′ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ:
OM 2 = OM ′2 + M Mﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ′ 2 = OM 32
M Mﻓﺈﻥ: ′ 2
OM 2 = OM ′2 + OM 32
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻭﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻡ OM 1M ′ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ OM ′2 = OM 12 + M 1M ′2 :ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ:
M 1M ′2 = OM 2 2ﻓﺈﻥ OM ′2 = OM 12 + OM 2 2 :ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ OM 2 = OM 12 + OM 2 2 + OM 32 :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ:
OM 2 = x 2 + y 2 + z 2ﺃﻱ u = x 2 + y 2 + z 2
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺘﺤﺴﺏ ﻁﻭﻴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) u ( x , y , zﺒﹻu = x 2 + y 2 + z 2 : ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺘﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A ( x A , y A , z Aﻭ ) B ( x B , y B , z Bﺒﹻ: ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ:
= AB ) (x B − x A ) + ( y B − y A ) + (z B − z A
2 2 2
= AB ) ( 0 − 1) + ( −2 + 1) + ( 3 − 2 ﻤﺜﺎل :ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A (1, −1, 2ﻭ ) B ( 0, −2,3ﻫﻲ = 3
2 2 2
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﺎﺕ ﻏﺎﻝﺒﺎ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻔﻀل ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ.
x 2 + y 2 + z 2 = α 2ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Sﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . α ﺇﺫﻥ
266
10 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , j , kﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B ( 4,8, 2 ) ، A ( 8,5, 2ﻭ ) . C ( 5,1, 2
.1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺎﺕ AC ، ABﻭ . BC
.2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻭ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ.
ﺤــل:
AB = 5 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ = AB ) ( 4 − 8) + ( 8 − 5) + ( 2 − 2 .1ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
2 2 2
(
= 52 + 52ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ A BCﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A ( 50 ))
2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔAC 2 + AB 2 = BC 2 :
267
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 10
268
10 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺃﺤﺩ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل (O ; I , J , K ) :ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) (Cﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻫﺎ ) (Oz
ﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﺎﻫﺎﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻫﻤﺎ 2ﻭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍﻫﻤﺎ Oﻭ ) . A ( 0, 0,5
• ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) M ( x , y , zﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) (Cﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺴﻘﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . (Ozﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ Hﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ Mﺘﺤﻘﻕ x 2 + y 2 = 4 :ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 5
• ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺎ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) M ( x , y , zﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ x 2 + y 2 = 4 :ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 5ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
MH = 2ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ) . (C
ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ :ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ x 2 + y 2 = 4 :ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 5
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ :ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻫﺎ ) (Ozﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ،
ﻤﻘﻁﻌﻬﺎ ﺒﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋل ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) R ، (Ozﻫﻲ x 2 + y 2 = R 2 :ﻤﻊ zﻜﻴﻔﻲ.
x 2 + y 2 = R 2
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺃﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻫﺎ ) (Ozﺒﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ z = aﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻬﺎ:
z = a
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ • :ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻷﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻫﺎ ) (Oyﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻤﻘﻁﻌﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = 0
ﻫﻭ . 3
• ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , y , zﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ z 2 + y 2 = 25 :ﻤﻊ . −2 ≤ x ≤ 3
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ﺃﺤﺩ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺭﺃﺴﻪ o
.1ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل (O ; I , J , K ) :ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ) ، (Oz
ﺭﺃﺴﻪ Oﻭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ) A ( 0, 0, 4ﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ .2
• ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) M ( x , y , zﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( M ≠ O ) (Cﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Hﻤﺴﻘﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ
1
ﻋﻠﻰ ) . (Ozﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ HM 2 = OH 2ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ Mﺘﺤﻘﻕ:
4
x 2 + y 2 − 1 z 2 = 0ﻤﻊ . 0< z ≤ 4ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﺜل 1ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
AOK؟
4 4
1
• ﻋﻜﺴﻴﺎ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) M ( x , y , zﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺘﺤﻘﻕx 2 + y 2 − z 2 = 0 :
4
ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ) . (C
1
ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ :ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ) (Cﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ x 2 + y 2 − z 2 = 0 :ﻤﻊ . 0 ≤ z ≤ 4
4
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ :ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ) ، (Ozﺭﺃﺴﻪ Oﻭ ﻗﻴﺱ ﻨﺼﻑ
ﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻪ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ αﻫﻲx 2 + y 2 − tan 2 α × z 2 = 0 :
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ :ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ) ، (Oyﺭﺃﺴﻪ ، Oﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻪ 5ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ.3
269
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 10
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , j , kﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A ( 3, 0, −3ﻭ ) . B ( 2, 0, −2
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺒﺤﻴﺙ . −2GA + 3GB = 0ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ B؟
.2ﻨﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M ( x , y , zﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ) f ( Mﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻf ( M ) = −2MA 2 + 3MB 2 :
ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Γ kﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ f ( M ) = k :ﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ.
ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ) f ( Mﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ y ، xﻭ zﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺘﻴﻥ ) ( Γ 4ﻭ ) . ( Γ −12 •
ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ kﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) . ( Γ k •
.1ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻁﺭﻕ .ﻨﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ Gﻫﻲ ) . ( x , y , z
ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ −2GA + 3GBﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ) ( −x , − y , −zﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ −2GA + 3GB = 0ﻴﻌﻨﻲ x = y = z = o
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻤﺒﺩﺃ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ. ﺇﺫﻥG ( 0, 0, 0 ) :
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ } ). { ( A ; −2 ) , ( B ;3
• .2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ MA 2 = ( x − 3) + ( y − 0 ) + ( z + 3) :ﻭ ) MB 2 = ( x − 2 ) + ( y − 0 ) + ( z + 2
2 2 2 2 2 2
270
10 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
( )
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , j , kﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )، B ( 0, 0, −4 ) ، A ( 0, 0, 2 ) ، E ( 0, 0, −1
. Dﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Sﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Eﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 3 ( )
Cﻭ 5, 0, −3 ( )
5, 0,1
.1ﻫل ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ؟
.2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( S؟ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( Sﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( Sﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ.
.3ﺃﺩﺭﺱ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﺍﻷﻭﻀﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﻁﺢ ) ( Sﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Paﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . z = a
.4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Sﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( P−2
( ( ) )
ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ ) ( Sﻤﻊ ) (Oyﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ 0, 2 2, 0ﻭ 0, −2 2, 0ﻭ ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻤﻊ ) (Ozﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . B
( )
.3ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Paﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ . P O ; i , jﻨﻤﻴﺯ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﺎﻻﺕ:
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ ) ( Sﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Paﻤﻨﻔﺼﻠﻴﻥ. • ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ [∞a ∈ ]−∞; −4[ ∪ ]2; +
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ } a ∈ {−4; 2ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Paﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺴﻁﺢ ) ( Sﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . B
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ [ a ∈ ]−4; 2ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( Paﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) ( Paﻭﻓﻕ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) . (Oz
[ ]−4; 2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( P−2ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ) (S ( −2 ) .4ﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ
ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻭﻓﻕ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﺒﹻ . H
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) (Ozﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) z = −2 : ( P−2
ﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻫﻲ ) . ( 0, 0, −2
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ ) ( Sﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ . EP = 3ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻭﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ EHPﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . EP 2 = EH 2 + HP 2 :ﻨﺠﺩ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ . HP = 2 2
ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ) ( Sﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( P−2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Hﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 2 2
271
10
أــ اـ
ء
ﺃﺳـﺌـﻠﺔ ﻣﺘـﻌـﺪﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺃﺻﺤـﻴـﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺧـﻄـﺄ
ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﻁﺄ ﻋﻥ ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 7
ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 8ﺇﻝﻰ ، 14ﻭﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ . ABCDEFGH
H G
ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ . ABCDEFGH
8ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ BHﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ : E F
ﺃ( . AB + AH
D C
ﺏ( . HG + BG
ﺝ( . BA + BG A B
Iﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ DCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . 9 1ﺃ ( AE ، AD ، ABﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . ﺏ ( EF ، DC ، ABﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ .
ﺃ ( . H، G، C، B ﺝ ( EH ، HC ، AHﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﺏ ( . H، J، E، I 2ﺃ ( HG ، BG ، AHﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺔ .
ﺝ( . I ، H، G، F ﺏ ( CD ، EG ، ACﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺔ .
ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
10 ﺝ ( HG ، DC ، ADﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺔ .
ﺃ ( FH ، BGﻭ . FG ﺃ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( EGﻭ ) ( CAﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ . 3
ﺏ ( BC ، ACﻭ . BH ﺏ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( HFﻭ ) ( ACﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
ﺝ ( AD ، AEﻭ . GC ﺝ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( HDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎﻥ : 11 4ﺃ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( HDﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( BCF
ﺃ ( AGﻭ . BH ﺏ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( HDﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( ABC
ﺏ ( BFﻭ . DH ﺝ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( HDﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( HCG
ﺝ ( BDﻭ . HF ﺃ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( EA ) ، ( BD ) ، ( HFﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ 5
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( HDﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ : 12 ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
ﺃ ( ) ( FB ﺏ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AEﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( BDHF
ﺏ ( ) ( AC
ﺝ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BHﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AE
ﺝ ( ) ( HC
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O ; i ; j ; kﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ 6
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O ; i ; j ; kﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
13
) A ( 2;3; 2؛ ) B ( −1; 2;1؛ ) C ( −3;1;0؛
) A ( 2;1;3؛ ) B ( −3;1;5؛ ) . C (1;3; 2
) . D ( 3;3; 2
ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) u ( 4 ; 2; − 3ﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ :
ﺃ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( CDﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ .
ﺝ( AC ﺏ( BC ﺃ ( AB
ﺏ ( ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ABﻭ CDﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎﻥ .
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) ( D ; DC ; DA ; DHﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( EFG 14
ﺝ ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( CD
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل :
7ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ
ﺝ( . z = 1 ﺏ( . y = 1 ﺃ ( . x =1
|| || MA + MB || = || MC + MBﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( BD
272
10 ﺃﺸـﻌـﺔ ﺍﻝﻔـﻀﺎﺀ
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ 20
ا
ــ او
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺠﺎﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺭﻴﻨﻴﻥ 15ﻭ ، 16ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، J ، I ، O
ﺃ ( . IA + AL + LO
Kﺤﻴﺙ Kﻫﻲ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( OIJ
ﺏ ( . AL + LF + FE
ﻨﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ICDOABEKﻭ ، G ، H
ﺝ ( . HB + BF + FG
L ، Jﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ] [OD ] ، [ IC ] ، [ ABﻭ ] [ KE
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 23 ، 22 ، 21ﻝﺘﻜﻥ K ، J ، I ، O
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺓ ﺤﻴﺙ Kﺘﻘﻊ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( OIJ K L E
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻤﺒﺩﺅﻩ Oﻤﻤﺜﹼﻼ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ 21
A H B
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : D
O J
ﺃ ( . 2OI + OJ G
I C
ﺏ ( . 2OI + OK
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ . LB ، ID ، LA ، IK 15
5
ﺝ ( . OJ + OK ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ . HD ، LC ، IL
2 16
22ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻤﺒﺩﺅﻩ Oﻤﻤﺜﹼﻼ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ﻭ ، J ، M ، L ، I 17ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGH
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : N ، Kﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ] ، [ DC ] ، [ BC ] ، [ AB ] ، [ AD
ﺃ ( . OI + OJ + OK ] [ HG ] ، [ DHﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
H G
ﺏ ( . OI + 2OJ + OK
N
3 1 E
ﺝ ( . OI + OJ + OK K F
2 2
23ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻤﺒﺩﺅﻩ Oﻤﻤﺜﹼﻼ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ D J C
I M
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : A
L
B
ﺃ ( . OI − OJ
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ . LN ، MD
ﺏ ( . OI − OJ + OK
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ
18
ﺝ ( . 2OI + OJ − OK
. IL ، LC
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ 24 ـــع ا
ــ
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺠﺎﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ﻭ ، I ، J ، M ، L 19ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGH
ﺃ ( . BC + CD Q ، R ، P ، Kﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ] ، [ BC ] ، [ AB
ﺏ ( . AB + BC + CD ] [GH ] ، [ FG ] ، [ EF ] ، [ AD ] ، [ DCﻭ ] [ EH
ﺝ ( . BA + AC + CD ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ O .ﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ، ABCDﻭ ' Oﻫﻭ
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺭﻴﻨﻴﻥ ، 26 ، 25ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ . EFGH
ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ، Oﻭ Sﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( ABC ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺠﺎﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺠﺎﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
25 ﺏ( . LB + BF ﺃ( . AB + AD
ﺏ( . AC + CS + SD ﺃ( . AB + BC ﺩ( . OB + OD ﺝ( . OB + OC
ﺝ( . AC + BD
273
10
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ . 31 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺠﺎﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ : 26
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﻫل ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺏ( . SA − AB ﺃ( . AB + CB
ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ؟ ﺝ( . AO + OB + BS
ﺃ ( . BF ، FG ، FE ﻼ ﻤﺒﺩﺃﻩ B
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ،ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻤﺜ ﹰ 27
ﺏ ( . CG ، FD ، AB ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒِـ :
ﺝ ( . EG ، AD ، AB 1
ﺏ( . BD + DC ﺃ( . 2 BC
32ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ،ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺒﺤﻴﺙ 2
1 1
. AE + 2 AD = 2 EC + 2 BD ﺝ( . CB + CA
2 3
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ AC ، AB ، AEﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ 28
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 35 ، 34 ، 33ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺠﺎﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ w ، v ، uﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
ﺃ ( . BC + BD
33ﺃ ( . u = 2v + 3w
ﺏ ( . BC + BD + BA
ﺏ ( u − 3v = 0ﻭ 2u − 5w = 0
ﺝ ( . DB + DC + DA
34ﺃ ( u = 2vﻭ . w = u + 3v
ﺏ ( u = 0ﻭ . 2v − 3w = 0
أ
ــ اي
35ﺃ ( 3u − 5v = 0ﻭ . w = 0 ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴﻼﺕ ﻭ ، I 29
ﺏ ( v = 0 ، u ≠ 0ﻭ. w = 0 L ، K ، Jﻫﻲ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ] [ HG ] ، [ EF ] ، [ AB
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 36ﺇﻝﻰ ، 41ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ k ، j ، i ﻭ ] [ DCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . H K G
ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻫل ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ w ، v ، uﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ؟ E J F
C
D L
. w = 2 j ، v = j − k ، u = j + k 36
A I
B
. w = j + k ، v = i + j + k ، u = i + k 37 ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ،ﻫل
. w = j + k ، v = i − k ، u = i + j − k 38 ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ؟
ﺃ ( AD ، EGﻭ . DI
، v = 3i + j ، u = i + j − k 39
ﺏ ( IJ ، IAﻭ . KL
. w = −5i − 2 j + 2k
ﺝ ( BC ، DIﻭ . HK
. w = j + k ، v = i − k ، u = i + j 40
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ Sﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ 30
، v = −i + j + k ، u = i + j − k 41 ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( ABCﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ
. w=i− j+k ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ،ﻫل ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ؟
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Gﻭ ' Gﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍ ﺍﻝﺜﻘل ﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ ABC 42 ﺃ ( . SD ، SB ، SA
ﻭ ' ، A ' B ' Cﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ،ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . ﺏ ( . SC ، AB ، SA
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ . AA ' + BB ' + CC ' = 3GG ' : ﺝ ( . CD ، SB ، SA
274
10
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
1 3 1
ﺏ ( u ; − ; − ﻭ . v − ; ;
2 3 1 ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﻭ ' A ' B ' C ' Dﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻤﻥ 43
15 5 5 3 2 2
ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍﻫﻤﺎ Oﻭ ' Oﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل 49
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ . AA ' + BB ' + CC ' + DD ' = 4OO ' :
ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
ا ــ اــ ،
ﺃ ( ) u ( 2;1;3ﻭ ) . v ( 3; − 1; 2
& ! "# $%
ﺏ ( ) u (1; − 2;3ﻭ ) . v (1;1; 2
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 46 ، 45 ، 44ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل
50 ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ، ( O ; OI : OJ ; OKﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، A
ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
. D، C
ﺃ ( ) u ( 0; 0; 6ﻭ ) . v ( 2;0; 2
ﺏ ( ) u ( −3;3;3ﻭ ). v ( 3;3;3
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 53 ، 52 ، 51ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، A K
J
C ، Bﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
O
B ( 3 ; 1 ; 2 ) ، A (1 ; 2 ; 3) 51ﻭ . C 2 ; ;
3 5 I
2 2
B ( −5 ; 2 ; 1) ، A ( 2 ; 1 ; 3) 52
ﺃﻋﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻌﺭﻑ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ
ﻭ . C ; ;
13 2 11
3 3 3 ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ،ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ .
B (1 ; 3 ; 3) ، A ( 3 ; 2 ; 2 ) 53ﻭ . C ; ;
7 3 3 )، C ( 2;1;0 ) ، B (1; 2;0 ) ، A (1;1;1 44
2 2 2
) . D ( 0; 0; 2
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 56 ، 55 ، 54ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ
)، C (1;0;1) ، B ( −1;1;0 ) ، A (1; − 1;1 45
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( CDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
) . D ( −1; − 1;0
) ، C (1;3; 2 ) ، B ( 2;1; 0 ) ، A (1;0; 2 54 ) ، C (1; − 2;1) ، B (1; 2; 2 ) ، A ( 2;1; 2 46
) . D ( 2; 4;0
) . D (1;1; − 2
)، C ( −2; 2; 0 ) ، B (1;3; − 1) ، A ( 2; 2;3 55
ا
ااز
) . D ( −3;3; − 4
ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O ; i : j ; k
)، C (1; 2;0 ) ، B ( 0;1;3) ، A ( 2;0;1 56
47ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
) . D ( 3;1; − 2
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
)ن ون
ﺃ ( ) u ( 2;1;3ﻭ ) . v ( 4; 2;6
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 59 ، 58 ، 57ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ
1
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB ﺏ ( u − ;1; 2 ﻭ ) . v ( −1;3;6
3
). B (1;6;3) ، A ( 5; 2;3 57
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ 48
. B ( 3;1; 2 ) ، A (1;3; − 2 ) 58 ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
. B ( −3; 0;3) ، A ; ;
2 1 1 1 3 1 1 3 1
3 3 3 59 ﺃ ( u ; ; − ﻭ . v ; ; −
2 2 2 5 5 5
275
10
) B (1 ; 5 ; − 1) ، A ( 2 ; − 1 ; 3؛
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
71
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 62 ، 61 ، 60ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ
) C (1 ; − 17 ; 9ﻭ . u = −2OA + 3OB + OC
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ .
) B (1 ; − 2 ; 1) ، A ( −5 ; − 3 ; − 2؛ 72
) A ( 2 ; 3 ; 1؛ ) B (1 ; 0 ; 2؛ ) C ( 3 ; 5 ; 3؛ 60
) C ( 3 ; 7 ; 0ﻭ . u = OA + 2OB + OC
). D ( 4 ; 8 ; 2
ا%ت "#ا+ء ) A (1 ; 2 ; − 5؛ ) B ( 0 ; 3 ; 2؛ ) C (1 ; 1 ; 1؛ 61
73ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )A ( 2 ; − 1 ; 1 ). D ( 2 ; 0 ; − 6
ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ). u ( 2 ; 3 ; − 1 ) A (1 ; − 1 ; − 1؛ ) B ( 3 ; − 2 ; 5؛ 62
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x ; y ; zﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ) C ( 7 ; 3 ; 1؛ ). D ( 5 ; 4 ; − 5
، AM = kuﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ، ℝﻫﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 65 ، 64 ، 63ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، C ، B ، Aﺘﺸﻜل
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ Mﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . kﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺃ( ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ .
Mﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ kﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼ ﻭﺴﻴﻁﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ) B ( 2 ; 5 ; − 3) ، A ( 3 ; 2 ; 1؛ 63
ﺏ ( ﺠﺩ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ،ﺘﺭﺒﻁ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، M ). C (7 ; − 1 ; 2
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ . k ) B ( 3 ; 2 ; − 5) ، A (1 ; 2 ; 3؛ 64
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ). C ( 0 ; − 1 ; − 3
74ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) B (1 ; 5 ; − 1) ، A ( 0 ; 1 ; 0؛
65
) A (1 ; − 3 ; 2ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) . u ( 3 ; − 2 ; 2 ) . C ( −3 ; 1 ; 2
ﺠﺩ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼ ﻭﺴﻴﻁﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ﺃ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ، 68 ، 67 ، 66ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
ﺏ ( ﺠﺩ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A (1 ; − 1 ; 1ﻭ ). B (1 ; 2 ; 3 75 ) B ( 0 ; 2 ; 1) ، A ( 3 ; 0 ; 0؛ ) . C (1 ; 0 ; 2 66
ﺠﺩ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼ ﻭﺴﻴﻁﻴﺎ ،ﺜﻡ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ؛ B ( 5 ; 2 ; − 1) ، A (1 ; − 3 ; 2 ) 67
ﺠﺩ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼ ﻭﺴﻴﻁﻴﺎ ،ﺜﻡ ﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﻤﺤﺎﻭﺭ 76 ). C ( 2 ; 0 ; 3
ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ) ' ( yy ') ، ( xxﻭ ) ' . ( zz
B ; − 1 ; 3 ، A ; ; 1؛
1 3 1
68
77ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )A (1 ; 2 ; 1 2 2 2
ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ). u (1 ; 3 ; 1 ). C ( 2 ; − 1 ; 1
ﺃ ( ﺠﺩ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼ ﻭﺴﻴﻁﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 72 ، 71 ، 70 ، 69ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ
ﺏ ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، B ، A ، O
Pﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . z = 3 Cﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ). B ( −1 ; − 2 ; 0 ) ، A ( 2 ; 1 ; 3 78 ) B ( −2 ; − 2 ; − 1) ، A ( 3 ; 1 ; 2؛ 69
ﺃ ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻤﺜﻴﻼ ﻭﺴﻴﻁﻴﺎ ﻭﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AB C ; 1 ; 0 ﻭ . u = OA + 2OB + 3OC
1
3
ﺏ ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻤﻊ
) B ( −1 ; 2 ; 1) ، A (1 ; 3 ; 2؛ 70
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Pﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . x = 2
) C ( −4 ; 3 ; 1ﻭ . u = OA − 3OB + OC
276
10 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
1
ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Kﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ ADﺒﺤﻴﺙ AK = AD
4 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 82 ، 81 ، 80 ، 79ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻤﻌﺭﻑ
1
ﻭﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Jﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ . EJ = EH ﺒﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ،ﻭﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻴﺸﻤﻠﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
4
) ( Dﻭﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
ﺃ ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ IKﻭ FJﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ABﻭ . AD
x + y − 3 = 0
ﺏ ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ K ، I ، J ، Fﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ . ( D) : 79
y + z −1 = 0
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
x + y + z −1 = 0
. ( D) : 80
ABCDﻫﻭ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ Sﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ 89 x + 3y − z + 2 = 0
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . ABC x = 3
. ( D) : 81
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Jﻤﻥ ] [ SAﻭ ] [ SBﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ، y =1
1 1 x −1 = 0
ﺤﻴﺙ SI = SA؛ ، SJ = SBﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ K . ( D) : 82
3
1
3 z − 5 = 0
ﻤﻥ ] [ BCﺒﺤﻴﺙ . CK = CB 0$ا./ة
3
ﻴﻨﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) . ( O ; i ; j ; k
ﺃ ( ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻬﺭﻡ SABCDﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( IJK
ﺏ ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) ( IJKﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ O 83
) . ( SCD ﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ، Rﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ .
ﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ،ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺤﻴﺙ : ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ Sﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 84
x − y = 1
. AE − 2 EB = 5 AD + 5DC . ، 3ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒِـ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ AB ، AEﻭ ACﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ z=2
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻤﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ . S
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ Sﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 85
ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﻭ Eﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ : 91
x + y = 2
. EC + DA = DB − 2 AE . ، 3ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒِـ
z=x
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ AB ، CEﻭ ACﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ Sﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ Sﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 86
92ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ،ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ I
، 5ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Pﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . x = 3
1 1
ﻭ Jﺒﺤﻴﺙ BI = BAﻭ . BJ = BC ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ Sﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . P
3 3
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ IJﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ . EG ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ Sﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 87
D ، C ، B ، Aﻫﻲ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ 93 ، 7ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Pﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . z = 13
ﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ،ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Jﺤﻴﺙ : ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺴﻁﺢ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ Sﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . P
AI = 2 AB + AC + AD؛ &ر
. AJ = AB + 3 AC + AD 88ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDEFGHﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ،ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻥ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( IJﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ) . ( ABC 3
ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ ] [ ABﺒﺤﻴﺙ . AI = AB
4
277
10
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
100ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A (1; − 1; 2 ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﻭ Eﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ :
94
ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) ، u (1; 2;1ﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( 1
x + y + z − 6 = 0 . CE = AD
. ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒِـ : 3
x − y − 1 = 0
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ AC ، AEﻭ CDﻫﻲ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( Dﻤﻊ ) ∆ ( . 95
C ، B ، Aﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .
101ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ )A ( −1; 2;1
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل
ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) ، u (1; − 1; 2ﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ (
ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ،ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻤﺴﺘﻘل ﻋﻥ . M
x − y + z − 10 = 0
. ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒِـ : ﺃ ( . u = MA + 2MB − 3MC
2 x + y − z + 4 = 0
ﺏ ( . u = 3MA − MB − 2MC
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( Dﻤﻊ ) ∆ ( .
102 C ، B ، Aﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ 96
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .
ﻭﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ) ، u ( 2;1; 2ﻭﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ )A ( −1; 2; −1
x = 1 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒﺤﻴﺙ . MA − MB + MC = 0 :
. ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒِـ :
z = 1 97
C ، B ، Aﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( Dﻤﻊ ) ∆ ( . ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .
ﻋﺭﻑ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺎ ﺒﺈﻋﻁﺎﺀ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻭﺸﺭﻁ ،ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ 103
ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒﺤﻴﺙ MA − 2MB + MC = 0 :؟
ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﻭﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ Oﻭﻤﺤﻭ )' ( yyﻋﻠﻤﺎ 98
C ، B ، Aﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺔ E
ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 3ﻭﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻪ . 6
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ ABﻭ Fﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ AC
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﺘ ٍﻪ .
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( EFﻭ ) ( BCﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
ﻋﺭﻑ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺎ ﺒﺈﻋﻁﺎﺀ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻭﺸﺭﻁ ،ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ 104 99
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ D ، C ، B ، Aﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ ،
ﺍﻻﺴﻁﻭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺤﻭﺭﻩ ) ' ( xxﻭﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭ ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Eﻭ Fﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﻲ ] [ ABﻭ ] [CD
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺫﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ x = 2ﻭ x = 5ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻔﻀﺎﺀ.
ﺃ ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ MEﻭ MFﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻲ :
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ،ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻪ ﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 3
. MA + MB + MC + MD
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺴﻁﺢ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﺘ ٍﻪ .
ﺏ ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﺒﺤﻴﺙ . IA + IB + IC + ID = 0
278
11
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
ﻫﻭ ﻏﻴﺎﺙ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻥ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺴﻌﻭﺩ ﺒﻥ ﻤﺤﻤﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﺎﻨﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻋﻭ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ .ﻭﻝﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻭﺍﺨﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻥ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﻬﺠﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻜﺎﺸﺎﻥ ) ﺇﻴﺭﺍﻥ ( .ﺩﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺤﻭ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺼﺭﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻔﻘﻪ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻁﻕ ،ﺜﻡ ﺩﺭﺱ
ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺘﻔﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ .ﻭ ﻻ ﻏﺭﺍﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻭﺍﻝﺩﻩ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻔﻠﻙ.
ﻭ ﻗﺩ ﻋﺎﺵ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ ﻤﻌﻅﻡ ﺤﻴﺎﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﺴﻤﺭﻗﻨﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺒﻨﺎ ﻤﺭﺼﺩﺍ ﺴﻤﺎﻩ " ﻤﺭﺼﺩ ﺴﻤﺭﻗﻨﺩ ".
ﻤﺅﻝﻔﺎﺘﻪ :ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ ﻤﺼﻨﻔﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻠﻭﻡ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻨﺫﻜﺭ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ:
iﻜﺘﺎﺏ " ﺍﻝﺯﻴﺞ ﺍﻝﺨﻘﺎﻨﻲ " ﻭ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻀﺒﻁ ﻝﺠﺩﺍﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﺠﻭﻡ.
" iﺭﺴﺎﻝﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ"" ،ﺭﺴﺎﻝﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﺔ"" ،ﺭﺴﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﺏ
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺘﺭ"ﻭ " ﺭﺴﺎﻝﺔ ﻋﻥ ﺇﻫﻠﻴﺠﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻤﺭ ﻭ ﻋﻁﺎﺭﺩ".
ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﻪ " ﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ " ﻤﻨﻬﻼ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﻰ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻤﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻕ
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻐﺭﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺤﺩ ﺴﻭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺩﻭﺍ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ ﺃﺒﻨﺎﺌﻬﻡ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺍﺭﺱ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺠﺎﻤﻌﺎﺕ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻗﺭﻭﻥ ،ﻜﻤﺎ ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺩﻤﻭﺍ ﻜﺜﻴﺭﺍ ﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ 839ﻫـ 1436 /ﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﺍﻨﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺃﺘﻰ ﺒﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺒﺭﻫﻨﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺒﺘﻜﺭﻫﺎ.
279
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 11
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ﻤﻥ ﻤﻤﻴﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ "" ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻭﺭﺱ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﻴﺭﺓ ""
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ .w = 0ﻨﺘﺴﺎﺀل ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ wﺇﺫﺍ ﻝﻡ ﻴﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ.
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺫﻝﻙ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺎ A BCﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AB
ﻨﻤﻴﺯ ﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ . H
) w = ( AB 2 + HA 2 − HB 2
1
2
• .2ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ :1ﺒﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ HB = AB − HAﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ :
w = AB × AH = AB × AC cos BAC
• ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ :2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ :
w = AB × AH = AB × AC cos BAC
w = −AB × AH = AB × AC cos BAC • ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ :3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ :
( )
1 2 2 2
= w u + v − u −v .3ﺒﻔﺭﺽ AB = uﻭ AC = vﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
2
.4ﻨﺫﻜﺭ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ) (O ; I , Jﻤﻌﻠﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ ) u ( x , yﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻓﺈﻥ:
u = x2+y2
ﺒﻔﺭﺽ ) u ( x , yﻭ ) v ( x ′, y ′ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥw = xx ′ + yy ′ :
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ wﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ABﻭ AC
280
11 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
( )
2
.1ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ BC 2 = AC − ABﺜﻡ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . BC
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ
cos ABCﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ
ﺇﻝﻰ 0.01ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
. ABC
.3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ 0.01ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
. BCA
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
281
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 11
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ
.1ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻴﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ u ⋅vﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﹻ:
• u ⋅v = 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u = 0ﺃﻭ v = 0
) (
• u ⋅v = u v cos u ,vﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u ≠ 0ﻭ v ≠ 0
) (
ﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ • :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﻓﺈﻥ u ⋅v = u vﻷﻥ cos u ,v = 1
) (
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺎ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ u ⋅v = − u vﻷﻥ cos u ,v = −1
2 2 2
• ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ u ⋅uﺒﹻ uﻭ ﻨﺴﻤﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ uﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ u = uﻭ ﺒﺼﻔﺔ ﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ
2 2
ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ AB = AB = AB 2
( )
1 2 2 2
ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ 48 = u ⋅v u + v − u −v ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ uﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ:
2
( )
1 2 2 2
= u ⋅vﻭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺇﺠﺭﺍﺀ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﺎﺕ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ ﻨﺠﺩu ⋅v = xx ′ + yy ′ : u + v − u −v ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ ﻓﻲ
2
.3ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺓ
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ:
AB = uﻭ AC = vﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( ACﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﻴﻥ.
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ . u ⋅v = 0
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ • :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u = 0ﺃﻭ v = 0ﻓﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃﻥu ⋅v = 0 :
π
) (
) (
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u ≠ 0ﻭ v ≠ 0ﻓﺎﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ u ⋅v = 0ﻴﻌﻨﻲ cos u ,v = 0ﺃﻱ u ,v = + k πﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ
2
ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﺩل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ uﻭ vﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ.
282
11 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = AC = BC = 3ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ′ ، A ′ﻭ C ′ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] [ AC ] ، [ BCﻭ ] [ ABﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ CC ′ ⋅ AB ، BC ⋅CA ٍ ، AB ⋅ AC :و . A ′B ′ ⋅ AB
ﺤــل:
ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ABﻭ ) (CDﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ AB ⋅CD = 0 ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ:
. AJ ⋅ BIﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺫﻝﻙ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( A ; B , D ﻝﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ = 0
1 1 1 1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ B (1, 0 ) ، J ,1 ، A ( 0, 0 ) :ﻭ I 0, ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ AJ ,1ﻭ BI −1, ﺭ
2 2 2 2
1 1
ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍAJ ⋅ BI = ( −1) + (1) = 0 :
2 2
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ AJﻭ BIﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( AJﻭ ) ( BIﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ.
283
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 11
ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ
ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ.1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎλ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲw ﻭv ، u ﻤﻥ ﺍﺠل ﻜل ﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﺸﻌﺔ:ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
( ) ( )
u + v ⋅w = u ⋅w + v ⋅w ( 3) u ⋅ v + w = u ⋅v + u ⋅w ( 2 ) u ⋅v = v ⋅ u (1)
( ) ( ) ( ) ( )
u ⋅ λv = λ u ⋅v ( 5) λu ⋅v = λ u ⋅v ( 4 )
w ( x ′′, y ′′ ) ﻭv ( x ′, y ′ ) ، u ( x , y ) ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ:ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ
u ⋅v = xx ′ + yy ′
u ⋅v = v ⋅ u ﻓﺈﻥyy ′ = y ′y ﻭxx ′ = x ′x ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ.1
v ⋅ u = x ′
x + y ′
y
: ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ. ( x ′ + x ′′, y ′ + y ′′ ) ﻫﻲv + w ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ.2
( )
u ⋅ v + w = x ( x ′ + x ′′ ) + y ( y ′ + y ′′ ) = xx ′ + xx ′′ + yy ′ + yy ′′
( )
u ⋅ v + w = u ⋅v + u ⋅w ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
u ⋅v + u ⋅w = xx ′ + yy ′ + xx ′′ + yy ′′ = xx ′ + xx ′′ + yy ′ + yy ′′
: ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ. ( λ x , λ y ) ﻫﻲλu ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ.3
( ) ( )
λu ⋅v = ( λ x ) x ′ + ( λ y ) y ′ = λ ( xx ′ + yy ′ ) = λ u ⋅v
( )( ) ( )
1 1
2u ⋅ −3v + w = 2u ⋅ −3v + 2u w = −6u ⋅v + u ⋅w • :ﺃﻤﺜﻠﺔ
2 2
( )( )
2 2 2 2
2u − v ⋅ u + 3v = 2u + 6u ⋅v − v ⋅u − 3v = 2u + 5u ⋅v − 3v •
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻁﺎﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﻴﺭﺓ.2
(u +v ) = (u +v )(u +v ) = u + u ⋅v +v ⋅u +v = u + 2u ⋅v +v
2 2 2 2 2
:• ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
(u −v ) = (u −v )(u −v ) = u − u ⋅v −v ⋅u +v = u − 2u ⋅v +v
2
2 2 2 2
:• ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
( )( )
2 2 2 2
u + v u − v = u − u ⋅v + v ⋅ u − v = u −v :• ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ
( ﺃﻭu + v ) = u + 2u ⋅v + v
2
2
2 2 2 2
u + v = u + 2u ⋅v + v
( ﺃﻭu −v ) = u − 2u ⋅v + v
2 2
2 2 2 2
u −v = u − 2u ⋅v + v
( ) ( ) : ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ
1 2 2 2 1 2 2 2
u ⋅v = u +v − u − v ﻭ u ⋅v = u + v − u −v
2 2
284
11 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل3
B ، A .1ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ .ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ AM ⋅ BC + BM ⋅CA + CM ⋅ AB = 0 : M
.2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . H
ﺤــل:
.1ﻨﻀﻊα = AM ⋅ BC + BM ⋅CA + CM ⋅ AB :
( ( ) ) ( )
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ α = AM ⋅ BA + AC + BA + AM ⋅CA + CA + AM ⋅ AB :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ:
α = AM ⋅ BA + AM ⋅ AC + BA ⋅CA + AM ⋅CA + CA ⋅ AB + AM ⋅ AB
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ AM ⋅ AC + AM ⋅CA = 0 ، AM ⋅ BA + AM ⋅ AB = 0 :ﻭ BA ⋅CA + CA ⋅ AB = 0ﻓﺈﻥ α = 0
.2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ A BCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ )ﻤﺜﻼ( ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻠﺫﻴﻥ ﻴﺸﻤﻼﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻷﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﻴﻥ .ﻝﻨﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ٍﺔ Hﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . C
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل 1ﻭ ﺒﺄﺨﺫ AH ⋅ BC + BH ⋅CA + CH ⋅ AB = 0 : M = H
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ) ( AH ) ⊥ ( BCﻭ ) ( BH ) ⊥ ( ACﻓﺈﻥ AH ⋅ BC = 0ﻭ BH ⋅CA = 0
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ CH ⋅ AB = 0 :ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ) (CH ) ⊥ ( AB
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . C
) (
1 1 a 2
AB ⋅CJ = AB ⋅ CD = AB ⋅ − AB = − ﻭ
3 3 3
( () )
AI ⋅ BJ = AB + BI ⋅ BC + CJ .2ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
AI ⋅ BJ = AB ⋅ BC + AB ⋅CJ + BI ⋅ BC + BI ⋅CJ
a2 a2
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ . AI ⋅ BJ = 0 − + + 0 = 0 :ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ) . ( AI ) ⊥ ( BJ
3 3
285
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 11
( )
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :ﻨﺯﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O ; i , jﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ
iﻭ uﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ.
ﻨﻀﻊ u = OAﻭ v = OBﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ B ′ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﹻ Bﻋﻠﻰ ) . (OA
ﺇﺫﻥ v ′ = OB ′ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ v = OBﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ u = OA
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ B ( x B , y B ) ، A ( x A , 0 ) ، O ( 0, 0 ) :ﻭ ) B ′ ( x B , 0ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
) OB ( x B , y B ) ، OA ( x A , 0ﻭ ) OB ′ ( x B , 0
OA ⋅OB = x A x B + 0 × y B = x A x B
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ OA ⋅OB = OA ⋅OB ′ﺃﻱu ⋅v = u ⋅v ′ : ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
OA ⋅OB ′ = x A x B + 0 × 0 = x A x B
ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ABﻭ CDﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺘﺎ
C ′ﻭ D ′ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Cﻭ D
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻓﺈﻥAB ⋅CD = AB ⋅C ′D ′ :
( )
2
• AB ⋅ BD = AB ⋅ BA = AB ⋅ − AB = − AB = − AB 2 = −25
ﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ BDﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻭ BA
2
• BC ⋅ BD = BC ⋅ BC = BC = 3
ﻷﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ BDﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ BCﻫﻭ BC
286
11 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل5
ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AC ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ A ′ . Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ ABﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﻤﻥ A ′
ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BCﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . B ′
ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ AB ⋅ AB ′ﻭ . AB ⋅ A ′C
ﺤــل:
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ AB ′ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ AA ′ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
× AB ⋅ AB ′ = AB ⋅ AA ′ = AB AA ′
ﻷﻥ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ABﻭ AA ′ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ.
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ A ′Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ABﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ A ′Aﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
AB ⋅ A ′C = AB ⋅ A ′A = −AB × AA ′
ﻷﻥ ﺍﺘﺠﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ABﻭ A ′Aﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﺎﻥ.
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ AB ⋅ AB ′ﻭ AB ⋅ A ′Cﻤﺘﻌﺎﻜﺴﺎﻥ ﺃﻱ AB ⋅ AB ′ = − AB ⋅ A ′C
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل6
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = AC = 4ﻭ . BC = 5ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Hﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ BC
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔٍ HA ⋅CB ، CA ⋅CB :ﻭ . AB ⋅ BC
.2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Kﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( ACﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . CK
ﺤــل:
• .1ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﹻ CAﻋﻠﻰ CBﻫﻭ CHﻓﺈﻥ:
5 25
= CA ⋅CB = CH ⋅CB = CH × CB = × 5
2 2
• ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ) ( HA ) ⊥ (CBﻓﺈﻥHA ⋅CB = 0 :
• ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﹻ ABﻋﻠﻰ CBﻫﻭ HBﻓﺈﻥ:
5 25
AB ⋅ BC = HB ⋅ BC = − HB × BC = − × 5 = −
2 2
.2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻉ CBﻋﻠﻰ CAﻫﻭ CKﻓﺈﻥCA ⋅CB = CA ⋅CK :
25
= CA ⋅CB ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل1
2
25 25
= CA ×CKﻭ ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ CA = 4 = CA ⋅CKﺃﻱ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ:
2 2
25
= CK ﻨﺠﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭ:
8
287
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 11
.3ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O ; i , j
Ω
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻡ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ) Ω ( x 0 , y 0ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . ( r >0 ) r
) (Cﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , yﺤﻴﺙ ΩM = r :ﺃﻱ ΩM 2 = r 2
ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ( x − x 0 ) + ( y − y 0 ) = r 2 :
2 2
ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ( r >0 ) rﻫﻲ: ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ) Ω ( x 0 , y 0
(x − x 0 ) + ( y − y 0 ) = r 2
2 2
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] [ ABﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﺤﻴﺙ MA ⋅ MB = 0
288
11 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل7
( )
O ; i , jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺤﻴﺙ B ( −2,3) ، A (1,1) :ﻭ ) . C ( 3, 2
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل8
( )
O ; i , jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ.
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ) Ω ( −2,1ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 3
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (C ′ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] [ ABﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ) A ( −2, −1ﻭ ) . B ( −3, 2
.3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , yﺤﻴﺙ x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 3 = 0ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ.
.4ﻫل ) ( Γﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , yﺤﻴﺙ x 2 + y 2 + 2x − 4 y + 8 = 0ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ؟
ﺤــل:
.1ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (Cﻫﻲ ( x + 2 ) + ( y − 1) = 3ﺃﻱx 2 + y 2 + 4x − 2 y + 2 = 0 :
2 2 2
M ( x , y ) ∈ (C ′ ) .2ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ MA ⋅ MB = 0ﺃﻱ( −2 − x )( −3 − x ) + ( −1 − y )( 2 − y ) = 0 :
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (C ′ﻫﻲ x 2 + y 2 + 5x − y + 4 = 0
)∗ ( .3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) (C ′′ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , yﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ x 2 + y 2 − 2x − 3 = 0
)( x − 1 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ x 2 − 2x = ( x − 1) − 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺘﻜﺘﺏ )∗ ( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل− 1 + y 2 − 3 = 0 :
2 2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺇﺫﻥ (C ′′ ) . ( x − 1) + y 2 = 22ﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) I (1, 0ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 2
2
(x 2
.4ﻨﻜﺘﺏ x 2 + y 2 + 2x − 4 y + 8 = 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل + 2x ) + ( y 2 − 4 y ) + 8 = 0
) ( x + 1) + ( y − 2 ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ x 2 + 2x = ( x + 1) − 1ﻭ y 2 − 4 y = ( y − 2 ) − 4ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ= −3 :
2 2 2 2
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻑ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻁﺭﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﺴﺎﻝﺏ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻻ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , yﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﻫﺎ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ.
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( Γﻫﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺨﺎﻝﻴﺔ.
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻝﻜل ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل x 2 + y 2 + ax + by + c = 0ﻝﻜﻥ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻜل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ
289
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 11
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺃﻁﻭﺍل ﻭ ﺃﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ
.4ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ I .ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] M . [ ABﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ.
( ( ) )
2 2 2 2
MA 2 + MB 2 = MA + MB = MI + IA + MI + IB ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
( )
2 2 2
MA 2 + MB 2 = 2MI + 2MI ⋅ IA + IB + IA + IB ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ:
2 2 1 1
ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ IA + IB = 0 :ﻭ IA = IB = ABﺃﻱ IA = IB = AB 2
4 2
1
ﻓﺈﻥMA 2 + MB 2 = 2MI 2 + AB 2 :
2
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ A :ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ ABﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
1
MA 2 + MB 2 = 2MI 2 + AB 2
2
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ
( )
2 2 2 2
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎBC 2 = BC = AC − AB = AC + AB − 2AC ⋅ AB :
a 2 = b 2 + c 2 − 2bc cos A AC 2 = b 2 ، AC ⋅ AB = AC × AB cos Aﻭ AB 2 = c 2ﻓﺈﻥ : ﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ :
c 2 = a 2 + b 2 − 2ab cos C b 2 = a 2 + c 2 − 2ac cos Bﻭ ﻭ ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ
290
11 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل9
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ AC = 8 ، AB = 5 :ﻭ . BC = 7
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ) ( Γﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕMA + MC = 38 :
2 2
Bﻭ
.C Aﻭ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ 0.1ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( AC .3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ BHﺤﻴﺙ Hﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ B
ﺤــل:
.1ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ ACﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
1 1
. MA 2 + MC 2 = 2MI 2 + AC 2ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Γﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ2MI 2 + AC 2 = 38 :
2 2
ﺃﻱ 2MI + 32 = 38ﺃﻭ . MI = 3ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ) ( Γﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 3
2 2
BC 2 = AB 2 + AC 2 − 2AB × AC cos A .2ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ A BCﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل10
Bﻭ . C = 70°
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ = 50° ، BC = 8 :
.1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
.A
.2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ABﻭ ACﺜﻡ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺩﻭﺭ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ . 10−2
ﺤــل:
Aﻨﺠﺩ = 60°
.A +B
+C
.1ﻤﻥ = 180°
AB AC BC
= = .2ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻴﻭﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
sin C sin B
sin A
BC sin B 8sin 50° BC sin C 8sin 70°
= AC = = ABﻭ = ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
sin A sin 60°
sin A sin 60°
ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺁﻝﺔ ﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺩﻭﺭ ABﺇﻝﻰ 10−2ﻫﻭ 8.68ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻤﺩﻭﺭ ACﺇﻝﻰ 10−2ﻫﻭ . 7.08
291
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 11
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ AHﺒﻴﻥ Aﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻤﺴﻘﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( D
ﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎ ) ( D ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O ; I , Jﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( x 0 , y 0
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ ax + by + c = 0ﺤﻴﺙ ) . ( a , b ) ≠ ( 0, 0
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ) ( Dﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ nﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﺎﻩ ﻫﻤﺎ ) . ( a , b
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ :ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( x 0 , y 0ﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ ax + by + c = 0ﻫﻲ:
ax 0 + by 0 + c
a2 + b 2
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ:
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 2,3ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻝﺔy = 2x + 1 :
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ) Ω ( −2,1ﻭ ﺘﻤﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔx + y − 2 = 0 :
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) (C ′ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x , yﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔx 2 + y 2 − 2x − 6 y − 3 = 0 :
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) (C ′ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ.
• ﻫل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( D ′ﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ 3x + 2 y + 4 = 0ﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (C ′؟
292
11 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ
.1ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) sin ( a − b ) ، cos ( a + b ) ، cos ( a − bﻭ ) sin ( a + b
) (O ; I , Jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ B
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﺒﺤﻴﺙ:
( ) ( )
OI ,OA = aﻭ OI ,OB = b
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ OAﻭ OBﺜﻡ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ
ﻝﻠﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﺃﺤﺴﺏOB .OA :
( ( ) ( ) )
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﺎل . OB ,OA = i ,OA − i ,OB :ﺒﻴﻥ،
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﻠﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ،ﺃﻥOB .OA = cos ( a − b ) :
)(1 ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻤﺎ ﺴﺒﻕ ﺃﻥcos ( a − b ) = cos a cos b + sin a sin b :
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺒﺩﺍل ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ bﺒﹻ ) ( −bﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ) (1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
)( 2 cos ( a + b ) = cos a cos b − sin a sin b
π π
ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ sin x = cos − x ﻭ cos x = sin − x ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
2 2
)( 4 ( 3) sin ( a − b ) = sin a cos b − cos a sin bﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥsin ( a + b ) = sin a cos b + cos a sin b :
ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺸﻜل ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
π π
sin cosﻭ
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ • :ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﻝﹻ
8 8
1 − cos 2a 1 + cos 2a
= sin 2 a = cos 2 aﻭ • ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ:
2 2
293
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 11
( )
O ; i ; jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ( D ) .ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) B (1,1ﻭ ) n ( 2,1ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻪ.
.1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ) M ( x , yﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( Dﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﺎ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ:
ﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻜﻴﻔﻲ. y = 2k + 1 ﻭ x = −k + 1
.2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝﺒﹻf ( k ) = 5k 2 − 10k + 10 :
.3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) . A ( 2; 4ﺃﺤﺴﺏ AM 2ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ kﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
.1ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻫﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل 2x + y + c = 0 :ﻷﻥ ) n ( 2,1ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻪ.
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) B (1,1ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ( Dﻓﺈﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﺎ ﺘﺤﺤﻕ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Dﺃﻱ 2 (1) + 1 + c = 0 :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪc = −3 :
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ 2x + y − 3 = 0ﻫﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M ( x , yﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ BMﻭ uﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﺤﻴﺙ uﺸﻌﺎﻉ
ﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( Dﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﻤﺜﻼ ) . u ( −1, 2
x − 1 = −k
BMﻭ uﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﺎﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺒﺤﻴﺙ BM = k u :ﺃﻱ
y − 1 = 2k
x = −k + 1
ﻨﺠﺩ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M ( x , yﺘﺤﻘﻕ
y = 2k + 1
.2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ f ( k ) = 5k 2 − 10k + 10 :ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪf ′ ( k ) = 10 ( k − 1) :
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ f ′ﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﻤﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﺇﺸﺎﺭﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺔ 1ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻋﻨﺩ 1ﻫﻲ )f (1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ . f (1) = 5 (1) − 10 (1) + 10 = 5 :ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﻋﻠﻰ ℝﻫﻲ .5
2
.3ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎAM 2 = ( x − 2 ) + ( y − 4 ) :
2 2
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻫﻲ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
294
11 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
=C
. ACB ، CBA
=B ، BAC
=A A BCﻤﺜﻠﺙ .ﻨﻀﻊ ، BC = a ، A C = b ، A B = c
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ Sﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ pﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ.
1 + cos Aﻭ ﺃﻥ ) = 2 ( p − b )( p − c
1 − cos A .1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) = 2 p ( p − a
bc bc
sin Aﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ b ، a ، pﻭ cﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥS = p ( p − a )( p − b )( p − c ) :
.2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
1 − cos A ) = 2 ( p − b )( p − c 1 + cos Aﻭ ﻨﺠﺩ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ = 2 p ( p − a ) :
bc bc
2 2
( ()
)
cos A + sin 2 Aﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ sin A = 1 − cos A = 1 − cos A 1 + cos A 2 .2ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ = 1
295
11
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺎﺕ ﻨﻘﻁ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O , A , Bﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) C ( 2;1ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Pﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﺓ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ) . (O , A
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﻭ:
.1ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ) ( E 1ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ PBCﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ Pﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) (O , A
.2ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ) ( E 2ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ PBCﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ Pﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) (O , A
.1ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( E 1
ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﻤﻴﻜﻴﺔ:
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ:
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻤﺯﻨﺎ ﺒﹻ aﺇﻝﻰ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ] [ BCﻭ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ] [ BPﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . a
( x , yﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Mﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ aﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ. y − 1 ≤ 0 : • ﻋﻴﻥ ،ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ) ، a
.2ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( E 2
ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ:
• ﺒﻌﺩ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) (O , A , Bﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ P ،Cﻭ Hﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ.
• ﺒﺈﺘﺒﺎﻉ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺤﺭﻴﻙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ) (O , Aﻭ ﻻﺤﻅ ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . H
• ﺒﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) . ( E 2
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ:
• ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻔﺎﺼﻠﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Pﻭ H؟
• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻤﺯﻨﺎ ﺒﹻ aﺇﻝﻰ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ PBCﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﻠﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ PC
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . a
296
11 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ
) (Cﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ A . Rﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﻭ Pﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . (C
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( APﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ .Qﻨﺴﻤﻲ Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ PQ
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﻭ:
ﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . (C Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ PQ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ) ( Eﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ
2R 2 − OA 2
). ( r > 0 = r O ′M = rﺤﻴﺙ
2
4
.2ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ:
2R 2 − OA 2
= r ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﺤﻘﻕ O ′M = rﻤﻊ
2
4
• ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ MA + MO = Rﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻘﻊ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . (C
2 2 2
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) (OMﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Pﻭ .Qﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ PQﻭ ﺃﻥ •
ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ APQﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Aﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . (C ′
297
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
ﺃﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ .
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ . 1
ﺃﺴـﺌـﻠﺔ ﻤﺘـﻌـﺩﺩﺓ ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ uﻭ vﺸﺎﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﻁﻴﻥ ﺨﻁﻴﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ : 2
ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﺎﺕ .
|| u . v = || u || × || v
ABCD 18ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ . 1 2
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ OBﻭ ODﻫﻭ : ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻉ u = || u ||2 ، uﺇﺫﻥ || u = || u 3
1 1 ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u . v = 0ﻓﺈﻥ u = 0ﺃﻭ . v = 0 4
ﺝ( . − ﺏ( ﺃ( 0
2π
= ) ( u , vﻓﺈﻥ
2
2
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ || u ||= 2 ، || u ||= 1ﻭ 5
19ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ DC.DBﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ : 3
ﺝ( 0 ﺏ( 2 ﺃ( 1 u . v = −1
ABC 20ﻤﺜﻠـــﺙ ﺤﻴـــﺙ BC = 2 ، AC = 1 π
π (u , v ) 4
= − ﻭ || u ||= 1 ، || u ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ||= 2 6
ﻭ = ) ( CA ; CBﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ CA.CB :ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ :
3 ﻓﺈﻥ || u + v ||2 = 4
1
ﺝ( . 3 ﺏ( 1 ﺃ( − ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺍﻷﺸﻌﺔ ، w ، v ، u
2
7
21ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠـﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤـﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠـﺎﻨﺱ ﻝـﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) ، u (1 ; − 2 ( 2u − v ) .w = 2 ( u.w ) − v.w
) v ( 2 ; − 3؛ u . vﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ : ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ ، v ، u 8
ﺝ( 4 ﺏ( 8 ﺃ( −8 || u + v ||2 = || u ||2 +2u. v + || v ||2
22ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋـﺩﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u . v = u . wﻓﺈﻥ . v = w 9
sin θ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ AB . AC = AB 2ﻓﺈﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ
u ﻓﺈﻥ : ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ θ؛ 10
cosθ
ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ . A
ﺏ( | || u ||=| cos 2θ ﺃ( || u ||= 1
A 11ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭ uﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ .ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M
ﺝ( | . || u ||=| sin 2θ
2 2 ﺤﻴﺙ AM . u = 0ﻫﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ .
ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل : 23ﺍﻝﻘﻭل u = v
12ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ،ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ
ﺃ( u =vﺏ( )( u + v ) ⊥ ( u− v
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ ) A (1; 2ﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ 2ﻫﻲ
ﺝ( u + v = 2uﺃﻭ . u + v = 0
2 2 x2 + y2 − 2x − 4 y + 1 = 0
|| u + v ||2 = u + v 24ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ :
π π π π
. cos + = 3 sin − cos 13
1
ﺝ( . u = v ﺏ( u ⊥ v ﺃ( u // v
3 7 2 7 7
u ( −2;3) 25ﻫﻭ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ :
2 x 1 + cos x
ﺏ( −2 x + 3 y − 1 = 0 . cosﺃ( −3 x + 2 y + 2 = 0 = 14ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ، x
2 2
ﺝ( 3x + 2 y + 1 = 0 3
A 26ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ .ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ M 15ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u ﻓﺈﻥ . || u ||= 3
3
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ MA.MB = 0 :ﻫﻲ :
1 −2
ﺃ ( ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB 16ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ u ﻭ v ﻓﺈﻥ . u . v = −5
−1 3
ﺏ ( ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ ] . [ AB
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( AB −1 3
17ﻜﺎﻥ u ﻭ v ﻓﺈﻥ u ⊥ v ﺇﺫﺍ
−3 1
298
11 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ
] [ BC O . BC = 4cm ، AB = 3cmﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ
ABD 27ﻭ BCDﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺎ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ CA . CBﻭ OA . BC
ﺤﻴﺙ . BD = 4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
I (2ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ـ Bﻋﻠﻰ ) ( AC
، BA . BC ، AB . AD
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . CI
DO . CDﻭ AD . CB
ABC 33ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = 2ﻭ AC = 3
ﻭ . AB . AC = 4
) ( O; Iﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( dﺤﻴﺙ OI = 1 28
ﻫل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ A؟ ﻋﻠل.
ABC 34ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ AC = 3 ، AB = 2 D A O C B x
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﻭ AB . AC = 4
AB . CD ، AD . CB ، AB . AC
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ . B
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ CA . CBﺜﻡ ﻗﻴﺴﹰﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ IA . DB ، OD . OI ، DC . AD
) Cﺒﺎﻝﺩﺭﺠﺎﺕ
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = 6ﻭ Iﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ 29
ﻭ ﺒﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ .( 10−1
ﻗﻁﺭﻴﻪ.ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
35ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﻌﻴﻨﺎ ABCDﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﺤﻴﺙ
DI . BI ، IB . IC ، AB . CB ، AB . DC
AC = 10ﻭ . BD = 6
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ Bﻭ ACD 30
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . AB . AD
ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ .ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ AC = 6
(2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Pﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( AB
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . AP
ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ، AC . CD ، AB . AC
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ 5cm 36
DC . DB ، DC . DA
. ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BC ﻭ I
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ DHﺤﻴﺙ H
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝـ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( DC
( )
. AI . AB − AC ، CA . CI ، BA . BC
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ CD . CBﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﺤﻴﺙ ، AB = 4 37
cosDCB
AD = 5ﻭ . AC = 7
ABCDﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﺤﻴﺙ AD = 3ﻭ . AB = 5 31
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . AB . ADﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ . BD
Eﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ AB
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ d . AB = 4ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ 38
)ﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل(
ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ABﻓﻲ B
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ACﻭ . DE
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ dﻓﺈﻥ
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﻥ
AM . AB = 16
ACﻭ DEﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ABﻭ . AD
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Nﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ AN . AB = 16
-ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ . AC . DE
ﻓﺈﻥ Nﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ . d
( )
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ θ = DE ; ACﺒﺎﻝﺩﺭﺠﺎﺕ
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ I . aﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﻲ 39
ﺒﺘﻘﺭﻴﺏ . 0,01
ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ BCﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ Aﺤﻴﺙ 32
ﻭ ] [CI Kﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ] [ AJ
299
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
، uﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ u = v 47 ( 1ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ AJ . CI
5π (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﺴﺎ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
) JKIﺃﻋﻁ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ( 0,1
) (
2 3
u .v = − = u, vﻭ
3 6 ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ BC = 8 ، AB = 10 40
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . u ﻭ AC = 12
48ﻝﻴﻜﻥ uﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ . (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ AB . AC
) (
ﻨﻀﻊ u , v = θ (2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ
BACﻤﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺤﺩﺓ.
) (
(1ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ u, −vﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . θ u 41ﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ u = 3ﻭ v = 2
) ( ) ( ) (
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥu . −v = − u . v = −u .v : ﻭ u . v = −3
300
11 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ABCD 56ف AD = 2 ، AB = 4 ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ A ' . Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ 52
و DC = 5 )( AB ﻤﻥ ] . [ ACﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ' Aﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( BCﻓﻲ ' B
، AB.BC ، DC.DB
ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ' AC . ABﻭ ' AC . BA
AC.DB ، AD.BC
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . CA.CB ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺭ ﻜﻭﺤﺩﺓ .
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﻝﻘﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ACB ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ ABCﺤﻴﺙ : 53
ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ، ABCﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ACEF 57 ﺃ( AC = 6 ، AB = 3ﻭ AB . AC = 9
ﻭ . BCDG ﺏ( AC = 5 ، AB = 4ﻭ AB . AC = −12
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ CA.CB = −CD.CE
ﺠـ( AC = 4 ، AB = 3ﻭ AB . AC = 0
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . BE. ADﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ؟
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ 4ﻭ ABIﻤﺜﻠﺙ 54
(3ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ CE.CB
ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ Jﻭ Kﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﻴﻥ ـ I
ﻭ ، CA.CDﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ BE = AD
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﺤﻴﺙ . AB = 4 ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ABﻭ ) ( ADﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ.
58
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ AB. ACﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل: (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ
(1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ. ، AD . AI ، IJ . IA
( )
5 cos AB, AC (2 . IJ . DC ، AI .CB
( )
1 (2ﺃ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ AB . DIﻭ DA . DI
(3ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ A; i, jﺤﻴﺙ i = AB
4
1 ﺏ( ﺍﺤﺴﺏ DIﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ DKI
ﻭ j = AD
4 ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻗﻴﻡ cos150ﻭ cos 750
( )
2 2
(4ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ BC = AC − AB ) ﻻﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ADIﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ(
u 59ﻭ vﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ AB . AC
2 2
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥu + v − u − v = 4u . v : O 55ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ i ،ﻭ jﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎﻥ ﻁﻭﻴﻠﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ
( )
2 2 2 2
u +v + u −v = 2 u + v ﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ A .1ﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ـ OA = i :
.ﻭ . OB = jﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ AOB = α
= ) (u + v ) .(u − v
2 2
u − v (2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
ﻨﻀﻊ u = i + 2 jﻭ v = 2i − j
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻁﺭﺍ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻴﻜﻭﻨﺎ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﻴﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ
Cﻭ Dﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﺎﻥ ـ OC = u :ﻭ OD = v
ﻭﻓﻘﻁ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺃﻀﻼﻋﻪ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ. 2 2
ﺤﻴﺙ ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BC ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ I 60 (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ v ، uﻭ u.vﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ α
301
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 60ﺇﻝﻰ 76ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ
( )
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ
ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O; i, j
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B (2;1) ، A(−2;0ﻭ )C (−3;3 64 ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ K . 1ﻨﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ 61
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ـ Aﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
ﻭ Nﺍﻝﻤﻘﻁﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝـ Kﻋﻠﻰ ) ( DC ] M . [ AC
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ BC ﻭ ) ( DAﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ 65ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( D
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( MN
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
2 ﻭ ) ( BKﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ
ﺃ( ) ( Dﻴﺸﻤل ) A(2; −1ﻭ n ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻪ.
3
( )
ﺏ( ) ( Dﻴﺸﻤل ) A(− 2;1ﻭ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻨﺄﺨﺫ ) K ( x; xﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ A; AB, AD
) ( BCﺤﻴﺙ ) B(−2;1ﻭ )C (5; 2 (2ﻫل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( BMﻭ ) (CNﻤﺘﻌﺎﺩﻴﻥ؟ﻋﻠل.
ﺠـ( ) ( Dﻴﺸﻤل Oﻭ ﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
( )
62ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O; i, jﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ 2 x + 3 y − 6 = 0
) A(−2; −2ﻭ ). B(1;1
D1 66ﻭ D2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ:
) (
x+3 ﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ O; i
y=− y = 2x +1ﻭ
2
) ( AMﻭ ) ( BMﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ.
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻴﺎ ِ n1ـ D1ﻭ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻴﺎ ِ n2ـ D2
) (
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Nﻤﻥ O; jﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . n1 . n2
(3ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ D1ﻭ D2؟ ABNﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ . N
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ )B(2; −1) ، A(5; −2 67 (3ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ـ M 1ﻭ N1ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﻤﺎ
ﻭ ). C (1;3 ﺴﺎﺒﻘﹰﺎ .ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ AM 1 BN1ﻤﺭﺒﻊ.
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻼﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ِـ . A ABCD 63ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ .4ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ I
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻼﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ِـ . B 3 1
ﻭ Jﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ AI = AD :ﻭ . BJ = BC
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ. 4 3
1 1
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ 68 ﻨﻀﻊ u = ABﻭ . v = AD
4 4
) (−1;1ﻭ ). (3; −1
( )
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ A; u , vﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻭﻋﻴﻥ
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
AM . AB = 0؟ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، C ، B ، Aﻭ . J
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ. (2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ .ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) (CDﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒـ :
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
69 DM = xDC
( )
) (−3; 2ﻭ ). (2; 0
ﺃ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ . A; u , v
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] . [ AB
ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ B
) ( BMﻋﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( IJ
302
11 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B(3;0) ، A(1;3ﻭ ). C (−5; −1 70
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( E؟ ﺃﻋﻁ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯﺓ
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﻗﺎﺌﻡ.
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ 77
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻁﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC
ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺘﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ.
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻤﻤﺎﺱ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ . A
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ B ' ، A ' .ﻭ ' Cﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎ ﻗﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﺔ
) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ y = x − 1 71
ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﻋﻠﻰ ) ( AC ) ، ( BCﻭ ( AB
ﻭ Aﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﺎ ). (2;3
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ H .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ )' ( BBﻭ )' . (CC
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ Hﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( D
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
(1ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻉ AH؟
BH . ACﻭ . CH . AB
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . H
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . AH . BCﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . AH
ABCDﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻭ Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . 78 3
. ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥMD MC = MA + MB :
2 2 2 2 72ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B(−1;3) ، A − ; −1ﻭ )C (5; −1
2
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎ 79 Hﻫﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( BC
OABﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺘﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺒﺎﺸﺭ .ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﺎ nﻨﺎﻅﻤﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( BC
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻌﻴﻥ ' OAA " Aﻭ ' OBB " B (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ AB . nﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ.
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Kﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ]' ) [ A ' Bﺍﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل( (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ AH
9
73ﻝﺘﻜﻥ A 0; ﻭ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
2
. 4x + 3 y −1 = 0
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ∆ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( Dﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
ﻴﺸﻤل . A
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ∆ ﻭ ). ( D
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ Aﻭ ). ( D
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) Ω(3; −2ﻭ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻪ
( ( ) )
74
(1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ OA; OBﻭ ' OB '; OA
. x − 3y +1 = 0
ﻤﺘﻜﺎﻤﻠﺘﺎﻥ. (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ Ωﻭ ) . ( D
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Ωﻭﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻤﺱ ) (2 ( Dﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . OA . OB ' = OA '. OB
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ . OK . AB 75ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل Oﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ' OA ' B ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (C
ﻫﻭ ﺍﻻﺭﺘﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل Oﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . OAB ﺃ( ) (Cﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ) A(−1; 2ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . R = 3
(4ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ )' ( ABﻭ ) ( A ' Bﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ ﺏ( ) (Cﺘﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A(4;1ﻭﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ ). B(2;3
ABCDﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻁﻭﻝﻪ Lﻭ ﻋﺭﻀﻪ . lﻝﺘﻜﻥ H 80 ﺠـ( ) (Cﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] [ ABﺤﻴﺙ ) A(2;1ﻭ )B(4; −1
ﻭ Kﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﻝـ Bﻭ Dﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ACﻋﻠﻰ ) ( Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x; yﺤﻴﺙ 76
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ. x 2 + y 2 − 10 x + 4 y + 23 = 0
303
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ J ، Iﻭ Kﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ HKﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ Lﻭ . l
83
] [ AC ] ، [ BCﻭ ] [ ABﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . ) ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻤﻲ ( CA . BD
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ : (2ﻜﻴﻑ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ Lﻭ lﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ AC = 2 HK؟
ﻋﺒﺭ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ BHDKﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ
= AI 2 + BJ 2 + CK 2
3
4
) ( AB2 + AC 2 + BC 2
ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ABCD
ا
ا 81
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭ dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻴﺸﻤل B ' . Aﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ 84
ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝـ Bﻋﻠﻰ C ' . dﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝـ C
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ AB. AM = AB. AC :؟
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ . AB = 4 ﻋﻠﻰ B " . dﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝـ ' Bﻋﻠﻰ ) ( AC
85
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ " Cﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝـ ' Cﻋﻠﻰ )( AB
MA2 + MB 2 = 16؟ ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ )" ( B ' Bﻭ )" (C ' Cﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ G 88 Tﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻬﺎ )(3; 4
ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A;3ﻭ ) ( B; 2ﺤﻴﺙ . AB = 5
(1ﺃ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Ωﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (C
(1ﺃ( ﺍﻜﺘﺏ AGﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ AB
ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ .
ﺏ( ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ) ( Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺏ( ﺍﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) . (Cﻤﺜل . T
AM . AB = 10
(2ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻥ Tﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﻭ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ A1
-ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) G ∈ ( E
ﻭ A2ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺱ.
-ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( Eﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( ABﻓﻲ . G
ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ A1ﻭ A2ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ )' (Cﺫﺍﺕ
(2ﺤﺩﺩ ) ( Fﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ ] . [ ΩT
MA2 + MB 2 = 7
ﺏ( ﺃﻋﻁ ﻤﻌﺎﺩل ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ )' . (C
Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ . 89
ﺠـ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ A1ﻭ . A2
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
ﺩ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻤﺎﺱ.
( )
MA + MB .MA = 0؟
304
11 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﻭ }' D ' = {M ∈ ( P ) / MA2 − 2MB 2 = k Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ 90
ﺤﻴﺙ k ' ∈ ℝ . AB = 1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
1
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( Dﻭ )' ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ . = AM . AB؟
2
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )A(0;1 94 EFG 91ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ Eﺤﻴﺙ EF = 3
1 2 ﻭ EG = 4
) C (−1; 2) ، B(1; 0ﻭ D ; ﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ) (Γﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ
3 3
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ Dﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( F ; 4ﻭ ) (G;3ﻭ Hﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) M ( x; yﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙMB = 2 MA :
) ( F ; 4ﻭ ). (G; −3
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) M ∈ (Γﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ 3 x 2 + 3 y 2 + 2 x − 8 y + 3 = 0
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ:
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل Mﻤﻥ ) ، (Γﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ MCDﻗﺎﺌﻡ
( () )
4 MF + 3MG . 4 MF − 3MG = 0؟
ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ M
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ Aﺤﻴﺙ AB = 3ﻭ 95 ( 3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ.
. AC = 4ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻫﻭ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ، ξ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ 92
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ: . AB = 2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A;3ﻭ )( B;1
MA2 − 2MB 2 + 3MC 2 = Kﺤﻴﺙ k ∈ ℝ (1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ Gﺜﻡ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ AGﻭ GB
(2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ : (4ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ Aﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ( E
MA2 − 2MB 2 + 3MC 2 = 2MG 2 + GA2 − 2GB 2 + 3GC 2 Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ 93
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ξﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻝـ k . AB = 2ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺒﺤﺙ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ) ( E
ﺠـ( k = −100 ،ﺏ( k = −60 ﺃ( k = 14 MA
ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Mﺤﻴﺙ = 3
MB
(4ﻋﻴﻥ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ξﺘﺒﻌﺎ ﻝﻘﻴﻡ k
ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ) M ∈ ( Eﻴﻜﺎﻓﺊ MA2 − 9 MB 2 = 0
( IIﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ
1 1 ﺏ( ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A;1ﻭ ) ( B;3ﻭ Kﻤﺭﺠﺢ
ﻨﻀﻊ i = ABﻭ j = AC ) ( A;1ﻭ )( B; −3
4 3
( )
A; i, jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Gﻭ Kﺘﻨﺘﻤﻴﺎﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( E
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ C؟ ﺠـ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ MA2 − 9 MB 2ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ MGﻭ . MK
(2ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ ) ( x; yﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M ﺩ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ) ( E
ﺍﻜﺘﺏ MA2 − 2 MB 2 + 3MC 2ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ xﻭ . y ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ ) ( Pﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻝـ k ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ )B(−1; 0) ، A(0; 2
305
π
= . A AC = 6 ، AB = 2ﻭ
3 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
2π ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗـﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﻴﺔ
= . A AC = 6 ، AB = 2ﻭ
3
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ BC = 5 ، AB = 6 : 96
π
.
=A AC = 3 ، AB = 2 2ﻭ ﻭ . AC = 7
4
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ ، AB = 2 : 104 ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺃﻁﻭﺍل ﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺎﺕ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ .
ﻭ =π BC = 2 (1 +141 ABC 97ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ BC = 8 ، AB = 7 :
. B )3
6 1
ﻭ J . AC = 5ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒـ . CJ = CB :
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل . AC 4
ﻭ
Cﻝﻠﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻴﻥ A ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . AJ
π ﺏ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . JA . JC
. cos
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝـ
12
.ﺝ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻘﺭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺩﺭﺠﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻝﻠﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ AJC
ABC 105ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ BC = 8 ، AB = 7 :
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ K ، J ، I ،ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ 98
104ﻭ . AC = 10
] [ AC ] ، [ BCﻭ ] . [ AB
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ) . ABCﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻤﺩﻭﺭﺓ
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ
ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭ( .
3
(2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABC = AI 2 + BJ 2 + CK 2 ) ( AB 2 + AC 2 + BC 2
4
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ،ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻭﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ABCD 99ﻤﺴﺘﻁﻴل ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ . I
ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﺸﻲ . ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
(1 105ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ Sﻝﻠﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺘﻜﺘﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ . MA2 + MC 2 = MB 2 + MD 2
1
. S = AC × AB × sin ﺍﻝﺸﻜل A : ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ AB = 5 100
2
ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻤﺜل ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻘﻕ :
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺜﻠﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺠﻴﻭﺏ : MA2 − MB 2 = −15
BC AC AB AB × AC × BC ABC 101ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ . C
= = =
sin A sin B
sin C 2S 100ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ) ( Dﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
(1
(3ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ : ﺤﻴﺙ . MA2 − MB 2 = 0 :
. C ﺃ ( ﻴﻌﻁﻰ = 45° ، BC = 6
Bﻭ = 75° (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ )' ( Dﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Nﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ABﻭ ACﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺤﻴﺙ NC 2 − NB 2 = AC 2 :
. BC 2 = AB 2 + AC 2 − 2 AB × AC × cos
ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ A (3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ )' . ( D
ﺏ ( ﻨﻀﻊ AB = xﺤل ﻓﻲ ℝﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭل ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ : 102
xﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ (10,5) = x + 12 − (10,5) × 12
2 2 2
.
AC = 6 cm ، AB = 2 cmﻭ A = 45° 101
ﺝ ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ AC = 12 ، AB = 10,5ﻭ = 60°
Cﻓﻤﺎ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل . BC
ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ؟ ﻭﻫل ﻫﻲ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺴﺔ ؟ ﻤﻘﺩﺭﺓ
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻋﻠﻡ ABﻭ ACﻭﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ A 103
106ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻫﻲ 10 km 102
ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺍﺩﻴﺎﻥ .ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻨﺎﻩ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
ﻭﻴﻌﻁﻰ = 39, 6°
CABﻭ ABC = 65, 7° . BC ﺍﻝﻁﻭل
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻁﻭل AC
306
π π
11
× 2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ.
12
=
6
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ: π 6+ 2
112 ، cos = ( 1107ﻴﻌﻁﻰ
cos (α + β ) .cos (α − β ) = cos α − sin β107
2 2
ﺃ( 12 4
π 6− 2
. cos (α + β ) .cos (α − β ) = cos 2 β − sin 2 α = . sin ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ
12 4
ﺏ( sin (α + β ) .sin (α − β ) = sin 2 α − sin 2 β
(2ﺍﻝﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﺩﻴﺎﻥ ﺃﻤﻠﺊ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺒﺎﺴـﺘﻌﻤﺎل
. sin (α + β ) .sin (α − β ) = cos 2 β − cos 2 α
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ ﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ .
113ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﻴﻥ αﻭ βﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ:
2 cos (α + β ) .cos (α − β ) = sin 2α − sin 2210ﺃ( β A
B C
ﺏ( 2sin (α + β ) .sin (α − β ) = cos 2 β − cos 2α π
π 3
<0< x x 114ﻋــــﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘــــﻲ ﺤﻴــــﺙ π π
2
132 4 3
ﻭ . cos x = 6 + 2
4 6− 2 2 3 8
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ cos 2xﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ . x
ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﻓﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ
115ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ sin 2xﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ :
π π 7π
( cos x + sin x )2؛ . ( cos x − sin x )2 ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺔ = + 108ﺒﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ
π 3 4 12
x 116ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝـﺸﻜل k 7π 7π
2 . sin cosﻭ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
sin 2 x cos 2 x 1 12 12
. − = ﺤﻴﺙ . k ∈ ℤﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ : 5π 5π
sin x cos x cos x . sin cosﻭ ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ
π 12 12
α 117ﻭ βﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل 0 ; ﺤﻴﺙ: 11π 11π
2 . sin cosﻭ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
3 1 514 12 12
= cos αﻭ = . cos β
5 3 109ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ cos xﻭ sin xﻜل ﻤـﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒـﺎﺭﺍﺕ
ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻜل ﻤﻥ sin αﻭ . sin β ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ:
ﺏ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻜﻼ ﻤﻥ ) cos ( 2α − βﻭ ) . sin ( 2α − β π π
. sin x + ، cos x +
4 4
118ﺃ( ﻋﺒــﺭ ﻋــﻥ ﻜــل ﻤــﻥ cos 2 αﻭ sin 2 α
π π
ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ cos 2α . sin x − ، cos x −
6 6
π π π
ﺏ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝـﺔ ، cos 2α + ﻋـﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒـﺎﺭﺓ : . sin − x ، cos − x
3 3 3
2 π 2 π
cos α + cos α + + cos α +
2
110ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺩﺴﺎﺘﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻊ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل
6 3
π
π ﻋـــﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘـــﻲ cos − x = sin x ، x؛
ﺝ( ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ، cos 2α + ﻋـﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺒـﺎﺭﺓ : 2
3
π
π π . sin − x = cos x
. sin 2 α + sin 2 α + + sin 2 α + 2
6 3
119ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : 111ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ xﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
ﺃ( . sin 4 x − cos 4 x − sin 2 x + cos 2 x = 0 2π 4π
sin x + sin x + + sin x + =0
ﺏ( . cos 4 x − sin 4 x = cos 2 x 3 3
π π
ﺝ( . cos 4 x + sin 4 x + 2sin 2 x.cos 2 x = 1 . sin cosﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻀﺒﻭﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ
12 12
307
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 11
) ( cﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . 8 123 ﻤـﺴـﺎﺌـل
Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( cﺤﻴﺙ . OA = 5 ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ ﺭﺃﺴﻪ . A 120
Oﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] ، [ BCﻭ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ
ﺭﺃﺱ ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻝﻜﻭﺱ ، APQﻤﺜﺒﺕ ﻓﻲ
ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻋﻠﻰ ] I . [ ACﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [OH
ﻭ ) ( AQ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﻴﺩﻭﺭ ﺤﻭﻝﻬﺎ .ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( AP
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( AIﻭ ) ( BHﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ .
ﻴﻘﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( cﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Eﻭ Fﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
] [ ABﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻁﻭﻝﻬﺎ 6ﻭﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ . I 121
Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ EF ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ Γﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ
Q ﺤﻴﺙ . MB = 2 MA
(1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ، OEFﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻥ ﺠﺴﻡ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻘﻭﻯ 122
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ . OM 2 + AM 2 = 64 ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺎ .
D
(1ﺠﺴﻡ Mﻤﺘﻌﺭﺽ
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ Mﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺒﺔ .
2 2N
→
ﺇﻝﻰ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﻭﻯ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ
F2
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ 124
135°
ﻤﺒﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل .
→
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) ( C1ﻭ ) ( C2ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺘﻴﻥ ( O100
) ;i ; j
F1 M
5N 150° ﺃ( ﻫل ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ؟
→ 2 3N
F3
ﺒﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ : C ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤل ﻝﻤﺤﺼﻠﺔ
( C1 ) : x 2 + y 2 + 4 x − y − 2 = 0 ﺍﻝﻘﻭﻯ R = F1 + F2 + F3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻡ ﻴﺘﺤﺭﻙ ﻤﻥ
Dﺇﻝﻰ ، Cﺤﻴﺙ DC = 4 cm
( C2 ) : x 2 + y 2 − 6 x − 6 y − 7 = 0
(2ﺠﺴﻡ Mﻜﺘﻠﺘﻪ mﻤﺜﺒﺕ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻭﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) ( C1 ﺒﺨﻴﻁﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﻠﻘﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺭﻴﻀﺔ
ﻭ ) . ( C2 ﺃﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ Aﻭ . Bﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
(2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) ( C1ﻭ ) ( C2ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ FB FA ﻓﻲ ﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺃﻱ :
، P + FA + FB = 0ﺤﻴﺙ
Aﻭ Bﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ.
ﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍ ﺍﻝﺨﻴﻁﻴﻥ P.
Pﻫﻭ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﺠﺴﻡ FB FA ،
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﻤﺎﺴﻴﻥ
ﻴﻌﻁﻰ || FA ||= 35 ، || P ||= 50ﻭ . || FB ||= 40
ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) ( C1ﻭ ) ( C2ﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩﺍﻥ .
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺯﻭﺍﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABM
308
11 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
125
ﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ AHﺤﻴﺙ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ) ( D
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O ; i ; jﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
)' ( D
.
) A ( −2 ; 5ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( dﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ y = −3 x + 1
A
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ ﻫﻭ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
u ) ( dﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ .
)( D
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ :
B
H ﻨﻌﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( d
ﺃ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺘﺭﺒﻁ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Hﺜﻡ
ﺃ( ﺒﺭﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﺍﺓ . BA . u = HA . u ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . H
ﺏ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺒﺔ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: ﺏ( ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ . AH
| | BA . u ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ :
= . AH
|| || u ﺃ( ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) B (1 ; − 2ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( d
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻋﺩﺩﻱ :
ﺏ( ﻨﻀﻊ ) ، u (1 ; − 3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ uﻫﻭ ﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺠﻴﻪ
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ
ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( d
ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A ( 6 ; 4ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( D
ﺍﺸﺭﺡ ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ Mﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ( dﺭﺍﺠﻊ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ
ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ . y = 2 x − 3
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺤﻴﺙ . BM = k .u :
ﺏ( ﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) F ( −1;1) ، E ( 2; 0ﻭ ) G ( 3; 4
ﺝ( ﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺔ fﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ℝ
ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( FG
ﺒـ . f (k ) = 10k 2 + 48k + 58 :ﺃﺤﺴﺏ . AM 2
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ، EHﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ EFGﻫﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻥ
ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻪ . ﺩ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ .
( IIﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ: ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ 126
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ،ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) (O ; i ; j
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ax + by + c = 0ﺤﻴﺙ aﻭ b 3x − 2 y + 1 = 0ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ). A ( 2 ;1
ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎ ،ﻭ ) B ( xB ; y Bﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) . ( D ﺃ ( ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻭﻋﻠﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ A
ﻨﻀﻊ ) u ( a ; bﻜﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ، ( D ﺏ ( ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )' ( Dﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( D
ﻭ ) A ( x A ; y Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ. ﻭﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A
ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ || || uﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ aﻭ . b ﺝ ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ﺏ( ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ | . | BA . u | =| ax A + by A + c Aﻋﻠﻰ ) . ( D
| | ax A + by A + c ﺩ ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ) AHﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ A
= dﺤﻴﺙ d ﺝ( ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ :
a +b
2 2
ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ( D
ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( D
( Iﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻤﺔ :
ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﻋﺩﺩﻱ :
) ( Dﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻭﻴﻘﺒل uﻜﺸﻌﺎﻉ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) A (1 ; 1ﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﻴﻁﺔ
ﻨﺎﻅﻤﻲ ﻝﻪ .ﻭﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻨﺭﻴﺩ
)ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ( OIJﺤﻴﺙ ، O ( 0;0 ) :
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ، ( Dﺃﻱ
) I ( 2 + 2 ; 0ﻭ ) . J ( 0 ; 2 + 2
309
12
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
311
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 12
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
OB = k OA ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ) kﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﻩ ( ﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ
)(3 )(2 )(1
A A
GD = k GB ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ) kﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﺩﻩ ( ﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ
)(4 ) (3 )(2 )(1
D
1
H G G
2 0 1 x
A
B
3
)(5
312
12 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
1
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ M .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ AM = AB
3
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( ACﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ Mﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( BCﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ N
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( ABﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ Nﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ACﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ P
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻫﻲ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Nﻭ Bﺍﻝﻤﺭﻓﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻠﻴﻥ 3ﻭ ) ( -1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯﻴﻥ S1ﻭ S2ﻝﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ NPCﻭ MBNﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
1
-ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ S1 = S2
4
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
) ( Cﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ [ AB ] ، Oﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ .
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﺤﻴﺙ M . AI = − AO :ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ Aﻭ ﻋﻥ M ′ ، Bﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ M
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺭﻜﺯ N ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( IMﻭ ). ( BM ′
-1ﻤﺎ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ' AMBM؟
-2ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ IAMﻭ IBNﻤﺘﺸﺎﺒﻬﺎﻥ .
-3ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ IN = k IM
-4ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻓﺈﻥ Nﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C′ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ O′ﺤﻴﺙ IO′ = k IO
ﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ . R = k . OM
313
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 12
-1ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ
Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ k ،ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺎ hﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ ، kﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ ) ، h(O,kﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ OM ′ = k.OM
hﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ A ، kﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ A’.ﻭ ’ Bﺼﻭﺭﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h
A′B′ = k AB ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :
h(A)= A′و h(B) = B ′
ﺃﻱ OA′ = k.OAو (1).... OB′ = k.OB
ﻝﻜﻥ A′B′ = OB′ - OA′ :
) (1ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ )A′B′ = k( OB - OA
ﺃﻱ A′B′ = k AB
ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ :
ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ k ≠ 0ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ Bﻓﺈﻥ A′ﺘﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ B ′ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ) (ABﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( A′B′
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻴﻜﻭﻥ A′B′ = k AB
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ Gﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ } ) ( A , αﻭ ) { ( B , βﻓﺈﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺘﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻫﻲ G′ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
} ) ( A′ , αﻭ ) . { ( B ′ , β
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :
ﻭ G′B′ = kGB α GA+ β GB = 0ﻝﻜﻥ G′A′ = kGA
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ α G ′A′ + β G ′B′ = k(αGA+ β GB )= 0 :
) ﻨﻘﻭل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻴﺤﺎﻓﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ (
314
12 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
N′ ، N ، Iﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ N′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Nﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ) . h( I , -2
-1ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ .
A -2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( C , 1ﻭ ) ( B , -kﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻴﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﻋﻥ 1
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ Cﺼﻭﺭﺓ Bﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻴﺯﺓ ) ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ (
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ Bﺼﻭﺭﺓ Cﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭﻩ .
ﺤــل:
I N′ = - 2 I N -1ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ :
ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺒﺎﻝﻀﺭﻭﺭﺓ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ kﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻴﺤﻭل Bﺇﻝﻰ Cﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ A,B,Cﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ؟
ﻷﻥ :ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻌﻨﻲ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ kﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ k ) AC = k ABﻭﺤﻴﺩ h ،ﻭﺤﻴﺩ (
A -2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( C , 1ﻭ ) ( B , -kﻴﻌﻨﻲ AC = k AB
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ hﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . kﻨﻀﻊ ) B′ = h(Bﺃﻱ AB′ = k ABﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ B′ = C
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ Cﺼﻭﺭﺓ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ hﻭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ) Aﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺤﻼ ﻝﻠﺴﺅﺍل (
315
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 12
-1ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ :
ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( dﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( d ′ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( d ﻤﺒﺭﻫﻨﺔ
ABCو ! AMNن ( AB ) #
$ M .
و * ( MN ) %& ( AC ) #
$ Nازي ) ( BC
ا,-آ hا1-ي 0آ A ./و *ّ,ل Bاّ,* M 4-ل آ C 5-1اN 4-
-2ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺔ :
ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Bﺇﻝﻰ Mﻴﺤﻭل
) ( BCﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل Mﻭ ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) . ( BC
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Cﻫﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ
ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ) ( ACﻓﻬﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ . N
316
12 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
317
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 12
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :
ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ k > 1ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺒﺘﻜﺒﻴﺭ ﺍﻷﺸﻜﺎل ﻭ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 1 > k > 0ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻴﺼﻐﺭ k ﻤﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ
1
. ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 3ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
2
-ﻤﺤﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻫﻭ 6πﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻬﺎ ﻓﻬﻲ 9π
1 3
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C ′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . hﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭ ) ( C ′ﻫﻭ = × 3
2 2
9 2
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺤﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C ′ﻫﻭ 3πﻭ ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺘﻬﺎ π
4
.2ﺍﻝﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ :
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ B ، Aﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ B′ ، A′ﻭ C ′ﺼﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ
ﺘﺤﺎﻙ hﻓﺈﻥ B′ ، A′ﻭ C ′ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ.
ﺒﺎﻝﻔﻌل ،ﻷﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺸﻤل B ، Aﻭ Cﻫﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻴﺸﻤل B′ ، A′ﻭ C ′
318
12 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 1
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ABCDﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Dﺍﻝﻰ D′
D′
D C D O D′ = D D C D C
O O
O
ﺤــل:
ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻷﻭل :ﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﻴﺠﺎﺩ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ D ، Aﻭ Cﻤﺜﻼ ) 3ﻨﻘﻁ ( ﻷﻨﻨﺎ ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ
ﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ ) ﺍﻝﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ (
* ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ C′ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ، ( COﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( DCﻫﻭ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( D′C′
ﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( DCﻭ ﻴﺸﻤل D′ﻓﻬﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( A D′ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ C′ﺘﻘﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ) ( A D′ﻓﻬﻲ
319
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 12
ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ :ﺍﻝﻌﻨﺎﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻫﻲ :ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯ . Oﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ . I
ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺩﺓ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻭ ﻨﺤﺩﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺎﺕ Gﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ G5 ;G4 ;G3 ;G2 ;G1
M2 ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻕ :ﺘﻭﻅﻴﻑ ﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﻨﻘﻁﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ ) ﻤﺤل ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻲ ( ﻫﻭ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻤﺨﺘﺼﺭﺓ ﺇﺫ ﻴﺴﺘﻐﻨﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ
ﻋﻥ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ .
320
12 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻫﻨﺩﺴﻲ
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ :
] [ AB K ،ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ] [ ACﻭ Lﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺇﻨﺸﺎﺀ ﻤﺭﺒﻊ IJKLﺩﺍﺨل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﺤﻴﺙ Iﻭ Jﻫﻤﺎ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ] [ BC
ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴل :
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﺃُﻨﺠﺯ ،ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﺕ ﻤﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺔ ،ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻤﻤﻜﻥ .
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ hﻝﻠﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Lﺍﻝﻰ . B
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﻜﻴﺏ :
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ BEDCﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Dﺘﻘﻌﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺠﻬﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( BC
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AEﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BCﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ADﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BCﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ J
ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ Iﻋﻠﻰ ) ( BCﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ABﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Lﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ Jﻋﻠﻰ ) ( BCﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( ACﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ K
321
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 12
D C ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ABCDﻭ MNPQﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﻥ ﺃﻀﻼﻋﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ ﻤﺜﻨﻰ .
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ :ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ) ( CP ) ، ( BN ) ، ( AMﻭ ) ( DQ
Q P ﺘﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .
ABCDﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ ﻤﺤﺩﺏ ،ﻴﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻗﻁﺭﺍﻩ ] [ ACﻭ ] [ BDﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ O
M
N
A B ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( DCﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ Oﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ADﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ I
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( BCﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ Oﻴﻘﻁﻊ ] [ ABﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ J
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ :ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( IJﻭ ) ( BDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ
) (Cﻭ ) ( C′ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﺍﻫﻤﺎ O′ ، Oﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻭ ﻨﺼﻔﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻴﻬﻤﺎ r′ ، rﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ) ( r ≠ r′
ﻤﺘﻤﺎﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺨﺎﺭﺠﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ A . Iﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ) (d). (Cﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ Aﻭ ﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) (Cﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Mﻭ . N
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( MIﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( C′ﻓﻲ M′ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( INﻴﻘﻁﻊ ) ( C′ﻓﻲ . N′
ﺍﻝﻬﺩﻑ :ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( M ′N ′ﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( dﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ A
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻊ MNPQﻫﻭ ﺘﺼﻐﻴﺭ ﻝﻠﻤﺭﺒﻊ ABCDﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺎﻥ . ﺍﻝﺤل :
ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺘﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻴﺠﺏ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﺭﺍﻥ ﺒﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻵﺨﺭﻴﻥ
* ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( AMﻭ ) ( DQ
* ODAﻭ OQMﻤﺜﻠﺜﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺎﻥ ،ﻝﻴﻜﻥ hﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺍﻝﻰ . M
ﻹﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( PCﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ Oﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ h ( C ) = P
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ C′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Cﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ C′ ، hﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( DCﺍﻝﻤﺭﺴﻭﻡ ﻤﻥ Qﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ
C′ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) . ( OCإذن C′ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ) ( OCﻤﻊ ) ( QPﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ C′ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ P
QM QC′
ﺃﻱ . QM = QC′ﻭ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ) ( BNﻴﺸﻤل . O = ﻷﻥ
AD DC
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺎ ﺒﺄﺨﺫ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( A , AB, ADﻭ ﺃﺨﺫ ) M(a, bﺜﻡ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ
ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻼ ﻭﺤﻴﺩﺍ .
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺇﺜﺒﺎﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﻴﻥ ،ﻴﻜﻔﻲ ﺇﺫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺤﺩﻫﻤﺎ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻝﻶﺨﺭ ﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ . h
ﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻤﺜﻼ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Oﺇﻝﻰ . Cﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) h( I ) = Dﻷﻥ ) (IOﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( (DCﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ
ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) h( J ) = Bﻷﻥ ) (JOﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( (BCﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻓﺈﻥ ) ( BDﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( IJﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ) ( BDﻴﻭﺍﺯﻱ ) ( IJ
ﻴﺒﺩﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ IMNﻭ IM′N′ﻤﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺎﻥ ﺭﺃﺴﺎﻫﻤﺎ . Iﻫل ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( M′N′ﻫﻭ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( MN
ﺒﺘﺤﺎﻙ hﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ I؟ ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ،ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﻝﻙ ؟
ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺒﺔ ﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ . Aﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ Aﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻰ ) ( MNﺇﺫﻥ ) h( A ) = A′ ∈( M′N′
A′ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺒﺔ .ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Iﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل ) ( MNﺍﻝﻰ ) ( M′N′؟
M ، Nﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ) M′ ، N′ ،( Cﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ) ، ( C′ﻴﺒﺩﻭ ﺃﻥ hﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Iﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل ) ( Cﺇﻝﻰ ) ( C′
r′ r′ r′
* ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻫﻲ -؛ h( M ) = M′ﺤﻴﺙ IM′ = − IMﻭ h( N ) = N′ﺤﻴﺙ IN′ = − IN
r r r
* ﻨﻀﻊ h( A ) = A′ﻨﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ A′ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ( M′N′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( MNﻷﻥ Aﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ) ( MN
A′ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻷﻥ Aﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ .
322
12 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O , i , jﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ) ( Cﻭ ) ( C′ﺍﻝﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ
x 2 + y 2 - 14x + 2y + 41 = 0 ﻭ x 2 + y 2 - 8x - 4y + 16 = 0 ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
-1ﻋﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻤﺭﻜﺯﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺜﻡ ﺤﺩﺩ ﻜل ﻤﻥ rﻭ r′ﻨﺼﻔﻲ ﻗﻁﺭﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
-2ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ) ( Cﻭ ) ( C′ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻠﻡ ) . ( O , i , j
3 3
− ﻭ -3ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ hﻴﺤﻭل ) ( Cﺍﻝﻰ ) ، ( C′ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ kﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺘﻴﻥ
2 2
-4ﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل -3-ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﻴﻥ h1ﻭ h 2ﻴﺤﻭﻻﻥ ) (Cﺍﻝﻰ ) ( C′ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ I1ﻭ I 2ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ I1ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A , -3ﻭ ) ( B , 2ﻭ ﺃﻥ I 2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A , 3ﻭ ) ( B , 2ﺜﻡ ﻋﻠﱢﻡ I1ﻭ I 2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
-5ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺎ ﺃﻥ ) ( C′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺒﻜل ﻤﻥ h1ﻭ . h 2
I1 ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل : ﺍﻝﺤل :
(C′) : ( x - 7 ) 2 + ( y +1 )2 = 9 ﻭ (C) : ( x - 4 ) 2 + ( y - 2 ) 2 = 4
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ) r = 2 ، B( 7 , -1 ) A( 4 , 2ﻭ r′ = 3
A
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ hﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻴﺤﻭل ) ( Cﺍﻝﻰ ) ( C′ﺇﺫﻥ hﻴﺤﻭل Aﺍﻝﻰ B
I2 3 3 3
ﻭ ) (− ﻭ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ r′ = k .rﺃﻱ = kﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ kﻫﻤﺎ
B 2 2 2
3 3
ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ h 2ﻫﻲ ) ( − ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺎﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭل h1ﻫﻲ
2 2
3 3
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ I1ﻤﺭﻜﺯ h1ﻭ I2ﻤﺭﻜﺯ h 2ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ h 2 ( A )= B , h1 ( A )= B :ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ I1B = I1Aﻭ I2 B = − I2 A
2 2
ﻴﻌﻨﻲ 2 I1B - 3 I1A = 0 :ﻭ 2 I 2 B + 3 I 2 A = 0ﻭ ﻫﺎﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺘﺎﻥ ﺘﻭﻀﺤﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ I1ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A , -3
ﻭ ) ( B , 2ﻭ ﺃﻥ I 2ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ) ( A , 3ﻭ ) . ( B , 2
ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻡ I1ﻭ I 2ﺒﺘﺒﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺘﻴﻥ :
3
2 I 2 B = - 3 I2 Aﺃﻱ 5 I2 B = - 3 BAﻴﻌﻨﻲ I2 B = ABﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺜل ﻨﺠﺩ I1B =3 AB
5
3 3
I2 M′ = -ﻨﻀﻊ ) M′ ( x′ , y′ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) M( x , y I1M′ = I1Mﻭ I 2 M
2 2
26 4
( I2 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) A( 4 , 2ﻭ ) B( 7 , -1ﻴﻨﺘﺞ ) , ) , I1 ( -2 , 8
5 5
′ 3 ′ 3
x = 2 x + 1 ) (x + 2 ) = 2 ( x + 2
أي ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h1ﻫﻲ
3
y′ = y - 4 3
) y′- 8 = ( y - 8
2 2
3 3 3 3
ﻨﻌﻭﺽ !" x′ , y′د ) ( x + 1 - 7 ) 2 +( y - 4+1) 2 = 9 : #$% ( C′ﺃﻱ ( x - 6 ) 2 +( y - 3) 2 = 9
2 2 2 2
ﻭ ﻨﺠﺩ x 2 + y 2 - 8x - 4y + 16 = 0و ه! د ا#ا)(ة ) ( C
اC-ا06ة ) ( C′ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ) h1ﻭ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝـ ( h 2 أي أن
323
ﺘﻜﻨﻭﻝﻭﺠﻴﺎ ﺍﻹﻋﻼﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺘﺼﺎل 12
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻭ ﻤﻭﺠﻪ ،ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ A . Oﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ) . ( Cﻨﺭﻓﻕ ﻴﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ) ( C
π
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ AMNﻤﺘﻘﺎﻴﺱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ ﻭ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ = ). ( AN, AM
3
-1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ) ( L1ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ Mﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C؟
-2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ) ( L 2ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AN؟
324
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
12
ﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ( O , i , jﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻬﺎ x 2 + y 2 - 2 x - 4 y + 4 = 0ﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ
) A( - 1 , 0ﻭ ) M ، B( 3 , 0ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ) . ( C
-1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻭ ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ . B
N -2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ MANBﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( MNﻴﻤﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ Iﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻭ ﺍﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل
P -3ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ MABPﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ .ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﺘﻤﺴﺢ Mﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( C؟
-ﺃﻜﺘﺏ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﺎﺭﺘﻴﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل .
ﺃﻭﻻ :ﺍﻝﺘﺨﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﺔ ﺍﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎﻤﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻤﺜل Declicﺃﻭ Atelier de geometrieﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺭﻫﺎ
-1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﺤﺩﺩ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ B ، Aﻭ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺤﻴﺙ r = 1ﻭ ) O( 1 , 2ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل
ﺍﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻝﻭﺤﺔ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒﻠﺔ ﻝﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ ﺩﻴﻜﻠﻴﻙ ) .ﻝﻠﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ،ﺃﻨﻘﺭﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺯﺭ ﺍﻷﻴﻤﻥ ﻝﻠﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﺜﻡ ﺍﻷﻴﺴﺭ (
-2ﺇﺨﺘﺭ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﺤﺭﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻭ ﺴﻤﻬﺎ Mﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺯﺭ
-3ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻴﺔ ﻀﻤﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ Construireﺇﺨﺘﺭ Polygonesﺜﻡ Parallelodgrammeﻭ ﺃﻨﻘﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ
B ، Mﺜﻡ Aﺒﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺴﺘﺠﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ
ﻗﺩ ﺃﻨﺸﺌﺕ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ ﻗﻡ ﺒﺘﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺃﺱ
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ N
-4ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻀﻤﻥ ﻓﺌﺔ Divers
ﺍﺨﺘﺭ Lieu de pointsﺜﻡ ﺃﻨﻘﺭ ﻓﻭﻕ Mﻭ ﺍﺴﺤﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ N
-ﺍﻵﻥ ﺤﺭﻙ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺒﺎﻝﻔﺄﺭﺓ ﻭﻻﺤﻅ ) ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ( P
325
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 12
* ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﺒﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻝﻺﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ x′ = x + 4ﻭ y′ = y
ﺜﻡ ﺒﺘﻌﻭﻴﺽ xﻭ yﻓﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) ( Cﻨﺠﺩ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ ) . ( C′′
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ P :ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻹﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . ABﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ ﺃﻥ Pﺼﻭﺭﺓ Nﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻷﻥ BP = − BNﻭ ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ Nﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Iﺃﻱ IN = − IM
ﻓﺈﻥ Pﺼﻭﺭﺓ Mﺒﻤﺭﻜﺏ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻴﻴﻥ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﻤﺎ SBﻭ SIﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
) P = S S (Mﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ،ﻭﻤﻥ ﺠﻬﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ) P = T (Mﺇﺫﻥ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ = S S
TAB B I AB B I
ﺍﻹﻨﺸﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻴﺔ
326
12 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
أ
أم
ABC 10ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ ABﻭ J ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 8ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ ACﺸﻌﺎﻉ ﺍﻹﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Jﺇﻝﻰ Iﻫﻭ: ﻤﻌﻠﻼ ﺇﺠﺎﺒﺘﻙ:
1 1ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ
. BC (1
2
ﺍﻨﺴﺤﺎﺒﺎ ﻭﺘﺤﺎﻜﻴﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﺍﻝﻤﻁﺎﺒﻕ .
. BC (2
2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ MNPﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ
1
. CB (3
2 ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ، hﻓﺈﻥ ABCﻭ MNPﻤﺘﺸﺎﺒﻬﻴﻥ .
ABC 11ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ BCﻭ G MNP 3ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ 36ﺤﻴﺙ MN = 7ﻭ ABC
ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ k . ABCﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﺤﻴﻁﻪ 42ﺤﻴﺙ . AB = 8ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h
Gﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ Iﻫﻲ : ﺤﻴﺙ h ( C ) = P ، h ( B ) = N ، h ( A ) = M :؟
1 ﻜل ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﻫﻭ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ .
4
. k = − (1
2
B ، A ، O 5ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺤﻴﺙ:
. k = −2 (2
2 AB = 2OA
. k = − (3
3 ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ 2ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ . B
S 12ﺍﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) ( dﻭ )' ( dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ .ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ 6
ﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Dﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ : B ﻴﺤﻭل ) ( dﺇﻝﻰ )' . ( d
. BD = AC (1
ABC 7ﻤﺜﻠﺙ O ،ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] f . [ BCﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل
. BD = CA (2
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ
. AB = CD (3
Nﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙMN = 2MA + MB + MC :
C ، B ، A 13ﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺤﻴﺙ :
][OA fﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ
3 AC = 2 BC
ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . - 3
kﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭﻴﺤﻭل Bﺇﻝﻰ Cﻫﻲ :
1 hﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ kﺤﻴﺙ . k ≠ 1 8
. k = − (1
2 ﻻ ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺃﻱ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺘﻨﻁﺒﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺼﻭﺭﺘﻬﺎ
. k = −2 (2 ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h
2 أ دة ا رات
. k = (3
3 ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 9ﺇﻝﻰ 14ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ
. k = −3 (4
ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ :
1
( C ) 14ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ 12cmﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ −ﻴﺤﻭل Aﻭ Bﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ 9
2
) ( Cﺇﻝﻰ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ' . ( C ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] k . [ ABﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ
ﻤﺴﺎﺤﺔ ) ' ( Cﻫﻲ : ﻴﺤﻭل Bﺇﻝﻰ Iﻫﻲ :
. 9π cm2 (1 1
. k = (1
2
. 18π cm 2 (2
. k = −1 (2
. 36π cm2 (3
. k = 2 (3
16π cm 2 (4
327
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 12
ABCDEFGH 21ﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ Iﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ 15ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻴﺔ .
H G ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BF (1ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ A
E F (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، A 1
. − ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
D ، C ، Bﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ 2
D C (2ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ 3
ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ AE
ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Q
A B (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
1 (3ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Iﻭ Jﺼﻭﺭﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
Hﻭ Fﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ .
2 ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ −4
B ، A 22ﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﻨﻘﻁ ﺤﻴﺙ B (4ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
. BA = 4 BC ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . CD
(1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ABCD 16ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ.
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ 4؟ (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . DB
(2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ (2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ BA؟
.
1
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ 17ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ
4 ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Mﺇﻝﻰ . N ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
(3ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ . 3CB = −CA
. AN = −3 AM (1
(4ﻫل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
. 4 AN = 5MN (2
ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Cﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . -3
MN = AM (3
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ .ﺤﻴﺙ . BC = 3 23
2 AM + 3 AN = 0 (4
Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AB
ABDC 18ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ.
Nﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AC
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
ﺤﻴﺙ :
. -2ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Fﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ
MN = 2ﻭﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ) ( MNﻭ ) ( BCﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
Cﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . -1
(1ﻝﻴﻜﻥ h1ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭﻴﺤﻭل Mﺇﻝﻰ . B ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺔ ] . [ AF
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h1؟
ABCD 19ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ.
(2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ h2ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Bﺇﻝﻰ Nﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل 1
ﺍﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ ABﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ
Cﺇﻝﻰ . M 2
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h2؟ ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h2؟ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . F
24ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ ) ( Dﻭ ) ' ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ. AF = EC ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ:
ABC 20ﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ I .ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻀﻠﻊ
M )'(D
] [ BCﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻀﻠﻊ ] . [ AC
1
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺒﺎﻻﻨﺴﺤﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺸﻌﺎﻋﻪ . − BC
)(D A O B 2
ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ EI
N
328
12 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ N ، M ، B ، Aﻭ Oﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ.
ABCD 26ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ Iﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ:
1 ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ kﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل M
. AI = AD ﺇﻝﻰ Nﻭ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ . O
3
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺼﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، Bﻭ Dﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ 25ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Gﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ
Iﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ . D ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
27ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ 2 (1
D C
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ' M
A M 'M
G
M A 'M
1
ﺃ( ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ .2 →
j
8 →
ﺏ( ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . G 0 i 1 x
5
ـ( ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ.-1
2 C (3
ﺩ( ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Cﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . − D
3
1
هـ( ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Dﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . −
4
29ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
3 G
. ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Cﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
4
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Bﺇﻝﻰ . Cﻋﻴﻥ
A I B
ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ.
ABCDﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ . 30
(4
-ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ Dﻭ Bﺇﻝﻰ C؟ A
329
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 12
ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺘﺤﺎﻙ ،ﺍﺫﻜﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻤﺎ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺘﻜﺒﻴﺭﺍ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺼﻐﻴﺭﺍ 32ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ E ، D ، C ، B ، Aﻭ Fﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻵﺘﻲ:
ﻝﺼﻭﺭﺓ " ." L E
35ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ (C ) ،ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ O
ﻭ ) ( Dﻤﻤﺎﺴﺎ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Qﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﺍﻝﺫﻱ A B
ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭ ﻴﺤﻭل Qﺇﻝﻰ . P
C
A
)(C
)(D
F
D
P B O Q ﺃ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ B
ﻭﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ.
(1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ: ﺏ( ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ ﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ B
ﺃ( ﺼﻭﺭﺘﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Oﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h ﻭﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Eﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Fﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ.
ﺏ( ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )' ( Dﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h 33ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ C ، B ، Aﻭ Dﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻵﺘﻲ:
ﺠـ( ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ )' (Cﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h
(2ﺃ( ﺤﺩﺩ ﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ )' ( Dﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ )' . (C A B
5
ﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ . D hﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ
3
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ B؟
-ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Oﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h
-ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺇﻨﺸﺎ ﺀ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) (Cﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ . h O
330
12 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
D C
K ) [Oxﻭ ) [Oyﻨﺼﻔﻲ ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ، A 38
I J F ، E ، D ، C ، Bﺤﻴﺙ ) ( AC ) // ( BD
ﻭ ) ) ( EC ) // ( FDﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل( .
A
x
B D
331
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 12
D C :ر*
>: #
F ) ( O ; i ; jﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ( C ) ، 45
G
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻬﺎ . x 2 + y 2 = 4 :ﻭ )' ( C
ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻬﺎ . x 2 + y 2 − 6 x + 8 = 0 :
A B E I (1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ) ( Cﻭ ) ' . ( C
. EBF
BACﻭ
(1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ
(2ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺃﻥ ) ( Cﻭ ) ' ( Cﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﺴﺘﺎﻥ .
• ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( ACﻭ ) ( BFﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ .
(3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Iﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﻴﻥ ) . ( 2; 0
(2ﻝﻴﻜﻥ hﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Iﻭﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ
ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ' ( Cﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ
Aﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . Bﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ . h ( C ) = F
Iﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ kﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ .
2
ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h؟ • ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ
3 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ) ( C1ﻭ ) ( C2ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻴﻬﻤﺎ 46
(3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ I ، G ، Dﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺎﻤﻴﺔ . O1ﻭ O2ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ،ﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﺭ ،
ﻤﺘﻤﺎﺴﺘﺎﻥ ﺨﺎﺭﺠﻴﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . I
ABCD 48ﻭ AEFGﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ :
π
= ) ( AB ; AD ) = ( AE ; AGﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل . ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺍﻥ ﻴﺸﻤﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ، Iﻴﻘﻁﻌﺎﻥ ) ( C1
2 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ M 1ﻭ N1ﻭﻴﻘﻁﻌﺎﻥ ) ( C2ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ
M 2ﻭ N 2ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل .
F
E M1
N2
G P N
D I
A O1
Q O2
M
N1 M2
B C
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Sﺍﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ . I
G ، P ، N ، Mﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ] ، [ ED ] ، [ BD
] [GEﻭ ] [GBﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . ﻫﻲ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ) ( C1ﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ . S ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ( C2 (1
(1ﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ BEDﻭ BEGﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ : (2ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ M 2ﻭ N 2ﻫﻤﺎ ﺼﻭﺭﺘﻲ
. MN = QP ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ M 1ﻭ N1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ . S
π (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ M 1 N1 M 2 N 2ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﺃﻀﻼﻉ.
. r (2ﺍﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭﺯﺍﻭﻴﺘﻪ
2
ABCDﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ . 3 47
• ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ BEﺒﺎﻝﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ . r
ﻭ BEFGﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻁﻭل ﻀﻠﻌﻪ . 2ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل .
• ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ MNPQﻤﺭﺒﻊ .
332
12 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
) ( Dﻭ ) ' ( Dﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ M .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ 52 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﻤﺎ . ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . A 49
Iﻭ Jﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ ] [ ABﻭ ] [ ACﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
M
Hﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( BC
)(D )'(D sﺍﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) . ( IJ
ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( Dﻭﻨﻘﻁﺔ Pﻋﻠﻰ (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Aﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ . s
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ' ( Dﺤﻴﺙ : (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺼﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( AIﻭ ) ( AJﺒﺎﻝﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ . s
N (1ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ MP (3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( HIﻴﻌﺎﻤﺩ ) . ( HJ
M (2ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ NP ) ( d1ﻭ ) ( d 2ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﻥ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﻁﻌﺎﻥ ﻭ Aﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻻ 50
( C ) 53ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ . O ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻫﺫﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ .
333
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 12
) ∆ ( ﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺜﺎﺒﺕ A .ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ 55
(1ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ xﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ C
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( .
ﺼﻭﺭﺓ Bﺒﺎﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Aﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ . x
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ : ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ N
ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ AM
• Bﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ AC
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Nﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
• Aﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] . [ BC
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ∆ ( ؟
Cﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ] [ AB •
( C ) 56ﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺔ ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ ] . [ AB
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﻭﻗﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻋﻠﻰ ) ∆ ( ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ :
Mﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﺤﻴﺙ ) M ≠ A
]. x ∈ ]−∞ ; − 1 • ﻭ. ( M ≠ B
]. x ∈ ]−1 ; 1 • ﻝﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻨﻌﻴﻥ Gﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺜﻘل ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ . ABM
[∞ . x ∈ ]−1 ; 0[ ∪ [1 ; + • ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤل ﺍﻝﻬﻨﺩﺴﻲ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Gﻝﻤﺎ ﺘﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ M
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ M .ﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BC 60 ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ) ( Cﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ Aﻭ B؟
ﻨﺭﺴﻡ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺙ ABCﺍﻝﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﻥ ' BABﻭ ' CAC ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ ﻗﺎﺌﻡ ﻓﻲ . Aﻝﻜل ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ 57
ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ Aﻭﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻗﻴﻥ )ﺃﻨﻅﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ( . ] [ BCﻨﻌﻴﻥ M 1ﻨﻅﻴﺭﺓ Mﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( AB
ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ rﻴﺤﻭل Cﺇﻝﻰ ' Cﻭ ' Aﺇﻝﻰ ' . B )∆( .
334
12 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
h (2ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭﻴﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Dﺇﻝﻰ ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ Oﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] I ، [ BCﻨﻘﻁﺔ 61
ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . E ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] . [ BO
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺯﻱ ﻝـ ) ( OAﻭﺍﻝﻤﺎﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Iﻴﻘﻁﻊ
5
، −ﻭﺃﻥ : • ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ hﻫﻲ : ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻓﻲ Jﻭﻴﻘﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻴﻡ ) ( ACﻓﻲ . K
5
. h (C ) = F ﻨﺴﻤﻲ h1ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Bﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ k1ﺤﻴﺙ :
• ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﺎﻥ Hﻭ Kﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻴﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ K ، h1 ( O ) = Iﻭ h2ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ C
Eﻭ Fﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ ABﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺎﻋﻲ EFKH
ﻭﻨﺴﺒﺘﻪ k2ﺤﻴﺙ . h2 ( O ) = I :
ﻤﺭﺒﻊ . A
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ] [ BQ ] ، [ APﻭ ] [CRﻝﻬﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ ) ∆ ( ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ] [ ABﻫﻭ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺘﻨﺎﻅﺭ
ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺘﺼﻑ O؛ ﻭﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ /01 O ، G ، Mا ,-. ﻝﻠﺸﻜل .
وا#2ة.
• ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﻴﻥ ) ( DCﻭ ) ( EFﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎﻥ.
335
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 12
ABCﻤﺜﻠﺙ B ' ، A ' .ﻭ ' Cﻤﻨﺘﺼﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻀﻼﻉ 65 (1ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺤﺎﻙ h1ﻴﺤﻭل Aﺇﻝﻰ Iﻭ B
] [ AC ] ، [ BCﻭ ] [ ABﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . ﺇﻝﻰ Jﻭ Cﺇﻝﻰ . K
H Aﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ BC (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻭﻤﺭﻜﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺎﻜﻲ h2ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل Iﺇﻝﻰ
H Bﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ AC Pﻭ Jﺇﻝﻰ Qﻭ Kﺇﻝﻰ . R
H Cﺍﻝﻤﺴﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁﺔ Cﻋﻠﻰ ] . [ AB ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻭﻴل ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻭل [ (3ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ I
336
13
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ.
ﺘﻔﺴﻴﺭ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ،
ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ.
ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ
) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ (.
ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ
) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ،ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ (.
ﺘﻭﻅﻴﻑ ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺤل ﻤﺴﺎﺌل.
337
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 13
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ا 4 7 10 13 16 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ا
ار 6 5 7 4 1 -1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
4,4,4,4,4,4,7,7,7,7,7,10,……. -2ﺃﻜﻤل ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﺼﺎﻋﺩﻴﺎ
-3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
-4ﺃﺤﺴﺏ Q1ﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ .
-ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻴﺔ ( ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻁﺒﻊ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ Q1؟
-5ﺃﺤﺴﺏ Q3ﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻭﻨﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﺜﻨﻲ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭﺓ .
-ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ) ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻴﺔ ( ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻁﺒﻊ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ Q3؟
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ا ا
ا
ا ا ا ا ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ
ا
ا
ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ
[[0،2 2 0,12 0,12
-1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻤﻴﻠﻴﻤﺘﺭﻱ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ
[[2، 4 4 0,15 0, 27 -2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻓﻭﺍﺼل ﻨﻘﻁ ﺘﻘﺎﻁﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻤﺎﺕ
[[4،6 6 0,18 0,45 y = 0, 75 ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺎﺩﻻﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ y = 0, 25 ، y = 0,5ﻭ
[[6،8 8 0,24 0,69 ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل ﻫﻲ Q1 ، Medﻭ Q3ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
[ [ 8 ، 10 10 0,14 0,83 -3ﻻﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ 0,25ﻴﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻔﺌﺔ [ [ 2 , 4
[ [ 10 ، 12 12 0,10 0,93 ﺃﺤﺴﺏ X1 ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ) A( 2 : 0,12ﻭ ) . B( 4 : 0,27
[ [ 12 ، 14 14 0, 07 1 ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻘﻴﻡ ) ( ABﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ 0,25
Q1 ﻻﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ X1ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻴﺔ ﻝـ
Q3 -4ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل (3ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ Medﻭ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ﺘﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
xi ا 9,5 9,6 9,7 9,8 9,9 10 10,1 10,2
ا
ار n i 17 22 25 29 31 35 45 40
ا x i 10,3 10,4 10,5 10,6 10,7 10,8 10,9 11
ا
ار n i 25 14 12 10 10 8 5 2
338
13 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻤﻊ Nﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ | x i − Med | ،ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ xiﻭ | x i − X | ، Medﺍﻝﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ xiﻭ . Xﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ
ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺭﺍﺒﻊ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ x1 , x 2 , x 3 ,........, x kﺤﻴﺙ kﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ 1
k
n = ∑ ni ﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ . n1 , n 2 , n 3 ,......., n kﻨﻀﻊ
i =1
k
d(x) = ∑ n i (x i − x) 2 ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﺘﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ :
i =1
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ dﺘﻘﺒل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﺼﻐﺭﻯ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻝـ xﻴﻁﻠﺏ ﺘﺤﺩﻴﺩﻫﺎ .
k
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺨﺎﻤﺱ
339
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 13
-1ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﺎﺕ
ﻤﺩﺨل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
4 , 4 ,4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 7 , 7 , 7 , 7 , 7 , 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , 10 , 13 , 13 , 13 , 13 , 16
ﺤﻴﺙ ﺃﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﺼﺎﻋﺩﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻜﺘﻭﺒﺔ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺴﺎﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﻫﺎ
ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻲ Nﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ 23
N N
ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺩﺴﺔ ﻷﻥ = 5, 75 ﺃﻭل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
4 4
ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ ) Q1ﻫﻨﺎ ( Q1 = 4
3N 3N
ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻤﻨﺔ ﻋﺸﺭ ﻷﻥ = 17, 25 ﺃﻭل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
4 4
ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻭ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ ) Q3ﻫﻨﺎ ( Q3 = 10
25 %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل 25 %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل 25 %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻠﺨﺹ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 4 , 7 , 7 , 7 , 7 , 7 ,1 0 ,1 0 ,1 0 ,1 0 ,1 0 ,1 0 ,1 0 ,1 3,1 3,1 3,1 3,1 6
Q1 Med Q3
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل Q1ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 25 %
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ . Q1
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ Q3ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻁﺒﻊ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ 75%
ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ Q3
Q1و !"#$ Q3ن ا ف ا Medا*ي & %#أن ' &%ن #$ا : ()*+
ﻨﻁﺒﻕ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﺨﺩﺍﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ * Q1ﻫﻲ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ )ﻤﻊ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ ﻜل ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺒﻌﺩﺩ ﻤﺴﺎﻭ ﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﻫﺎ(
340
13 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺤــل:
xi 3 4 5 7 8 10 11 -2ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻲ N = 2 × 20 :
ni 5 7 3 8 8 6 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ Medﻫﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ 3
تمص 5 12 15 23 31 37 40
0,125م ص 0,3 0,375 0,575 0,775 0,925 1 ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﺫﻴﻥ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﺎﻫﻤﺎ 20ﻭ 21
ﺃﻱ Med = 7
ﺒﻘﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Q1ﺤﻴﺙ 25 %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ *
ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ Q1ﻫﻲ 4ﻭ ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ Q3 = 8
-3ﻴﻘﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] 21 ، [ Q1 ، Q3ﺤﺩﺍ ﺃﻱ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻌﺎﺩل ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﺎ 52,5 %ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ
ﻨﺴﺒﺘﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎﻝﻴﻥ [ min ، Q1 ] ،ﻭ ] [ Q3 ، maxﻫﻤﺎ ﺘﻘﺭﻴﺒﺎ 30 %ﻭ 42,5 %ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
ﺤــل:
8 X 4 + X5 8
Q3 = X 6 ﻭ Q3ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﻪ × 3ﺃﻱ ﺃﻱ Q1 = X 2ﻭ Medﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ Q1ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺭﺘﺒﺘﻪ
4 2 4
ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺇﺫﻥ ﻫﻭ ) ( E -
341
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 13
ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﺎﺕ :
ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺸﺎﻫﺩﺓ ﺘﺸﺘﺕ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺓ ﺴﻼﺴل ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ . : ()*+
ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﺒـ Q1′و Q3′ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ Med′ = a.Med + bﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل a > 0
Q B = a.QA + b
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ Q1′ = a.Q 1 + b :و Q3′ = a.Q 3 + b
342
+
13 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
343
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 13
ﺘﻤﻬﻴﺩ :
ﻋﺭﻓﻨﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﻗﻊ ) ﺍﻝﻤﻨﻭﺍل ،ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ( ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﻏﻴﺭ
ﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﻜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺒل ﻻﺒ ﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺘﺸﺘﺕ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺤﻭل ﻤﺅﺸﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﻗﻊ .ﻭﻤﻥ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻨﺩﺭﺝ ﻫﺫﻩ
ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺒﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺸﺘﺕ ﻭﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻋﺭﻓﻨﺎﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ .
i ∈ {1, 2,3,..., p ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ ﻤﻊ } ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ) (x i , n iﺤﻴﺙ x iﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ﻭ n i ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ:
n
fi = i ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ Vﻭﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻑ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ :
N
n1 ( x1 − X ) + n 2 ( x 2 − X ) + ... + n p ( x p − X )
p
1
= Vﻤﻊ N = ∑ n iﻭ Xﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
2 2 2
إذا آ VMا !! I /ّ+ت ) ز x i [\]M ( (T+ 0آآ $ : ()*+
! ;/ه[ aا 2/رة ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ) (x i , n iﺤﻴﺙ x iﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ﻭ n iﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ 2+ه: 2 T
دة !ب
ﻤﻊ } i ∈ {1, 2,3,..., pﻭ pﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺘﻤﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ .1ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ Vﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
دون !)Vب 1 1 n
)(x i − X 2 =V (n1 x12 + n 2 x 2 2 + ... + n p x p p ) − X 2 = ∑ n i x i 2 − X 2
N N i =1
1 p
∑ (x i − X) 2 = x i 2 − 2.x i X + X 2ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ) (n i x i 2 − 2.n i .x i X + n i .X 2 ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :
p p
=V
∑ a.x
i =1
i = a ∑ Xi
i =1
N i =1
i : ;!+ a 1 p p
1 p 2 p 1 p
=X ﻭ ∑ ni xi = Vﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻡ ﺃﻥ N = ∑ n i ∑ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ n i x i 2 − X ∑ n i x i + X 2 ∑ n i
:
0إ\ا;23 ig N i =1 i =1 N i =1 N i =1 N i =1
ا ∑ $+ =V
1 p
∑ ni xi2 − X2 ﺇﺫﻥ =V
1 p
∑ n i x i 2 − 2X2 + X 2 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
N i =1 N i =1
إذا آ 3 x i VMا ^ 2ذات و)ات ) T/+أ#ال ،ز`R ( ... ، :+ن a[<I b!0 Vا )ات /I+ : 1 ()*+
) ، )!+ز ( ... ، I+ :+و `R K Iن و)ة s = Vه Kو)ة x i
;/!0 : 2 ()*+أ) !0 \d V. ef+ Mا > Qا !M* KIاRت ا ^ و ه ا /د ا em K
p
i ∈ {1, 2,3,..., p ا > Qا ! f i ، KIا اات و } X x i +ه 3 Kا ^، 2 e m = ∑ f i .x i − X )1
i =1
344
13 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
xi 3 5 7 9 11 13
fi
-1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
0,08 0,15 0,28 0,35 0,1 0,04
-2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ
ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﺴﻁﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﺠﺩﻭل ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ fi .x iﺜﻡ ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ fi .x i
ﺤــل:
0# -1ﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ )(2
ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﺴﻁﺭﺍ ﺁﺨﺭﺍ ﻝﻠﺠﺩﻭل ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ fi .x i 2ﺜﻡ ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ fi .x i 2
ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :
ا ! 2ع 1ﺃﻓﻀل ﻤﻥ ﻨﺎﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ) ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻤﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ (
345
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 13
∑n
i =1
i ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ Vﻤﻊ xiﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ni ،ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺘﻬﺎ = N ،
ﺒﺭﻫﺎﻥ :
1
= )g (a ) ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ gﻤﻊ aﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ( n1 ( x1 − a) 2 + n2 ( x2 − a ) 2 + ... + n p ( x p − a ) 2
n
−1
= ) g ′( a 2n1 ( x1 − a) + 2n2 ( x2 − a ) + ... + 2n p ( x p − a )
N
−1
= 2n1 x1 + 2n2 x2 + ... + 2n p x p − 2( n1 + n2 + ... + n p ) a
N
−1 p p
= (2∑ ni xi − 2a ∑ ni ) = −2 X + 2a a X
N i =1 i =1 ) g ′(a - +
g ′( a ) = 0ﻤﻌﻨﺎﻩ ( g ( X ) = V ) a = X
) g (a
V
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ x ֏ a.x + bﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ) ، yi = f (x iﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل a > 0ﺘﻜﻭﻥ fﻤﺘﺯﺍﻴﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﺭﺘﺒﺔ x iﻓﻲ Aﻫﻲ ﻨﻔﺴﻬﺎ
ﺭﺘﺒﺔ yiﻓﻲ ) Bﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ x i ≤ x i+1ﻓﺈﻥ ( yi ≤ yi +1ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ S y = a 2Vxﺃﻱ S y = a Vxﺃﻱ S y = a S x
346
13 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 7
.1ﻴﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﻤﺩﻴﺭ ﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺭ
* ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ :ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻤﺒﻠﻎ 750 DAﻝﻠﺠﻤﻴﻊ * ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ :ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺭ ﻜﻠﻬﺎ ﺒﻨﺴﺒﺔ5 %
ﻴﻔﻀل ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺒﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺭ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ .ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺩل ﺃﺠﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻭ
15000 DAﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻫﻭ . 5400 DAﻓﺄﻱ ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺘﻴﻥ ﺃﻨﺴﺏ ﻝﻠﻌﻤﺎل ؟
ﺤــل:
Y = 1, 05.X ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ Xﺍﻷﺠﺭ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ،ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺍﻷﺠﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ : 1
ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻤﻌﺩل ﺃﺠﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻭ 15000 × 1,05 = 15750 DA
ﻭ ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻫﻭ 5400 × 1,05 = 5670 DA
ﻤﻌﺩل ﺃﺠﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻫﻭ 15000 + 750 = 15750 DA ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ : 2
ﻭ ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻫﻭ ﻨﻔﺴﻪ 5400 DA
ﺍﻝﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﻨﺴﺏ ﻝﻠﻌﻤﺎل ﺇﺫ ﺒﻬﺎ ﺘﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺃﺠﻭﺭﻫﻡ ) ﺇﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ( ﺍﻝﺨﻼﺼﺔ :
347
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 13
ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ
ﺘﻤﻬﻴﺩ :ﻤﺅﺸﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﻗﻊ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻜﺎﻑ ﻝﻠﺤﻜﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﺫ ﻻﺒﺩ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﺘﺸﺘﺕ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻊ ﺤﻭل .1
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ
ﻴﺘﻡ ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﻤﺅﺸﺭﻴﻥ ) ﻤﺅﺸﺭ ﻤﻭﻗﻊ ﻭ ﻤﺅﺸﺭ ﺘﺸﺘﺕ (
ﻋﻤﻭﻤﺎ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ،ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ ( ) ( Med ، em
ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ( ﺃﻱ ) ( X ، sx
ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻝﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻜﺎﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ،ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻯ ( ﻝﻜﻥ ﻴﻌﺎﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻯ ﺘﺄﺜﺭﻩ
ﺒﺎﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺫﺓ .
ﺘﺴﺘﺨﺩﻡ ﺃﺤﻴﺎﻨﺎ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝ ﺭﺒﻌﻲ ( ﻝﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻻ ﺘﺘﺄﺜﺭ ﺒﺎﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺫﺓ
ﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻴﻤﻜﹼﻨﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺘﻬﺎ ﺒﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻤﻠﺨﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ .
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻘﻀﻴﻬﺎ ﺸﺨﺼﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﺃﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻜل ﺸﻬﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻤﺜﺎل:1
ﺃﺠﺭﻴﺕ ﺴﻨﺔ . 2003
ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12
ﺍﻝﺸﺨﺹ A 68 60 61 43 41 51 51 60 60 126 108 110
ﺍﻝﺸﺨﺹ B 44 42 57 63 77 79 76 92 92 97 79 60
-1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻜل ﺸﺨﺹ .
-2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻘﺔ ﻝﻜل ﺸﺨﺹ ﺃﻴﻀﺎ .
ﺍﻝﺤل :
( 1 ) qp ( 2 ) qp
ا efات X sx Med em
ا A qp. 69h55mn12s 28h 22mn32s 60h 00mn 00s 22h 22mn30s
ا B qp. 71h30mn 00s 17 h32mn52s 76h30mn 00s 15h15mn 00s
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﺸﺨﺹ Bﺃﻜﺒﺭ .ﻓﻬﻭ ﻴﻘﻀﻲ ﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺨﺹ Aﻝﻜﻨﹼﻪ ﻴﻘﻀﻴﻬﺎ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ
ﺍﻨﺘﻅﺎﻤﺎ ﻤﻥ Aﻷﻥ ﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﻪ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ .
ﻤﺜﺎل :2ﻋﻭﻝﺠﺕ ﻋﻼﻤﺎﺕ 200ﻤﺘﺴﺎﺒﻘﺎ ﻻﺠﺘﻴﺎﺯ ﻤﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺸﻔﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺠﺎﻤﻌﻲ ﻓﺄﻋﻁﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ m = 11,4ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ s = 5,2ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ Med = 13ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ . 9
-ﺍﻗﺘﺭﺡ ﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﻜﻔﻴﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺘﻠﺨﻴﺹ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺎﺕ .ﻓﺴﺭ.
ﺍﻝﺤل :
ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺘﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ) ( Med ; Q3 -Q1 ) = ( 13 ; 9ﻭ )(m ; s) = (11,4 ; 5,2
ﻴﻌﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﺒﺏ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻹﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻘﺴﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻨﻨﺠﺯﻩ ﺒﻘﻴﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻨﻁﻼﻗﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﻓﺭﺓ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ .
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﺜﻨﻴﻥ ﻋﻼﻤﺘﻪ 13ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺯﻱ ﻝﻠﻌﻼﻤﺎﺕ
ﻤﻭﺯﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ 9ﻨﻘﻁ .ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺎﺕ 11,4ﻭﻤﻌﺩل ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﻗﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل
ﻫﻭ . 5,2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻓﻬﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻤﻥ ﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﺒﻘﻴﻥ ﻋﻼﻤﺎﺘﻬﻡ ﺘﻔﻭﻕ . 11,4
348
13 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل Excelﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ
ﻴﻨﺘﺞ ﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﻗﻁﻌﹰﺎ ﻓﻀﻴﺔ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺴﻤﻜﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻠﻴﻤﺘﺭ) ( mmﻜﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
[ [ 1,8; 1,85 [ [ 1,85; 1,9 [ [ 1,9; 1,95 [ [ 1,95; 2,0 [ [ 2,0; 2,05 [ [ 2,05; 2,1 [ [ 2,1; 2,3ﺍﻝﺴﻤﻙ )(mm
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ n i 3 6 17 34 13 4 1
* ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻊ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺼﺎﻝﺤﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﻤﺠﺎل ﺍﻝﺼﻼﺤﻴﺔ ﻤﺤﺘﻭﺍﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] . [ 1,9 ; 2ﻫل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻜﺫﻝﻙ ؟
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﺼﻠﻴﺢ ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺤﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﻼﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻵﻝﺔ ﺍﻵﻥ .
[ [ 1,8; 1,85 [ [ 1,85; 1,9 [ [ 1,9; 1,95 [ [ 1,95; 2,0 [ [ 2,0; 2,05 [ [ 2,05; 2,1 [ [ 2,1; 2,3ﺍﻝﺴﻤﻙ )(mm
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ n i 1 2 43 25 4 2 1
349
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 13
ﺘﺘﻨﺎﻓﺱ ﻗﺎﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺤﻼﻗﺔ Aﻭ Bﻓﻲ ﺠﻠﺏ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺒﺎﺌﻥ .ﺘﺒﻨﹼﻰ ﺼﺎﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺔ Aﺸﻌﺎﺭﺍ ﻜﺘﺒﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﺏ ﻫﻭ:
" ﺍﻝﺤﻼﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ 40ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ) ".ﻜﻤﻌﺩل. (...
* ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺎﻓﻲ ﻝﻠﺤﻼﻗﺔ ﻫﻭ 30ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻭﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺯﺒﻭﻥ ﺴﻴﻨﺘﻅﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻗل ﻤﻥ 10ﺩﻗﺎﺌﻕ .
( Iﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﻥ ﺼﺤﺔ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻌﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﻓﺱ ﻗﺎﻡ ﺼﺎﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺔ Bﺒﺎﺤﺼﺎﺀ ﻓﺘﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻹﻨﺘﻅﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻓﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺠﻪ ﻜﻤﺎﻴﻠﻲ :
350
13 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ
ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﻴﺔ ﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﻴﻥ 2ﻉ 1ﻭ 2ﻉ2
ﺍﻝﻔﺌﺎﺕ [[ 0;8 [[8;9 [[9;10 [[10;12 [[12;13 [[13;14 [[14; 20
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ 2ﻉ1 0 4 10 10 5 2 1
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ 2ﻉ2 3 5 9 12 3 0 0
-1 (Iﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﻴﻥ ) ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ (
-2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﻴﻥ
(IIﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﻨﺘﻘﺎل ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻴﻘﺘﻀﻲ ﻤﻌﺩﻻ ﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺃﻭ ﻴﻔﻭﻕ 10
-1ﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ ﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘﻠﻭﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ؟
-2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻗﺴﻡ ،ﺜﻡ ﺤﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻷﺤﺴﻥ ؟
-3ﻋﻠﻲ ﻭ ﻤﺼﻁﻔﻰ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺍﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﻴﻥ 2ﻉ2 ، 1ﻉ 2ﻤﻌﺩﻻﻫﻤﺎ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﻴﺎﻥ 9,75 ، 10,5ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻴﺭﺓ
ﻤﻌﺩﻝﻴﻬﻤﺎ ﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﻙ ؟
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ Mﻝﻠﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺭ ﻝﻠﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻭ ﺒـ Xﻝﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﻱ ﻭ ﺒـ sﻝﻼﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
/+ل /+ل اMsاف -4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﺕ ﺃﻥ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ
K ا ! ا /ري !
ا 1 Kt*H 11 9 1 -ﻫل ﻋﻠﻲ ﻴﺘﻘﺩﻡ ﺃﻡ ﻴﺘﺄﺨﺭ ؟
ا 2Kt*H 12.5 9.5 2 -ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻴﺭﺓ ﻤﻌﺩﻝﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﻙ ؟
م رu0ت 0$Rء -5ﻤﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﻤﺼﻁﻔﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺴﺎﺴﻴﺔ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ
/+ل ^+ 9 8 10 -ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺃﺜﺭﺕ ﺴﻠﺒﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻌﺩﻝﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﺎﻡ ؟
/+ل ا ! 10 8 11
اMsاف -ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻴﺭﺓ ﻤﻌﺩﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ،ﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﻙ ؟
2 2 1.5
ا /ري ! (IIIﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻨﺘﻘﺎل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﻝﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ
" ﻴﻨﺘﻘل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ 75 %ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻷﻭﺍﺌل ﺒﻌﺩ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻤﻌﺩﻻﺘﻬﻡ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﻭﻴﺔ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﻨﺎﺯﻝﻴﺎ "
-1ﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ ﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘﻠﻭﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻁﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻨﺘﻘﺎل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜل ﻗﺴﻡ ؟
-ﻫل ﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘل ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﻤﺼﻁﻔﻰ ؟
-2ﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﺫﻴﻥ ﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘﻠﻭﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺜﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻁﺒﻘﻨﺎ ﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﻨﺘﻘﺎل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻤﻴﻥ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺩﻤﺠﻬﻤﺎ ؟
-ﻫل ﺴﻴﻨﺘﻘل ﻜل ﻤﻥ ﻋﻠﻲ ﻭﻤﺼﻁﻔﻰ ؟
-3ﺃﻨﺠﺯ ﺤﻭﺼﻠﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ.
351
ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ 13
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ : 1
ﻨﺩﺭﺱ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺘﺄﺜﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻁﺒﻊ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ .
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ X1 , X 2 , X 3 ,......., X nﻭ ﻝﻴﻜﻥ m 0ﻭﺴﻁﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ V0ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻨﻬﺎ .
Xﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﻭ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ) m(Xﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ ﻭ ) V(Xﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩ n +1 ﻨﻀﻴﻑ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ = X
) ﺃﻱ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ . ( X n +1
X + n.m 0
-2ﻜﻴﻑ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ Xﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ m(X) = m 0؟ = )m(X -1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
n +1
n n.m 0 n.V0 n.m 0 2
= )V(X X − 2.X
2
+ + -3ﺒﺭﻫﻥ ﺃﻥ :
(n + 1) 2 (n + 1)2 n + 1 (n + 1) 2
-4ﻤﺎﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ) V(Xﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ؟
-5ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ ﻝﻠﺩﺍﻝﺘﻴﻥ mﻭ ) Vﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻫﻭ ( X
15 13 11 12 10 9 -6ﻋﻼﻤﺎﺕ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﺼﻴﺎﺕ ﺨﻼل ﺴﻨﺔ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :
-aﺃﺤﺴﺏ m 0ﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻭ s0ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ .
-bﺘﻭﻀﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﻋﻼﻤﺔ xﺨﺎﺼﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﺴﻴﺭﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻭﻙ ﻝﻜل ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻭ ﻴﺭﻴﺩ ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ
x 15 13 11 12 10 9 ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺠﺎﻨﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﻲ .
-ﻤﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ xﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل m 0ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺎ ) ﺒﻌﺩ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ( ؟
-ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺭﺍﺩ ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ s 0ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺎ ﺒﻌﺩ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ x
) ﺍﻝﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺎﺕ ( ﻓﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ xﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ؟
-ﻝﻭ ﺃﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ . 14ﻤﺎ ﺘﺄﺜﻴﺭ ﺫﻝﻙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﺒﺎﻝﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﺼﺎﻥ .ﻤﺎ ﺘﻌﻠﻴﻘﻙ ؟
ﺤـل :
X1 + X 2 + X 3 + ..... + X n + X X + n.m 0
= )m(X = -1
n +1 n +1
X = m0 m( X ) = m0 -2ﻴﻌﻨﻲ
n +1 n +1
1 1
= )V(X ∑ = (X i − m(X)) 2 ∑ ])[ (Xi − m0 ) + (m0 − m(X
2
-3
n + 1 i =1 n + 1 i =1
1 ( ) m0 − X
2
m −X
= n.V0 + (X − m 0 ) +
2
+2 0 (X − m 0 )
n + 1 n +1 n +1
n n.m 0 n.V0 n.m 0 2
= )V(X 2
X - 2.X + + ﻭ ﺃﺨﻴﺭﺍ ﻨﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻁﻠﻭﺒﺔ :
(n + 1)2 (n + 1)2 n + 1 (n + 1)2
2Xn n.m 0
X = m0 = ) V′(Xﺘﻨﻌﺩﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل −2 -4ﻨﺒﺤﺙ ﻋﻥ ﻤﺸﺘﻘﺔ Vﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ، X
)(n + 1 2
(n + 1) 2
352
13 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
1
ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ V = )m′(X -5ﺠﺩﻭل ﺘﻐﻴﺭﺍﺕ mﻤﻊ
n +1
X m0 X m0
n m0
V0 )m(X
)v(X n +1
m s 0 ≈ 2,16 ، m 0 ≈ 11, 66 - a (6
- bﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ Xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺎ ﻫﻲ X ≈ 11, 66
ﺒﻘﺎﺀ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺎ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺒﻘﺎﺀ V0ﺜﺎﺒﺘﺎ ﻭﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻨﺤل ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺔ V(X) = V0ﻨﺠﺩ X ≈ 12, 61ﺃﻭ X ≈ 10, 70
ﺇﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ 14ﺘﻌﻨﻲ ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﺍﻝﺘﻌﻠﻴﻕ " ﻤﺴﺘﻭﻯ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺭﻓﻲ ﻻ ﻴﺘﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻤﻊ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﻭﻙ "
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ : 2
ﺘﻤﺕ ﺩﺭﺍﺴﺔ ﺤﻭل ﻋﻴﻨﺔ ) 340ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺤﺎﺴﻭﺏ ( ﻝﺨﺼﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :
-1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ mﻤﻌﺩل ﻤﺩﺓ ﺼﻼﺤﻴﺔ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ sﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
+ة -2ﺇﺫﺍ ﻋﻠﻤﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ) 5000 DAﻤﻊ ﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ( ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺯﺒﺎﺌﻥ ﻴﻔﻀﻠﻭﻥ ﺩﻓﻊ ﺜﻤﻥ
ا
ار
ا *)
T! Iات ﺇﻀﺎﻓﻲ ﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﺍﻝﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﻝﻤﺩﺓ ﺴﻨﺘﻴﻥ ﺇﻀﺎﻓﻴﺘﻴﻥ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺍﻝﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ
[[0 ; 1 91 ﻝﻠﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺘﻘﺘﺭﺤﻪ ﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﺍﻝﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺴﻨﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﻀﺎﻓﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺘﻔﺎﺩﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺘﻐﻴﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺎﺕ؟
[[1 ; 1,5 40
-3ﺒﻌﺩ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺘﺤﺴﻨﺕ ﻨﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺎﺕ ﻓﺎﺯﺩﺍﺩﺕ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺍﻝﺼﻼﺤﻴﺔ ِـ 50 %
[[1,5 ; 2 47
[[2 ; 3 82 -aﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ m′ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ s′ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﺴﻥ .
[[3 ; 4 62 -bﺍﺤﺴﺏ M ′ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺴﻨﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺘﻘﺘﺭﺤﻪ ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺔ
[[4 ; 5 18
-4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ Medﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ . Iﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
-1ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﻨﺠﺩ m ≈ 2, 0022 :ﺃﻱ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻌﺎﺩل ﺴﻨﺘﺎﻥ ﻭ 13ﻴﻭﻤﺎ )ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺃﻥ ﺃﻁﻭﺍل ﺍﻝﻔﺌﺎﺕ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ(
ﺒﺘﻁﺒﻴﻕ ﺍﻝﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ ﻨﺠﺩ s ≈ 1, 216ﺃﻱ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻌﺎﺩل ﺴﻨﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ 78ﻴﻭﻤﺎ
-2ﺇﺫﺍ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺯﺒﺎﺌﻥ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻀﻤﺎﻥ ) ( M.DAﻝﻠﺴﻨﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻹﻀﺎﻓﻴﺘﻴﻥ
ﺴﺘﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺔ 240M DAﻝﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﺴﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺩﺓ
ﺼﻼﺤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻗل ﻤﻥ 3ﺴﻨﻭﺍﺕ ﺃﻱ 91 + 40 + 47 + 82 = 260 :
1300000
=M ﺃﻱ ﺒﺘﻜﻠﻔﺔ ) ( 1300000 DAﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ≈ 3824DA
340
ﻤﻼﺤﻅﺔ :ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺤل ﺁﺨﺭ ﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﻻ ﺘﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺼﻼﺤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﻗل ﻤﻥ ﺴﻨﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺜﻤﻥ ﻀﻤﺎﻨﻬﺎ
ﻤﺩﻓﻭﻉ ) ﻀﻤﻥ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﺍﺀ ( ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ M ≈ 2485DA :
(bﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺴﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺔ 178 = 91 + 40 + 47 :ﺸﺎﺸﺔ ﻓﻘﻁ s′ = 1, 5 × s ، m′ = 1, 5× m (a -3
890000
= M ′ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ M ′ ≈ 2618DA ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ
340
ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻝﻡ ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻠﻀﻤﺎﻥ ) ﺃﻱ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺴﻨﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻀﻤﻥ ﺜﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﺍﺀ (
(m'; s') = (3,03;1,81) ، (Med; I) = (2,9; 4) -4ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ 50 0 0ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺎﺕ ﺘﺘﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺼﻼﺤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺒﻴﻥ
1,4ﻭ 4,4ﻭ 50 0 0ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻝﻬﺎ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺼﻼﺤﻴﺔ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل.
353
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 13
-1.إ
ء
ل
و . ا
ء
ا
8 .2ا
K .7أ!Rى )ا!ن أو ا
0ا!:ى أو ا
0ا!Sى(
! VWا5ا
, Oل أ C,اU 0A
354
13 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
#$ت:
S
Wإء
أ!Rى ? 12ان وه)ا CK 56ه)( ا
/K 12أ!Rى )،(4+ L2
و إXع ? ا
!ا -ا
.0 و و
ت CDاRر
إذا YZKا
!S 02!
0ارات ا
ا 56 ،02ا 12 C0إZ-ى ا0ا (4+ L1) C/وا!Sارت
(.
) Freq : 12 L2 6
/K 12أ!Rى ) Z CD ،(4+ L2اRر ا
+
.2إ *
ز
-آ
ة * )(ا&
ل
ا ^
X 1ل، 6ز آة ، ,اAع
،TIا
. وا اZ 8 ،/د 0و 1وا
)AX 1
:
أ
, ،56ل ، ,-آة ر! 50 WZ0 K 1ة 6
X Mا!ف ZA Fر اbc
وا!ف ZA Pر ا.!G
,ع ^
X TI 83ل ،ا8 ،/ ــ!
:أن ا
ل Zد 0وّS 1ن 9أرKم Zا
A2 ، 02 Fا
Z 8د ر 0و.10
و ،اZ 8 ،/د 0 8 :; .2
و ! .10آ أرKم ه)ا اZد و^ أن آ ر CKزو1c
) +
W (4+ا (P)!Gوآ ر!2 CKدي +
Wا.(F) bc
12ه)( ا اZد ا
ب ه 1,374504142و +
W
10 6رت FFFPFPPFPP :
!0 :#$أ اiرKم ا
ر إ 8ا
.
355
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 13
ا ^
X 1ل، 6ز آة ، ,اAع
،TIا
. وا اZ 8 ،/د ر Zد Wآ ،وا
)AX 1
:
ل
،أ *
- 6آ
ة ر 4زه د 20ة.
ــ! :
; .1ا 0 8 jر Z CKا
, Fل ا
وا
)A .2ا!:7
)A .3ا!:7
و ،اZ 8 ،/د 1k 8 :; .4
1و.6
S
W :#$ال !Iة 12 5 6 n 8إZ-ى Kا C/ا
, ,ل ا
. ا
!:7
:ل
،أ *
- 6آ
ة ر 4زه د 120ة.
ــ! :
)Aا!7
120
356
13 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
:) -3.د ات <;(ر * * )(ا&
- :آ
ة
•
ل
Zد !ات ر !6X 6ا Z /آة
,ا
. ا
!:7
-4.ا !Cا
() * B&
? 4ا&
- :آ
ة
ل
ا
!6X 7/ +ا Z /آة
, ، ،ا
!:7
(2ﻨﻨﻔﺫ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻨﺎﻤﺞ:
357
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 13
ــ! :
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺒﺭﻤﺠﻴﺔ
SENEQUANON
ﻨﺘﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل
ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻤﻜﻨﻨﺎ ﻤﻥ ﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ
ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺘﻴﻥ
MIN MAX
358
13 ر:0
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ .12 .ﺇﻝﻰ 15 .ﺃﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ..ﺃﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ..
ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ.
12ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺘﻴﻥ S1ﻭ S 2ﺤﻴﺙ ﻭﺴﻁ S1 ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ . 1 .ﺇﻝﻰ . 11 .
ﻫﻭ ، 5ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ S1ﻫﻭ 1ﻭﺴﻁ S 2ﻫﻭ ، 9ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ S 2ﻫﻭ 1 ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﻁﺄ ﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺤﻠﻴل :
1,5 (2
.2 .ﻓﻲ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ 50 %ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ
(3ﻻ ﻴﺴﺘﻁﻴﻊ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) Vﻻ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﻜﺎﻓﻴﺔ (
ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ .
.14ﻓﻲ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻤﻭﺠﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻷﻗل 10ﻗﻴﻡ ،ﻨﻀﺭﺏ ﻓﻲ 1ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ:
3 .ﻓﻲ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ 25 %ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ
(1ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻻ ﻴﺘﻐﻴﺭ . ﻤﻥ ) Q3ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ( .
.15ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻥ 100ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﺘﻤﺎﻴﺯﺓ ،ﻤﺨﻁﻁ 6 .ﺇﺩﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻤﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ﻜل ﻗﻴﻡ ﻫﺫﻩ
ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻫﻭ ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ: ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ.
Q1 Me Q3 7 .ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻴﻘﺴﻡ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺠﺯﺃﻴﻥ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﻴﻥ.
D1 D9 8 .ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﺌﻤﺎ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ .
10 20 30 40 9 .ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝ ﺭ ﺒﻴﻊ( ﺍﻷﻭل ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺩﺍﺌﻤﺎ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ
1 .
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ.
(1ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻬﺩﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻫﻭ .20
10 .ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝـ Q1ﻭ . Q3
(2ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻫﻭ .18
11 .ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﻫﻭ . Q3
(3ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ D1ﻭ D 9ﻫﻭ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ.
359
ر:0 13
.16
20ﻓﻲ ﺇﺤﺩﻯ ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺎﺕ ،ﺍﻷﺠﻬﺯﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﻤﺎل ﻫﻲ:
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
.14485 DA
ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ 7_9_5_7_3_7_20_14:
ﺒﺎﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻴﻘﺩﺭ ِـ 6000 DAﻗﺭﺭ ﻤﺩﻴﺭ ﻋﺎﻡ
.17
ﻝﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ 1600 DAﻓﻲ ﺃﺠﻭﺭ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺎل ﻭ ﺯﻴﺎﺩﺓ
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﺘﻘﺩﺭ ِـ 3 %ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﺠﺭ ﺍﻝﺸﻬﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﻲ
ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻷﺠﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ؟ (1
8_4_1_13_0_1_3_7_7_2
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ . (2 ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻓﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ (2
(1ﻨﻀﻊ mﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﺔ ،ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ mﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ x 18.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ
x k ....., x 2 , x 1
(2ﻨﻀﻊ vﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ،ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ vﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ x
ﺒﺎﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ n k ....., n 2 , n1ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
(3ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ : ﻨﻌﻁﻲ :
k k
ﻫل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻗﻴﻡ ﻝـ xﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ (1ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻭﺯﻥ ﺤﻜﻴﻤﺔ ؟
ﻭﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎﻥ ؟
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ .
360
13 ر:0
.24
.28.ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :
ﺒﻌﺩ ﺍﻻﻤﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺎﺩﺓ
[ [15, 20[ [ 20, 25[ [ 25,30[ [30, 40[ [40,50[ [50,70ﺍﻝﻔﺌﺎﺕ
ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻸﻗﺴﺎﻡ 2ﻉ2 ، 1ﻉ 2ﻭ2ﻉ 3ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ :
x 10 22 12 7 10 6 ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ
6 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 17 19ﺍﻝﻨﻘﺎﻁ
i
.29.ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻤﺜل ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ ﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﺇﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ . ﻝﻜل ﻗﺴﻡ ؟ ﻋﻠل ﺇﺠﺎﺒﺘﻙ .
ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ،ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﻴﻥ Q1ﻭ Q2ﻝﻬﺫﻩ (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ . ﻝﻨﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻸﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺙ .
..اـ
ت..
.25.
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﻴﻌﻁﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﺠﻤﺎﻝﻲ ﻝﻌﻴﻨﺔ .
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﻤﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﺎ ﺘﺼﺎﻋﺩﻴﺎ .
-ﺃﻭﺠﺩ ﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻴﻊ ( ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ،ﺜﻡ ﺃﻭﺠﺩ
.30..ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺭﺘﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ .
)ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭل ( ،ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ،ﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ . n=133 (1
n=154 (2
5-5-5-5-5-5-5-5-5-5 (1 n=186 (3
3-3-3-3-3-3-4-4-4-4 (2 n=294 (4
1-2-3-4-5-6-7-8-9-10 (3
.26.
10-9-8-7-6-5-4-3-2-1 (4
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ
1-1-2-2-3-3-4-4-5-5 (5
xi 0,1 0,2 0,3 0,4 0,5 0,6 0,7 0,8
.31..ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ
yi 11 16 8 12 7 9 15 1
ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ .
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ M eﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﻴﻥ Q1ﻭ Q2
7-9-3-9-8-6-3-1-2-8 (1
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﺴﻊ D1ﻭ D9
7-9-3-9-8-6-3-1-2-10 (2
.27
1-2-3-4-5-6-6-6-6-6 (3
ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ :
7-9-9-9-9-7-7-7-7-9 (4
xi 100 300 500 700 900 1100 1300
.16-12-19-11-14 (5
yi 10 25 12 31 18 29 14
361
ر:0 13
.32ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩﺓ
.36.ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻨﻘﺎﻁ )ﻤﻥ 0ﺇﻝﻰ (20ﻭﺴﺎﺌﻁﻬﺎ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ
(1ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻷﺴﺘﺎﺫ ﺃﻀﺎﻑ ﻨﻘﻁﺘﻴﻥ ﻝﻜل ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ .ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ
ﻭﺴﺎﺌﻁ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻴﺩﺓ .
ﻫﻭ25
.35.ﻓﻲ ﺤﺼﺔ ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ ،ﻴﻘﻭﻡ ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻗﺴﻡ ﺒﺎﻷﻓﻭﺍﺝ
ﺒﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺌﻴﺔ ﻭﺩﻝﻙ ﺒﻤﻌﺎﻴﺭﺓ 25mlﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻤﺽ .
-ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ .
ﺍﻝﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺎﻴﺭﺓ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻜل ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻤﻌﻁﺎﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
362
13 ر:0
ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻤﺔ 147 150 151 152 155 160 161 165 .41.ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺃﻓﺭﺍﺩ ﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺴﻨﻬﻡ
)(cm
1 1 2 4 6 4 3 2 ا ا ا
ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ا
(1ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ .
(2ﻝﻜل ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺃﺤﺴﺏ :
ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁﺔ
ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ
(3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل
Q1 − 3 ( Q3 − Q1 ) ; Q3 + 3 ( Q3 − Q1 )؟ ا !:
2 2
.44.ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻜﺒﻴﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ (1ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻝﻬﺩﺍ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ .
ﻭﺍﻝﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻴﻁ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﻴﻥ Q1و Q3
ﻨﺭﻴﺩ ﺘﻌﻴﻥ ﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺠﻭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ.
ﻨﺄﺨﺫ 50ﻜﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ; .42.ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻤﺜل ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺴﺒﻭﻋﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
ﻨﻀﻊ 0ﺇﺫﺍ ﺴﺤﺒﻨﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ 1ﺇﺫﺍ ﺴﺤﺒﻨﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻓﺭﺩ ﺃﻤﺎﻡ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻋﻤﺭﻩ .
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ m1ﻝﻠﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻝﻠﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﺒـ s1 ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ 14,6 15,9 23,3
ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ 1 2 3 4 5 (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻝﻠﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﻤﺎﻡ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻸﺸﺨﺎﺹ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻋﻤﺭﻫﻡ ﻴﺘﺭﺍﻭﺡ ﺒﻴﻥ 2ﻭ 17ﺴﻨﺔ
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ
ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ
16 20 18 16 25 (2ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻝﻠﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺴﺒﻭﻋﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ
ﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻔﺭﺩ ﺃﻤﺎﻡ ﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻝﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ .
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 .43.ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ ﻗﺎﻤﺔ 30ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻤﻥ ﻗﺴﻡ
15 22 21 21 22 17 11 21 21 15
)ﺒﺎﻝﺴﻨﺘﻴﻤﺘﺭ(
(3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ miﻭ siﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ
Q1ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻷﻭل
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ . i
(4ﺃﺤﺴﺏ Mﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ miﻭ Sﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ Q3ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻲ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ . Si D1ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﻭل
(5ﻨﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﻋﺸﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ،ﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ D9ﻴﻤﺜل ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﺴﻊ
ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ M ′ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻭﺴﻁ ﻝﻠﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻓﻲ ﻜل
ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ .
ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ S ′ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﻠﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻜﻠﻬﺎ
(6ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ Mﻭ M ′ﺜﻡ ﺒﻴﻥ Sﻭ S ′ﻋﻠل. ﻗﺴﻡ ﺁﺨﺭ ﻤﻭﺯﻉ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﺎﻤﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
363
ر:0 13
.46ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻷﻴﻜﺴﺎل ) (Excelﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ .45.ﺴﺠﻠﺕ ﻤﺼﺎﻝﺢ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻴﺩ ﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﺎﻝﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻬﺎﺘﻔﻴﺔ
ﺃﻭﺯﺍﻥ ﻭﻁﻭل ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻤﺭﺍﻫﻘﻴﻥ . )ﺒﺎﻝﺜﻭﺍﻨﻲ( ﻝﻤﺸﺘﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻤﺩﺓ ﺃﺴﺒﻭﻉ ،ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ :
ﺍﻝﻭﺯﻥ)xi (Kg 52 57 58 59 60 61 62 64 65 66 -181-210-6-57-3-93-134-67-224-37-68
ﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ 1 2 1 1 7 5 3 7 3 5 -258-28-7-39-101-20-78-28-69-96-77
-111-12-118-88-87-12-89-45-32-9-1-123
)(Cm
ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻤﺔ
ﻝﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺯﻥ ﻭ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻤﺔ ﺒﺘﺩﺒﺩﺏ (1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ،ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
[[90,120
38 )=Moyenne (A2:A36
[[120, 240
39
40 )=Eartype (A2:A36
(5ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ،ﺍﻝﺘﺒﻴﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ
ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ.
ﺃﻨﻘل ﺩﺴﺘﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B2ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻷﺴﻔل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ Bﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
(6ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﻨﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﻝﻜﻥ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﻠﻨﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺒﺩﺒﺔ ﻝﻸﻭﺯﺍﻥ.
ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ؟
364
13 ر:0
.48 .ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﺤﺼﺎﺌﻴﺔ : (2ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺨﻼﻴﺎ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻗﺭﺍﺀﺓ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﻐﺭﻯ ،
ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﻴﻥ Q1ﻭ Q 2ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﺭﻯ ﻝﻠﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ
xi [[ 0,8[ [8,12[ [12, 20[ [ 20,30 ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺒﺩﺒﺔ.
ni 7 16 10 17 (3ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻨﺎﺕ Dﻭ Eﻝﻠﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻌﻤل ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ
ﻝﻠﻘﺎﻤﺔ.
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩ.
(4ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﺒﺩﺒﺘﻴﻥ ﺜﻡ ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ
(2ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ Cﺍﻝﺘﻜﺭﺍﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺼﺎﻋﺩﺓ.
ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ.
(3ﻝﺘﻜﻥ fﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﺜﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻲ Cﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ
.47 .
) f ( xﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . x
ﺸﺎﺭﻙ 5000ﻤﺘﺭﺸﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻤﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﻀﻴﻔﺔ
(4ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ] u ∈ [ 0,1ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﻌﻴﺔ ) Q (uﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﻥ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ،ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩﻻﺕ
ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺔ xﺤﻴﺙ ، f ( x ) = uﻋﻴﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺓ ) Q (u
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺭ ﺸﺢ:
ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ . u
ا:=#ل ;:د ا783"#
(5ﺃﺭﺴﻡ ﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﻝﺔ . Q [[ 0, 2 198
365
14
ﺍﻟﻜﻔﺎﺀﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ
ﻭﺼﻑ ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ
ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻤﻨﺘﻪ.
ﻨﻤﺫﺠﺔ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻘﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل.
ﻤﺤﺎﻜﺎﺓ ﺘﺠﺎﺭﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺒﺴﻴﻁﺔ ﻭ ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ.
ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺨﻭﺍﺹ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻓﻲ ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ
ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﻜﺒﺔ.
ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ.
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ،ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ.
367
ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ 14
ﺘﻬﺩﻑ ﺍﻷﻨﺸﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﻬﻴﺩ ﻝﻨﻅﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺼﺎﺩﻓﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻷﻭل ﻤﺭﺓ .
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺃﻭل
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﻨﺭﻤﻲ Pﻤﺭﺓ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺴﺘﺔ ﺃﻭﺠﻪ ،ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺍﻝﻰ 6
ﻭ ﻨﻬﺘﻡ ﺒﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻭﺴﺎﺌﻁ .
ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ fnﻝﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 6ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل nﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ mnﻝـ nﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ
ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ) nﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻅﻬﻭﺭﺍ ( ) ( n ≤ p
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ - :ﺍﻝﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺠﻤﺎﻋﻴﺎ
ﻜل ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ 30ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻴﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ .
ﻴﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ .
ﺘﻭﻀﻊ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ) ﻝﻜل ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ ( ﻓﻲ ﺠﺩﻭل ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻙ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ) nﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ 30
ﺜﻡ 60ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ .....ﺤﺘﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﺍﻷﺨﻴﺭ (
N 30 60 90 .............
ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 6
ﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 6 fn
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻝﻸﺭﻗﺎﻡ mn
(n, ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻨﻘﻁ ) mn ، ( n ,ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟ ﻨﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) fn
ﻴﺸﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺇﻝﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ) ( fnﺘﺅﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻗﺭﻴﺏ ﻤﻥ ) 0,17ﺘﻭﺍﺯﻥ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ ﻴﺅﻜﺩ ﺃﻥ
1 1
) ( ≃ 0,17 ﻝﻠﺭﻗﻡ 6ﺤﻅﺎ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺴﺘﺔ ﺤﻅﻭﻅ ﻝﻠﻅﻬﻭﺭ ( ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 6ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
6 6
ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ :ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﻤﺠﺩﻭل Excel
ﺃﺩﺨل ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﻥ A1ﺇﻝﻰ A2500ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻁﻠﺒﻴﺔ ) = ENT(ALEA( )*6+1ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﻠﻴﺔ B1
ﺜﻡ ﺍﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺯﺍﻝﻕ ﺇﻝﻰ B2500ﻨﺤﺎﻜﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ) 2500ﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻝﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ (
ﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ) 6ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻨﺔ (C1ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻁﻠﺒﻴﺔ = NB.SI($B$1:B1;6)/A1ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻝﻰ C2500 ﻨﺤﺴﺏ fn
] ( n ,ﺴﺤﺎﺒﺔ ﻨﻘﻁ [ ،ﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
ﻨﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) fn
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻁﻠﺒﻴﺔ ) = MOYENNE($B$1:B1ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻝﻰ D2500 ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻨﺔ D1ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ mn
ﻤﺜل ﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺎ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) . ( n , mnﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻼﺤﻅ ؟
ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﺒﺎﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻤﻭﺩ Eﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻁﻠﺒﻴﺔ ) = VAR.P($B$1:B1ﺜﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻝﻰ E2500
ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺴﺔ F9ﻜﺭﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺎﻜﺎﺓ ﻭ ﻻﺤﻅ
368
14 ﺃﻨﺸﻁﺔ
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻥ
ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ xi 1 2 3 4 5 6 ﻋﻨﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 6
1 1 1 1 1 1 ﻓﺈﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻫﻲ } E = { 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6
ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ) P( x i
6 6 6 6 6 6 -ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻤﻸ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
ﻭ ﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺃﻨﻨﺎ ﻋﺭﻓﻨﺎ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ) ﻜل ﺭﻗﻡ ﻝﻪ ﺤﻅ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺴﺘﺔ ﻝﻠﻅﻬﻭﺭ (
ﻨﺸﺎﻁ ﺜﺎﻝﺙ
ﻗﻭﺍﻋﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ :ﻴﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ 20ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭ ﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ) Nﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ (15ﺜﻡ ﻴﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﺎﺌﺘﻲ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻤﺎ .
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺴﺘﻘﺭ ﺍﻝﺴﻬﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻝﻠﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺜﻼﺜﻴﻥ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻤﻭﺍﺴﺎﺓ ﻝﻪ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ ﻻ ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺸﻲﺀ ).ﺃﻱ ﻴﺨﺴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﻴﻥ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺩﻓﻌﻬﺎ(
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺘﻤل ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ . G
-ﻭﻀﺢ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ } E = { 1 , 2 , 3 , ……, 15ﻭ ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل
-2ﺍﺸﺭﺡ ﻝﻤﺎﺫﺍ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﻡ Gﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ ) + 180 , + 10 , - 20 :ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ) (-20ﺃﻱ ﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ 20ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﹰﺍ(
-3ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ " * :ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ " – 20ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ) ( G = - 20
* " ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ " 10ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ) ( G = 10
* " ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ " 180ﻨﻜﺘﺏ ) ( G = 180
ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ) ( - 20ﺃﻱ ) P(G = - 20
369
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 14
-1ﻤﺼﻁﻠﺤﺎﺕ
ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﻜل ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺘﻭﻗﻊ ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺘﻬﺎ ﺭﻏﻡ ﻤﻌﺭﻓﺔ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ .
* ﻓﻲ ﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ،ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺘﺴﻤﻰ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ . Ω
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Aﺠﺯﺀﹰﺍ ﻤﻥ ، Ωﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺃﻥ Aﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ .
ﺇﺫﺍ ﺍﺤﺘﻭﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺌﻴﺔ Aﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻨﺼﺭ ﻭﺤﻴﺩ ﻓﺈﻨﻬﺎ ﺘﺩﻋﻰ ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺔ .
Ωﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺍﻷﻜﻴﺩﺓ ﻭ ∅ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻠﺔ ∅) .ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻝﻲ (
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﻤﺎ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻬﺎ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻬﺎ ﺒـ Aﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻭﻱ ﻜل ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ Ωﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﺍ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ A
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ .ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ A ∩ Bﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " Aﻭ " Bﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻌﻨﺎﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺘﺭﻜﺔ ﺒﻴﻥ Aﻭ B
* ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ A ∩ Bﺨﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺃﻱ ∅ = A ∩ Bﻨﻘﻭل ﻋﻨﺩﺌﺫ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻼﺌﻤﺘﻴﻥ .
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒـ A ∪ Bﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " Aﺃﻭ " Bﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺤﻭﻱ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ Aﻭ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ Bﺃﻴﻀﺎ .
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺴﺘﺔ ﺃﻭﺠﻪ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ . 6ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻤﻠﺔ ﻫﻲ Ω={ 1,2,3,4,5,6 } :
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ": Aﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ".ﺃﻱ } A={ 2,4,6
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ": Bﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ". 3ﺃﻱ } B={ 3,4,5,6
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ Aﻭ Bﻫﻤﺎ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺘﺎﻥ ﺠﺯﺌﻴﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ . Ω
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ": Cﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ". 6ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺃﻭﻝﻴﺔ ﻷﻥ } C={ 6
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ A ∩ Bﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ":ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ". 3ﺃﻱ } A ∩ B ={ 4,6
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ A ∪ Bﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ":ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ". 3ﺃﻱ } A ∪ B ={ 2,3,4,5,6
-2ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل
ﺘﻌﺭﻴﻑ :ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل Pﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﻫﻭ ﺇﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻜل ﻤﺨﺭﺝ eiﺒﻌﺩﺩ ﻤﻭﺠﺏ piﻤﻊ } i ∈{ 1,2,3,…,n
p1 + p 2 + p 3 + ..... + pn = 1 ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ
'0 1(2 34$ا -. /إر '( )*+إ$%ت Ωو *'$ن ا6ل Ω 8 P
ﻴﺴﻤﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ piﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺘﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﺝ ei
:1أن آ د piﻤﻭﺠﺏ ﻓﻬﻭ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ 1ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 0 ≤ pi ≤ 1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل 1 iا n
:2ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﻴﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻪ ﺒـ ) P(Aﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ . A
370
14 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺤــل:
r -1أس ا/
p 4 = p 2 + 2r ، p3 = p 2 + r ، p 2 = p1 + r 2
p 2 − r + p 2 + p 2 + r + p 2 + 2r = 1 p1 + p 2 + p 3 + p 4 = 1و 42
1 − 4p 2 1
=r = و 7 أي أن 4p 2 + 2r = 1
2 10
4 3 1 1 1
= p 4 = p 2 + 2r = p3 = p 2 + rو و = p1 = −
10 10 5 10 10
A -2اد;<= ": /%ر -د ,9دي ".
2
= )p(A ?> أن p(A) = p1 + p3إذن
5
371
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 14
C-2ﻴﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻤﻥ ﺨﻼل ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﻨﺼﻭﺹ ﻭﺼﻑ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻤﺜل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻘﺎل " ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ
ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ " " ،ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ " " ،ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻨﻔﺭﻕ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻤﺱ " .....
1
) ﻜل ﻭﺠﻪ ﻝﻪ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺤﻅ ﻝﻠﻅﻬﻭﺭ ( ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺠﻪ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ
6
1 1
ﺃﻴﻀﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ " ﻅﻬﺭ" ﻫﻭ ﺃﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ " ﻭﺠﻪ " ﻫﻭ
2 2
1
ﻭﻫﻜﺫﺍ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ،ﻓﻠﻭ ﻓﺭﻀﻨﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻴﺤﻭﻱ nﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻴﺔ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻫﻭ
n
-2ﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ :
+ /( 9وي ا'(ل
1
= pi آ,C Dج } 4 { eiا(ل H( pi
n
1
× P(A) = m إذا آ? Iاد;+ A /%ي ,J2- mا ;ن ا(< )H( P(A
n
أي أن
د A 1E-
= )P(A
د Ω 1E-
و ∅) = 0 <D$
∅(p ﻓﺈﻥ Ω) = 1
p(Ω أن p1 + p 2 + p 3 + ..... + pn = 1
:
372
14 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 3
ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ": Aﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﻬﺭﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻭﺠﻪ ) ".ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻜﺎﻥ ( ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﻝﻠﻅﻬﺭ
ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ Pﻭ ﻝﻠﻭﺠﻪ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ F
-1ﺃﻨﺸﺊ ﻤﺨﻁﻁﺎ ﻴﻭﻀﺢ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ .
-2ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ . A
P ﺤــل:
P
F - -1ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 8ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ 3ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻤﻼﺌﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ A
P P ﻭ ﻫﻲ PPF - PFP – FPP
F F
P P
F -2ﺒﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ A
F
P
F
ا 1 F 3 د ا @Gت ا
G8 /دA c
اQو = )P(A ﺃﻱ ﻫﻭ :
ا 1 8 د ا @Gت ا -%
ا $b ا 1
ا b b
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 4
'G.ي -Eوق 5آ.1ت 1 *1إ 1I$ @ 5ق - )-ا 8 JG?$ . H8ا '6ا 3آ.1ت Kر3ع
] أي آ <31$ GNا .1%ا ? 'Gإ ا J216 (?$ . [ H%اQر*م ا )8G2 6ا 1%ات ا ?'G
) 3 /* 8 SG$أر*م ?1D Yورة 'VW I86Xذة . ( 1,2,3,4,5
-1ه' د ا 'Aا ]/ا -%؟ ) أي د ا @Gت ا ( -%
2 4 ؟ ( 'Aا]/ ا ) -% ا @Gت ا د ه' ، ?'G $ -2ا 1(6ه a4ا ّ1ة %دون إر3ع ا .1%ا
3 5 1 )
+ :ه a4ا ّ1ة '%2ن ا 'Aا ]/ذات 3أر*م ( -b -b I86X
-ه' إ6ل ا Gد ": A cا .1%ا $bا ? G2 'Gا ". 4 ]*1
ﺤــل:
3 $V 2 $V 1 $V
-1ﻝﺘﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻨﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻤﻸ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻨﺎﺕ
) 3ﺨﺎﻨﺎﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ 3 ، 2 ، 1ﻨﻤﻸﻫﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺏ (
ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 5ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺨﺎﻨﺔ 1ﻤﻥ ﺍﺠل ﻜل ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 5ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻠﺨﺎﻨﺔ )2ﺍﻯ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 25ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ
ﻝﻠﺨﺎﻨﺘﻴﻥ 1ﻭ ( 2ﻭﻤﻥ ﺍﺠل ﻜل ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ 25ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 5ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻠﺨﺎﻨﺔ.3
ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 5 × 5 × 5ﻤﺨﺭﺠﺎ ﻤﻤﻜﻨﺎ
* -2ﺒﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ 3 × 4 × 5ﻤﺨﺭﺝ ﻤﻤﻜﻥ
) ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﻻ ﺘﺭﺠﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻨﺔ 1ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺘﻜﺭﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻨﺘﻴﻥ (3 ، 2ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ...
* ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﻴﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻭﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 4ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺨﺎﻨﺔ 2ﻓﻴﺒﻘﻰ ﺇﺫﻥ 4ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻠﺨﺎﻨﺔ 1ﻭ ﻝﻜل ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ 3
ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻠﺨﺎﻨﺔ . 3
12 1
= )P(A = ﺃﻱ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻼﺌﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﻫﻭ 4 × 3ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
60 5
373
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 14
ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Ωﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﻤﻠﺔ ) ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ( ﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ .،ﻨﺯﻭﺩ Ωﺒﺎﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل . P
-1ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠل ﻜل ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﻓﺈﻥ 0 ≤ P(A) ≤ 1
P(∅) = 0 P(Ω) = 1 -2ﻭ
)P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B) − P(A ∩ B -3ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ ﻜﻴﻔﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﺈﻥ :
)P(A ∪ B) = P(A) + P(B -4ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ Aﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺘﻼﺌﻤﺘﻴﻥ ) ∅ = ( A ∩ Bﻓﺈﻥ
P(A) = 1 − P(A) -5ﺤﻴﺙ Aﺍﻝﺤﺎﺜﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ A
-6ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﺠﺯﺀﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ( A ⊂ B ) Bﻓﺈﻥ )P(A) ≤ P(B
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻋﻨﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﻭﺠﻬﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ . 6
":Bا 'SGل 8ر*] ;Dـ ". 3 ، ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ":Aﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ".
} A∩B = { 6 ، A ∪ B = { 2,3,4,6 } ، } B = { 3,6 } ، A = { 2,4,6
2 1 1 1
= )P(A ∪ B = P(A) + P(B) − P(A ∩ B) = + −
3 2 3 6
1
A } = { 1,3,5 )P(A) = = 1 − P(A ": Aﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ".
2
2ر;.
} Ω = {e1 , e2 ,e 3 , .....,en '( Ω %6ا e/6-ا '0 1(6 -%ا 16$ ) /ه a4ا e/6-أادا ( AA
) p i = P(ei P %ا p i g1 g1$ ، Ω 8 @6ﻝﻼﺤﺘﻤﺎل
n
ﺃﻤل ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ Eﺤﻴﺙ E = ∑ ei p i
i=1
n
ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ Vﺤﻴﺙ V = ∑ (ei - E)2 p i
i =1
374
14 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 5
ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ 100.000ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 100.000ﻤﻭﻀﻭﻋﺔ ﺩﺍﺨل ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ .
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎ ) . xﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻻ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﻔﺭﻴﻕ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺱ (
-ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺘﻴﻥ ؟
x ": Bﻝﻴﺱ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 3ﺃﻭ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ " 5 x ": Aﻝﻴﺱ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ". 3
ﺤــل:
-1ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻜﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺸﺎﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ 100.000ﻜﺭﻴﺔ .ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻴﺔ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻓﺭﻀﺎ ) ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺹ
ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﻤﻊ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﻴﻴﺯ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺱ ( ﺇﺫﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻬﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺤﻅ ﻝﻠﻅﻬﻭﺭ .
ﻝﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) P(Aﻴﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﺘﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﻜل ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻝﻴﺴﺕ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ 100.000ﻜﺭﻴﺔ
ﻭﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻷﻓﻀل ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ) P(Aﻤﻊ Aﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﻜﺴﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Aﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ x ": Aﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ". 3
99999
* ﺃﻭل ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻤﻁﻠﻭﺏ ﻫﻭ 3ﻭ ﺁﺨﺭ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻫﻭ 99999ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ 3ﻫﻭ = 33333
3
33333
= ) P(Aﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ )P(A) = 1 - P(A ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
100000
x ":ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ". 15 ﺃﻱ B -2ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ x ":ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ 3ﻭ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ ". 5
) ﻨﻘﺒل ﺃﻥ ﻜل ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻤﺸﺘﺭﻙ ﻝﻌﺩﺩﻴﻥ ﺃﻭﻝﻴﻴﻥ ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ aﻭ bﻫﻭ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝﺠﺩﺍﺀﻫﻤﺎ ( ab
3333 6666 99990
P(B) = 1 - P(B) = 1 -ﺃﻱ ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ * ﻋﺩﺩ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺎﺕ 15ﻫﻭ = 6666
50000 100000 15
375
ﺍﻝﺩﺭﺱ 14
ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ :
ﻤﺜﺎل :ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ 3ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ " ﻭﺠﻪ = " ، " Fﻅﻬﺭ = " P
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﻫﻲ } E = { PPP,PPF,PFP,PFF,FPP,FPF,FFP,FFF
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻅﻬﺭ ) ﻭﺠﻪ ( Fﻭ ﻴﺨﺴﺭ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻅﻬﺭ ) ﻅﻬﺭ ( P
Ωا (' ا '0 1(6 80ا1l6 ?$ . /ا '0ا /آ دا دΩ 8 +1 . :1;.12
*'$ن إ6ل '0 1l6ا X /ه' ا ا ا ( X ]* '( ) I 8 +1و ا % m+12 6 :2;.12
* I x iا د ) p(X=x i
n :3;.12
ا Qا X 1l68 2n.1ه' ا د )E(X) = ∑ x i pi o E(X
i =1
n
ا X 1l68 .6ه' ا د V(X) = ∑ (xi − E(X))2 pi
i =1
376
14 ﻁﺭﺍﺌﻕ
ﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﺤﻠﻭل 9
ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ 4 ،ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ 10ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻻ ﻨﻤﻴﺯ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻠﻤﺱ .
14 14
ﺘﹸﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻓﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺤﺏ ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺍ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ،
ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺩﻨﺎﻨﻴﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﻋﺸﺭﺓ ﺩﻨﺎﻨﻴﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ .
13 ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ Xﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺘﻤل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ
7 15
2 -2-ﻋﺭﻑ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ X -1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ X
1 -4-ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ X -3ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ X
ﺤــل:
-1ﻗﻴﻡ Xﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻫﻲ 10 ، 3 ، 1 :
-2ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ " " X=1ﻫﻲ " ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ " ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ 10ﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻜل ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ 17
10
= )
+ /( ) P(X = 1وي ا(ل ( ﻭﻤﻨﻪ
17
3 4
= )P(X = 10 = ) P(X = 3و WX27ا: N? /U,V
17 17
Xi 1 3 10 ﺘﺠﻤﻊ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ :
10 4 3
) P(X = X i
17 17 17
10 4 3 52
= ) E(Xو b.ه4ا ا د jN'6ا + q1ا 8 = × + 3 × + 10 ≃ 3, 06 -3
17 17 17 17
2
10 4 3 52 3178
= V(X) = 1 × + 32 × + 102 × −
2
-4
17 17 17 17 289
3178
= )σ (X و ≃ 3, 32 : 7
17
377
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 14
-4ﻨﻘﺒل ﺃﻥ :
-5ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ": Mﻜل ﺴﻠﺔ ﺘﺤﻭﻱ ﺒﻴﻀﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ".
2n -1
. P(M) = 1 - 3ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ) P(Mﻝﻤﺎ ﻴﺅﻭل nﺍﻝﻰ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺎ ﻻ ﻨﻬﺎﻴﺔ ؟ -ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ :
3n
378
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﻤﻭﺠﻬﺔ 14
]?A$ا ? إ @( 4nز -و G$آ و* A u( 6و 6 66 6G? B
و Kر3ع -Eوق 'G.ي آ.1ت *1آ : 8.
4n ………. 3 2 1
ه-ك إذن ) 31X ( 4n
2
-1ا1sح ذا mAG2ا Gدg86?. F cم Aء Aﻭ .Bا e6-6Nأن x n ≤ p
-3ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻼﺌﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ Fﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ 2n - 2 ; ..... ; n + 1 ; nﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ aﻋﻠﻰ
-ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ n ≤ a ≤ 3n + 1ﺜﻡ ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ aﻤﺴﺎﻭﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ
15n − 7
= xn -4ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ :
16n
-6ﺇﻋﻁ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﺩﻭﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻰ 10-2ﻝﻠﻌﺩﺩ pﺜﻡ ﻗﺎﺭﻥ ﻤﻊ ﻤﺤﺎﻜﺎﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ .
379
14 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ : 1
ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ 90ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﻴﺙ :
ﺃﻝﻭﺍﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ :ﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ ،ﺍﻷﺴﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺒﻴﺽ .
30ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ .
ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﻌﺎ ﻫﻭ 60ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل
ﻴﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﺸﺨﺹ ﻓﻲ ﻝﻌﺒﺘﻴﻥ ﻭ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺒﺩﺀ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻴﺔ ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﻴﺨﻴﺭ ﺒﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻋﺩﺘﻴﻥ :
ا 8ا $b ا 8اQو
JG?.ا
Jآ .1واة و ?)$' J JG?.ا
Jآ .1واة و ?)$' J
و ا Aة ا 6Xرة q1.ا
: J و ا Aة ا 6Xرة q1.ا
: J
آ.1 آ.1 آ.1 آ.1 آ.1 آ.1
1اء Dء 'Nداء 1اء Dء 'Nداء
ا Aة 100 ا Aة 100
100DA 0 DA 0 DA 0 DA
C DA A DA
ا Aة 100 100 ا Aة
0 DA 0 DA 100DA 0 DA
D DA DA B
ﺍﻝﺤل :
ﻋﻤﻭﻤﺎ ﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺎﺭﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ Aﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ D
ﺒﺘﻭﻅﻴﻑ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻴﺘﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻹﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ !
ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﻭﺯ ) P(N) , P(Rو ) P(Bﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ،ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻭ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ .
ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ :
2 1
ﻭ P(R) + P(N) + P(B) = 1 ≥ )P(R) + P(N ≥ ) P(Rﻭ
3 3
8 ?-ا $b 8 ?-اQو
? y1 ,Oﻭ y 2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﻴﻥ ? x1 ,Oﻭ x 2ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﻴﻥ
ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺘﻴﻥ Cﻭ Dﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺘﻴﻥ Aﻭ Bﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ
200 100
≥ ))E(y1 ) = 100(P(R) + P(N ≥ )E(x1 ) = 100 × P(R
3 3
))E(y 2 ) = 100(P(B) + P(N )E(x 2 ) = 100 × P(B
1 2 )P(B) = 1 − (P(R) + P(N
= P(B) + P(N) = 1 − P(R) ≤ 1 −
3 3 1 2
200 P(B) ≤ 1 −ﺃﻱ ﺃﻥ ≤ )P(B
≤ ) E(y 2 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ 3 3
3 100
≤ ) E(x 2 ﻭ ﻤﻨﻪ
3
ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ Dﺃﻓﻀل ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻘﺎﻋﺩﺓ Aﺃﻓﻀل
380
14 ﻤﺴﺎﺌل ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ
ﻤﺴﺄﻝﺔ ﻤﺤﻠﻭﻝﺔ : 2
ﻓﻲ ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ) ﻤﺘﻭﺍﺯﻨﺔ ( ،ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ " ﻭﺠﻪ " ﻓﺴﻴﺭﺒﺢ
2ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺘﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻤﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ " ﻭﺠﻪ " ﻓﺴﻴﺭﺒﺢ
22ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭ ﺘﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﻓﺈﻨﻪ ﻴﻌﻴﺩ ﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻭﺩ ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ ....
-1ﻨﻘﺩﻡ ﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺇﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﻴﻥ :
ﺭﺒﺢ 10.000.000ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ
ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺎﺭﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ) ﺃﻱ ﺭﺒﺢ 2nﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﺒﻌﺩ nﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻀﺭﻭﺭﻴﺔ ﻝﻠﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ " ﻭﺠﻪ " (
-ﺃﻱ ﺍﻻﻗﺘﺭﺍﺤﻴﻥ ﺃﻓﻀل ﻝﻼﻋﺏ ؟
-2ﻨﻘﺘﺭﺡ ﺍﻵﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﻴﺩﻓﻊ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻤﺒﻠﻐﺎ ﻤﺎﻝﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﺩﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ :
ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ " ﻅﻬﺭ " ﻓﺈﻥ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﻤﺜل ﻤﺎ ﺩﻓﻊ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﺨﺴﺭ ﻤﺎ ﺩﻓﻊ .
ﻴﺸﺎﺭﻙ ﻻﻋﺏ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :ﻴﺩﻓﻊ 10ﺩﻨﺎﻨﻴﺭ ﻭ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ " ﻅﻬﺭ " ﺘﻭﻗﻑ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﺩﻓﻊ 20ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ
ﻭ ﺃﻋﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﺈﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ " ﻅﻬﺭ " ﺘﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺏ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﺩﻓﻊ 40ﺩﻴﻨﺎﺭﺍ ﻭ ﺃﻋﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺏ ﻭ ﻫﻜﺫﺍ...
) ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﺒﺢ ﺘﻭﻗﻑ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺏ ﻭ ﺇﻻ ﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﺍﻝﺩﻓﻊ ﻭ ﺃﻋﺎﺩ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺏ (
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Yﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻼﺯﻤﺔ ﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﻝﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ
ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ) P( Y = nﻴﺌﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ 0ﻋﻨﺩﻤﺎ ﻴﺌﻭل nﺇﻝﻰ∞ +
ﻫل ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺃﻜﻴﺩ ) ﻨﻅﺭﻴﺎ /ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺎ ( ؟
ﺍﻝﺤـل :
-1ﻨﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ) E(Xﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ Xﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ .ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل :
381
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 14
382
14
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺤــل
383
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
14
384
14
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
385
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
14
ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻭﻋﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭ 4ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ،ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻤﻨﻪ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻭ ﻨﻬﺘﻡ ﺒﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﺤﻤﺭ
.ﺃﻱ ﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻲ ،ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﺎﺫﺝ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ ،ﺘﺭﺍﻩ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺎ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ؟
ﺃﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻲ ﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻴﻌﻨﻲ ﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺭﻓﺎﻕ ﻜل ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺒﻌﺩﺩ
ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭ ﺒﻴﻥ 0ﻭ . 1
ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻭﺍﻀﺢ ﺃ ،ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺘﺸﻤل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﻫﻤﺎ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻁﻬﻭﺭ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺃﻴﺔ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ
.ﻨﺭﻤﺯ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻤﺯ p 0إ $ا(ل -م [<;ر آ,ة (,اء و p1 ],7إ $ا(ل [<;ر آ,ة (,اء وا(ة .
اي - 4;Pا;ز^ ا
وي ;?Uن ا'(ل اول أي ا;2ذج اول ؟
ه ,J( Dا'cر 9ا;2ذ bا ?aو ا Ha؟
;? Rb,ذج ,be7 2P ، ,cd $-اء آة < fا;7 /7,NاN /Vول آ,ر? ا, k /7,Nة و (
2Oا;اfk ,+
;<gر آ,ة (,اء ،وذ Qأ
k Dbوي hi? I? 9 1000 >% 100 >% 10ا;ا,+ات 2- ,Mت آU Dس
اUت ا /%jaآ ه Vة 9اNول ا;ا
f10 0,6 0,4 0,2 0,1 0,3 0,8 0,3 0,2 0,4 0,2
f100 0,42 0,39 0,47 0,44 0,37 0,37 0,50 0,36 0,37 0,44
f1000 0,412 0,409 0,395 0,400 0,402 0,404 0,414 0,397 0,402 0,386
ﺃ( ﺃﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻜل ﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ fkو >b,+ذ. Q
-ﻤﺎﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻹﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺒﺩﻭ ﺃﻜﺜﺭ ﻤﻼﺀﻤﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺸﺎﻫﺩﺓ ؟
ﺏ( ﺍﺴﺘﺨﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺏ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﻼﺴل ﺒﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻹﻋﺩﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﻝﻨﺎﻓﺫﺓ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﺘﻌﻤل ﻝﻬﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻐﺭﺽ .
386
14 ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ
ﺤــل :
-1ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻤﻘﺎﺒل 4ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ،ﺇﺫﻥ ﻤﻨﺎﻝﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺃﻥ ﻋﺩﻡ ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻜﺜﺭ ﺤﻅﺎ
ﺃﻱ ﺍﻷﻜﺒﺭﺇﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻ .ﻭ ﻫﺫﺍ ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺒﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻷﻭل ﺫﻱ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﻝﻺﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ .
ﻏﻴﺭ ﺍ ،ﻫﺫﺍ ﻻ ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﻔﺼل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻴﻴﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻨﺠﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ . p 0 ≻ p1
ﻝﺩﻴﻨﺎ 0,3 ≺ f10 ≺ 0, 4ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻝﻴﺱ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻤﺎ ﻴﺴﻤﺢ ﻝﻨﺎ ﺒﺘﻔﻀﻴل ﺃﻱ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻤﺘﻴﻥ 0,3ﻭ 0,4ﻝﻼﺤﺘﻤﺎل ، p1ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻷﺨﺭﻯ .ﻓﺘﺭﺠﻴﺢ ﺃﺤﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺠﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻤﻜﻥ ﻝﺤﺩ ﺍﻵﻥ .
-1ﺘﺫﺒﺫﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﻴﻘل ﻜﻠﻤﺎ ﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ ،ﺇﺫ ﻴﺘﻀﺎﺀل ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻯ ﻤﻥ ، 0,700ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ ، 10ﺍﻝﻰ 0,028ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ ، 1000ﻤﺭﻭﺭﺍ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺩﻯ 0,140ﻝﻠﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ . 100
-2ﺘﻘﺎﺭﺏ ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ 100ﻤﻊ ﺘﻠﻙ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﻘﺎﺴﻬﺎ ، 1000ﻤﻘﺎﺭﻨﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ ﻓﻲ
ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺱ 10ﻭ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺱ . 100
-3ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺒل ﻨﻼﺤﻅ ﺘﻀﺎﺀل ﺍﻹﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﺼﻐﺭ 10ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻌﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻷﻜﺒﺭ
1000ﺃﻱ σf10 ≻ σf100 ≻ σf1000
ﺘﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﻅﺎﻫﺭ ،ﺒﺎﻹﻀﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻝﻰ ﻜﻭﻥ ، σf1000 = 0, 01ﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻤﻴﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻹﺴﺘﻘﺭﺍﺭﺤﻭل ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ
ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ f1000ﺤﻴﺙ ﻴﻤﻜﻥ ﻜﺘﺎﺒﺔ f1000 ≈ 0, 4
ﺨﻼﺼﺔ :
ﻨﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻷﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻼﺌﻤﺔ ﻝﻤﻌﻁﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ ﺃﻱ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻨﺘﺒﻨﺎﻩ ﻜﻨﻤﻭﺫﺝ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻲ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ .
387
ﺃﻋﻤﺎل ﺘﻁﺒﻴﻘﻴﺔ 14
-3ﺏ( ﺘﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﺎﻨﻴﺔ TI83+ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺏ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻤﻭﻀﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺸﺎﺸﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺘﻴﺔ :
ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁﺎﺕ ﺘﺒﺩﻱ ﺒﻭﻀﻭﺡ ﺴﻠﻭﻙ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﺘﺭﺍﺕ ،ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻨﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺒﻴﺭﺓ ) ( Loi des grand no,bresﻭ
ﺘﺅﻴﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻭﻗﺕ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﻭﺼﻠﻨﺎ ﺇﻝﻴﻬﺎ .
• ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺤﻴﺙ k = 10ﻨﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ :
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ
ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺤﻴﺙ k = 100ﻨﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ : •
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ
ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺴﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺤﻴﺙ k = 1000ﻨﺠﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﺒﺎﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺒﻌﺽ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺸﺭﺍﺕ : •
ﺍﻝﻭﺴﻁ ﺍﻝﺤﺴﺎﺒﻲ
ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ
388
14 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
أ دة ا رات أ
أم
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 7ﺇﻝﻰ 9ﺍﺨﺘﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺍﻝﺼﺤﻴﺢ
ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 6ﺃﺠﺏ ﺒﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﺃﻡ ﺨﺎﻁﺊ
ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ :
ﻤﻌﻠﻼ ﺇﺠﺎﺒﺘﻙ:
7ﻝﺘﻜﻥ B ، Aﻭ Cﺜﻼﺙ ﺤﺎﺩﺜﺎﺕ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ Ω
ﻨﺸﻜل ﻋﺩﺩﹰﺍ ﻤﻥ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺒﺎﺴﺘﻌﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ، 3 ، 2 ، 1
ﺤﻴﺙ p (C ) = 0, 7 ، p ( B) = 0, 4 ، p ( A) = 0,3
5،4
، p ( A ∪ B) = 0, 7 ، p ( A ∩ B) = 0, 2
ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ:
p ( A ∩ C ) = 0, 2 ، p ( B ∪ C ) = 0, 7
1ﻋﺩﺩ ﺒﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻫﻭ 0,48
p ( B ∩ C ) = ... (1
ﻋﺩﺩ ﻴﺸﻤل 3ﻫﻭ 0,78 2
)•( 0,5 ، )•( 0,4 )•( ، 0,35
3ﻋﺩﺩ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻫﻭ 0,52
p ( A ∪ C ) = ... (2
b ، a 4ﻭ cﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﺎل ] [ 0;1ﻭﻫﻲ ﺒﻬﺫﺍ
)•( 0,75 )•( ، 0,09 )•( ، 0,8
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﺤﺩﻭﺩ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﺒﻌﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻤﺘﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ ﺤﺴﺎﺒﻴﺔ.ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ
( )
p A ∩ C = ... (3
ﺤﻴﺙ:
)•( 1,02 )•( ، 0,5 )•( ، 0,3 p (1) = p(2) = a
ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 5ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 8 p (3) = p (4) = b
.5ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎ ﻭ ﻨﻌﻴﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ﺜﻡ p (5) = p (6) = c
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺃﺨﺭﻯ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎ.ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ 1
ﺇﺫﻥ = b
ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ . 6
ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ Xﻫﻭ 5ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﺸﺭ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ.
1
5,5 (4 ، 7 (3 ، 6 (2 ، 5 (1 =p ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺸﺭ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ "ﻭﺠﻪ" ﻫﻭ
1000
a 9ﻋﺩﺩ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ X ،ﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎﻝﻪ
6ﺇﻝﻴﻙ ﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻭ ﻴﺘﻀﻤﻥ ﺨﻁﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
ﻤﻭﺯﻉ ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ:
Eﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ nﺤﻴﺙ 1 ≤ n ≤ 30
x -2 1 3
ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻤﻥ . E
1 1
)P( X = x a " : Aﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ"
4 3
ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ aﻫﻲ : " : Bﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻑ ﻝـ" 3
5 7 1 ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) p ( B) ، p ( Aﻭ ) p ( A ∪ B
(3 (2 (1
12 12 2 ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ:
10ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺴﺕ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ 6
ﺒﻴﻥ 1ﻭ 30ﻴﻭﺠﺩ 15ﺭﻗﻡ ﺯﻭﺠﻲ ﻭ 10ﺃﻋﺩﺍﺩ ﻤﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ
(1ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ،ﻨﺴﺠل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﺘﺤﻤﻠﻪ 1 1
ﻝـ ، 3ﺇﺫﻥ = )، p ( B) = ، p ( A
ﻭ ﻨﻌﻴﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﺜﻡ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺠل ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎ. 3 2
ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ . = )p ( A ∪ B) = p ( A) + p ( B
5
6
(2ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﻻ ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ
ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻗﺒل ﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ.
ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ.
389
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 14
Aﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ ، p ( A ) = 0,3 11
18ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ 4 ،ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺨﻀﺭﺍﺀ
. p ( A ∩ B ) = 0, 2 ، p ( A ∪ B ) = 0, 7ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) . p ( B
ﻭ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺼﻔﺭﺍﺀ .ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ.
A 12ﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ ، p ( A) = 0, 45
ﻫل ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻨﺕ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ Ω
ﻫﻲ: p ( A ∪ B ) = 0,82 ، p ( B ) = 0,37
ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻭﺠﻪ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﻤﺭﻗﻡ ، 1ﻭﺠﻬﻴﻥ 19 13ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻭﺠﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ ، 6ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل
ﻤﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ ، 2ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ. 3 ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ ﺍﻝﺴﺕ ﻴﺤﻘﻕ ﺍﻝﻌﻼﻗﺔ:
(1ﻫل ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ؟ )p (1) = p(2) = 2 p (3) = 3 p (4) = p(5) = p (6
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻬﺎ ﺘﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻅﻬﻭﺭ ﻜل ﻭﺠﻪ.
20ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻨﺭﺩﻴﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﺃﺴﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﺃﺨﻀﺭ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ n ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻁﺭﻨﺞ.ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺒﻴﻥ B ، Aﻭ Cﻝﻬﻡ ﻨﻔﺱ
ﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ ﻝﻠﻨﺭﺩ ﺍﻷﺴﻭﺩ ﻭ ℓﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ ﺍﻷﺨﻀﺭ. ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﻭ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺒﻴﻥ Dﻭ Eﻝﻬﻤﺎ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل
Bﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ" ℓ ≤ 3 " : Aﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ." n ≤ 3 " : ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ Aﻝﻪ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﺤﻅﻭﻅ ﻝﻠﺭﺒﺢ
Cﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ n + ℓ < 3 " :ﺃﻭ " ℓ > 2 ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻼﻋﺏ . D
390
14 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
23ﺃﻋﺩ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺘﻤﺭﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻕ ﻭ ﻝﻜﻥ ﻻ ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ
(2ﻴﺴﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺔ ؟
ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ.
(3ﻴﺫﻫﺏ ﺒﺎﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻯ؟
24ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻋﻠﻰ 7ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﻨﻬﺎ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ
ﻼ ﻴﺴﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ.ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻠﺘﺤﻕ
(4ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻤ ﹰ
ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ 3 ، 2 ، 1ﻭ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ، 1
ﻤﺎﺸﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻼ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﺍﻡ؟
.4 ، 3 ، 2ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ
29ﻓﻲ ﻗﺴﻡ ﺒﻪ 45ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ 14ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻨﺎﺩﻱ
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺴﻴﻘﻰ ﻭ 10ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻓﻲ ﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ ﻭ 5ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻼ
": Aﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺴﻭﺩﺍﺀ"": B .ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ".
ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺩﻴﻴﻥ.ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻘﺴﻡ .ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل
" : Cﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺭﻗﻤﺎ ﻓﺭﺩﻴﺎ"
ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ (1 :ﻤﻥ ﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺴﻴﻘﻰ ؟
(2ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺩﻴﻴﻥ؟ (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ، A ∩ C ، A ∩ B :
. B ∪C ، A∪C ، A∪ B ، B ∩C
(3ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﻤﻥ ﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﺭﺴﻡ.ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ
ﻨﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺴﻴﻘﻰ؟ ) (
A 25ﻭ Bﺤﺎﺩﺜﺘﺎﻥ ﺤﻴﺙ، p A = 0, 44 :
30ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻨﻘﺩﻴﺔ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ .ﻨﺴﻤﻲ P ( )
p B = 0, 63ﻭ . p A ∪ B = 0,52ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) P ( A ∩ B ) (
ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺙ " ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﻬﺭ " ﻭ Fﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺙ " ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل 26ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﺃﻨﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻻﺩﺓ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﺤﻅﻭﻅ ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ
ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺠﻪ". ﺒﻨﺕ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻝﺩ .
(1ﻋﻠﻤﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﻅﻬﺭ ﻫﻭ (1ﺒﺎﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻭﻻﺩﺍﺕ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻌﺎﺌﻠﺔ
= )، p ( Pﺍﺤﺴﺏ = ) . p ( F
1 ﺒﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﻁﻔﺎل.
3
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﻋﺎﺌﻠﺔ ﺒﺜﻼﺙ ﺃﻁﻔﺎل ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻥ
(2ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻘﻁﻌﺔ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ
ﺒﻨﺘﻴﻥ.
ﺃ( ﻀﻊ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﹰﺎ ﺘﻭﻀﺢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝﻬﺫﻩ
27ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 4ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ 7 ، 5 ، 2 ، 1
ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ.
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺒﺤﻴﺙ ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ
ﺏ( ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل -:ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ " ﻭﺠﻪ" ؟
ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ.ﻨﻀﻊ Xﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ
-ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ "ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻭﺠﻪ " ؟
ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﻭ Yﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ
31ﻴﻨﻘﺴﻡ ﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﻨﺴﺎﻥ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺃﺭﺒﻊ ﻓﺼﻴﻼﺕ AB ، O ، B ، A
+ (1ﺃﻋﻁ ﻗﺎﺌﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ 16ﻝﻬﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﺘﺠﺭﺒﺔ.
ﻭﺇﻝﻰ ﻨﻭﻋﻴﻥ Rhﻭ . Rh −
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺤﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﻓﻲ ﻤﺠﺘﻤﻊ Pﻓﺼﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻝﺩﻡ ﻤﻭﺯﻋﺔ ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ، A : 20 0 0 :
." X + 3Y ≤ 3 " : B ." X = 5 " : A
AB :10 0 0 ، O : 45 0 0 ، B : 25 0 0
X + Y " : Dﻋﺩﺩ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ". ." X = 2Y " : C
ﻭ ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ R hésusﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ:
28ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ ﻴﻤﺜل ﺘﻭﺯﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﺎل ﺤﺴﺏ ﻭﺴﻴﻠﺔ ﺘﻨﻘﻠﻬﻡ
A B O AB ﺇﻝﻰ ﻋﻤﻠﻬﻡ ﻭ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻗﺎﻤﺘﻬﻡ
+
Rh 80 0 0 85 0 0 83 0 90 0 0
0
ﺤﺎﻓﻠﺔ ﺴﻴﺎﺭﺓ ﻤﺸﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﺍﻡ
Rh − 20 0 0 15 0 0 17 0 0 10 0 0
ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ 23 34 20
ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﺸﺨﺼﺎ ﻤﻥ . Pﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ
ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺔ 56 18 5
(2ﻤﻥ ﻓﺼﻴﻠﺔ . B (1ﻤﻥ ﻓﺼﻴﻠﺔ . O +
+ ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻤل ﻤﻥ ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻤﺅﺴﺴﺔ .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ:
(4ﻤﻥ Rhﻭ . O (3ﻤﻥ . Rh −
(1ﻴﺴﻜﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﺩﻴﻨﺔ ﻭﻴﻠﺘﺤﻕ ﺒﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ ﻤﺸﻴﹰﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺩﺍﻡ؟
391
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 14
(1ﺒﻨﺘﹰﺎ (2ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﻗﺎﺼﺭﹰﺍ (3 .ﺒﻨﺘﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻝﺩﺍ ﺭﺍﺸﺩﺍ. 32ﻓﻲ ﺤﻘﻴﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﻔﺭ ﻷﺤﻤﺩ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺴﺭﻭﺍﻻﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﺃﺒﻴﺽ
35ﻋﻠﺒﺔ ﺘﺘﻀﻤﻥ 50ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻭ ﻫﻲ ﺇﻤﺎ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻭﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﺃﺴﻭﺩ ،ﻤﻌﻁﻔﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﺃﺒﻴﺽ ﻭﺍﻵﺨﺭ ﺃﺴﻭﺩ ﻭﺜﻼﺜﺔ
ﺃﻭ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻭ ﺇﻤﺎ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜﻭﻻﻁﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺭﺒﻰ. ﺃﻗﻤﺼﺔ ،ﺍﺜﻨﺎﻥ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻵﺨﺭﺃﺴﻭﺩ.ﺃﺨﺫ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ
30 0ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜﻭﻻﻁﺔ ﻭ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ 10ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل 0
ﻻ ﻭ ﻤﻌﻁﻔﹰﺎ ﻭ ﻗﻤﻴﺼﹰﺎ.
ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ ﺴﺭﻭﺍ ﹰ
ﻭ 60 0 0ﻤﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻫﻲ ﺩﺍﺌﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل. (1ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺸﺠﺭﺓ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﺘﺴﻤﺢ ﻷﺤﻤﺩ
(1ﺃﻤﻠﺊ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
ﺒﺎﺭﺘﺩﺍﺀ ﺴﺭﻭﺍل ﻭ ﻤﻌﻁﻑ ﻭ ﻗﻤﻴﺹ.
ﺩﺍﺌﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ (2ﻝﺘﻜﻥ Aﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ":ﻝﺒﺎﺱ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﺃﺴﻭﺩ"
ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜﻭﻻﻁﺔ 1
= )P( A -ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ
ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺭﺒﻰ 12
ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ (3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﻤﺭﺘﺩﻴﺎ ﺴﺭﻭﺍﻻ ﻭﻤﻌﻁﻔﺎ
(2ﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻁﻔل ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﺒﺔ.ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﻤﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻴﻥ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ.
ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺤﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: (4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻻ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﺃﺤﻤﺩ ﻤﺭﺘﺩﻴﺎ ﻗﻤﻴﺼﺎ ﺃﺴﻭﺩﺍ ﻭ ﻻ
" Aﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل " ﻤﻌﻁﻔﺎ ﺃﺒﻴﻀﺎ.
" Bﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺭﺒﻰ " 33ﻓﻲ ﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﻘﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﻤﻭﺯﻋﺔ ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ:
" Cﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺭﺒﻰ " 72 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻓﻲ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ
" Dﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل ﺃﻭ ﺒﺎﻝﻤﺭﺒﻰ " 54 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻓﻲ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﻥ
(3ﺍﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻝﻁﻔل ﺤﺒﺔ ﺤﻠﻭﻯ ﻤﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﺍﻝﺸﻜل . 30 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺎﺓ.
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺒﺎﻝﺸﻜﻭﻻﻁﺔ. 7 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻤﻴﻨﺎﺕ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺙ.
36ﻨﻀﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻴﺱ ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ . T ، H ، M ، Aﻨﺴﺤﺏ 25 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ.
ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻭﻑ ﺍﻷﺭﺒﻌﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻭ ﻨﻀﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ 31 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻁ .
14 0 0ﻤﺴﺠﻠﻴﻥ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ.
ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ1 ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ2 ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ3 ﺍﻝﺤﺭﻑ4 (1ﻤﺜل ﻫﺫﻩ ﺍﻝﻭﻀﻌﻴﺔ ﺒﻤﺨﻁﻁ.
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻠﻤﺔ " ." MATH (2ﺘﺭﺴل ﺍﻝﺸﺭﻜﺔ ﻤﺭﺍﺴﻠﺔ ﻋﻥ ﻁﺭﻴﻕ ﺍﻝﺒﺭﻴﺩ ﻷﺤﺩ ﺯﺒﺎﺌﻨﻬﺎ
37ﺘﺴﻴﺭ ﻨﻤﻠﺔ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ Aﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Bﻓﻲ ﻜل ﻤﺭﺤﻠﺔ ﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ،ﻨﻀﻊ:
y ﺘﺘﺤﺭﻙ ﺒﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻴﻤﻴﻥ " Aﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ "
ﺃﻭ ﺒﻤﺭﺒﻊ ﻨﺤﻭ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﻤﺜﺎل " Hﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻜﻥ "
1
C B
ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻴﻤﻴﻥ ،ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻴﻤﻴﻥ ، " Vﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺎﺓ "
→
j
ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ،ﻴﻤﻴﻥ ،ﻴﻤﻴﻥ( ﻨﻤﺜﻠﻬﺎ ﺃ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻷﺤﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ، A ∪ H ، A ∩ V :
→ A0
i1 x
( )
A ∪V ، A ∪ H ، A ∩V ∩ H ، A ∪ H
ﺒـ . i, j , i, j , i, i
(2ﻋﺒﺭ ﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ H ، Aﻭ Vﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺤﺩﺍﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
(1ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻝﻠﻭﺼﻭل ﺇﻝﻰ . B
" Eﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻝﺴﻜﻥ
ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻜل ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ؟
ﻭﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺤﻴﺎﺓ ".
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﻤﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻤﻠﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . C
" Fﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺠل ﻓﻘﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ".
38ﻓﻲ ﺠﻴﺏ ﺴﻠﻴﻤﺔ ، 27 DAﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﻁﻊ ﺫﺍﺕ ، 1DA
" Gﺍﻝﻤﺅﻤﻥ ﻤﺴﺠل ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺘﺄﻤﻴﻥ ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻝﺴﻜﻥ ﻓﻘﻁ ".
ﻗﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ، 5DAﻗﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ 2 DAﻭ ﻗﻁﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ
ﻓﻲ ﺜﺎﻨﻭﻴﺔ ﻴﺒﻠﻎ ﺘﻌﺩﺍﺩ ﺘﻼﻤﻴﺫﻫﺎ ، 720ﻴﻭﺠﺩ230 34
ﺫﺍﺕ . 10 DA
ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﺫﻜﺭﺍ ﻤﻨﻬﻡ 49ﺭﺍﺸﺩﹰﺍ ،ﻭ 51ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﺓ ﻗﺎﺼﺭﺍ.ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ
ﺘﺄﺨﺫ ﺴﻠﻴﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺠﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﻗﻁﻌﺘﻴﻥ.
ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫﹰﺍ ﺒﻁﺭﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺔ .ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ:
392
14 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
(1ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﺠﺩﻭل ﻋﻴﻥ ﻜل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ.
X -1 0 1 2 3 4
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺘﻰ ﺘﺄﺨﺫ :
)P ( X = x
1 1 1 1
α α • ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل 5DA • ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗل . 10 DA
8 6 10 3
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ . α 39ﺴﺅﺍﻻﻥ ﻤﻁﺭﻭﺤﺎﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺴﺘﻔﺘﺎﺀ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺨﺏ ﺃﻥ ﻴﺨﺘﺎﺭ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) E ( Xﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝـ . X ﺍﻝﺠﻭﺍﺏ "ﻨﻌﻡ" ﺃﻭ "ﻻ" ﻝﻜﻼ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍﻝﻴﻥ.ﻨﺘﺎﺌﺞ ﺍﻻﺴﺘﻔﺘﺎﺀ ﻤﻭﺯﻋﺔ
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) V ( Xﺍﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﻝـ Xﻭ ) σ ( Xﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ . X ﻜﺎﻵﺘﻲ 65 0 0 :ﺃﺠﺎﺒﻭﺍ "ﻨﻌﻡ" ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻷﻭل.
44ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﻴﺄﺨﺫ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ 51 0 0ﺃﺠﺎﺒﻭﺍ "ﻨﻌﻡ" ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ.
7 ، 4 ، 3 ، - 8ﻭ9 46 0 0ﺃﺠﺎﺒﻭﺍ "ﻨﻌﻡ" ﻋﻥ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍﻝﻴﻥ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ.
ﻨﻀﻊ u2 = P ( X = 3) ، u1 = P ( X = −8 ) : ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﻨﺎﺨﺒﹰﺎ.ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﻨﺎﺨﺏ
393
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 14
ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺘﻴﻥ.
(1ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ، P ( X = 12 ) :
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ ' . Ω
) P ( X < 9 ) ، P ( X = 36ﻭ ) . P ( X ≥ 27
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝـ Y؟
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل . Y
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ X
(4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . Y
(5ﻋﻴﻥ ). P (Y ≤ 1 47ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ 3ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ،ﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﺼﻔﺭﺍﻭﻴﻥ
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ Ω '' ،ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻜل ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ. Xﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ
Zﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﻭ Yﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل
ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺘﻴﻥ. ﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﺼﻔﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ.
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ '' . Ω (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝـ . X
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝـ Z؟ (2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل . Z (3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
(4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . Z (4ﺃﺠﺏ ﻋﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻷﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺴﺎﺒﻘﺔ ﺒﺎﻝﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . Y
7 (5ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ Zﺤﻴﺙ ، Z = X + Yﻭﻝﻴﻜﻥ
(5ﻋﻴﻥ . P Z ≥
2
Nﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺍﺕ
49ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﻥ 1ﻭ X ،99ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ
ﺍﻝﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ.
ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺍﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ.
• ﻋﺒﺭ ﻋﻥ Zﺒﺩﻻﻝﺔ • . Nﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل . Z
(1ﺃﻤﻸ ﺍﻝﺠﺩﻭل ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻲ:
• ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) E ( Zﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ـ Zﻭ ) σ ( Zﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ . Z
ﺍﻵﺤﺎﺩ
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ــ
ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﺍﺕ
ﻨﻀﻊ ﻓﻲ ﻜﻴﺱ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ،1 48
0
ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﺘﺤﻤﻼﻥ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻤﻴﻥ 2ﻭﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﺘﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ.3
1
ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ: 1
2
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ )ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ(،
3
ﻨﻀﻊ Ωﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ X ،ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ
4
ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺭﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺘﻴﻥ.
5
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ ﻋﺩﺩ ﻋﻨﺎﺼﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ . Ω
6
(2ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝـ X؟
7
(3ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل . X
8
(4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺘﺒﺎﻴﻥ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
9
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل . X ﺍﻝﺠﺯﺀ :2ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﺤﻴﺙ
(3ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ ) . P ( X ≥ 5 ﻨﻌﻴﺩ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ﻗﺒل ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﺍﻝﻲ
(4ﻴﻠﻌﺏ ﻋﻤﺭ ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ :ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ X ≥ 5ﻴﺭﺒﺢ ﻨﻘﻁﺔ .ﻝﺘﻜﻥ ' Ωﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻜل ﺍﻹﻤﻜﺎﻨﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ Yﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ
394
14 ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ
53ﻝﻴﻜﻥ ﻤﻜﻌﺏ ﻁﻭل ﺤﺭﻓﻪ 3 cmﻤﻠﻭﻥ ﺒﺎﻷﺯﺭﻕ. Yﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﻋﻤﺭ .
ﻨﻘﺴﻤﻪ ﻤﻭﺍﺯﻴﺎ ﻝﻠﻭﺤﺩﺓ ﺇﻝﻰ 27ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ ﻁﻭل ﺤﺭﻓﻪ 1 cm ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ . Y
(5ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) E (Yﻭ ) . σ (Yﻫل ﺍﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻝﺔ؟
50ﻨﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻋﺩﺩﺍ ﻤﺤﺼﻭﺭﺍ ﺒﻴﻥ 0ﻭ . 60ﻝﻴﻜﻥ
Xﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻵﺤﺎﺩ ﻭ Yﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ
ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺏ ﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﺭﺍﺕ.
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل Xﻭ . Y
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) . P ( X = Y
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ) . P ( XY > 17
(4ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ). P ( 2 X + Y = 13
ﻨﻀﻊ ﺍﻝﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻝـ 27ﻓﻲ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻭ ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻤﻜﻌﺒﺎ.
51ﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ 8ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ :ﺨﻤﺱ ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺯﺭﻗﺎﺀ
ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻭﻩ
ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ 5 ،4 ،3 ،2 ،1ﻭﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﻴﺎﺕ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ،2 ،1
ﺍﻝﻤﻠﻭﻨﺔ.
. 3ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ ﻜﺭﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ ﺤﻴﺙ ﻻ ﻨﺭﺠﻊ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
ﺍﻝﻜﺭﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺼﻨﺩﻭﻕ .ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Sﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ
(2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻜﺒﺭ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻨﺩ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺏ.
54ﻓﻲ ﺍﻤﺘﺤﺎﻥ ﻴﺠﻴﺏ ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻤﺘﻌﺩﺩﺓ
(1ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ . S
ﺍﻻﺨﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻴﺸﻤل ﺜﻼﺜﺔ ﺃﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻝﻜل ﺴﺅﺍل ﺘﻭﺠﺩ ﺜﻼﺜﺔ (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻻﻨﺤﺭﺍﻑ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭﻱ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ
ﺃﺠﻭﺒﺔ ﻤﻘﺘﺭﺤﺔ ﻤﻥ ﺒﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻴﻭﺠﺩ ﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﻭﺍﺤﺩ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻓﻘﻁ. ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ . S
( )
ﻝﻜل ﺠﻭﺍﺏ ﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ +1ﻭ ﻝﻜل ﺠﻭﺍﺏ 52ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ . O; i, j
1
ﺨﺎﻁﺊ ﻴﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻰ −ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ﻋﺩﻡ ﺍﻹﺠﺎﺒﺔ ﻴﺤﺼل ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ) B (1;0 ) ، A ( 0;1ﻭ ) . C ( −1; 0
2
ﻋﻠﻰ . 0ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻴﺠﻴﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺴﺌﻠﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﻼﺜﺔ. ﻨﺭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ B ، Aﻭ Cﺒﺎﻝﻤﻌﺎﻤﻼﺕ β ، 1ﻭ δﻋﻠﻰ
ﺍﻝﺘﺭﺘﻴﺏ) βﻭ δﻋﺩﺩﺍﻥ ﺤﻘﻴﻘﻴﺎﻥ( G .ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ
(1ﻤﺜل ﻜل ﺍﻝﻤﺨﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺒﻭﺍﺴﻁﺔ ﻤﺨﻁﻁ.
ﻝﻴﻜﻥ Xﻤﺠﻤﻭﻉ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ.ﺇﺫﺍ ﻜﺎﻥ Xﺴﺎﻝﺒ ﹰﺎ
(1) ....... ﺍﻝﻤﺜﻘﻠﺔ }) {( A,1) ; ( B, β ) ; ( C , δ
ﻴﺤﺼل ﺍﻝﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻋﻠﻰ .0 (1ﻨﺎﻗﺵ ﺤﺴﺏ ﻗﻴﻡ βﻭ δﻭﺠﻭﺩ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ . G
-ﻋﻴﻥ ﺇﺤﺩﺍﺜﻴﺘﻲ . G
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﻤﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﻝـ X
(2ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻭﺠﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ:
(3ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
3 ، 2 ، 1 ، -1، -2 ، -3ﻭﻨﺴﻤﻲ βﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻪ
(4ﺃﻋﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﻤﻭﻀﻭﻉ ﻝـ 650ﺘﻠﻤﻴﺫ ﻴﺠﻬﻠﻭﻨﻪ ﻭ ﺃﺠﺎﺒﻭﺍ ﻜﻠﻬﻡ
ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ δ ،ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻤﺤﺼل ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ.
ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﹰﺎ - .ﻤﺎ ﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﻌﺩل ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺘﻅﺭ ؟
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ )(1 •
55ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻜﺭﺍﺕ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ 2 ، 1 ، 0
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺘﺭﺘﻴﺒﻬﺎ. 1
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻋﺸﻭﺍﺌﻴﺎ ﻜﺭﺓ ﻤﻥ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ .ﻨﺴﺠل xﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻜﺭﺓ
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ )(1 •
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺔ ﻭﻨﻌﻴﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻜﻴﺱ ،ﺜﻡ ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻜﺭﺓ ﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﻨﺴﺠل
ﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﻓﺎﺼﻠﺘﻬﺎ . 0
ﺭﻗﻤﻬﺎ . yﻝﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﻝﻜﺭﺘﻴﻥ ﻨﺭﻓﻕ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ) M ( x; yﻤﻥ ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻻﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺤﺘﻰ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﺭﺠﺢ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) (1ﻴﻨﺘﻤﻲ
( )
ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺘﻭﻱ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺴﻭﺏ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﻌﻠﻡ ﻤﺘﻌﺎﻤﺩ ﻭ ﻤﺘﺠﺎﻨﺱ O; i, j ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺼﻑ ﺍﻷﻭل.
395
ﺘﻤﺎﺭﻴﻥ 14
ﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻤﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻨﻬﺘﻡ ﺒﺎﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻅﻬﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻨﺴﻤﻲ ) ( Dﺍﻝﻘﺭﺹ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻩ Oﻭ ﻨﺼﻑ ﻗﻁﺭﻩ . 1,7
ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﻌﻠﻭﻱ. (1ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻤﺨﺘﻠﻑ ﺍﻝﺴﺤﺒﺎﺕ.
(1ﺒﻴﻥ ﺃﻥ . p1 = 0,1 (2ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
-ﺍﺴﺘﻨﺘﺞ . p6 ، p5 ، p4 ، p3 M " : Aﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﻤﺤﻭﺭ ﺍﻝﻔﻭﺍﺼل "
(2ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ: M " : Bﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺇﻝﻰ ﺍﻝﺩﺍﺌﺭﺓ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻤﺭﻜﺯﻫﺎ Oﻭﻨﺼﻑ
" : Aﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ ﻓﺭﺩﻱ". ﻗﻁﺭﻫﺎ. " 1
" : Bﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻗﻤﹰﺎ ﺃﺼﻐﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ." 3 X (3ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻓﻕ ﺒﻜل ﺴﺤﺏ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ
" : Cﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺘﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 2ﺃﻭ ." 5 . x2 + y 2
. " A∩C " : D • ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل . X
. " A∪C " : E • ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
" A" : F 4
.• ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻨﺘﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﻘﻁﺔ Mﺇﻝﻰ ) ( Dﻫﻭ
(3ﻨﻌﺭﻑ ﻝﻌﺒﺔ ﻜﻤﺎ ﻴﻠﻲ :ﺍﻝﻼﻋﺏ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺭﻤﻲ ﺍﻝﻨﺭﺩ ﻴﺭﺒﺢ 9
56ﻴﺤﺘﻭﻱ ﻜﻴﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ nﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ) nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ
40 DAﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ، 4ﻴﺨﺴﺭ 10 DAﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺭﻗﻡ
ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ ، (7ﻤﻨﻬﺎ 7ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺎﺕ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭﺍﻝﺒﺎﻗﻲ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ .
ﻓﺭﺩﻱ ﻭ ﻴﺨﺴﺭ 100DAﺇﺫﺍ ﻅﻬﺭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ 2ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ . 6
ﻨﺴﺤﺏ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺘﻴﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﺘﻭﺍﻝﻲ )ﺒﺩﻭﻥ ﺇﺭﺠﺎﻉ(.
Xﻫﻭ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ ﺍﻝﻌﺸﻭﺍﺌﻲ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻝﺨﺴﺎﺭﺓ.
(1ﻨﻔﺭﺽ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل ﺃﻥ. n = 10 :
ﺃ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﻴﻡ ﺍﻝﺘﻲ ﻴﺄﺨﺫﻫﺎ ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﻭﺍﺩﺙ ﺍﻝﺘﺎﻝﻴﺔ:
ﺏ -ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﺎﻨﻭﻥ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
" : Aﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻝﻰ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻴﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ".
ﺠـ -ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﻷﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻝﻠﻤﺘﻐﻴﺭ . X
" : Bﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻗﺭﻴﺼﺔ ﺤﻤﺭﺍﺀ ".
ﺩ -ﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻝﺭﺒﺢ ﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ ﻝﻠﻌﺒﺔ ﻋﺎﺩﻝﺔ ؟ )ﺃﻤل
" : Cﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺘﺎﻥ ﺒﻴﻀﺎﻭﺍﻥ " .
ﺭﻴﺎﻀﻴﺎﺘﻲ ﻤﻌﺩﻭﻡ(
" : Dﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻨﻔﺱ ﺍﻝﻠﻭﻥ " .
58ﻨﻌﺘﺒﺭ ﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( Sﻝﻠﻤﻌﺎﺩﻝﺘﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﺨﻁﻴﺘﻴﻥ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻝﻤﺠﻬﻭﻝﻴﻥ
(2ﻓﻲ ﻫﺫﺍ ﺍﻝﺴﺅﺍل nﻋﺩﺩ ﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻜﻴﻔﻲ ﺃﻜﺒﺭ ﻤﻥ ﺃﻭ ﻴﺴﺎﻭﻱ
x− y =3
xﻭ: y Pn .8ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺃﻥ ﺘﻜﻭﻥ ﺍﻝﻘﺭﻴﺼﺘﺎﻥ ﺍﻝﻤﺴﺤﻭﺒﺘﺎﻥ ﻤﻥ ﻝﻭﻨﻴﻥ
ax − by = c
ﻝﺘﻌﻴﻴﻥ b ، aﻭ ، cﻨﺭﻤﻲ ﺜﻼﺙ ﻤﺭﺍﺕ ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻥ.
)14( n − 7
ﻭﺠﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ . 6ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ ﺍﻝﻅﺎﻫﺭ ﺍﻷﻭل ﻴﻌﻁﻲ a = Pn -ﺃﺜﺒﺕ ﺃﻥ
n2 − n
،ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻨﻲ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ bﻭ ﺍﻝﺜﺎﻝﺙ ﻴﻌﻁﻲ . c -ﻋﻴﻥ ﺍﻝﻌﺩﺩ ﺍﻝﻁﺒﻴﻌﻲ nﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﻜﻭﻥ ﻤﻥ ﺃﺠﻠﻪ ﻝـ Pnﻗﻴﻤﺔ
ﻓﻲ ﻜل ﺤﺎﻝﺔ ،ﺍﺤﺴﺏ ﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺎﺩﺜﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻁ ﺍﻝﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ
ﺤﺩﻴﺔ ﻋﻅﻤﻰ ؟ ﻋﻴﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ Pnﺍﻝﻤﻨﺎﺴﺒﺔ.
ﻜل ﻜﺴﺭ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻗﺎﺒل ﻝﻼﺨﺘﺯﺍل.
57ﺯﻫﺭﺓ ﻨﺭﺩ ﻤﺯﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺠﻭﻫﻬﺎ ﻤﺭﻗﻤﺔ ﻤﻥ 1ﺇﻝﻰ . 6ﻨﺴﻤﻲ
ﺃ( " : Aﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( Sﺘﻘﺒل ﻤﺠﻤﻭﻋﺔ ﻏﻴﺭ ﻤﻨﺘﻬﻴﺔ ﻤﻥ
piﺍﺤﺘﻤﺎل ﺍﻝﺤﺼﻭل ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻝﻭﺠﻪ ﺍﻝﺫﻱ ﻴﺤﻤل ﺍﻝﺭﻗﻡ . i
ﺍﻝﺤﻠﻭل "
ﺏ( " : Bﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( Sﻻ ﺘﻘﺒل ﺤﻠﻭ ﹰ
ﻻ ". ﻴﻌﻁﻰ، p5 = 2 p6 ، p3 = 2 p1 ، p1 = p5 :
ﻼ ﻭﺍﺤﺩﹰﺍ ".
ـ( " : Cﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( Sﺘﻘﺒل ﺤ ﹰ ﻭ . p4 = 2 p3 p2 = 0,15
ﻼ ﻝﻬﺎ ".
ﺩ( " : Dﺍﻝﺠﻤﻠﺔ ) ( Sﺘﻘﺒل ﺍﻝﺜﻨﺎﺌﻴﺔ ) (3;0ﺤ ﹰ
396